JP2022006464A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of more suitably showing a series of performances to be executed.SOLUTION: In both of a first informing performance and a second informing performance, a speech sound uttered by a character is outputted, a speech sound and a speech caption are displayed or a speech caption is not displayed, the number of words uttered by a character differ between the first informing performance and the second informing performance, a ratio of display of a speech caption relative to a speech sound in an epilogue part of the first informing performance is higher than a ratio of display of a speech caption relative to a speech sound in an introduction part of the first informing performance, and a ratio of display of a speech caption relative to a speech sound in an epilogue part of the second informing performance is higher than a ratio of display of a speech caption relative to a speech sound in an introduction part of the second informing performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 175

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a plurality of parts (for example, an introduction part, a win / fail determination part, an epilogue part, etc.) are provided from the start to the end of the variable display to enhance the interest of the player (Patent Document 1). ). In addition, among the jackpot symbols, a gaming machine that executes a re-lottery effect such that the jackpot symbol re-changes after being temporarily stopped at the non-probability variation symbol (normal jackpot symbol) and then the non-probability variation symbol or the probability variation symbol stops is known. (Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-118411 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-179389

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in showing the flow of the series of productions to be performed better.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of more preferably showing a series of effects to be performed.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that notifies whether or not a big hit is achieved) that notifies whether or not the control is in an advantageous state.
It is determined that the notification effect is controlled to the advantageous state after the introduction part (for example, the fanning part) and the result notification of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. Consists of including an epilogue part (eg, a hit epilogue part) that is executed when it is
The notification effect includes a first notification effect (for example, a notification effect of the SP second half reach A) and a second notification effect (for example, a notification effect of the SP final reach).
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output.
Both the first notification effect and the second notification effect have a case where the dialogue subtitle is displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character and a case where the dialogue subtitle is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 175). , Subtitles may or may not be displayed for dialogue sounds),
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect (for example, the number of lines shown in FIG. 175).
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification effect. High (for example, the ratio of subtitling in the hit epilogue part of SP second half reach A in FIG. 175 is higher than the ratio of subtitling in the fanning part of SP second half reach A).
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification effect. High (for example, the percentage of subtitles in the epilogue part per SP final reach in FIG. 175 is higher than the percentage of subtitles in the fanning part of the SP final reach).
In the introductory part, the first character to which the serif sound emitted by the character is output and the serif subtitles are displayed for the serif sound is a friendly character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)).
Moreover,
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) and
As the vibration effect that the operating means vibrates, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) are used. A vibration effect execution means (for example, an operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 or a variable display effect control pattern vibration control data) that can execute a vibration effect execution means (for example, driving a vibration motor 131) is used to produce a variable display in step S172. CPU 120 for effect control that executes processing, etc.) and
In the light emitting effect executing means (for example, step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. The effect control CPU 120, etc., which executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in
Based on a specific effect execution means (for example, a variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach A reach effect, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. (Such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172).
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern). (Big hit reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect in the period AKZ01 to AKZ05).
The vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the series of effects to be performed look more suitable. In addition, the player can accurately recognize the ally character in the introduction part (at the start of SP reach). In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the following gaming machine (2). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, there has been a technique of providing a vibrating means on a hitting ball launching handle as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-38019. However, in the technique described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-38019, there is room for improvement in improving the interest of the production by vibration, and in view of this point, a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game when the production by vibration is performed. It is required to be provided.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) and
As the vibration effect that the operating means vibrates, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) are used. A vibration effect execution means (for example, an operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 or a variable display effect control pattern vibration control data) that can execute a vibration effect execution means (for example, driving a vibration motor 131) is used to produce a variable display in step S172. CPU 120 for effect control that executes processing, etc.) and
In the light emitting effect executing means (for example, step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. The effect control CPU 120, etc., which executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in
Based on a specific effect execution means (for example, a variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach A reach effect, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. (Such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172).
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern). (Big hit reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect in the period AKZ01 to AKZ05).
The vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the frame lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the special figure LED board, the 4th symbol unit, and the 4th symbol unit, and a game effect lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of a screen in an image display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating various boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit type. It is a figure for demonstrating each random number. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of an effect control command. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the prevariation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the post-variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating the prevariation pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the total variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the lottery of the production pattern on the sub side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process of opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening post-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of a series of productions. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship before and after the winning / failing decision, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the fan part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A), and the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the fan part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B), and the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the character operation part (at the time of the development of the latter half of SP). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the fan part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A), and the loss epilogue part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the fan part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach B), and the loss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP final reach), and the loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the part per relief. It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbol or even-numbered symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a re-lottery part (odd number symbol derivation after a button operation), and a fanfare repertoire. It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a re-lottery part (even number symbol derivation after a button operation), and a fanfare repertoire. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of output to an LED driver. It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the accessory operation part (at the time of development of the latter half of SP). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a relief hit part. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a relief hit part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (the odd-numbered symbol derivation after a button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (the odd-numbered symbol derivation after a button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (the odd-numbered symbol derivation after a button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fanfare repertoire. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (the even-numbered symbol derivation after a button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (the even-numbered symbol derivation after a button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (the even-numbered symbol derivation after a button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fanfare repertoire. It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (b11) to (b13). It is a figure for demonstrating the volume level. It is a figure for demonstrating the volume level. It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (r24) to (r27). It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (r28) to (r31). It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (r32) to (r35). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory operation in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory operation in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory operation in (r54)-(s4). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory operation in (r54)-(s4). It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (A1) to (A23). It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (A24) to (A46). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the part (b4) to (b6), and is a comparative diagram during a big hit round. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the transmittance of the subtitle and the sound output with respect to the dialogue. It is a detailed explanatory view of the part (b4)-(b6) and the detailed explanatory view of the part (o3)-(o5). It is a figure for demonstrating the comparative example of the subtitles. It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (B4) to (B11). It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the pattern output. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the re-lottery. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of a symbol fixing period. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of a blackout. It is a figure for demonstrating the detailed explanatory view of the game effect lamp at the time of loss, and the deformation example at the time of loss. It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (r48). It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the start part. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a start part. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the accessory operation part at the time of the development of the latter half of SP. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the latter half of SP reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the latter half of SP reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a relief hit part. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a re-lottery part (before promotion of operation). It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part (the symbol promotion after operation promotion). It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a re-lottery part (maintaining a symbol after promotion of operation). It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare repertoire. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for the accessory lamp and the grandchild table for the left side lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for the frame lamp in the accessory operation red blinking luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for the accessory lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for the accessory lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a fanning luminance data table without operation promotion. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a trigger display luminance data table and operation promotion luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a shutter luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a loss luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table per relief. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table per relief. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a hit determination luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a hit determination luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a re-lottery effect brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a re-lottery effect brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a background luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the lamp control at the time of a hit and the time of a loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the lamp control at the time of a hit and the time of a loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the lamp control at the time of a hit and the time of a loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the shaking mode of a design. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the re-lottery effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the re-lottery effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the re-lottery effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the reference of a luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating the reference of a luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating the reference of a luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating the reference of a luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of lamp control using a luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol determination process. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example and setting example about a setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a vibration effect and an example of a jackpot reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing and the effect period of a vibration effect and a line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production apparatus about the characteristic part 48AK to 50AK. It is a figure which shows the setting example when the operation part effect pattern and the specific interlocking effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the setting contents of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the effect by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the continuous effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control pattern. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the timing which can execute the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the effect of making a game effect lamp emit light. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the effect period which can execute a specific interlocking effect. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the music reproduction execution example.

<Configuration of pachinko gaming machines, etc.>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 shows an arrangement layout of main members in a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is performed by variably displaying a special symbol. The "variable display" of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

Two types of special symbols are provided as the special symbols that are variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also referred to as "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the other special symbol is also referred to as "second special symbol" or "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas. Update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character named Yumemu-chan, who appears in the production performed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Yumemu-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko machine 1. Further, on the lower right game board 2 of the image display device 5, a character named Jam-chan, which appears in the production executed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 6). The variable-sweep wing device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the second start winning opening is used. It becomes a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as a closed state in which the second start winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open). When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 6), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (see FIG. 6). Hereinafter, it is usually referred to as a large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A includes a gaming board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 2) located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A large winning opening door is provided in the space between the pachinko machines, and this large winning opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open and close the normal large winning opening with a gaming ball. The route to is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game ball enters the normal large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the normal large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through the area provided inside the normal large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 6), the game ball corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls for each detection) is paid out to the player as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the normal large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round is completed and the normal large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 6), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter referred to as V large). Form a winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and the large winning opening door is on the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By sliding open and close in the horizontal direction between the spaces, the route to the V-large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for the game ball to enter the V large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 24 (see FIG. 6) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V prize area) provided inside the V prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to the probable change state. That is, in the present embodiment, the V prize is generated on the condition that the game ball enters the V big prize opening during the round of the big hit game state, and the game state is controlled to the probable change state. .. In addition, the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening are collectively referred to as a large winning opening. The big prize opening is also called an attacker.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols is performed. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. The movable body 32 is composed of the character string "POWERFULII". "POWERFULII" may be the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or may be a name representing the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the title of an animation or the name of a singer). Further, the characters attached to the movable body 32 may indicate the name of the character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, "Yumemu" indicating the main character Yumemu-chan). In the present embodiment, the model name (powerful II) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown on the movable body 32.

In the present embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between the position above the image display device 5 and the position overlying (overlapping) the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the movable body 32 covers the front surface of the image display device 5 by the characters "POWERFULII" falling diagonally ("P" falls downward and "II" falls upward). Stop at the (superimposing) position. The movable body 32 is also referred to as an accessory.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A as an operation rod that can be grasped and tilted by the player (operation in the front-back and left-right directions, operation pulled toward the player) at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. Is attached. A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 6) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided inside the main body of the stick controller 31A. Further, the stick controller 31A has a built-in vibrator motor (not shown) for vibrating the stick controller 31A. Since the stick controller 31A can be pulled toward the player, it is also referred to as a "trigger".

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 6).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a special LED board 9020 at the lower left of the gaming board 2. The special figure LED board 9020 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. In the special figure LED board 9020, the type of the special symbol (first special figure) in the first special figure game and the special symbol in the second special figure game are determined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 4A, which will be described later, in the special figure LED board 9020, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021. The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the variable display unit 9022 of the special figure 2. In the present embodiment, the term "lighting mode" is used as a concept including lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of various lamps such as a frame lamp described later.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 9050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 9050 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the fluctuation of the special figure, the number of reserved storages, the right-handed display, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 9050, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are determined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 4 (b) described later, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9053. The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the variable display unit 9054 of the special figure 2.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps (also referred to as game effect lamps) in the gaming board 2 and the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided in the vicinity of the accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, the board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and the special variable winning ball device 7B. The attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the round of the big hit gaming state where the V big winning opening is open and the V winning can be generated and the V winning The V lamp 9G for notifying the occurrence of the above, the electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, the stick controller lamp 9J provided for the stick controller 31A, and the push provided for the push button 31B. It includes a button lamp 9K, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. The V lamp may notify that a big hit has occurred.

The accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the member with the letter "POWERFULII" included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, the accessory lamp 9A1 is behind the "P" and "O" portions, and the accessory lamp 9A2 is. The accessory lamps 9A3 are arranged on the back side of the "W" and "E" parts, the accessory lamps 9A3 are arranged on the back side of the "R" and "F" parts, and the accessory lamps 9A4 are arranged on the back side of the "U" and "L" parts. There is. As a result, the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are lit (light-emitting) on the back side of the member with the letters "POWERFULII", so that the "POWERFULII" is lit (light-emitting).

The panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, the main character (for example, "Yumemu" indicating the main character Yumemu-chan) is drawn in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are the main characters. Is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 on which is drawn. As a result, the left side lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) behind the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn lights up (lights up). ing.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V attacker lamp 9F lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A lights up (lights up).

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 marked with "V". As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) behind the part of the game board 2 marked with "V", so that the part of the game board 2 drawn with "V" lights up (lights up). It has become. The electric chew lamp 9H is arranged in the vicinity of the variable winning ball device 6B, and by lighting (light emitting), the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B is lit (light emitting).

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and by lighting (light emitting), the stick controller 31A is lit (light emitting). The push button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and by lighting (light emitting), the push button 31B is lit (light emitting).

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and each lamp is lit (light emitting) for the gaming machine. The left side of the frame 3 is lit (light-emitting). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and each lamp is lit (light emitting) for the gaming machine. The right side of the frame 3 is lit (light-emitting). The frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a frame lamp. In addition, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, the V lamp 9G, the electric chew lamp 9H, the stick controller lamp 9J, the push button lamp 9K, the frame left lamp 9L, and the frame right lamp 9R. Are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 6).

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 6) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big prize opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has 12 lamp groups of the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 in a counterclockwise direction from above to below the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L emits light near the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has 11 lamp groups of the frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12 clockwise from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R emits light near the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the special LED substrate 9020 and the fourth symbol unit 9050. As shown in FIG. 4A, the special figure LED board 9020 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 showing the variable display of the first special figure and a special figure 2 variable display unit showing the variable display of the second special figure. 9022, a special figure 1 storage display unit 9023 indicating a first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 storage display unit 9024 showing a second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game. , The normal figure storage display unit 9025 showing the number of normal figure reserved storage, the normal figure display unit 9026 showing the variable display of the normal symbol, the right-handed display unit 9030 for urging the player to hit right, and the presence or absence of a probability change state. A probability variation display unit 9028 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, a time reduction display unit 9029 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, and a round display unit 9027 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit are provided. Each display unit may notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special figures or ordinary symbols, the result, the current gaming state, the number of pending numbers, etc. by lighting or blinking by a lighting means such as an LED. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

Further, the special figure LED board 9020 can urge the player to strike right by turning on / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display unit 9030. In the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, when the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 9030 lights up (lights up) and does not urge the player to hit right. That is, when urging the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 9030 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting designation command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 9030, and after the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , The right-handed display / off designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 9030 is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled by the high base after the jackpot gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 9030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display unit 9030.

Here, right-handed means firing a game ball toward the second flow path of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided in the game board 2. It is to operate the hitting ball operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path that passes through the left region of the gaming area, and the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is present ahead of the path, while the variable winning ball device is present. This is a route in which the second starting winning opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second flow-down route is, for example, a route that passes through the area on the right side of the game area, and beyond that, a second start winning opening or a large winning opening (usually a large winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big winning opening) is the route that exists. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path, the game ball flows through the first flow path toward the first start winning opening. When the player launches the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path toward the second start winning opening and the large winning opening (normal large winning opening, V large winning opening). Flow into.

In the present embodiment, in the big hit game after the big hit occurs and in the game state (time saving state or probability change state) after the big hit game, the player is provided on the right side of the game area by hitting right. The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display unit 9030 urges the player to make a right-handed hit. By hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is displayed, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls is paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering a game ball into a normal large prize opening. Further, as will be described in detail later, the V-large winning opening is opened during the round of the probable change jackpot, but the player hits the right while the display prompting the player to hit the right is displayed, so that the V-large winning opening is opened. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and control it to a probable change state. For this reason, the player may have an overall advantage by hitting right while the display prompting him to hit right is being performed. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hit method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 4B, the fourth symbol unit 9050 has a special figure 1 storage display unit 9051 indicating a first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a second special figure game corresponding to the second special figure game. 2 Special figure 2 storage display unit 9052 showing the number of reserved storage, special figure 1 variable display unit 9053 showing the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. A special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 and a right-handed display unit 9055 that urges the player to hit the right-hand side are provided. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence / absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of holdings, the right-handed instruction, and the like by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 9053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

In the following, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol indicates that the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is represented by the lighting means such as the LED in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special diagram 1 variable display unit 9053. Also called. Further, the fact that the change of the stop symbol of the second special symbol is represented by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 is also referred to as the variation display (variable display) of the second special symbol. Refer to.

Further, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 lights up (lights up) and hits right. When not prompting the player, that is, when prompting the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 9055 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 9055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and the symbol changes due to the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After confirmation, the right-handed display unit 9055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display / off designation command from the CPU 103. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled by the high base after the jackpot gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 9055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 9055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 4C is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a pre-variation pattern command, a post-variation pattern command, or a symbol confirmation command, which will be described later, among the effect control commands, the fourth symbol unit 9050 and the game effect lamp are used. , Whether or not to switch the lighting mode such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing is different. The pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command are commands output from the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, which will be described later, to the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12, and are the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern. One set of commands is output from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120. In the following, the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command are collectively referred to as a variation pattern command.

Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the LED (special figure 1 variable display 9053 and special figure 2 variable display 9054) in the fourth symbol unit 9050 is changed. .. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the first special figure game from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the special figure 1 variable display 9053 is set to the lighting mode of the first special symbol based on the received variation pattern command. It switches from the extinguishing indicating the stop to the blinking indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special figure game from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the special figure 2 variable display 9054 is set to the lighting mode of the second special symbol based on the received variation pattern command. It switches from the extinguishing indicating the stop to the blinking indicating the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode before receiving the variation pattern command is not changed without changing the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp or the like) in the game effect lamp. Keep it up.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol determination command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the LED (special figure 1 variable display 9053 and special figure 2 variable display 9054) in the fourth symbol unit 9050 is changed. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103 that specifies that the symbol variation is terminated in the first special symbol game, the special figure 1 variable display 9053 is lit based on the received symbol confirmation command. The mode is switched from blinking indicating the change of the first special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stop of the first special symbol. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103 that specifies that the symbol variation is terminated in the second special symbol game, the special figure 2 variable display 9054 is lit based on the received symbol confirmation command. The mode is switched from blinking indicating the change of the second special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stop of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode before receiving the symbol confirmation command without changing the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp or the like) in the game effect lamp. Keep it up.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, the mode of the lamp (LED) changes according to the reception of the variation pattern command and the symbol determination command. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the game effect lamp 9, the mode of the lamp is maintained before and after receiving the command regardless of receiving the variation pattern command or the symbol determination command. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the mode of the gaming effect lamp 9 in response to receiving the variation pattern command. For example, when the gaming state changes from the normal state to the time saving state after the big hit, the pachinko gaming machine 1 changes from the lighting mode of the normal state to the time saving state in response to receiving the variation pattern command in which the time saving state is started. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to the lighting mode of.

FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays an image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern or a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is used. Etc.) are variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, the first hold storage display area 5D in which the first hold storage number can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and the second hold storage number by the number of circular hold displays A displayable second hold storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display are provided.

At the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol 5J indicating that the special symbol is being variablely displayed is displayed. At the lower part of the fourth symbol 5J, a number indicating the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is displayed. As for the number indicating the number of holdings, the left side shows the first holding number and the right side shows the second holding storage number. At the bottom of the display indicating the number of reservations, a small symbol 5M having a size smaller than that of each decorative symbol is displayed. The small symbols are displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Further, the small symbol 5M is also a symbol that is not hidden during the variable display and is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 5, a decorative symbol is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small symbol 5M has a size smaller than the decorative symbol at the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. Have been placed. Therefore, the legibility of the small symbol 5M is lower than the legibility of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the shape of the screen of the image display device 5 is a quadrangle or a substantially quadrangle, but the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, a part (particularly the end) of the screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized by the gaming board 2. It has become.

<Board configuration>
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining various substrates and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 connected to the power supply switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electric components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later) and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special figure LED board 9020 and the like, solenoid drive signals). Consists of including.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), a count switch 23, a V winning switch 24) for detecting a game ball. A detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on, etc.) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, or the solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) assigns an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that specifies the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9. Brightness data (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) to be performed is supplied to the LED driver. Further, the effect control CPU 120 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

As will be described in detail later, each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED substrate on which an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies a current to the LED are mounted. The LED driver turns on / blinks / turns off the game effect lamp 9 by adjusting the current for each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on the luminance data from the effect control CPU 120. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls lighting / blinking / extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, brightness data signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include an output port for.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12 and the sound control board 13, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 9050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and each display unit can be turned on (blinking) under the control of the effect control CPU 120.

<Outline of the progress of the game>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game proceeds as follows. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special drawing game by the special drawing 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special drawing LED board 9020 is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special drawing game by the special drawing 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special drawing LED board 9020 is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the jackpot game state described later (a start winning is generated, but is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined maximum number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, the combination of the lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, which will be described later). The actual design differs depending on the type of big hit.) When the combination of lighting modes corresponding to) is used, it becomes a "big hit". It should be noted that the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) in the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020. Is also referred to as a "specific display result". Further, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 corresponds to a special symbol (missing symbol) different from the jackpot symbol. When it becomes a combination of lighting modes, it becomes "missing". It should be noted that, in the combination of the lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020, it corresponds to a special symbol (missing symbol) different from the jackpot symbol. The lighting mode to be turned on is also referred to as a “loss display result”.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. In addition, it may be controlled to the small hit game state as an advantageous state. Here, the small hit is a hit that is allowed up to the number of times that the large winning opening is opened less than the big hit. When the small hit game state ends, the game state does not change. That is, before and after the small hit game state, there is no transition from the probabilistic state to the normal state or from the normal state to the probabilistic state. Further, as in the case of the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is either the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until early timing. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as the opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type that can hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. As a result, control (high opening control, high base control) that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, and the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be turned off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach. In addition, the super reach includes the first half of the super reach that ends in the first half of the super reach, the second half of the super reach that develops from the first half of the super reach, and the final reach that develops from the first half of the super reach. In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the normal reach. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the latter half of the super reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the first half of the super reach. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the final reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the latter half of the super reach. In the following, "Super Reach" is "SP Reach", "Super Reach First Half" is "SP First Half (SP First Half Reach)", and "Super Reach Second Half" is "SP Second Half (SP Second Half Reach)", " "Final reach" is also referred to as "SP final (SP final reach)".

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the "big hit" (the above-mentioned specific display result), it is predetermined as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. A definite decorative symbol that is a combination of big hits is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed. As the promotion effect, for example, a re-lottery effect may be executed to incite whether or not the non-probability variable symbol (normal symbol) is temporarily stopped as a jackpot display result and then promoted to the probabilistic symbol. In addition, a round promotion effect of promoting from a non-probable change big hit to a probable change big hit may be executed during the big hit game state.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "loss" (the above-mentioned loss display result), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, but the variable display of the decorative symbol. As a display result of, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "non-reach loss") of the non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

<Various tables related to big hits>
Various tables related to big hits will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.

[Hit type]
FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the hit type. As shown in FIG. 7, in the hit type table, for each type (type) of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot ( The number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probabilistic jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. In the following, the marking of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth.

The normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 3 rounds. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

The normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 3 rounds. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probabilistic jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of three rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 1, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variation jackpot 6 is a jackpot controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 5 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 6, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variation jackpot 7 is a jackpot controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 7 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 7, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probabilistic jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds. In the probability variation jackpots 8 and 9, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Random numbers]
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 8, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random 1 is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random 1 is, for example, incremented and updated by 1 from 1 and incremented and updated up to its upper limit of 65536, and then incremented and updated from 1 again. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the jackpot type) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and random 4 are random counters (for determining the post-variation pattern) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a post-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns. Post-variation refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation in the special symbol. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss. For example, it is updated one by one, added and updated from 1, and added and updated up to the upper limit of 65519, and then added again from 1. Will be updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to a hit. For example, it is added and updated from 1 to 1 and is added and updated up to its upper limit of 239, and then added and updated again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the pre-variation pattern) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a pre-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the pre-variation among the variation patterns. The pre-variation refers to the variation of the first half of the variation of the special symbol. Random 5 is, for example, incremented and updated by 1 from 1 and incremented and updated up to the upper limit of 251 and then incremented and updated from 1 again. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol). Random 6 is, for example, incremented and updated from 1 to 1, incremented and updated up to the upper limit of 201, and then incremented and updated from 1 again.

In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) whether or not the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. Then, which of the plurality of types of jackpots is to be selected is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 2). At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 2.

First, the posterior variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the random number for determining the posterior variation pattern (random 3 and 4), and the anterior variation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the anterior variation pattern (random 5). Will be done. As described above, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

[Big hit judgment table, big hit type judgment table]
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change time) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a game state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

The jackpot judgment values are set for the number of judgment values shown in the upper column of FIG. 9 (a) in the normal jackpot determination table, and the lower column of FIG. 9 (a) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. The jackpot judgment value is set for the number of judgment values described in. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time, and the jackpot judgment value peculiar to the probability change is added to the normal time. A larger number of jackpot determination values than the jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the probabilistic state, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1). If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. In addition, FIG. 9A shows the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit or the probability (ratio) of losing.

9 (b) and 9 (c) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 9B is a first special figure big hit type determination table used for determining the big hit type when the big hit is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 9C is a second special figure big hit type determination table used for determining the big hit type when it is determined to be a big hit by the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 9B is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 2 for determining the jackpot type, and corresponds to each of the normal jackpots 1 and 2 and the probability variation jackpots 1 to 4. Judgment values are set for the number of determined judgment values. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and the normal jackpot 2 is 100 random 2s. 25 of the random 2 values are assigned, the probability variation jackpot 1 is assigned the value of 5 random 2 out of 100 random 2 and the probability variation jackpot 2 is 37 of the 100 random 2 Random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 4 is 4 random 2 out of 100 random 2s. The value of is assigned.

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 9C, determination values are set for the number of determination values corresponding to each of the probabilistic jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the values of random 2. Has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 9C, for the second special figure, the probability variation jackpot 5 is assigned the value of 10 random 2 out of 100 random 2, and the probability variation jackpot 6 is assigned 100 random 2s. 5 random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 8 is 70 out of 100 random 2s. The value of each random 2 is assigned, and the probability variation jackpot 9 is assigned the value of 10 random 2 out of 100 random 2.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 2 values match as the jackpot type, and the random 2 values match as the jackpot symbol. Determine the big hit design you made. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

<Direction control command>
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 which is the control board on the main side transmits various effect control commands to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 10 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" is shown to be a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in the present specification.

The command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern (pre-variation pattern) corresponding to the pre-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. It is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous fluctuation pattern). The front variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of pre-variation patterns, there is a pre-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the pre-variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the posterior variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. It is a command (XX corresponds to the post-variation pattern number). The post-variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the latter half of the variation of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the post-variation patterns specified by the number.

The pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command are transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 as a set of two commands. The effect control CPU 120 cannot specify the variation pattern only by receiving only one of the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command, and receives both the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command. By doing so, the fluctuation pattern can be specified.

The command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the second special figure. Upon receiving the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

The command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the command is determined to be lost. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 is determined. The command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability variation jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability variation jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 2 is determined. The command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability variation jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 3 is determined. The command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variation jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 4 is determined. The command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variation jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 5 is determined. The command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variation jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 6 is determined. The command 8C10 (H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variation jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 7 is determined. The command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variation jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 8 is determined. The command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variation jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 9 is determined. Each of the loss designation command, the normal jackpot 1, 2 designation command, and the probability variation jackpot 1 to 9 designation command, or these are collectively referred to as an 8C system command.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the first special figure is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the second special figure is started. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization specification command that specifies the initialization (designates to display the initial screen at the time of turning on the power) to be transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery designation command for designating the recovery of the power failure (designating to display the power failure recovery screen) transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command for designating the background of the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state specification command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probabilistic state specification command for designating the background of the probabilistic state. Each of the normal state specification command, the time saving state specification command, and the probabilistic state specification command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95-series command or a background specification command.

The command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command that specifies the transition to the customer waiting demonstration display. The effect control CPU 120 determines that there is currently no hold due to the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sends the demonstration image to the image display device 5 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. The effect control CPU 120 turns on the game effect lamp 9 in the manner of a demonstration lamp 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 for demonstration is more lively (high brightness, many blinking modes, rainbow lighting, etc.) than the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in the normal state. Thereby, the attractiveness of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shown to the player. In the demonstration display waiting for customers, the background in the normal state (hereinafter, also referred to as the normal background) is displayed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, in the demonstration display waiting for customers, the title of the gaming machine 1 (for example, "POWERFULII") may be displayed, or an introduction image (still image or moving image) of a part of the effect may be displayed.

The command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that normally specifies the start of the jackpot 1. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that normally specifies the start of the jackpot 2. The command A003 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 1. The command A004 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 4 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 2. The command A005 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 5 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 3. The command A006 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 6 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 4. The command A007 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 7 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 5. The command A008 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 8 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 6. The command A009 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 9 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 7. The command A010 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 10 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 8. The command A011 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 11 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1 to 11 designated commands, or these are collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command while the large winning opening is open is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening indicating the closure of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after opening the big winning opening is also called an A2 system command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that normally specifies the end of jackpot 1. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that normally specifies the end of jackpot 2. The command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 1. The command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 2. The command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 3. The command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 4. The command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 5. The command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 6. The command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 7. The command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 8. The command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designated commands, or these are collectively referred to as A3 series commands.

The command AD00 (H) is a probability variation determination device pass designation command for designating that a V prize has occurred. The probability change determination device pass designation command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V large winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

The command B100 (H) is a first start winning prize designation command for designating that there was a first start winning prize. The command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command C1XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating that the first hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 system command. The command C2XX (H) is a designated command for second hold storage that specifies that the second hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2 system command.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as the jackpot determination, the jackpot type determination, and the variation pattern type determination at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is an effect control command to be shown. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and a determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results.

C7XX (H) is a large winning opening winning designation command indicating the passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display off-designated command indicating that the right-handed display is turned off. The command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1, is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit is obtained, the type of the big hit, and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type are in the range of the determination value at the time of starting winning. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to send the data to the effect control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type in the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, and can recognize the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation type command. ..

<Variation pattern>
The contents of the fluctuation pattern, determination of the fluctuation pattern, and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set by the game control microcomputer 100 on the main side. Each variation pattern is managed by the main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a pre-variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the pre-variation, and a post-variation pattern corresponding to the post-variation. It is designed to include. The pre-variation pattern corresponds to the pre-variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. 10, and the post-variation pattern corresponds to the post-variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. Corresponds to.

[Pre-variation pattern on the main side]
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pre-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of pre-variation patterns to which the pre-variation numbers are assigned, the pre-variation number 1 is a pre-variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 13 seconds). Is. The pre-variation number 2 is a pre-variation pattern command (8001 (H)) that specifies a shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 7 seconds). The pre-variation number 3 is a pre-variation pattern command (8002 (H)) that specifies a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 3 seconds).

The pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (normal or the first half of the SP) (a reach that ends in the normal reach or ends in the first half of the SP reach after the reach mode is reached). The pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (reach that develops into the SP second half reach after becoming the reach mode). The pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (reach that develops into the final reach after becoming a reach mode).

The pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (normal or the first half of SP) is executed after one pseudo-variation. Pseudo-variation means that the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted from the start of the variable display (variable display) of the decorative symbol until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. Variable display (variable display). The effect of repeating such pseudo-variations is also called pseudo-ream. By executing the pseudo-ream, the variable display based on one hold memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The variable display that is temporarily stopped and then restarted is also referred to as "re-variable display". The pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007 (H)) that specifies that normal reach (SP second half development) is executed after one pseudo-variation. The pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008 (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo-variation.

The pre-variation number 10 is a pre-variation pattern command (8009 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (normal or the first half of the SP) is executed after the pseudo-variation is performed twice. Pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A (H)) that specifies that normal reach (SP second half development) is executed after performing pseudo-variation twice. The pre-variation number 12 is a pre-variation pattern command (800B (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo-variation twice.

A variation time is specified for each of the pre-variation patterns, and an animation (moving image) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting the moving image. For example, in the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 7 to 9, 41500 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is about 1246. Further, in the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 10 to 12, 62000 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is about 1861.

[Post-variation pattern on the main side]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of the post-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of posterior variation patterns to which the posterior variation numbers are assigned, the posterior variation number 1 is a posterior variation pattern command (8400 (H)) for designating a 13-second variation. The post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401 (H)) that specifies a 7-second variation. The post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402 (H)) that specifies a 3-second variation. The post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403 (H)) that specifies that the pseudo-continuous gassing is executed. Pseudo-ren Gase is an effect that pretends to execute pseudo-ren and does not execute pseudo-ren in the end.

The post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative pattern that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into SP reach). The post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of SP (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops into SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the first half of SP reach). The post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the latter half of SP (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the latter half of SP reach). The post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407 (H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

The post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (variation of a decorative symbol that becomes a reach mode and becomes a hit mode). The post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409 (H)) that specifies the first half (hit) of the SP (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the SP reach and becomes the hit mode in the first half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A (H)) that specifies the latter half of the SP (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach and becomes a hit mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B (H)) that specifies the final reach (hit) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into the final reach and becomes the hit mode in the final reach).

[Judgment of post-variation pattern]
The post-variation pattern is determined by using different random counters in the jackpot determination depending on whether it is determined to be a jackpot or a loss. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of loss. As shown in FIG. 13, when a loss is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 3 described in FIG. Further, when the jackpot determination is determined to be lost, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved storages after digestion, and the determined post-variation number is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13A, when the number of reserved storages after digestion is 0, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined as the post-variation pattern. A different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 1, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 2, one of the post-variation numbers 2, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 3, one of the post-variation numbers 3, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

In this way, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion, and further, the post-variation number is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion. Therefore, the type of fluctuation pattern changes according to the number of remaining reserved memories, which makes it possible to give variety to the game and improve the fun of the game.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a big hit. As shown in FIG. 14, when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 4 described with reference to FIG. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using different numbers of determination values according to the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), when it is determined to be one of the normal jackpot 1, 2 and the probabilistic jackpot 1, 2, 5 to 8, any of the post-variation numbers 9 to 12. The posterior variation pattern is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

When it is determined to be one of the probabilistic jackpots 3 and 9, any of the posterior variation patterns 9 to 12 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. .. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

When the probability variation jackpot 4 is determined, any of the posterior variation patterns 9 to 12 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

In this way, since the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of variation pattern changes according to the type of jackpot, thereby giving diversity to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach is about 1/102 at the time of loss, whereas it is a big hit. Since the time is about 1 / 1.1, which is higher than that, when the SP reach or the final reach is developed, the player can be expected to have a big hit.

[Judgment of pre-variation pattern]
FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a pre-variation pattern determination table. The pre-variation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of the post-variation pattern previously determined. Further, the pre-variation number determined is also different depending on the type of the post-variation pattern determined earlier.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 1 is determined, the posterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15B, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 2 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15C, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 3 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15D, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 4 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15 (e), when it is determined to be the posterior variation pattern of any of the posterior variation numbers 5 and 9, it is determined to be any of the anterior variation patterns of the anterior variation numbers 4 and 7. As shown in FIG. 15 (f), when it is determined to be the posterior variation pattern of any of the posterior variation numbers 6 and 10, it is determined to be any of the anterior variation patterns of the anterior variation numbers 4, 7 and 10. As shown in FIG. 15 (g), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 7 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 5, 8 and 11 of the anterior variation number 5.

As shown in FIG. 15 (h), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 11 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 5, 8 and 11 of the anterior variation number 5. As shown in FIG. 15 (i), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 8 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 6, 9 and 12 of the anterior variation number 6. As shown in FIG. 15 (j), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 12 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 6, 9, and 12.

[Total variation pattern]
FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15, any of the variation patterns of the main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 16 is obtained.

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery of an effect pattern on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 on the sub side determines the effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103 on the main side.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 7 to 9 from the CPU 103, the effect of the loss pattern of the SP first half reach A, which will be described later, among a plurality of types of reach effects, or , It is decided to produce one of the loss patterns of reach B in the first half of SP. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 18 to 20 from the CPU 103, among a plurality of types of reach effects, the effect of the hit pattern of the SP first half reach A, which will be described later, or the SP It is decided to be one of the production of the hit pattern of the first half reach B.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 10 to 12 from the CPU 103, among a plurality of types of reach effects, the effect of the loss pattern of the SP second half reach A, which will be described later, or the SP. Decide on one of the production of the loss pattern of reach B in the second half. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 21 to 23 from the CPU 103, among a plurality of types of reach effects, the effect of the hit pattern of the SP second half reach A, which will be described later, or the SP It is decided to be one of the production of the hit pattern of the second half reach B.

<Operation>
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

[Main operation of main board 11]
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 makes necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the gaming control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

When the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the recovery process (step S4) and then the setting confirmation process (step S5). The CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then the setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the game is stopped, which is different from the lost symbol. It suffices to control so that the display corresponding to is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like. Turn off the display monitor 29. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L, 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, a pressing operation of the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. The setting change process of step S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. .. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted. (Step S10). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 19 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, the CPU 103 starts the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.) supplied to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined information output process. Data such as information (information indicating the number of start winnings and the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state has been reached) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal figure display unit 9026, and the normal figure holding number is displayed by turning on the normal figure storage display unit 9025.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. The special symbol process process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit" are displayed as the display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit", etc. It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special diagram 2 variable display unit 9022, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special diagram 2 variable display unit 9022 stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

The set value that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game performance (so-called V) in which the rate at which the gaming ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the gaming ball is a special variable winning ball device 7 during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the machine. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6) may be provided. If the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Starting prize judgment process)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a start winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 20. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (Step S51). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S52 (Y in step S52). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step). S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing any of the processes of step S53 and step S56, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step S58). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 uses the random number value random 1 for jackpot determination and the jackpot type determination among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number value random 2 and the random number value random 3 and 4 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random values 1 to 4 are stored in the first special figure holding storage unit (not shown), while the starting buffer value is "2". At a certain time, numerical data indicating random values 1 to 4 are stored in a second special figure holding storage unit (not shown).

For the numerical data indicating the random value random 1 for determining the jackpot and the random value random 2 for determining the jackpot type, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result is "". It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". Random random values 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step S59, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start prize designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for sending the first start winning prize designation command is made to. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start prize designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is seconded. 2 Make settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start prize designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process process is completed. To.

Following the process of step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the hold storage (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start opening buffer, initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start winning determination process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 uses the first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved storage buffer (of the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not there is hold storage data in the storage buffer for storing the hold storage information (step S1001). When there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (step S1002). If a predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled not to send the wait demo specification command. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

When there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the hold specific area is "second". It is determined whether or not the data is data (step S1004). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating "second" (that is, the data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (first). 1 Set the data indicating "first" in the flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol (step S1005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special are performed according to whether the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer or the data indicating "second" is set. The variable display of the symbol is executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

Under the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if even one data of the second reserved storage exists in the second reserved storage buffer, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is the second. 1 Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data in the hold storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command of the side indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (). Step S1009). In this case, when the value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second reserved storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the hold storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining that a jackpot is determined if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability changing state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, when the number of jackpot determination values is probable, the jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical values in the lower column of FIG. 9A) are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values is probable. A normal jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 9A) are set to be less than the jackpot determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic big hit determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in a state or a time-saving state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 9A, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but it also means deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol a big hit symbol. ..

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the gaming state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the condition that the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the condition that the next jackpot is determined. When the earlier of the conditions is satisfied, the change display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing of the stop display.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1015 described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9 (b) and the second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 9 (c) are used. Select one of the judgment tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9B. Further, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 9C when the special symbol pointer indicates "second". Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining the jackpot type extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, and stores the random number for determining the jackpot type in the reserved storage buffer using the selected jackpot type determining table. The jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type are determined (step S1013).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (step S1015). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 23, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the post-variation pattern based on random 3 and 4 according to the number of reserved storages and the presence / absence of a big hit (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a loss, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 according to the number of reserved storages, and after the selection, the post-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 3 are used later. Determine the variation pattern. Further, in the case of a big hit, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 according to the type of the big hit, and determines the post-variation pattern based on the selected post-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 4. decide.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the pre-variation pattern based on the random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the pre-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15 according to the post-variation pattern determined in S1102, and pre-variates based on the selected pre-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 5. Determine the pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (pre-variation pattern and post-variation pattern) to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1105). S1106).

(Special symbol change processing)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 24, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the special symbol. The value corresponding to the stop process (step S113) is updated (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 or the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022. Control for derivation display is performed (step S1301). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 9021 is terminated, and the special symbol pointer indicates "second". When the data is set, the change of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 is terminated. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). Then, if the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1305).

In addition, referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROМ101, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and between rounds are performed for the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal big hit of 3R, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning opening in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot of 5R, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round and the V large winning opening is opened at the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Further, in the case of a probability variation jackpot of 10R, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th R and the V large winning opening is opened at the 9th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. .. The data of the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (time for notifying the image display device 5 that a big hit has occurred), which is the big hit display time, is set in the big winning opening control timer (step S1307). After that, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the big winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and the round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set is set (step S1309). .. If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process proceeds to step S1316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time reduction state has ended, and the time reduction flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the loss display result is performed a specific number of times (100 times) in the reduced working hours state, the gaming state shifts from the reduced working hours state to the non-reduced working hours state. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 in step S1311 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag indicating that the probability change state is set is set (step S1313). If the probability change flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability change flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the reduced working hours state to the normal state (low probability / low base state) (step S1315), and in step S1316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process proceeds to step S1315 without performing the process of step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step S1316), and the processing is terminated.

(Pre-processing for opening big hits)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 26, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process ends.

When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal large winning opening (step S1404). As a result, the large winning opening is usually opened in the 1st round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the maximum time during which the large winning opening can be opened (large winning opening opening time) by the large winning opening control timer based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306). The corresponding large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and the process is terminated.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing during the opening of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 27, in the big hit opening process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S1502). When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. When the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is being opened (step S1503). Whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open may be determined by the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (Y in step S1504), the winning number counter is incremented by +1 (addition update) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change determination flag is set (step S1506). The probability change determination flag is a flag set when it is determined that the probability change state is controlled when a V prize is generated. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability change determination flag is set (step S1508), the probability change determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach a predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large winning opening, or drives the solenoid 83 to drive the V large winning opening. One of the controls for closing the solenoid is controlled (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the processing.

(Post-processing after opening the jackpot)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of post-processing after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 28, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening count counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the open count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), the jackpot end designation mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1602), and the jackpot end time (the jackpot game is completed) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, a value corresponding to (time to be notified in the image display device 5) is set (step S1603), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604). End the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the open number counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a designated mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening (step S1605), and a round is sent to the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round in which the V large winning opening is opened (also referred to as the V open round), that is, the next round is the V open round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), the solenoid 82 is driven to control the normal opening of the large winning opening (step S1608). On the other hand, when it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), the solenoid 83 is driven to control the opening of the V large winning opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a designated mand during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 29, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer for which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the big hit flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag set by passing through the V winning region is set (step S1704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. If the probability change determination flag is set in step S1704 (Y in step S1704), the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step S1707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1708), the probability change determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S1710), and 100 is set in the time saving number counter (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set in step S1704 (N in step S1704), the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set is set in step S1705 (step S1705), and 100 is set in the time reduction counter. (Step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game state is the probability change, the time saving, or the normal game state by the probability change state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103.

[Main operation of the effect control board 12]
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

(Main processing of production control)
In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 30 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. The effect control process process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 31, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. By driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (lamp control data) to the LED driver. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the jackpot game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. As shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the result of the variable display is determined to be lost (step S7101). If the effect control CPU 120 is determined to be lost, it confirms whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (step S7103).

When the effect control CPU 120 determines that a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 120 uses the loss symbol determination data table to determine the display result of the loss that does not reach as the final stop of the effect symbol (step). S7105), the process proceeds to step S7106.

When it is determined in the process of step S7103 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), a stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination of reach symbols is determined (step S7104), and step S7106 Proceed to.

Further, when it is not decided to make a loss in the process of step S7101 (when it is decided to make a big hit), the effect control CPU 101 configures a combination of big hit symbols according to the type of big hit. The stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (step S7106) for setting various effects in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S7107. For example, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute an effect that suggests a big hit (incites whether or not it is a big hit) in the effect setting process of step S7106. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 128 (r41), which will be described later, as an effect that suggests a big hit (incites whether or not it is a big hit). In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 specifies whether or not it develops into the final reach based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command, and if it develops into the final reach, it is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern. Determine whether or not to execute the cut-in effect based on the result of whether or not it is a specified jackpot, and determine the type of cut-in effect (red cut-in effect, green cut-in effect) when executing. do. When executing the cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets information for executing the cut-in effect in the effect setting process.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, the symbol variation control pattern is set according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command and various effect control (effect operation) patterns specified by the effect control pattern of the effect determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the table, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the specified various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121, for example, the effect symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the stop display of the final stop symbol. Data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the fluctuation display operation, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the pseudo-ream effect, and the effect display operation in the advance notice effect are stored as multiple types of symbol variation control patterns. Has been done.

Further, each symbol variation control pattern corresponds to the variation display of the effect symbol such as the effect control process timer setting value, the effect control process timer determination value, the effect display control data, the voice control data, the brightness data, and the end code. It includes control data for controlling various effect operations, and the contents of various effect controls, the switching timing of the effect control, and the like are set in time series.

Next, the process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process of step S7109, the effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, various lamps as an effect component, and various lamps as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, brightness data, sound number data), and Control of the speakers 8L, 8R) as production parts) is started (step S7110). For example, according to the display control execution data, the image display device 5 outputs a command to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, a control signal (lamp control data) is output to the LED driver in order to control lighting / extinguishing of light emitters such as various LEDs. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display time timer (step S7111), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

<Details of the progress of the game>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player first hits the left side to launch the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the area on the left side of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 becomes a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probabilistic jackpots 1 to 4. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion effect that urges the player to strike right is executed. As a right-handed promotion effect, characters (for example, "right-handed") and figures (for example, an arrow directed to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) that encourage right-handedness are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying an image, the right-handed display unit 9030 of the special figure LED board 9020 and the right-handed display unit 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 also prompt right-handed by lighting a lighting means such as an LED. As a result, the player will hit right after that.

During the round of the big hit game state, the big winning openings are opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a normal big hit of 3R and 10 times in the case of a probable big hit of 10R). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

When the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the reduced working hours state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V prize is generated during the big hit round, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled in the time saving state.

Even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 9030, and the right-handed display unit 9055. For this reason, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect even in the time-saving state after the big hit round is completed after the first big hit (also referred to as the first hit) occurs.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special map fluctuation time (period in which the special map is changed) from the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period in which the normal map is changed) is executed. Is executed to shorten the time from the normal state, and further, the control to improve the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the normal figure game is executed. Further, in the time saving state, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is opened is increased, so that the frequency at which the game ball enters the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning a prize in the winning opening (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time saving state after the big hit round, the second special figure game is started by the launched game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 becomes a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit (also referred to as a continuous chan hit) occurs.

As described above, there are 5 to 9 probabilistic jackpots as the types of jackpots in the second special figure game. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 9030, and the right-handed display unit 9055 has continued from the time of the first hit.

During the round of the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the reduced time state and the probable change state (high probability high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) as in the case of the first hit. Will be done. Even in the probable change state after the big hit round in the continuous chan, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 9030, and the right-handed display unit 9055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player will be hit by consecutive chans in the probable change state or time saving state after the big hit round is finished, and the player will be in the probable change state or time saving after the big hit round per continuous chan is finished. Even in the state, you are always encouraged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect.

The probabilistic state or time saving state after the big hit round of the first hit ends, and the probable change state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring in either the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit round per consecutive chan ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 9030, and the right-handed display unit 9055 is also completed. As a result, the player hits the left again to launch the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the left area of the game area.

<Flow of production>
Next, the flow of a series of effects executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the notification effect is executed from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display. The notification effect is an effect of notifying the player whether or not the fluctuation of the special figure or the decorative symbol is stopped in a manner indicating a big hit, that is, whether or not it is controlled to the big hit gaming state. The notification effect is formed from a plurality of effect parts, and in the present embodiment, the start part, the fanfare part, the hit epilogue part, the lost epilogue part, the character action part, the relief hit part, the re-lottery part, and Includes fanfare repertoire. After the re-lottery part, it will be a fanfare repertoire that will be executed before the game shifts to the jackpot game state. In addition, the fanning part is also called the introduction part. In addition, the hit epilogue part and the lost epilogue part are collectively referred to as an epilogue part.

[Starting part]
The start part is a part in which the effect corresponding to the pre-variation pattern is executed. The start part is also a part indicating the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach after the pseudo-ream or the normal reach is executed. The start part also includes fluctuations that result in non-reach loss.

[Fan part (introduction part)]
The fanning part (introduction part) includes from the start of SP reach (also referred to as super reach) (the start timing of the title display of SP reach) to the timing of facing the branch of big hit or loss. In addition, the fanning part is a part that fuels whether it will be a big hit or a loss depending on the production to be performed. The fanning part corresponds to any of the SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B, which is executed after the start part, and the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach that develop from the SP first half reach. Includes parts. The SP first half reach A and the SP first half reach B may be collectively referred to as the SP first half, the SP second half reach A, the SP second half reach B, and the SP final reach collectively as the SP second half.

[Epilogue Part]
The epilogue part includes a hit epilogue part for notifying that a big hit display result will be obtained after each fanning part, and a loss epilogue part for notifying that a loss display result will be obtained. In the hit epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect by story development is executed so as to notify that the changing symbol becomes a big hit display result and is controlled to the big hit game state. In the lost epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect by story development is executed so as to notify that the changing symbol becomes a lost display result and is not controlled to the big hit game state.

In addition, in the epilogue part, the notification that the jackpot display result will be obtained is when the notification is made by moving the accessory when the hit / fail notification is performed after the introduction part, as in the final reach described later, and when the SP reach other than the final reach is notified. As described above, there are times when the notification is made by developing a story on the liquid crystal display (image display device 5) without using an accessory. Of the epilogue parts, the hit epilogue part that is notified by the movement of the accessory is also referred to as the success / failure notification part. Specifically, in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, when a big hit occurs, the liquid crystal is used by the hit epilogue part as described above. It is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled as the ending of the story production, and if the jackpot does not occur, the loss epilogue part notifies that the jackpot gaming state is not controlled as the ending of the story production using the liquid crystal display. The first story development in the story production may suggest whether it is a hit or not. On the other hand, in the final reach, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, first of all, the branch of whether or not the character is controlled by the winning / failing notification part (the character operation part) is controlled to the big hit game state. After that, if a big hit occurs, the hit epilogue part as described above notifies that the story is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the end of the story production using the liquid crystal, and if the big hit does not occur, the liquid crystal is lost by the lost epilogue part. As the end of the story production using, it is notified that the jackpot game state is not controlled. As described above, the hit epilogue part in the final reach includes a hit / fail notification part and a hit epilogue part or a lost epilogue part that is visited thereafter.

Further, corresponding to the SP first half reach A, the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A and the lost epilogue part of the SP first half reach A are executed. Corresponding to the SP first half reach B, the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B and the lost epilogue part of the SP first half reach B are executed. Corresponding to the SP second half reach A, the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A and the lost epilogue part of the SP second half reach A are executed. Corresponding to the SP second half reach B, the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B and the lost epilogue part of the SP second half reach B are executed. Corresponding to the SP final reach, the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach and the lost epilogue part of the SP final reach are executed.

[Character movement part]
The accessory movement part is a part corresponding to the period during the development of the latter half of the SP, in which the effect indicating that the movable body 32 is operated to develop from the first half of the SP to the second half of the SP is executed. The accessory movement part is executed after the fanning part of the SP reach first half A or the fanning part of the SP reach first half B. Then, after the character movement part, any one of the fanning part of the SP second half reach A, the fanning part of the SP second half reach B, and the fanning part of the SP final reach is executed.

[Part for relief]
The relief hit part is a part in which a relief hit effect is executed, which once pretends to be a loss and then suggests that it is a big hit. The relief hit part is a part that may develop from either the lost epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the lost epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, or the lost epilogue part of the SP final reach.

[Re-lottery part]
The re-lottery part is a part executed after the hit epilogue part in which the jackpot display result is displayed. Specifically, the re-lottery production is the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the hit epilogue part of SP reach first half B, the hit epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the hit epilogue part of SP second half reach B, and the SP final reach. Performed after the hit epilogue part and the relief hit part. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after each winning part (winning epilogue part, relief winning part), but the re-lottery effect part may not be transferred. For example, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the relief part, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the hit epilogue part, or the jackpot display result may be a probabilistic symbol (probability change). When the odd-numbered symbol (shown) is derived, the re-lottery part may not be executed.

[Relationship before and after the decision of success or failure]
Next, an example will be described in which a series of effects are divided at the timing before and after the decision of success or failure. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after the winning / failing decision, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. Here, the winning / failing determination is an effect showing a branch of whether the jackpot display result or the loss display result is obtained at the final stage of the fanning part. As shown in FIG. 34 (A), the series of effects can be divided into parts that are executed before and after the decision of success or failure from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation, before and after the decision of success or failure. The part before the decision of success or failure includes the start part and the fanning part. In addition, the part after the winning / failing decision includes an epilogue part (hit, lost), a relief hit part, and a re-lottery part.

In this way, the series of effects from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation is composed of a plurality of parts. It is also possible to divide the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation before and after the start of SP reach (start of post-variation). In such a case, before the start of SP reach corresponds to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern of the pre-variation, and after the start of SP reach corresponds to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern of the post-variation.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 20, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot among the fluctuation patterns, will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (B). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach A jackpot in the first half of the SP, the start part is from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach (start of the rear fluctuation). Then, the period from the start of SP reach (start of post-variation) to the decision of success or failure is the fanning part (SP first half reach A). In the fluctuation pattern of the reach A jackpot in the first half of the SP, the accessory does not move at the timing of the winning / failing decision. Then, the epilogue part (per reach A in the first half of the SP) is from the decision of winning or failing to the start of the re-lottery production. Then, the re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery effect to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the fanning part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is 15 seconds, and the re-lottery part is 20 seconds. The time is set so that it becomes.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot among the fluctuation patterns, will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (C). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach (the start of the post-variation). Then, the part from the start of SP reach (start of post-variation) to the development of the latter half of SP is the fanning part (reach A in the first half of SP). Then, the part from the development of the latter half of the SP to the decision of whether or not to win is the part (SP final reach). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the accessory does not move at the timing of winning or failing. Then, the epilogue part (per SP final reach) is from the decision of winning or failing to the start of the re-lottery production. Then, the re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery effect to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the fan part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the fan part (SP final reach) is 25 seconds, and the epilogue part (SP final reach) is 30 seconds. The time is set so that the second and the re-lottery part are 20 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 34 (B) and 34 (C), the SP final reach, which has a higher expectation, has a longer fluctuation time than the SP first half reach A. In addition, the SP final reach, which has a higher expectation than the SP first half reach A, has a longer total fanning part time and epilogue part time. As a result, the higher the expectation of the fluctuation, the longer the period of inciting the player, and the longer the lingering time when hit, so that the feeling of blessing can be enhanced.

<About the scenario>
Next, the correspondence between the content of the effect executed in the series of effect and the game effect lamp 9 will be described by a scenario for each part. The scenario described here has the role of a script that summarizes the contents of each scene of a series of productions. The scenario of each part corresponds to the figure for explaining the production mode corresponding to each part described later. The contents such as the effect executed on the screen of the image display device 5 and the aspect of the game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings for explaining the effect mode described later. In the following, the correspondence between the figure for explaining the scenario of each part and the figure for explaining the effect mode described later will be described.

FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a start part. The scenario of the start part corresponding to the number 1 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the effect mode of FIGS. 55 to 61, which will be described later. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a fanning part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the fanning part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to the number 2 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 62 to 67, which will be described later. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and a lost epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to the number 3 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 68 to 69 described later. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to the number 4 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 70 to 71, which will be described later.

FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a fanning part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the fanning part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to the number 5 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 72 to 77, which will be described later. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and a lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to the number 6 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 78 to 80, which will be described later. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to the number 7 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 81 to 82 described later. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of the accessory operation part (during the development of the latter half of the SP). The scenario of the accessory operation part (during the development of the latter half of the SP) corresponding to the number 8 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIG. 83, which will be described later.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a fanning part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to the number 9 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 84 to 96, which will be described later. FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and a lost epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to the number 10 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 97 to 98, which will be described later. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to the number 11 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 99 to 100, which will be described later.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to the number 12 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 101 to 109 described later. FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a hit epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and a lost epilogue part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to the number 13 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 110 to 112, which will be described later. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to the number 14 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 113 to 114 described later.

45 and 46 are diagrams for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP final reach). The scenario of the fanning part (SP final reach) corresponding to the number 15 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 115 to 132, which will be described later. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a hit epilogue part (SP final reach) and a lost epilogue part (SP final reach). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to the number 16 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 133 to 136, which will be described later. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to the number 17 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 137 to 138 described later. FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a part per relief. The scenario of the relief hit part corresponding to the number 18 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 139 to 140, which will be described later.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). The scenario of the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation) corresponding to the number 19 of FIG. 33 corresponds to the effect mode of FIGS. 141 to 156 described later. FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a re-lottery part (odd number symbol derivation after button operation) and a fanfare repertoire. The scenario of the re-lottery part (odd number symbol derivation after button operation) corresponding to the number 20 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the effect mode of FIGS. 157 to 159 described later. The scenario of the fanfare repertoire corresponding to the number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIG. 160, which will be described later. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a re-lottery part (even-numbered symbol derivation after button operation) and a fanfare repertoire. The scenario of the re-lottery part (deriving even-numbered symbols after the button operation) corresponding to the number 21 of FIG. 33 corresponds to the effect mode of FIGS. 161 to 163 described later. The scenario of the fanfare repertoire corresponding to the number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIG. 164 described later.

<Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 turns on / blinks / turns off one or a plurality of lamps (LEDs) among the plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. The brightness data for making the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) is output. In the following, the lighting / blinking / extinguishing control performed on a lamp such as an LED by the effect control CPU 120 is also referred to as lamp control. The LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp in order to turn on / blink / turn off each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 to be controlled by the lamp based on the luminance data received from the effect control CPU 120. Each game effect lamp 9 is turned on / blinked / turned off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 store a luminance data table in which luminance data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data table includes the brightness data table for error used when an error occurs, and the brightness for SP reach used in each part during SP reach (such as a fanning part, a hit epilogue part, a lost epilogue part, and an accessory operation part). Includes a data table and a background luminance data table.

Further, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, and a jackpot game. The brightness data table for the jackpot background used during the round of the state, the brightness data table for the ending background used in the ending state in which the ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed, and the high accuracy and high base state (probability variation). Includes a luminance data table for probabilistic backgrounds used in (state).

Each of the above-mentioned background luminance data tables is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any of a plurality of types of gaming states such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot gaming state, an ending state, and a probability variation state. Depending on whether or not, one of the background luminance data tables is used. That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses one of the background luminance data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs the luminance data based on the background luminance data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is ramp-controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Further, each of the luminance data table for error, the luminance data table for SP reach, and the luminance data table for background has a priority when used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the priority is high when the luminance data table for error, the luminance data table for SP reach, and the luminance data table for background are used in this order.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 develops into SP reach while outputting luminance data based on the normal background luminance data table in a normal state, the SP reach luminance data table corresponding to the SP reach is used as the normal background. The luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach luminance data table by preferentially using the luminance data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 develops into SP reach when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table, the mode corresponding to SP reach based on the SP reach brightness data table. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by the lamp. During the period when the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but it is usually after the SP reach is completed. When it returns to the state, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is output to the LED driver, and when it becomes a big hit and the fanfare state is reached, the brightness data based on the fanfare background brightness data table is output to the LED driver. It is output.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses a background brightness data table corresponding to the game state under control while measuring the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control by a timer, and is an LED driver. However, when it develops into SP reach or the like, the luminance data table for SP reach corresponding to the SP reach is used preferentially over the luminance data table for background, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the timer value without stopping the time counting of the lamp control using the background luminance data table. That is, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background brightness data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled based on the SP reach brightness data table, but the background brightness Since the luminance data included in the data table has a lower priority than the luminance data included in the SP reach luminance data table, the luminance data included in the background luminance data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. Then, after the SP reach is completed, the effect control CPU 120 starts to output the luminance data included in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

Further, for example, when an error occurs while the effect control CPU 120 is outputting luminance data based on the SP reach luminance data table during SP reach, the error luminance data table corresponding to the error is SP reach. It is used with priority over the luminance data table for error, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the luminance data table for error. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to SP reach based on the SP reach brightness data table, the game effect is handled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. The lamp 9 is lamp controlled. During the period when the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but the error is cleared and the SP reach is in progress again. When the game state is returned to, the luminance data based on the SP reach luminance data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 tells the LED driver the luminance data table for the SP reach corresponding to the SP reach while measuring the lamp control time corresponding to the SP reach under control by a timer. Data is output, but when an error occurs, the luminance data table for error corresponding to the error is used preferentially over the luminance data table for SP reach, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the timer value without stopping the time counting of the lamp control using the SP reach luminance data table. That is, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled based on the error brightness data table, but the SP reach Since the luminance data included in the luminance data table has a lower priority than the luminance data included in the error luminance data table, the luminance data included in the SP reach luminance data table should not be output to the LED driver. It has become. Then, after the error is cleared, the effect control CPU 120 starts to output the luminance data included in the SP reach luminance data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

<Lighting mode of the game effect lamp>
In the present embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by the output of the luminance data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. Here, the lighting mode of each game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

In the present embodiment, the terms related to the lighting of the game effect lamps 9 such as the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the left panel lamp 9B, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H are "off" and "". "Abbreviated off", "on", "blinking", etc. are used. Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and the brightness becomes zero. The term "substantially extinguished" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its luminance is extremely low (for example, the luminance "1" described later).

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the frame lamp is “000”, the frame lamp is “turned off”. Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights up in white with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, the state of the frame lamp in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially extinguished" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the data of RRRR (Red, Red, Red, Red) defined as the luminance data of the accessory lamp 9A is "0000", the accessory lamp 9A is "turned off". .. Further, when the luminance data (RRRR data) of the accessory lamp 9A is "1111", the accessory lamp 9A lights up in red with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, the state of the accessory lamp 9A in which the RRRR data is "1111" may be referred to as "substantially extinguished" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the data of WWWWW (White, White, White, White, White) defined as the luminance data of the panel left lamp 9B is “0000”, the panel left lamp 9B is “turned off”. "do. Further, when the luminance data (WWWWWW data) of the panel left lamp 9B is "11111", the panel left lamp 9B is lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, the state of the panel left lamp 9B in which the WWWWW data is "11111" may be referred to as "substantially extinguished" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the attacker lamp 9E is “000”, the attacker lamp 9E is “turned off”. Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "111", the attacker lamp 9E is lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, the state of the attacker lamp 9E in which such RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially extinguished" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the WWW (White, White, White) data defined as the luminance data of the V attacker lamp 9F is “000”, the V attacker lamp 9F is “turned off”. Further, when the luminance data (WWW data) of the V attacker lamp 9F is "111", the V attacker lamp 9F lights up with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, the state of the V attacker lamp 9F in which the WWW data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially extinguished" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the electric chew lamp 9H is “000”, the electric chew lamp 9H is “turned off”. Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the electric chew lamp 9H is "111", the electric chew lamp 9H lights up with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, the state of the electric tulamp 9H in which such RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially extinguished" for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes constant lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is always lit, wave lighting in which a plurality of side-by-side lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are sequentially switched from off to on, and game effect lamp 9. Includes moya lighting that is dimly lit while changing the brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the luminance data is any one of "2" to "F". The luminance data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F". "0" has no luminance, "1" has the lowest luminance, and "F" has the lowest luminance. Will be higher.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X2), when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 is "AAA", the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are "lit", and especially in this case, Since the brightness is high, the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are lit brightly.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X3), when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is "AAA", the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are "lit", and in this case, the luminance is particularly high. Because it is high, the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 light up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X4), when the luminance data (RRRR data) of the accessory lamp 9A is "AAAA", the accessory lamp 9A is "lit", and in this case, the luminance is particularly high, so that it is useful. The object lamp 9A lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X5), when the brightness data (WWWWWW data) of the panel left lamp 9B is "AAAAAA", the panel left lamp 9B is "lit", and in this case, the brightness is particularly high, so that the panel The left lamp 9B lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X6), when the luminance data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "AAA", the attacker lamp 9E is "lit", and in this case, the attacker lamp 9E is particularly high in luminance. Lights up brightly. When the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacker lamp 9F is "AAA", the V attacker lamp 9F is "lit", and in this case, the V attacker lamp 9F is lit brightly because the brightness is high. When the luminance data (RGB data) of the electric chew lamp 9H is "AAA", the electric chew lamp 9H is "lit", and particularly in this case, since the luminance is high, the electric chew lamp 9H is brightly turned on.

The term "blinking" is an embodiment other than the above-mentioned "turning off" and "lighting" of the game effect lamp 9, and the brightness of each lamp is the first brightness and the second brightness higher than the first brightness. Includes aspects such as alternating between. For example, "blinking" includes repeating lighting and extinguishing or substantially extinguishing, and specifically, "blinking" means that the luminance data is any one of "2" to "F". It includes switching between the case where the luminance data is "0" or "1" with the passage of time. As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a moya lighting as a lighting mode of the lamp, but the moya lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing the brightness. , Blinking is different from each other in that the entire lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on and off repeatedly or substantially turned off.

<Direction mode of pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 164, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. In the present embodiment, an effect mode when any of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 is selected will be described.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 9 is selected, among the plurality of routes shown in FIG. 33, the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), and the SP first half reach A The production transitions in the order of the lost epilogue part (4), or the production transitions in the order of the start part (1), the fanning part (5) of the SP first half reach B, and the lost epilogue part (7) of the SP first half reach B. ..

When the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 12 is selected, the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), the accessory movement part (8), the fanning part of the SP second half reach A (9), SP The production changes in the order of the loss epilogue part (11) of the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), the character movement part (8), and the fanning part of the SP second half reach B. (12), the production transitions in the order of the loss epilogue part (14) of the SP second half reach B, or the start part (1), the SP first half reach B fanning part (5), the character movement part (8), the SP second half. The production transitions in the order of reach A fanning part (9), SP second half reach B loss epilogue part (14), or start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), character movement part ( 8), the production transitions in the order of the fanning part (12) of the SP second half reach B and the loss epilogue part (14) of the SP second half reach B.

When the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 15 is selected, the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), the accessory movement part (8), the fanning part of the SP final reach (15), and the SP final The production changes in the order of the reach loss epilogue part (17), or the start part (1), the SP first half reach B fanning part (5), the character movement part (8), and the SP final reach fanning part (15). , The production changes in the order of the lost epilogue part (17) of the SP final reach.

When the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 20 is selected, the production transitions or starts in the order of the start part (1), the fanning part (2) of the SP first half reach A, and the hit epilogue part (3) of the SP first half reach A. The production changes in the order of the part (1), the fanning part (5) of the SP first half reach B, and the hit epilogue part (6) of the SP first half reach B.

When the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 20 is selected, the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), the accessory movement part (8), the fanning part of the SP second half reach A (9), SP The production changes in the order of the hit epilogue part (10) in the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), the character movement part (8), and the fanning part of the SP second half reach B. (12), the production transitions in the order of the hit epilogue part (13) of the SP second half reach B, or the start part (1), the SP first half reach B fanning part (5), the character movement part (8), the SP second half. The production transitions in the order of reach A fanning part (9), SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (10), or start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), character movement part ( 8), the production transitions in the order of the fanning part (12) of the SP second half reach B and the hit epilogue part (13) of the SP second half reach B.

When the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26 is selected, the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), the accessory movement part (8), the fanning part of the SP final reach (15), and the SP final The production changes in the order of the reach hit epilogue part (16), or the start part (1), the SP first half reach B fanning part (5), the character movement part (8), and the SP final reach fanning part (15). , The production changes in the order of the hit epilogue part (16) of the SP final reach.

Further, in the figure, the mode of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 and the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are also shown. In the present embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after the hit epilogue, but there may be a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed and ends in the hit epilogue part. Further, although the description of the variation pattern corresponding to the relief per part is omitted in the example of the total variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the relief per part will also be described. In the case of a hit, the fluctuation time is longer than the fluctuation pattern of the loss, so that the relief hit part, which pretends to be a loss, may perform an effect by the relief hit part using the fluctuation time.

[Direction mode in the start part]
The production mode in the start part will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a1), when variable display (variable display) is started based on one hold storage, the decorative symbol is variable in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including an image of a character or a landscape is displayed as a background during variable display. In the present embodiment, an image in which a girl named Yumemu-chan is flying is displayed as a character that appears in the fluctuation during the normal game state. Yume-chan is the main character that appears as an ally character in the production performed by the pachinko machine 1.

At the start of the fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow corresponding to the normal background. During the variable display, the effect sound is appropriately output from the speakers 8L and 8R, but the effect sound is described only in some drawings. Further, the yellow lighting corresponding to the normal background by the game effect lamp 9 is referred to as "background yellow lighting". The effect control CPU 120 lights the game effect lamp 9 in a yellow background lighting pattern based on the normal background luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, the “lighting” referred to here includes constant lighting, wave lighting, moya lighting, and the like, and is the same in the following description.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a2), after the left and right decorative symbols are in a reach mode in which the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the “2” symbol, the “NEXT” symbol as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped at the middle symbol. By stopping the "NEXT" symbol, it is shown that the second variation of the pseudo variation is started. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. Note that the "blinking" referred to here includes repeating turning on and off of the lamp as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and is the same in the following description. After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (a3), the character "x2" indicating that the second variable display by the pseudo-continuous effect is performed is displayed. When "x2" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is white and blinks twice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4), re-variation is performed as the second variation of the pseudo-variation. In the upper left of the screen, the character "x2" indicating that it is the second variable display is displayed in a small size. At the time of re-variation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a5), the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped in the middle symbol after the reach mode is reached. By stopping the "NEXT" symbol, it is shown that the third variation of the pseudo variation is started. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (a6), the character "x3" indicating that the third variable display by the pseudo-continuous effect is performed is displayed. When "x3" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is white and blinks twice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (a7), a pseudo re-variation is performed as the third variable display. In the upper left of the screen, the character "x3" indicating that it is the third variable display is displayed in a small size. At the time of re-variation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (a8), "2" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, and "2" also stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, which is called a reach tempai. It becomes an aspect. At the time of reach tempai, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9), the background darkening is started and the screen becomes dark while the middle symbol is changed in the mode at the time of reach tempai. At the start of background darkening, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a10), an image of the shape of the shutter (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a shutter) is displayed so as to hide the display of the decorative pattern and the character image of Yumemu-chan. The shutter layer has a higher priority than the decorative pattern layer and the Yumemu-chan character layer. High priority means that the image layer (image layer) is located on the front side. As shown in FIG. 58 (a10), the shutter is displayed so as to close from the top and bottom of the screen toward the center of the screen. Due to the image of the shutter, the image behind the shutter becomes invisible. In addition, the screen brightness gradually decreases as the shutter gradually closes. When the shutter of (a10) is closed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while gradually reducing the brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a11), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than that at the time of (a10). When the shutter of (a11) is closed, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 further decreases from the time of (a10), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than that at the time of (a11). When the shutter of (a12) is closed, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 further decreases from the time of (a11), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. The screen brightness gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12) so that the relationship is, for example, (a10) 75%> (a11) 50%> (a12) 25%. Further, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12).

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the shutter is completely closed. When the shutter of (a13) is closed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintains the same brightness as that of the time of (a12). After that, the shutter is maintained in the closed state from FIGS. 59 (a14) to 59 (a15). In the state where the shutters of (a14) and (a15) are kept closed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained at the same brightness as that at the time of (a13).

After that, the screen brightness is gradually improved according to the situation in which the shutter is gradually opened from FIGS. 60 (a16) to 60 (a18). When the shutter of (a16) is open, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained at the same brightness as at the time of (a15). After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (a17), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved from the time point of (a16). When the shutter of (a17) is open, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained at the same brightness as at the time of (a16). After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (a18), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved from the time point of (a17). When the shutter of (a18) is open, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained at the same brightness as at the time of (a17).

The screen brightness is gradually improved from (a16) to (a17) so that the relationship is, for example, (a16) 25% <(a17) 50% <(a18) 75%. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red while maintaining the brightness from (a16) to (a18). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (a19), when the shutter is completely opened, the screen corresponding to the SP first half reach A is displayed. When the shutter of (a19) is open, the screen brightness is 100%. Further, in the state where the shutter of (a19) is open, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. It should be noted that it may be "substantially turned off" instead of "turned off". Further, if it is decided to shift to the SP first half reach B when the shutter is released, the screen corresponding to the SP first half reach B will be displayed. When the SP first half reach A is executed from the state of (a19), the process shifts to the effect of FIG. 62 (b1), and when the SP first half reach B is executed from the state of (a19), FIG. 72 ( Move to the production of e1).

[Direction mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A)]
The production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67. The fanning part (SP first half reach A) is a part where the story of Yume-chan, who is a ally character, chasing Baku Chu, who is an enemy character, is developed. In the fanning part (SP first half reach A), a story is unfolded that fuels a big hit if Yumemu can catch Baku Chu, and a loss if Yumemu can't catch Baku Chu.

As shown in FIG. 62 (b1), in the fanning part where the SP first half reach A is executed, the title corresponding to the SP first half reach A such as "Catch the Baku Chu!" Is displayed. The title display shows the contents of the production of the first half of the SP to be executed from now on. In the state where the title display of (b1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (b2), the title display is erased, and an image showing how an enemy character called Baku Chu is landing is displayed. In the state where the title display of (b2) is turned off, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Further, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (b2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP first half reach A is output. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (b3), an image in which the enemy character Baku Chu lands in the center of the screen and poses is displayed. In the state where the enemy character of (b3) appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), an image of a confrontation between the ally character Yumemu-chan and the enemy character Baku Chu facing each other is displayed in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (b4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green on the left side where Yumemu-chan is displayed, corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red on the right side where the Baku Chu is displayed, corresponding to the character of the Baku Chu. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle display "I found" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "I found" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (b5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in green in response to Yume-chan's speech. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b6), the subtitle display "found" corresponding to the line "found" of Baku Chu is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (b6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yumemu-chan. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in red in response to the fact that the explosion chew emits a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (b7), Yume-chan, who is an ally character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. In addition, as shown in (b7), the subtitle display "Catch me!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Catch me!" Is displayed on the Yumemu up screen. Further, in the state of the dream up in (b7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan is emitting a line. After that, as shown in (b8), an image of Yumemu-chan chasing Baku Chu is displayed. Further, in the state of chasing the dream of (b8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan emitting the line "To". After that, as shown in (b9), an image of Baku Chu escaping from Yumemu-chan is displayed. Further, in the state of (b9) Baku Chu escaping, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Baku Chu emitting the line "Hehehe".

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b10), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background of (b10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (b11), an image of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Baku Chu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the subtitle display "Wait" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Wait" is displayed on the Yumemu chase screen. In addition, Yumemu-chan's footsteps "Zazzazza" as a physical sound (hereinafter referred to as "physical sound") are output according to the image of Yumemu-chan. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the state of chasing Yumemu in (b11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in green in response to Yumemu-chan emitting a line. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b12), images of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing the explosion chew on the right side of the screen are continuously displayed. As shown in (b11), Yumemu-chan's footsteps "Zazzazza" as a physical sound are output according to the image of Yumemu-chan. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the state of chasing the dream of (b12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b13), the back view of Baku Chu is displayed, and a part of Yumemu-chan's hand is displayed, so that the screen is such that Baku Chu escapes from Yumemu-chan. As shown in (b13), the subtitle display "Catch Monka!" Corresponding to the Baku Chu line "Catch Monka!" Is displayed on the Baku Chu Escape screen. In addition, Yumemu-chan's footsteps "Zazzazza" as a physical sound are output according to the image of Yumemu-chan. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the state where the Baku Chu escapes in (b13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the Baku Chu emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b14), an image in which the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen jumps to escape from Yumemu-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b14), the jump sound "Pyo-n" of the explosion chew as a pseudo sound (hereinafter referred to as an onomatopoeia) is output according to the image of the jump of the explosion chew. Further, in the state of the explosion chew jump of (b14), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the jump of the explosion chew. After that, as shown in (b15), the enemy character Baku Chu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b15), on the screen of the explosion chew-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the character of the explosion chew.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (b16), Yume-chan, who is an ally character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b16), on the dream-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (b17), an image of Yumemu-chan jumping and jumping on the explosion chew is displayed. As shown in (b17), Yumemu-chan's line "Torya!" Is output on the Yumemu Jump screen. Further, in the state of the dream jump of (b17), the BGM is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the jump of Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), the screen in the scene of the winning / failing determination in which Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed is displayed. Further, in the scene before the winning / failing determination in (b18), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the winning / failing determination scene. It is easy to understand that it is a branching scene of the winning / failing decision because the scene before the winning / failing decision is muted. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit in the reach A in the first half of the SP from the state of (b18), the production shifts to the production of (c1). If it is determined that the state of (b18) will be lost in the reach A of the first half of the SP, the production shifts to the production of (d1). If it is decided to develop from the state of (b18) to the SP reach in the latter half, the production shifts to the production of (h1).

[Direction mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
The production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 69. The hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part that informs you that Yumemu-chan will be controlled to a big hit game state by developing a story that catches Baku Chu.

As shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, an image in which Yumemu-chan catches the tail of the explosion chew by hand is displayed. In addition, in the state of catching Baku Chu in (c1), the sound "Bashi!" That Yume-chan catches as a physical sound is output according to the image of Yume-chan catching Baku Chu. Further, in the state of catching the Baku Chu in (c1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color in (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) in response to catching the Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (c2), an image in which Yume-chan, who caught the Baku Chu, is buoying is displayed. As shown in (c2), in the state of catching Baku Chu, the subtitle display "Rakusho!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Rakusho!" Is displayed. Further, in the state of (c2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color to indicate that the jackpot has been achieved. Hereinafter, the smooth lighting of the rainbow color is also referred to as rainbow lighting (smooth). Further, in the state of (c2), the BGM for hitting is output. After that, as shown in (c3), the image of Yume-chan, who caught Baku Chu, buoying is displayed as a graphic novel-style still image. In the state of the still image of (c3), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (c4), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (c4), the design of "222" is enlarged in the design, and the design is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of displaying the pattern in (c4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in bright white. After that, as shown in (c5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (c4). In the state of displaying the pattern in (c5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (c6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (c5) and displayed in a normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) of (c6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighting mode of rainbow lighting (smooth).

[Direction mode in the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
The production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 71. The lost epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part that informs that Yumemu-chan is not controlled to the big hit game state by developing the story that Baku Chu was not caught.

As shown in FIG. 70 (d1), in the lost epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, an image in which Yumemu-chan was not caught by Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, in the state where Baku Chu was not caught in (d1), the sound "Suka" that Yume-chan was not caught as an onomatopoeia is output according to the image in which Yume-chan was not caught. Further, in the state where the Baku Chu was not caught in (d1), the game effect lamp 9 was darker than the white color in (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) in response to the fact that the Baku Chu was not caught. Lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (d2), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan, who could not catch Baku Chu, kneels down and is disappointed, and Baku Chu is pleased. As shown in (d2), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a white color darker than the white color in (td1) indicating the lighting mode of (d1). After that, as shown in (d3), the screen is dimmed. In the state of the screen darkening of (d3), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (d4), the symbol of "232", which is a combination of lost symbols, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (d4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in the same background yellow lighting pattern as that of (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1).

[Direction mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B)]
The production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 77. The fanning part (SP first half reach B) is a part where the story of a hockey confrontation between a friend character Yumemu and an enemy character Boingo is developed. In the fanning part (SP first half reach B), a story is unfolded that encourages Yumemu-chan to win a big hit if she wins Boingo, and Yumemu-chan loses if she loses to Boingo.

As shown in FIG. 72 (e1), in the fanning part where the SP first half reach B is executed, the title corresponding to the SP first half reach B with the “bilibili hockey confrontation” is displayed. The title display shows the contents of the production of the first half of the SP to be executed from now on. In the state where the title display of (e1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (e2), the screen is cracked and an image in which the title display is erased is displayed. The screen of (e2) is cracked. When the title display disappears, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green. After that, as shown in (e3), an image of the appearance of the opponent character in which the ally character Yumemu-chan and the enemy character Boingo appear on the screen is displayed. In the state where the opponent character of (e3) appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (e4), an image of a confrontation between Yume-chan, who is a ally character on the left front of the screen, and Boingo, who is an enemy character on the right back of the screen, is displayed. In the confrontation state of (e4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green on the left side where Yumemu-chan is displayed, corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in cream color on the right side where the boingo is displayed, corresponding to the boingo character. Further, at the timing when the title display of (e4) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the reach B in the first half of the SP is output. After that, as shown in (e5), the subtitle display "Because I can't lose" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Because I can't lose" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (e5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in green in response to Yume-chan's speech. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the character of Boingo.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (e6), the subtitle display "Kakekoi" corresponding to the Boingo line "Kakekoi" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (e6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yumemu-chan. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in cream color in response to Boingo emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (e7), an image in which the ally character Yume-chan hits the pack is displayed. Further, as shown in (e7), Yumemu-chan's line "ya-" is output on the screen which is Yumemu-chan's turn. Further, in the state of the dream turn of (e7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to the fact that Yume-chan is emitting a line. After that, as shown in (e8), the pack struck by Yumemu-chan is enlarged and displayed. Further, in the state of the pack display of (e8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the physical sound "shoe" in which the pack operates. After that, as shown in (e9), an image of Boingo preventing Yumemu-chan's pack is displayed. Further, in the state of preventing boingo in (e9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in cream color corresponding to the character of boingo.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (e10), an image of the plucked puck flying in the air is displayed. In the state of dancing in the puck of (e10), the physical sound "shururu" that the puck rotates is output. Further, in the state of (e10), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yumemu-chan. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the character of Boingo. After that, as shown in (e11), an image in which the enemy character Boingo hits the puck is displayed. Further, as shown in (e11), the line of Boingo "Good job" is output on the screen which is the turn of Boingo. Further, in the state of the boingo turn of (e11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in cream color corresponding to the boingo emitting a line. After that, as shown in (e12), the pack struck by Boingo is enlarged and displayed. Further, in the state of the pack display of (e12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the physical sound "shoe" in which the pack operates.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (e13), Yumemu-chan is damaged by receiving the pack directly, and an image in which electricity runs and the bones are transparent is displayed. As shown in (e13), Yumemu-chan's line "Wow" is output in the state of Yumemu damage. Further, in the state of dream damage in (e13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white in response to the damage to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (e14), Yumemu-chan is damaged, electricity runs, and an image through which the bones are transparent is displayed. Further, in the state of dream damage in (e14), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white in response to the damage to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (e15), Yumemu-chan is damaged, electricity runs, and an image through which the bones are transparent is displayed with the same contents as in (e13). Further, in the state of dream damage in (e15), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white in response to the damage to Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (e16), an image in which Yumemu-chan is damaged, electricity runs and the bones are transparent is displayed with the same contents as in (e14). Further, in the state of the dream damage of (e16), the BGM is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white in response to the damage of the dream-chan. After that, as shown in (e17), it becomes a scene in the scene before the decision of whether or not the result is displayed in which Yumemu-chan has been damaged. In the scene before the winning / failing decision of (e17), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the winning / failing decision. It is easy to understand that it is a branching scene of the winning / failing decision because the scene before the winning / failing decision is muted. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit in the reach B in the first half of the SP from the state of (e17), the production shifts to the production of (f1). If it is determined that the state of (e17) will be lost in the reach B of the first half of the SP, the production shifts to the production of (g1). If it is decided to develop from the state of (e17) to the SP reach in the latter half, the production shifts to the production of (h1).

[Direction mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
The production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. The hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part that informs you that the story of Yumemu-chan's victory over Boingo will be unfolded and controlled to a big hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 78 (f1), in the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, an image of Yumemu-chan hitting the pack is displayed. In addition, in the state of Yumemu-chan attacking by hitting the pack back in (f1), the subtitle display "Go-!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Go-!" Is displayed. Further, in the state of the dream attack of (f1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a brighter white than the white of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to the attack by Yume-chan. do.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (f2), an image in which Boingo attacked by Yumemu-chan is blown away is displayed. As shown in (f2), in the state of being attacked by Boingo, the subtitle display "Wow!" Corresponding to the line "Wow!" Of Boingo is displayed. Further, in the state of (f2), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth) indicating that it has become a big hit. Further, in the state of (f2), the BGM for hitting is output. After that, as shown in (f3), the image of Yumemu-chan's guts pose and Boingo's fall is displayed. As shown in (f3), in the state of dream victory, the subtitle display "easy victory!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "easy victory!" Is displayed. Further, in the state of (f3), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth).

After that, as shown in (f4), the image of Yumemu Victory is displayed as a graphic novel-style still image. In the state of the still image of (f4), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (f5), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (f5), the design of "222" is enlarged in the design, and the design is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of displaying the pattern in (f5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (f6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (f5). In the state of displaying the pattern of (f6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (f7), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (f6) and displayed in a normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) of (f7), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighting mode of rainbow lighting (smooth).

[Direction mode in the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
The production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 82. The lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part that informs that the story of Yumemu-chan's defeat to Boingo is unfolded and is not controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 81 (g1), in the lost epilogue part of the reach B in the first half of the SP, an image in which Yume-chan, who was attacked by Boingo, is blown away is displayed. As shown in (g1), in the state of being blown by a dream, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to the fact that the dream is blown. Lights up in white. After that, as shown in (g2), an image in which Yumemu-chan blows away from the state of (g1) is displayed. As shown in (g2), in the state of being blown by a dream, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to the fact that the dream is blown. Lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (g3), an image of Yume-chan, who was defeated by Boingo, kneeling down and laughing at Boingo is displayed. As shown in (g3), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a white color darker than the white color of (tg1) and (tg2) indicating the lighting mode of (g1) and (g2). Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (g4), the screen is dimmed. In the state of the screen darkening of (g4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (g5), the symbol of "232", which is a combination of lost symbols, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (g5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in the same background yellow lighting pattern as that of (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1).

[Direction mode in the character movement part (during the latter half of the development)]
With reference to FIG. 83, an effect mode in the accessory movement part (during the latter half of the development) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 83 (h1), when the SP reach is developed from the SP first half reach A or the SP first half reach B to the SP reach of any one of the SP second half reach A, the SP second half reach B, and the SP strongest reach. The movable body 32 operates as. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls while tilting diagonally from the upper part of the screen toward the front of the screen. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the start of the fall of the accessory. Due to the effect image, Yumemu-chan's character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern cannot be seen. Further, in the state of (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls.

After that, in the state of (h2), the accessory further falls from the state of (h1). In the state of (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls. After that, in the state of (h3), the character is further arranged so that the character "P" among the characters of the character is positioned up to the position where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" is displayed. Fall. In the state of (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. The effect of raising the accessory from the state of (h3) is executed. If it is decided to develop into the reach A in the latter half of the SP after the ascending character, the production shifts to (i1). If it is decided to develop into the reach B in the latter half of the SP after the ascending character, the production shifts to (n1). If it has been decided that the SP will reach the final reach after the character has risen, the production will shift to (r1).

[Direction mode in the fanning part (SP second half reach A)]
The production mode in the fanning part (SP second half reach A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 96. The fanning part (SP second half reach A) is a part where the story of the ally characters Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan chasing the enemy character Baku Chu. In the fanning part (SP second half reach A), a story is developed that fuels a big hit if Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan can catch the Bakuchu, and a story that if Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan cannot catch the Bakuchu, it will be a loss. Dream.

As shown in FIG. 84 (i1), in the fanning part where the SP second half reach A is executed, the title corresponding to the SP second half reach A such as "Catch the Baku Chu!" Is displayed. The title display shows the content of the SP second half reach production that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display of (i1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (i2), an image of a confrontation between the friendly characters Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan (the character on the far left) and the enemy character Baku Chu facing each other is displayed in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (i2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white on the left side where Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are displayed corresponding to the two characters. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red on the right side where the Baku Chu is displayed, corresponding to the character of the Baku Chu. Further, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (i2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP second half reach A is output. After that, as shown in (i3), the subtitle display "I will not let you escape!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "I will not let you escape!" Is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (i3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in green in response to Yume-chan's speech. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i4), the subtitle display "I will help you!" Corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I will help you!" Is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (i4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan emitting a line. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu. After that, as shown in (i5), the subtitle display "I'll run away again!" Corresponding to the line "I'll run away again!" Of Baku Chu is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (i5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the two characters Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in red in response to the fact that the explosion chew emits a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i6), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Catch me!" Corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Catch me!" Is displayed. In the state of the jam display of (i6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to the fact that the jam is emitting a line. After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (i7), when Yumemu-chan is displayed, the subtitle display “Gozo” corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line “Go” is displayed. In the state of the dream display of (i7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan is emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (i8), when the Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display "Kake Koi!" Corresponding to the line "Kake Koi!" Of the Baku Chu is displayed. In the state of the explosion chew display of (i8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the explosion chew emitting a line. After that, as shown in (i9), when the image of Jam chasing Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait!" Corresponding to Jam's line "Wait!" Is displayed. In the state of chasing the jam in (i9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to the fact that the jam is emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i10), when the image of Baku Chu escaping from Jam-chan is displayed, the footstep sound of Baku Chu is output as a physical sound. Further, in the state where the Baku Chu escapes in (i10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the Baku Chu escaping. After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i11), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background of (i11), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i12), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Baku Chu on the right side of the screen is displayed. Further, as shown in (i12), the subtitle display "Wait!" Corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" Is displayed on the jam chasing screen. As shown in (i12), Jam-chan's footstep sound "Zazza-Za-Za" is output as a physical sound according to the image of Jam-chan. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the state of chasing the jam in (i12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in purple in response to the fact that the jam is emitting a line. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i13), an image in which Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chases the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen is continuously displayed. As shown in (i13), Jam-chan's footstep sound "Zazza-Za-Za" is output as a physical sound according to the image of Jam-chan. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the jam chasing state of (i13), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to the character of Jam-chan. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu. After that, as shown in (i14), an image of Jam jumping and jumping on the explosion chew is displayed. As shown in (i14), in the jam jump state, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i15), an image in which the explosion chew on the right side of the screen jumps to escape from Jam on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i15), the jump sound "Pyon" of the explosion chew as an onomatopoeia is output according to the image of the jump of the explosion chew. Further, in the state of the explosion chew jump of (i15), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the jump of the explosion chew. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i16), an image in which Jam-chan was not caught by Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, in the state where the Baku Chu is not caught in (i16), the subtitle display "I can't catch" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I can't catch" is displayed. In addition, the sound "Suka" that Jam-chan could not catch as an onomatopoeia is output according to the image that Jam-chan could not catch Baku Chu. Further, in the state where the explosion chew of (i16) is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan emitting a line. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i17), when Yumemu-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Next is me!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Next is me!" Is displayed. .. In the state of the dream display of (i17), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan is emitting a line. After that, as shown in (i18), an image of Yumemu-chan chasing Baku Chu is displayed. In the state of chasing the explosion chew of (i18), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the operation of Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i19), when the image of Baku Chu escaping from Yumemu-chan is displayed, the footstep sound of Baku Chu is output as a physical sound. Further, in the state where the Baku Chu escapes in (i19), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the Baku Chu escaping. After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i20), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background of (i20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i21), an image of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Baku Chu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i21), the subtitle display "Wait!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Wait!" Is displayed on the dream chasing screen. Further, as shown in (i21), Yumemu-chan's footsteps "Zazzazza" as a physical sound are output according to the image of Yumemu-chan. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the state of chasing Yumemu in (i21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in green in response to Yumemu-chan emitting a line. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i22), images of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen are continuously displayed. As shown in (i22), Yumemu-chan's footsteps "Zazzazza" as a physical sound are output according to the image of Yumemu-chan. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the state of chasing the dream of (i22), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu. After that, as shown in (i23), an image of Yumemu-chan jumping and jumping at Baku Chu is displayed. As shown in (i23), in the state of the dream jump, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the jump of Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i24), an image in which the explosion chew on the right side of the screen jumps to escape from Jam on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i24), the jump sound "Pyon" of the explosion chew as an onomatopoeia is output according to the image of the jump of the explosion chew. Further, in the state of the explosion chew jump of (i24), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the jump of the explosion chew. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i25), an image in which Yume-chan was not caught by Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, in the state where (i25) Baku Chu is not caught, the subtitle display "I can't catch" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "I can't catch" is displayed. In addition, the sound "Suka" that Yume-chan could not catch as an onomatopoeia is output according to the image that Yume-chan could not catch Baku Chu. Further, in the state where the explosion chew of (i25) is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in green in response to Yume-chan's speech. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i26), two allies, Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan, are displayed. As shown in (i26), when two allies are displayed, the subtitle display "Next is two people!" Corresponding to the dialogue of the two allies "Next is two people!" Is displayed. In the state of displaying two allies in (i26), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan emitting a line. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in green in response to Yume-chan's speech. After that, as shown in (i27), Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, in the dream-up state of (i27), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (i28), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the left side of the screen, and Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i28), in the dream and jam-up state, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to the character of Jam-chan. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character. After that, as shown in (i29), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chase after the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i29), in the state of chasing by two people, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (i30), images of Yume-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen are continuously displayed. In (i30), an image in which two people are closer to the explosion chew than in (i29) is displayed. As shown in (i30), the footsteps of Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are output as physical sounds in accordance with the images of Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the state of chasing by two people (i30), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i31), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i31), on the jam-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the character of Jam-chan. After that, as shown in (i32), an image of Jam jumping and jumping on the explosion chew is displayed. As shown in (i32), Jam-chan's line "Wow" is output on the jam jump screen. Further, in the jam jump state of (i32), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to the jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i33), Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i33), on the dream-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i34), an image of Yumemu-chan jumping and jumping on the explosion chew is displayed. As shown in (i35), Yumemu-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Yumemu Jump screen. Further, in the state of the dream jump of (i34), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the jump of Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (i35), an image of Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan jumping and jumping on the explosion chew is displayed. As shown in (i35), the subtitle display "Wait!" Corresponding to the dialogue "Wait!" Of the two allies is displayed in the state of the two-person jump. In the state of the two-person jump of (i35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the two people jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i36), an image in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as a still image 1. In the state of the two-person jump of (i36), the BGM is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white corresponding to the two people jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (i37), an image in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as a still image 2. In the state of the two-person jump of (i37), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white corresponding to the two people jumping. After that, as shown in (i38), the image in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as a still image 3. In the state of the two-person jump of (i38), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white corresponding to the two people jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (i39), the image in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as a still image 4, which is a scene before the decision of success or failure. In the scene before the winning / failing determination of (i39), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the winning / failing determination. It is easy to understand that it is a branching scene of the winning / failing decision because the scene before the winning / failing decision is muted. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit in the SP second half reach A from the state of (i39), the process shifts to the production of (j1). If it has been decided that the state of (i39) will be lost in the reach A in the latter half of the SP, or that it will be a relief hit, the process will shift to the production of (k1).

[Direction mode in the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
The production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 98. The hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A) is a part that informs you that the story of catching Baku Chu with Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan will be developed and controlled to the big hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 97 (j1), in the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, an image in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan catch the tail of Baku Chu by hand is displayed. In addition, in the state of catching Baku Chu in (j1), the sound "Bashi!" That Yume-chan and Jam-chan catch as physical sounds is output according to the image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan catching Baku Chu. Further, in the state of catching the explosive chew of (j1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) in response to catching the explosive chew.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (j2), Yume-chan who caught the Baku Chu signs a buoy, and an image of Jam riding on the Baku Chu is displayed. As shown in (j2), in the state of catching Baku Chu, the subtitle display "I'm sorry!" Corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I'm sorry!" Is displayed. Further, in the state of (j2), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth) indicating that the jackpot has been achieved. Further, in the state of (j2), the BGM for hitting is output. After that, as shown in (j3), Yume-chan who caught Baku Chu signs a buoy, and the image of Jam riding on Baku Chu is displayed as a graphic novel-style still image. In the state of the still image of (j3), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (j4), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (j4), the design of "222" is enlarged in the design, and the design is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of displaying the pattern of (j4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (j5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (j4). In the state of displaying the pattern of (j5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (j6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (j5) and displayed in a normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) of (j6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighting mode of rainbow lighting (smooth).

[Direction mode in the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
The production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 100. The lost epilogue part (SP second half reach A) is a part that informs that Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are not controlled to the jackpot game state by developing a story in which Baku Chu was not caught.

As shown in FIG. 99 (k1), in the lost epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, an image in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan could not catch the Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, in the state where the Baku Chu was not caught in (k1), the sound "Suka" that was not caught as an onomatopoeia is output according to the video in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan were not able to catch the Baku Chu. Further, in the state where the Baku Chu was not caught in (k1), the game effect lamp 9 was darker than the white color in (ti39) showing the lighting mode of (i39) in response to the fact that the Baku Chu was not caught. Lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (k2), the explosion chew is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (k2), the subtitle display "Usshisshi!" Corresponding to the line "Ussushi!" Of the Bakuchu is displayed on the Baku Chu-up screen. In the state of the explosion chew-up of (k2), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a white color darker than the white color of (tk1) indicating the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in (k3), an image of Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan, who couldn't catch Baku Chu, kneels and regrets is displayed. As shown in (k3), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a white color darker than the white color of (tk1) indicating the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4), the screen is darkened. In the state of the screen darkening of (k4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in (k5), the symbol of "232", which is a combination of lost symbols, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (k5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in the same background yellow lighting pattern as that of (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been decided that the relief will be achieved from the state of (k5), the process shifts to the production of (v1).

[Direction mode in the fanning part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 101 to 109, an effect mode in the fanning part (SP second half reach B) will be described. The fanning part (SP second half reach B) is a part where the story of the confrontation between the ally characters Jam and Nana and the enemy character Crab robot is developed. In the fanning part (SP second half reach B), a story is unfolded in which Jam and Nana are big hits if the crab robot beats Boingo, and Jam and Nana are lost if they lose to the crab robot.

As shown in FIG. 101 (n1), in the fanning part where the SP second half reach B is executed, the title corresponding to the SP second half reach B with "Severe earthquake Robo Battle" is displayed. The title display shows the content of the production of the latter half of the SP to be executed from now on. Below the title display, the jackpot expectation for this reach is indicated by the number of stars. In addition, the display indicating the jackpot expectation degree may be displayed by another SP reach. In the state where the title display of (n1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (n2), an image of a confrontation between the friendly characters Jam and Nana (the character on the left end) and the enemy character Crab robot is displayed. As shown in (n2), the subtitle display "I will not lose!" Corresponding to the dialogue "I will not lose!" Of the two allies is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (n2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in white in response to two people emitting lines. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of the crab. Further, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (n2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP second half reach B is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (n3), an image of a crab attack in which a crab, which is an enemy character, shoots a beam is displayed. Further, in the state of the crab attack of (n3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white in response to the crab attack. After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n4), an image of Jam and Nana escaping from the crab beam is displayed. As shown in (n4), the subtitle display "Kya!" Corresponding to the dialogue "Kya!" Of the two allies is displayed on the screen where the two are running away. In the state of (n4) where two people escape, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the action of two people running and escaping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n5), an image is displayed in which Jam and Nana escape into a rocky depression in order to escape from the crab beam. In the state of the two-person jump of (n5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n6), an image in which the beam passes over the rocky area is displayed. In the state where the beam of (n6) is passing, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n7), an image in which Jam and Nana are relieved in the shadow of the rocky area is displayed. As shown in (n7), the subtitle display "hahaa" corresponding to the jam line "hahaa" is displayed on the screen where the two people are relieved. In the confrontation state of (n7), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan emitting a line. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n8), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (n8), the subtitle display "This number!" Corresponding to Jam-chan's line "This number!" Is displayed on the jam-up screen. Further, in the jam-up state of (n8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to the fact that the jam-chan is emitting a line. After that, as shown in (n9), an image of Jam attacking the crab by the technique called Delta Break is displayed. Further, in the state of the jam attack of (n9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to the jam-chan emitting the line "delta break".

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), an image in which the crab is damaged by the attack of Jam is displayed. Further, in the state of the crab attack of (n10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the crab emitting the line "Gununu". After that, as shown in (n11), an image of a confrontation between Jam-chan and Nana-chan and a crab is displayed. In the confrontation state of (n11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of the crab. After that, as shown in (n12), an image of a crab attack in which a crab, which is an enemy character, shoots a beam is displayed. Further, in the state of the crab attack of (n12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white in response to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (n13), an image of Jam and Nana escaping from the crab beam is displayed. As shown in (n13), the subtitle display "Kya!" Corresponding to the dialogue "Kya!" Of the two allies is displayed on the screen where the two are running away. In the state of (n13) where two people escape, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the action of two people running and escaping. After that, as shown in (n14), an image in which the beam approaches Jam-chan and Nana-chan is displayed. In the state of the beam of (n14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n15), an image is displayed in which Jam and Nana are damaged by the crab beam. Further, in the state where the two people (n15) are damaged, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the damage to the two people.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (n16), an image in which the damaged Jam and Nana stand up is displayed. As shown in (n16), the subtitle display "From now on!" Corresponding to the dialogue "From now on!" Of the two allies is displayed on the screen where the two people stand up. In the state where the two people stand up in (n16), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character. After that, as shown in (n17), Nana is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, in the state of (n17) Nana-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character. After that, as shown in (n18), a screen where Nana prays is displayed. Nana's prayer action is performed as a production that confuses the enemy. Further, in the state of Nana prayer (n18), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in response to the action of offering Nana-chan's prayer.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (n19), an image in which the crab is confused by the production of Nana-chan's prayer is displayed. Further, in the state of crab confusion (n19), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the crab confusion operation. Then, as shown in (n20), an image of the crab recovering from the confusion getting angry is displayed. In the state where the crab is angry (n20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the character of the crab. After that, as shown in (n21), an image in which the crab swings its arm and attacks is displayed. Further, in the state of the crab attack of (n21), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (n22), an image in which Nana is damaged by the crab's attack is displayed. Further, in the state of receiving Nana damage of (n22), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the damage of Nana. After that, as shown in (n23), an image operated by Jam-chan with the remote controller is displayed. As shown in (n23), the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" Corresponding to the line "Leave it to me!" Of the jam is displayed on the screen of the jam remote control operation. Further, in the state of the jam remote control operation of (n23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to the fact that the jam is emitting a line. After that, as shown in (n24), an image in which Jam tries to press a button on the remote controller is displayed. As shown in (n24), in the state of the jam remote control operation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the jam-chan operating the remote control.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (n25), the effect of the hand coming out of heaven is executed. As shown in (n25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white while the hand is out of the heavens. After that, as shown in (n26), an image of a hand extending from heaven going to catch a crab is displayed. As shown in (n26), in the state of going to catch the crab, the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white. After that, as shown in (n27), the scene before the decision of whether or not the crab and the hand are enlarged is displayed. In the scene before the winning / failing determination of (n27), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the winning / failing determination. It is easy to understand that it is a branching scene of the winning / failing decision because the scene before the winning / failing decision is muted. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit in the reach B in the latter half of the SP from the state of (n27), the production shifts to the production of (o1). If it has been decided that the state of (n27) will be lost in the reach B in the latter half of the SP, or that it will be a relief hit, the process shifts to the production of (p1).

[Direction mode in the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
The production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112. The hit epilogue part (SP second half reach B) is a part that informs that the story of Jam and Nana winning the crab robot is developed and controlled to the big hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 110 (o1), in the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, an image in which a hand extending from heaven catches a crab is displayed. Further, as shown in (o1), the subtitle display "done" corresponding to the crab line "done" is displayed on the screen where the crab is caught. Further, in the state of catching the crab of (o1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) in response to catching the crab. After that, as shown in (o2), an image in which the caught crab is installed as a signboard of the shop is displayed. Further, (o2) In the state of the store where the crab is a signboard, the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth) indicating that it has become a big hit. Further, in the state of (o2), the BGM for hitting is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (o3), a screen is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of the shop where the crab is a signboard. In addition, as shown in (o3), the subtitle display "Good signboard" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Good signboard" is displayed on the screen of the shop where the crab is the signboard. Further, in the state of the store where the crab of (o3) is a signboard, the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o4), the screen in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed is continued in front of the shop where the crab is the signboard. In addition, as shown in (o4), the subtitle display "Work hard" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "Work hard" is displayed on the screen of the shop where the crab is a signboard. Further, in the state of the store where the crab of (o4) is a signboard, the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth). After that, as shown in (o5), the image of the shop with the crab as a signboard is displayed as a graphic novel-style still image. In the state of the still image of (o5), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (o6), the design of "222" is enlarged in the design, and the design is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of displaying the pattern (o6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (o7), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than the state of (o6). In the state of displaying the pattern (o7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (o8), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (o7) and displayed in a normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) of (o8), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighting mode of rainbow lighting (smooth).

[Direction mode in the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
The production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 114. The lost epilogue part (SP second half reach B) is a part that informs that the story of Jam and Nana being defeated by the crab robot is unfolded and is not controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 113 (p1), in the lost epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, an image in which the hand extending from the heavens did not catch the crab is displayed. Further, in the state where the crab is not caught in (p1), the game effect lamp 9 has a white color darker than the white color of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) in response to the fact that the crab was not caught. Light. After that, as shown in (p2), an image of the crab walking sideways and escaping is displayed. In the state where the crab escapes in (p2), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a white color darker than the white color in (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1). After that, as shown in (p3), an image of Jam and Nana who escaped to the crab is displayed, which is disappointing. In addition, as shown in (p3), the subtitle display "Such" corresponding to the dialogue "Such" of the two allies is displayed on the unfortunate screen. Further, as shown in (p3), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a darker white than the white in (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1).

Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (p4), the screen is dimmed. In the state of the screen darkening of (p4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in (p5), the symbol of "232", which is a combination of lost symbols, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (p5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in the same background yellow lighting pattern as that of (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been decided that the relief will be achieved from the state of (p5), the process shifts to the production of (v1).

[Direction mode in the fanning part (SP final reach)]
The production mode in the fanning part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 132. The fanning part (SP final reach) is a part where the story of six ally characters, Yumemu-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, Maid A, Maid B, and AD, chasing the enemy character Baku Chu is unfolded. Is. In the fanning part (SP final reach), a story is unfolded that fuels a big hit if 6 people can catch Baku Chu, and a loss if 6 people can not catch Baku Chu. In addition, the fanning part (SP final reach) is the reach with the highest expectation of a big hit among all the reach.

As shown in FIG. 115 (r1), in the fanning part where the SP final reach is executed, the title corresponding to the SP final reach such as "Catch the Baku Chu with 6 people!" Is displayed. The title display shows the content of the SP final reach production that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display of (r1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (r2), the six ally characters AD, Maid A, Maid B, Nana, Jam, and Yumemu-chan and the enemy character Baku Chu face each other in the center of the screen. The image is displayed. On the screen where the characters are facing each other, the lines of 6 allies, "This is the end" are output. Further, in the confrontation state of (r2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in white corresponding to the six characters emitting the lines. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu. Further, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (r2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP final reach is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (r3), the line of Baku Chu "I'll run away again" is output on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (r3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the six characters. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in red in response to the fact that the explosion chew emits a line. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (r4), when AD is displayed, the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" Corresponding to the line "Leave it to me!" Is displayed. In the state of the AD display of (r4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange corresponding to the AD emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r5), when the maid A is displayed, the subtitle display "see" corresponding to the line "see" of the maid A is displayed. In the state of the maid A display of (r5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue corresponding to the maid A emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r6), when the maid B is displayed, the subtitle display "because I do my best" corresponding to the line "because I do my best" of the maid B is displayed. In the state of the maid B display of (r6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue color corresponding to the maid B emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (r7), when Nana-chan is displayed, the subtitle display “Catch me” corresponding to Nana-chan's line “Catch me” is displayed. In the state of Nana-chan display in (r7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink corresponding to Nana-chan emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r8), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Margin desho" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Margin desho" is displayed. In the state of the jam-chan display of (r8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to the jam-chan emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r9), when Yumemu-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Everyone goes!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Everyone goes!" Is displayed. In the state of (r9) Yumemu-chan display, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumemu-chan emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (r10), when the Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display "Anyone can take it" corresponding to the Baku Chu line "Anyone can take it" is displayed. In the state of the explosion chew display of (r10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the explosion chew emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r11), when the image of Maid A chasing the explosion chew is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait!" Corresponding to the line "Wait!" Of Maid A is displayed. In the jam chasing state of (r11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in response to the maid A emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r12), when the image of AD and Maid A chasing Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait and wait!" Corresponding to the lines of the two allies "Wait and wait!" Is displayed. In the state of chasing AD & Maid A in (r12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in orange corresponding to the character of AD emitting a line. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in blue corresponding to the character of the maid A emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (r13), when the image in which the Baku Chu escapes is displayed, the subtitle display "Catch?" Corresponding to the line "Catch!" Of the Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu "Tata Tata" are output as physical sounds. Further, in the state where the Baku Chu escapes in (r13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the Baku Chu escaping. After that, as shown in (r14), an image in which the Baku Chu escapes and is separated from the screen is displayed. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu "Tata Tata" are output as physical sounds. Further, in the state of (r14) escaping the explosion chew, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r15), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background of (r15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r16), when the image of Nana chasing the explosion chew is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait!" Corresponding to Nana's line "Wait!" Is displayed. .. In the state of chasing Nana in (r16), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in response to Nana's issuing a line. After that, as shown in (r17), when the image of Maid B and Nana chasing Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait and wait!" Corresponding to the lines of the two allies "Wait and wait!" Is displayed. In the state of chasing Maid B & Nana in (r17), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in Hawaiian blue color in response to the character of Maid B emitting a line. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in pink in response to Nana-chan's character emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r18), when the image in which the Baku Chu escapes is displayed, the subtitle display “Wow!” Corresponding to the dialogue “Wow!” Of the Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu "Tata Tata" are output as physical sounds. Further, in the state of (r18) escaping the explosive chew, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the escape of the explosive chew. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r19), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background of (r19), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r20), when the image of Yumemu-chan chasing Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Wait!" Is displayed. Will be done. In the state of chasing Yumemu (r20), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumemu-chan emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r21), when the image of Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan chasing Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait and wait!" Corresponding to the lines of the two allies "Wait and wait!" Is displayed. In the state of dream dream & jam chasing (r21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in purple in response to the character of Jam emitting a line. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in green in response to the character of Yumemu-chan emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r22), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background of (r22), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (r23), when the image in which the Baku Chu escapes is displayed, the subtitle display "Yabai!" Corresponding to the line "Yabai!" Of the Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu "Tata Tata" are output as physical sounds. Further, in the state where the Baku Chu escapes in (r23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the Baku Chu escaping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r24), in the scene where the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in orange corresponding to AD. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in the scene where the AD jumps. At this time, "Ah!" Is output as the AD dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r26), when the character of the maid A is up, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in blue corresponding to the maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), in the scene where the maid A jumps, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue. At this time, "To!" Is output as the dialogue sound of Maid A, but the subtitles are not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (r28), in the scene where the character of the maid B is up, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in the Hawaiian blue color corresponding to the maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), in the scene where the maid B performs the jumping motion, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue color. At this time, the same line "To!" As that of Maid A is output as the line sound of Maid B, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r30), in the scene where Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in pink corresponding to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r31), in the scene where Nana performs the jumping motion, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink. At this time, "Taya!" Is output as Nana-chan's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r32), when the character of Jam is up, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in purple corresponding to Jam. After that, as shown in (r33), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple when the jam-chan performs the jumping action. At this time, "Torya!" Is output as Jam-chan's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r34), in the scene where the character of Yumemu-chan is up, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in the scene where Yumemu-chan performs the jumping action. At this time, "Orya!" Is output as the dialogue sound of Yumemu-chan, but the subtitles are not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r36), an image in which the faces of the six characters are raised is displayed on the divided screen. As shown in (r36), when the image of 6 allies up is displayed, the subtitle display "This is the last!" Corresponding to the line "This is the last!" Of the 6 allies is displayed. Further, in the state of (r36) with 6 allies up, the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the fact that 6 people are emitting lines. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r37), the image of 6 allies up is continuously displayed. Further, in the state of (r37) with 6 allies up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r38), the explosion chew is displayed together with the background of the city. Further, in the state of the explosion chew display of (r38), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the character of the explosion chew. After that, as shown in (r39), the explosion chew is enlarged and displayed. In addition, as shown in (r39), when the image of Baku Chu Mondai is displayed, the subtitle display "Yabee !!!" corresponding to the line "Yabee !!!" of Baku Chu is displayed. To. Further, in the state of the explosion chew-up of (r39), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the explosion chew emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r40), the image showing the push button 31B and the time gauge are displayed together with the concentrated line on the image of the explosion chew-up. Further, in the state of the explosion chew-up + button display of (r40), the game effect lamp 9 is white and blinks three times. After that, when the player operates the button within the valid period of the button operation, three main characters of the pachinko gaming machine 1, Nana, Yumemu, and Jam, are cut in on the screen as shown in (r41). It will be displayed. The cut-in display is an effect in which another image is interrupted and displayed in the displayed image. In addition, the cut-in display can indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit with the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is green. Further, in the cut-in state of (r41), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red or green depending on the color of the cut-in display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r42), after the cut-in display is cleared, an image in which six people jump toward the explosion chew is displayed. Further, in the cut-in handling state of (r42), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when the screen is displayed with six allies. After that, as shown in (r44), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the screen on which the explosion chew is displayed is displayed. After that, as shown in (r45), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when six allies who are enlarged more than in (r43) are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (r46), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the explosive chew enlarged from that of (r44) is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), when 6 allies who are enlarged from the time of (r45) are displayed, the subtitle display "hunted down!" Corresponding to the line of the 6 allies "I cornered!" "!" Is displayed. Further, in the state of (r47) displaying 6 allies, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the fact that the 6 allies are emitting lines. After that, as shown in (r48), the display of Baku Chu and the display of 6 people are alternately displayed. In the state of (r48), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49), an image in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen is displayed. As shown in (r49), a sound corresponding to the operation promotion for the player to promote the operation is output in response to the trigger display gathering in the center. Further, in the state of (r49) toward the center of the trigger display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r50), an image in which the trigger display is gathered in the center of the screen is displayed as compared with (r49). As shown in (r50), a sound corresponding to the operation promotion for the player to promote the operation is output in response to the trigger display gathering in the center. Further, in the state of (r50) toward the center of the trigger display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r51), the image of Baku Chu is displayed as a still image 1. At this time, a promotion display for operating the trigger and a time gauge are displayed along with the characters "Close!" Overlaid on the image of Baku Chu. In the state where the closing display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion for the player to promote the operation is output. Further, in the state where the closing display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r52), the image of Baku Chu is displayed as a still image 2. At this time, a promotion display for operating the trigger and a time gauge are displayed along with the characters "Close!" Overlaid on the image of Baku Chu. The time gauge is smaller than that at (r51). In the state where the closing display (still image 2) of (r52) is displayed, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in (r53), the image of Baku Chu is displayed as a still image 3. At this time, a promotion display for operating the trigger and a time gauge are displayed along with the characters "Close!" Overlaid on the image of Baku Chu. The time gauge is smaller than that at (r52). In the state where the closing display (still image 3) of (r53) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the image of the explosion chew is displayed as a still image 4, which is a scene before the decision of success or failure. At this time, a promotion display for operating the trigger and a time gauge are displayed along with the characters "Close!" Overlaid on the image of Baku Chu. The time gauge is smaller than that at (r53). In the state where the closing display (still image 4) is displayed as the pre-decision scene of (r54), the sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit in the final reach of the SP from the state of (r54), the production shifts to the production of (s1). If it has been decided that the state of (r54) will be lost in the final reach of the SP, or that it will be a relief hit, the process shifts to the production of (u1).

[Direction mode in the hit epilogue part (SP final reach)]
The production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 136. The hit epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which it is notified that the story of six people catching the bomb chew will be developed and controlled to the big hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 133 (s1), in the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, as shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the start of the fall of the accessory. Will be done. This effect image has a more flashy production mode than the effect image when developing into the latter half of SP reach. In addition, the effect image makes it impossible to visually recognize the character of Baku Chu and the reduced decorative pattern of "2". Further, in the state of (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a rainbow color in accordance with the fall of the accessory.

After that, in the state of FIG. 133 (s2), the accessory further drops from the state of (s1). In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color as the accessory falls. After that, in the state of (s3), the character is further arranged so that the character "P" among the characters of the character is positioned up to the position where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" is displayed. Fall. In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a rainbow color. The effect of raising the accessory from the state of (s3) is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s4), the scene where Yumemu-chan caught the Baku Chu is displayed in the state after the character has risen. Further, as shown in (s4), the subtitle display "U, caught" corresponding to the line "U, caught" of Baku Chu is displayed. In the state of catching the Baku Chu of (s4), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth). Further, in the state of (s4), the BGM for hitting is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s5), an image in which six people are pleased to catch the Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, as shown in (s5), the subtitle display "Everyone, did it!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Everyone, did it!" Is displayed. In the state of catching the Baku Chu of (s5), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth). After that, as shown in (s6), an image in which the six people are pleased to catch the Baku Chu is displayed. Further, as shown in (s6), the subtitle display "Everyone, you did it!" Is continuously displayed. In the state of catching the Baku Chu of (s6), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7), an image in which the six people are pleased with the Baku Chu is displayed as a graphic novel-style still image. In the state of the still image of (s7), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth). After that, as shown in (s8), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (s8), the design of "222" is enlarged in the design, and the design is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of displaying the pattern in (s8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (s9), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (s8). In the state of displaying the pattern of (s9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (s9) and displayed in a normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) of (s10), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighting mode of rainbow lighting (smooth).

[Direction mode in the lost epilogue part (SP final reach)]
The production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 138. The lost epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part that informs that the story that 6 people could not catch the bomb chew is unfolded and is not controlled to the big hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 137 (u1), in the lost epilogue part of the SP final reach, an image in which the Baku Chu escapes is displayed. Further, in the state of (u1) escaping the explosion chew, the game effect lamp 9 has a white color darker than the white color of (tr54) indicating the lighting mode of (r54) in response to the fact that the explosion chew was not caught. Light. After that, as shown in (u2), an image is displayed, which is disappointing for the six people who could not catch the Baku Chu because the Baku Chu escaped far away. Further, as shown in (u2), the subtitle display "Sorry" corresponding to the line "Sorry" of Baku Chu is displayed on the unfortunate screen. As shown in (u2), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a white color darker than the white color in (tu1) indicating the lighting mode of (u1).

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3), the screen is darkened. In the state of the screen darkening of (u3), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (u4), the symbol of "232", which is a combination of lost symbols, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (u4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in the same background yellow lighting pattern as that of (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been decided that the relief will be achieved from the state of (u4), the process shifts to the production of (v1).

[Direction mode in the relief hit part]
With reference to FIGS. 139 to 140, an effect mode in the relief hitting part will be described. The relief hit part is a part where the story by the relief production, which becomes a big hit after the story of the loss is developed, is developed. In the relief hit part, a premium character corresponding to the relief (revival) called Drum-kun, which did not appear in other reach, will appear.

As shown in FIG. 139 (v1), in the relief hit part, a relief effect in which a character named Drum-kun is displayed on the screen is executed. By displaying Mr. Drum, the player can recognize that it is a revival that pretends to be a loss. In the relief effect of (v1), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a brighter red color than (td4, tg5, tp5, tu4). After that, as shown in (v3), the screen whites out. In the whiteout of (v2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (v3), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (v3), the design of "222" is enlarged in the design, and the design is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of displaying the pattern of (v3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (v4), the symbol combination “222” is displayed in a smaller size than the state of (v3). In the state of displaying the pattern of (v4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (v5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (v4) and displayed in a normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) of (v5), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighting mode of rainbow lighting (smooth).

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbol or even-numbered symbol derived after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 141 to 156, an effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation) will be described. In FIGS. 141 to 156, a series of production flows from the detailed production of the design to the fanning effect to the button operation in the re-lottery effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 141 (A1), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (A1), in the state of two symbol enlargement, the symbol of "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of the two symbols enlarged in (A1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (A2), the symbol combination "222" is enlarged and displayed from the state of (A1). In the state of the two symbols enlarged in (A2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (A3), the symbol combination "222" is reduced and displayed. In the state of the two symbols reduced in (A3), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in white and blinks.

After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (A4), the symbol combination “222” is further reduced and displayed. In the state of the two symbols reduced in (A4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (A5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in a normal size. In the state of the two symbols normal size of (A5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. After that, as shown in (A6), the background is switched and the re-lottery effect is started. In the state of (A6), the symbol combination "222" has a shaking period in which it swings up and down. In (A6), a screen in which the symbol is raised upward from the normal position is displayed. In the state of the two symbols shaking in (A6), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off.

Here, from the state of (A5) to the state of (A6), the period in which the symbol is shaken is omitted. Specifically, when the design is the normal size, the design is shaking. Then, after reaching the normal size, the pattern shaking of the re-lottery part continues. At this time, at the timing related to the completion of the symbol output (for example, the timing immediately before the normal size, the timing after the normal size, the timing to start the symbol shaking, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 is set. It switches from blinking white to smooth lighting in rainbow color. As a result, it is possible to smoothly print out the symbol from the symbol to the re-lottery effect, shift to a smooth shaking period, and bless the pattern by emitting light from the screen and the lamp. After that, during the symbol shaking period of FIG. 143 (A7), a screen in which the symbol is lowered from the normal position is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 is turned off in the state of the two symbols shaking in (A7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (A8), the screen in which the symbol is displayed in the center is displayed during the symbol shaking period. As shown in (A8), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off in the state of the two symbols shaking. After that, as shown in (A9), the two symbols are displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (A8) during the period of the start of movement by the re-lottery effect. In the state of the two symbols reduced in (A9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (A10), two symbols are further reduced and displayed from the state of (A9). In the state of the two symbols reduced in (A10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, from FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 148 (A24), the numbers used as the decorative symbols fluctuate at high speed, so that the replacement display is performed. When the replacement display is performed, the decorative symbols that have been temporarily stopped are sequentially replaced with other symbols, so that the decorative symbols are switched one after another. For example, as shown in (A11), two symbols are displayed faintly during high-speed fluctuation. In the fluctuating state of (A11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in (A12), three symbols are clearly displayed during high-speed fluctuation. In the state of the three symbols (A12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, from FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbol, etc. are displayed while changing at high speed. The clear display is repeated. From FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, in FIG. 148 (A24), in which the high-speed fluctuation starting from the two symbols is cycled once and the two symbols are clearly displayed again, the button image and the time gauge are slightly displayed below the two symbols. After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (A25), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed when the two symbols are faintly displayed during the high-speed fluctuation. After that, from FIG. 149 (A26) to FIG. 156 (A46), 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, and so on. , The design is changed at high speed, and the faint display and the clear display are repeated. Also, the time gauge gradually decreases over time. From FIG. 148 (A24) to FIG. 156 (A46), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, when it is determined that the odd-numbered symbol is derived when the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), the process shifts to the effect of (B1). If it is determined that an even-numbered symbol is derived when the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), the process shifts to the effect of (C1).

[Direction mode in the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbol derivation after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 157 to 160, an effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol derivation after button operation) will be described. FIGS. 157 to 160 describe a flow of a series of effects from the operation of the button operation to the derivation of the odd-numbered symbols in the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 157 (B1), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “333” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (B1), in the state where the three symbols are enlarged, the background becomes bright and the symbol of "333" is enlarged, and the symbols are emphasized by the concentrated lines. In the state of the three symbols enlarged in (B1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (B2), the symbol combination "333" is enlarged and displayed from the state of (B1). In the state of the three symbols enlarged in (B2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (B3), the symbol combination "333" is reduced and displayed. In the state of the three symbols reduced in (B3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (B4), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of the three symbols reduced in (B4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (B5), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed in a normal size. In the state of the three symbols normal size of (B5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B6), the symbol combination "333" has a shaking period in which it swings up and down. In (B6), a screen in which the symbol is raised upward from the normal position is displayed. In the state of the three symbols shaking in (B6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a rainbow color. After that, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 159 (B7). Even in the normal background of (B7), the pattern shaking period continues. In the normal background shaking state of (B7), a screen in which the symbol is lowered from the normal position is displayed. In the normal background shaking state of (B7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a rainbow color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the decorative symbol of "333" is fixedly stopped. Further, in the symbol confirmation period of (B8), the small symbol is also stopped at "333". During the symbol determination period of (B8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B9), the symbol determination period continues. During the symbol determination period of (B9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighting mode of blinking rainbow colors. After that, in the fanfare period of FIG. 160 (D1), the same screen as in the state of (B9) is displayed. However, the aspect of the game effect lamp 9 is to turn off the lights corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (D2), the screen is switched to the screen in which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yumemu-chan are displayed behind the mode of the game effect lamp 9. Further, in the mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time, the lighting of the fanfare mode is maintained.

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (even-numbered symbol derivation after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 161 to 164, an effect mode in the re-lottery part (even-numbered symbol derivation after button operation) will be described. FIGS. 161 to 164 describe a flow of a series of effects from the operation of the button operation to the derivation of even-numbered symbols in the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 161 (C1), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (C1), in the state where the two symbols are enlarged, the background becomes bright and the symbol of "222" is enlarged, and the symbols are emphasized by the concentrated lines. In the state of the two symbols enlarged in (C1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (C2), the symbol combination "222" is enlarged and displayed from the state of (C1). In the state of the two symbols enlarged in (C2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (C3), the symbol combination "222" is reduced and displayed. In the state of the two symbols reduced in (C3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (C4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of the two symbols reduced in (C4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (C5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in a normal size. In the state of the two symbols normal size of (C5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. After that, as shown in (C6), the background returns to the state of (A46), and the symbol combination "222" becomes a shaking period in which the symbol combination "222" swings up and down. In (C6), a screen in which the symbol is raised upward from the normal position is displayed. In the state of the two symbols shaking in (C6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. After that, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 163 (C7). Even in the normal background of (C7), the pattern shaking period continues. In the normal background shaking state of (C7), a screen in which the symbol is lowered from the normal position is displayed. In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 163 (C8), the decorative symbol of "222" is fixedly stopped. Further, in the symbol confirmation period of (C8), the small symbol is also stopped at "222". During the symbol determination period of (C8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. After that, as shown in (C9), the symbol determination period continues. During the symbol determination period of (C9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the smooth lighting of the rainbow color. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 164 (E1), the same screen as in the state of (C9) is displayed. However, the aspect of the game effect lamp 9 is to turn off the lights corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (E2), the screen is switched to the screen in which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yumemu-chan are displayed behind the mode of the game effect lamp 9. Further, in the mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time, the lighting of the fanfare mode is maintained.

<Explanation of characteristic parts in the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, the featured portion, the modified example, and the like in the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 5)
The shutter described above is an image that makes the image of the effect executed behind by making it invisible by closing it, and makes the image of the effect executed by opening after closing visible. In addition, the shutter is executed at the timing related to the fanning part, that is, before the start of the fanning part. When the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is lowered as the visible area of the effect is narrowed, and when the shutter is opened, the screen brightness is reduced as the visible area of the effect is widened. Will be higher. According to this, the flow of the production can be shown favorably by giving reality when the shutter is closed and opened. In addition, although the image of the effect executed behind is made invisible or visible using the image of the shutter, the image may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect is executed with the accessory. You may.

(Start 6)
Further, the shutter described above is in a mode of closing from the upper and lower edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to preferably show an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Further, the shutter may be closed from both ends of the screen toward the center like a sliding door. Further, the shutter may be closed from the upper end of the screen toward the lower end of the screen.

(Start 7)
Further, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is represented in black. According to this, it is possible to blur the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter just before the shutter is completely closed as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), and to eliminate the sense of incongruity. .. Similarly, when the shutter as shown in FIG. 60 (a16) starts to open, the discomfort can be eliminated.

(Start 8)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, after the shutter is opened, the reach of the first half of the SP is started. Until the shutter is fully opened, the effect of reaching the first half of the SP is not started and the screen brightness gradually increases, and after the shutter is released, the effect of the first half of the SP progresses. According to this, since the effect of the reach in the first half of the SP is an effect that the player wants to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction caused by the effect being executed before the shutter is opened.

(Start 10)
Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is lowered before the shutter closing is started, and the shutter is closed at the timing when the shutter is completely closed. .. Here, if the brightness of the screen is lowered at the timing when the shutter is closed, the speed of darkening of the screen may become too fast. Therefore, by starting to reduce the screen brightness in advance, it is possible to appropriately show a series of effects by making the speed of screen darkening appropriate.

(Start 12)
Further, until the shutter is released, the player does not know which SP first half reach will be started. According to this, it is possible to have an expectation as to which effect will be executed.

(Start 13)
It should be noted that the above-mentioned effect by the shutter may be executed at a timing other than the timing of developing in the first half of the SP. For example, the timing may be from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-ream. In addition, when the shutter is closed and then released, an icon image (for example, a green hold image) suggesting a change in the active hold, which is a hold display of the change, is displayed, and the active hold corresponds to the icon image. It may change (for example, change from blue to green). Further, the effect by the shutter may be executed at the timing of developing from the reach of the first half of the SP to the reach of the second half of the SP. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the production by the shutter.

(Start 15)
Further, in addition to the above-mentioned pattern in which the shutter closes and automatically opens, a pattern in which a button image is displayed after the shutter closes and the shutter is released by executing a button operation may be provided. According to this, since a plurality of types of effects by the shutter are provided, the interest of the effects by the shutter is improved.

(Fan 1)
In addition, the above-mentioned fanning part that fanned the success or failure was updated by the development in which the ally character and the enemy character alternately compete with each other (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B, etc.). There is a scene where a ally character is damaged in the production in such a fanning part. Further, in the production of such a fanning part, the image display switching interval is earlier than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switchings is also large. According to this, it is possible to make the fanning part look more suitable by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part.

(Fan 2)
Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b5) described above, in the fanning part, the dialogue of the ally character was generated at the very beginning, and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in the fanning part.

(Fan 3)
The subtitle display of the ally character displayed first may be set so as to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in another scene of the fanning part. According to this, the ally character can be firmly recognized.

(Fan 4)
Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) described above, there is a scene in which the subtitles are not displayed when the ally character emits a line. According to this, it is possible to preferably show the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first, and more preferably show the screen display than adding the subtitle display to all the lines.

(Fan 5)
Further, in the above-mentioned fanning part, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first fanning part executed at the timing of the first half, and SP second half reach A as the second fanning part executed at the latter half timing. , SP second half reach B, SP final reach. Then, there are scenes in which the ally character plays an active part in both the first fanning part and the second fanning part. In addition, in any of the fanning parts, the dialogue of the ally character was generated at the very beginning, and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized regardless of the fanning part.

(Fan 6)
In addition, in the above-mentioned fanning part, Yumemu-chan's character plays an active part in the fanning part corresponding to the SP first half reach B, and Jam-chan and Nana-chan's characters play an active part in the fanning part corresponding to the SP second half reach B. There was a scene where he was active. Then, in the first half of the SP reach B, a line was generated by Yume-chan, an ally character who was active first, and the subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. Further, in the second half of the SP reach B, a line was generated by the first active ally characters Jam and Nana, and the subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in any of the fanning parts. The number of active characters may be one or two or more. In addition, the characters that are active in the first half of the fanning part and the second half of the fanning part may be the same.

(Fan 11)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 (b5) and 63 (b6) described above, there is a scene in which each character emits a line under the situation where the ally character and the enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, the subtitle display for the dialogue has a certain size and is displayed at a certain display position. According to this, it is possible to reduce the chance that a bug or the like gets angry by not changing the display mode of the dialogue for each character.

(Fan cut-in 2)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 127 (r39) to 128 (r42), the subtitle display is displayed before the promotion display of the button image is displayed at the timing when the cut-in display is executed. According to this, since the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen by paying attention to the subtitle display, it is possible not to miss the button image, and the cut-in display can be appropriately executed. Can be done.

(Fan cut-in 3)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 128 (r41) to 130 (r47) described above, the design is such that there is no dialogue during a predetermined period after the cut-in display is separated. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period without dialogue, a dialogue is issued, and a subtitle is displayed for the dialogue. According to this, the player can concentrate on the production in the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be obtained.

(Win / Fail 1)
Further, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the scene of the decision of success or failure was between the fanning part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene of winning / failing, the player is notified whether or not it is a big hit after the trigger is operated as an operating means. In addition, in the scene of winning or failing, the accessory was movable after the trigger operation in the case of a big hit. According to this, the interest of the production is improved by setting a suitable scene for determining whether or not the result is made by using the operating means.

(Win / Fail 2)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54), the subtitles are displayed by the ally character before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and then the screen corresponding to the operating means is displayed. The effect that was being executed becomes invisible. Then, the effect executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, while giving an impact by displaying the introduction of the operating means on the entire screen, it is possible to display the effect that was firmly executed at the timing when the operating means can be operated, and to show the progress of the effect appropriately. ..

(Win / Fail 3)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51), the introduction images (images of (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation means are being displayed. The production is in progress. According to this, by advancing the effect behind the scenes, it is possible to pay attention to the image (image of (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to pay attention to the development of the effect.

(Win / Fail 4)
Further, in FIGS. 132 (r51) to 132 (r54) described above, when the trigger image as the promotion display was displayed, the tail was slightly moved at each image change in the image of the explosion chew. In this way, the effect may be advanced while the promotion display is displayed. Here, as the progress of the production, the scene may be switched or the character may be moved instead of the tail moving. According to this, it is possible to pay attention to the development of the effect during the promotion display.

(Win / Fail 5)
In addition, the effect that progresses while the promotion display is displayed is slower than the effect that was executed before the promotion display was displayed. According to this, the player can pay attention to the promotion display for operating the operating means, and the promotion display and the progress of the production can be balanced. It should be noted that the effect progressing during the display of the promotion display may be slower than the effect progressing during the display of the introduced image. According to this, it is possible to make a difference in the progress speed of the effect between the display of the promotion display and the display of the introduced image.

(Win / Fail 6)
Further, it is preferable to apply an echo to the dialogue before the introduction image as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) is displayed. According to this, the player can be excited before the introductory image is displayed.

(Win 7)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 131 (r49), the introduced image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introduced image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introduced image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

(Win / Fail 14)
Further, from FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39) described above, the image in which the two characters Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed, and at the timing of (i39), 1 The image is displayed still for a predetermined period. After that, if it is a big hit, the video of the hit epilogue part will be played, and if it is lost, the video of the lost epilogue part will be played. During the period in which one image is stationary and displayed for a predetermined period, one image can be diverted and used, so that it is possible to preferably agitate the scene of winning or failing while reducing the data capacity. In the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 95 (i36) to 96 (i39), many images (for example, 10 images) are displayed. You may use it.

(Win / Fail 16)
Further, from FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54) described above, there is a display period of the introduced image in which the image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which the promotion display for operating the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the promotion display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make the character appear to be moving. After that, by operating the trigger in the scene of the branch of the hit / fail decision, the video of the hit epilogue part is played if it is a big hit, and the video of the lost epilogue part is played if it is lost. All of these periods are periods in which the image is dynamically displayed as if it were moving. According to this, a series of effects can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of effects can be obtained.

(Win / Fail 18)
Further, the hit epilogue part and the lost epilogue part after the scene of the winning / failing determination shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to 136 (s10) and 137 (u1) to 138 (u4) will be described. In the hit epilogue part, the video corresponding to the hit epilogue part is played after the production of the character movement. Further, in the lost epilogue part, the screen goes dark after the effect corresponding to the lost epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since it is a flow of switching a plurality of images after the scene of determining whether or not to win, it is possible to make a suitable flow of production.

(Epilogue 1)
The above-mentioned hit epilogue part is a part that does not shift at the time of loss, and there is a scene in which the enemy character is disadvantageous and a scene in which the ally character is advantageous. Further, in the hit epilogue part, the number of switching of the image display in the production is smaller than that in the fanning part. According to this, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect in each part, and it is possible to appropriately show the flow of a series of effects.

(Epilog 4)
As shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not added to the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character is damaged in the fanning part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110 (o1), subtitles are added to the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character in the hit epilogue part is damaged (the scene of catching a crab). According to this, the subtitle display that was not displayed in the fanning part is displayed in the hit epilogue part, so that the feeling of blessing can be emphasized.

(Epilogue 6)
As shown in FIGS. 134 (s5) to 134 (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the hit epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the fan part. According to this, by displaying the subtitle display in the final hit epilogue part for a long period of time, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big hit and the blessing can be emphasized. When displaying the subtitle display, the one with a large number of characters may be displayed longer than the case with a small number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) is displayed in the hit epilogue part and the fanning part, the subtitle display period is longer in the hit epilogue part. It should be designed as follows.

(Epilogue 15)
As shown in FIGS. 134 (s6) to 135 (s8) described above, the final subtitle display for the final dialogue in the hit epilogue part is designed to be erased before the patterning effect is executed. .. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being covered with the decorative pattern and to be misunderstood as a message in the effect of displaying the pattern. Therefore, the production in the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably.

(Epilogue 17)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, at the timing when the effect of displaying the pattern is completed and the player can recognize the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern and the image of the character or the like displayed as the background become a still image. There is. According to this, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decorative pattern is a moving image.

(Epilogue 18)
As shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the image flowing in the hit epilogue part becomes a still image at the timing before the effect of displaying the pattern is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the symbol from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of the symbol output.

(Epilogue 19)
As shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the still image displayed in the hit epilogue part has a special aspect of a graphic novel style. According to this, by adding an effect of a special aspect to the still image, it is possible to make a suitable hit epilogue part by emphasizing that the image is still and suggesting that the scene has been switched.

(Epilogue 21)
It is desirable that the subtitle display before the patterning shown in FIG. 134 (s6) described above does not have a fade effect that gradually erases the display. Here, for the subtitle display displayed at other timings, a fade effect may be added to gradually turn off the display. According to this, except for the final subtitle display, it is possible to switch effectively by adding a fade effect, and by instantly erasing the final subtitle display, the final subtitle display is covered with the decorative pattern. It is possible to prevent it from being misunderstood as a message in the production of the design. Therefore, the production in the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably.

(Epilogue 22)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative design and the small design are displayed at the time of producing the design. Then, the effect image by the concentrated line is added to the decorative symbol, but the effect image is not added to the small symbol. Further, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the front side. According to this, it is possible to recognize that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by the small symbol while enhancing the effect of the effect image, and it is possible to make it a suitable hit epilogue part.

(Epilogue 23)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative design and the small design are displayed at the time of producing the design. Here, the movements of the decorative symbol and the small symbol may be synchronized at the timing when the decorative symbol is finished. Specifically, during the symbol shaking period in which the decorative symbol has been finished and the symbol is swaying up and down, the small symbol may also be swayed up and down in the same motion as the decorative symbol. According to this, by matching the movements of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to appropriately show the flow of the production in the hit epilogue part.

(Epilogue 24)
As shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol are displayed at the time of producing the symbol in the re-lottery part. Then, the effect image by the concentrated line is added to the decorative symbol, but the effect image is not added to the small symbol. Further, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the front side. According to this, it is possible to recognize that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by the small symbol while enhancing the effect of the effect image.

(Epilogue 25)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol may be displayed in a state where the symbols are once aligned at the time of the effect of displaying the symbols. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol may be changed again. According to this, it is possible to synchronize the decorative pattern and the small pattern to obtain a suitable display.

(Re-lottery production 3)
As shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the effect of displaying the symbol in the hit epilogue part, the decorative symbol is shaken and displayed, and the effect image by the concentrated line is added. Even when switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image by the concentrated line is still added. Further, the game effect lamp 9 switches from the smooth rainbow lighting to the extinguishing. In other words, from the design to the re-lottery effect, the design is such that the pattern shaking and the mode of the effect continue, and the background and the lamp are switched. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery effect started.

(Re-lottery production 6)
As shown in the flow shown in FIGS. 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery effect, the symbol feed is executed by the decorative symbol of the reduced size, and the button is pressed. Operation promotion display is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, the effect of displaying the symbol in an enlarged manner is executed. That is, the decorative symbol that is finally notified from the moment when the symbol is put out is enlarged and displayed. According to this, since it is a symbol that is finally notified from the beginning of expansion, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final notification symbol is.

(Re-lottery production 16)
The above-mentioned symbolizing in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the symbolizing in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) are executed using substantially the same image. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern output by the “2” symbol and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, since the images of the symbols can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the probabilistic symbols. In addition, the image of the pattern appearance portion including the background may be exactly the same.

(Re-lottery production 17)
In the above-mentioned effect of displaying the symbol, a series of effects of enlarging the symbol once and then setting the normal size at the center of the screen are executed. According to this, it is possible to preferably show a series of patterning effects by enlarging and reducing the pattern.

(Re-lottery production 18)
In the above-mentioned effect of patterning, common patterning data may be used for the data of the patterning effect in the hit epilogue part and the data of the patterning effect in the re-lottery effect. Then, a series of patterning effects may be executed by using the common patterning data and the combination of a plurality of decorative patterns. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data capacity while making the effect of patterning appear suitable. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used for the data of the designing effect in the hit epilogue part and the data of the designing effect in the re-lottery effect.

<Detailed explanation of the production mode>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 to 191, the feature portions and modification examples that should be particularly mentioned will be described in detail with respect to the above-mentioned effect mode.

[About fanning 12, 13, 15]
In FIG. 165, the characteristic portions in the fanning part will be described by numbering them.

(Detailed explanatory view of parts (b11) to (b13))
FIG. 165 is a detailed explanatory view of the (b11) to (b13) portions of the SP first half reach A described above. As shown in FIG. 165 (b11), the relationship between Yumemu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is that Yumemu-chan is on the left side and Bakuchu is on the right side in the left-right direction. According to this character arrangement, the left frame lamp will be lit green corresponding to Yumemu-chan, and the right frame lamp will be lit red corresponding to Baku Chu. In addition, in the state of (b11), Yumemu-chan's line "Wait" is output as the line sound, Yumemu-chan's footstep "Zazzazza" is output as the physical sound, and Baku Chu's footstep "Zazzazza" is output as the physical sound. "Tatata Tat" is output.

Further, as shown in (b11), the relationship between Yumemu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is the relationship of Bakuchu in the front and Yumemu-chan in the rear in the front-back direction. The positional relationship seen by the player is that Baku Chu is near and Yumemu-chan is far away. On the other hand, the volume relationship is as follows: Yumemu-chan's dialogue sound of "Wait"> Baku Chu's footsteps "Tatatatta"> Yumemu-chan's footsteps "Zazzazza". In this way, the volume data is set so that the dialogue sound of the distant Yumemu-chan is louder than the footsteps of the near Baku Chu.

In FIG. 165 (b12), the relationship between Yumemu-chan and Baku Chu on the screen is the same as in the state of (b11) in both the left-right direction and the front-back direction. In (b12), the dialogue sound is not output, but the footsteps of Yumemu-chan as a physical sound "Zazzazza" and the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tatatatta" are output. The relationship between the volume is "Baku Chu's footsteps" Tatatatta "> Yumemu-chan's footsteps" Zazzazza ". In this way, when the dialogue sound is not output, the volume data is set so that the footsteps of the near Baku Chu are louder than the footsteps of the distant Yumemu-chan so as to match the context on the screen.

In FIG. 165 (b13), the relationship between Yumemu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is that Yumemu-chan is on the left side and Bakuchu is on the right side in the left-right direction. In the state of (b13), the dialogue of Baku Chu is output as the dialogue sound, "Catch Monka!", And the footstep of Yumemu-chan as the physical sound "Zazzazza" is output, and the footstep of Baku Chu as the physical sound. "Tatata Tat" is output. Further, as shown in (b13), the relationship between Yumemu-chan and Baku Chu on the screen is the relationship of Yumemu-chan in the front and Baku Chu in the rear in the front-back direction. The positional relationship seen by the player is that Yumemu-chan is near and Baku Chu is far away. On the other hand, the relationship of volume is the relationship of the dialogue sound of Baku Chu of "Catch Monka!"> The footsteps of Yumemu-chan "Zazzazza"> The footsteps of Baku Chu "Tatatatta". In this way, the volume data is set so that the dialogue sound of the distant Baku Chu is louder than the footsteps of the near Yumemu-chan.

(Fan 12)
In the fanning part, there is a scene where the SP reach BGM is output and the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also referred to as the operation sound) are output at the timing of overlapping. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the overlapping timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume when it is output from the speakers 8L and 8R than the physical sound. According to this, while the physical sound is output as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production is given to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to make the production in the fanning part look better.

(Fan 13)
Here, a work process for actually making various effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a video for each production corresponding to a fluctuation time such as SP reach is created. Along with this image, BGM, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, dialogue sounds, and other production sounds are added one by one with dedicated software. The finished image and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is further added. In such a series of work processes, rather than outputting the sound with reality while keeping the actual sense of distance on the image, the sound is output ignoring the actual sense of distance that is easily transmitted to the player by discarding the reality. Sound data is set as follows. Thereby, a series of effects can be preferably shown.

(Fan 15)
In addition, when the dialogue sound of a character with a distant sense of distance from the player and the physical sound with a close sense of distance from the player overlap, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound sounds louder than the physical sound. Has been done. As a result, the sound that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily transmitted to the player by discarding the reality is output, so that the content of the production can be easily transmitted to the player.

[About fanning 14 and 16]
In FIGS. 166 and 167, the characteristic portions in the fanning part will be described by numbering.

(Explanation of volume level)
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. As shown in FIG. 166 (A), among the sounds output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the relationship between the dialogue sound, the physical sound (footstep sound), and the volume level in the SP reach BGM will be described. The output volume level has a relationship of dialogue sound> physical sound (footstep sound)> SP reach BGM. Further, when these three sounds overlap, the way of outputting the sound is different between the case of the serif sound with subtitles and the case of the serif sound without subtitles.

As shown in FIG. 166 (B), in the case of a dialogue sound with subtitles, the volume of the SP reach BGM is output at the timing when the dialogue sound (with subtitles), the physical sound, and the SP reach BGM overlap. It is controlled to reduce the level and output. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166 (C), in the case of the dialogue sound without subtitles, when the dialogue sound (without subtitles), the physical sound and the BGM of SP reach are output at the overlapping timing, the dialogue sound> It is controlled to output without changing any volume level while maintaining the relationship of physical sound (footstep)> SP reach BGM.

(Fan 14)
In this way, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so as to be heard louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), the SP reach BGM is adjusted to be small according to the output period of the dialogue sound. By doing so, it is possible to easily convey the content of the production to the player while giving reality.

(Fan 16)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 166 (B) and 166 (C), the dialogue sound has subtitles depending on whether the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound has subtitles or the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound has no subtitles. The case is adjusted so that it sounds louder by lowering the volume of the SP reach BGM. The dialogue sound with subtitles is more related to the content of SP reach than the dialogue sound without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the production by outputting a large amount of the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

(Explanation of volume level)
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. FIG. 167 describes a method of effectively outputting the volume by a method different from that of FIG. 166. In FIG. 167 and FIG. 166, the relationship between the output volume levels is the same as dialogue sound> physical sound (footstep)> SP reach BGM. However, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted to be louder than the physical sound.

(Fan 16)
As shown in FIGS. 167 (B) and 167 (C), when the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound has subtitles and when the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound has no subtitles, the dialogue sound has subtitles. Only one is adjusted to increase the volume. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the production by outputting a large amount of dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of SP reach.

[About fanning 7 and 8]
In FIGS. 168 to 170, the characteristic portions in the fanning part will be described by numbering.

(Detailed explanatory view of parts (r24) to (r27))
FIG. 168 is a detailed explanatory view of the (r24) to (r27) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r24), when the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in orange corresponding to AD. After that, as shown in (r25), in the scene where the AD jumps, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange. At this time, "Ah!" Is output as the AD dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r25'), the game effect lamp 9 is white and blinks three times in the scene where the AD is handled from the screen.

After that, as shown in (r26), when the character of the maid A is up, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in blue corresponding to the maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), in the scene where the maid A jumps, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue. At this time, "To!" Is output as the dialogue sound of Maid A, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r27'), the game effect lamp 9 is white and blinks three times in the scene where the maid A is separated from the screen.

(Detailed explanatory view of parts (r28) to (r31))
FIG. 169 is a detailed explanatory view of the (r28) to (r31) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r28), when the character of the maid B is up, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in the Hawaiian blue color corresponding to the maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), in the scene where the maid B performs the jumping motion, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue color. At this time, the same line "To!" As that of Maid A is output as the line sound of Maid B, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r29'), in the scene where the maid B is separated from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 is white and blinks three times.

After that, as shown in (r30), in the scene where Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in pink corresponding to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in (r31), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink when Nana executes the jumping action. At this time, "Taya!" Is output as Nana-chan's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r31'), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in the scene where Nana handles from the screen.

(Detailed explanatory view of parts (r32) to (r35))
FIG. 170 is a detailed explanatory view of the (r32) to (r35) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r32), when the character of Jam is up, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in purple corresponding to Jam. After that, as shown in (r32), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple when the jam-chan performs the jumping action. At this time, "Torya!" Is output as Jam-chan's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r32'), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times when Jam is handling from the screen.

After that, as shown in (r34), in the scene where Yumemu-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in the scene where Yumemu-chan performs the jumping action. At this time, "Orya!" Is output as the dialogue sound of Yumemu-chan, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r35'), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in the scene where Yume-chan is handling from the screen.

Here, in a scene such as r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35, the output line is a word that seems to be enthusiastic. And in these particular scenes, scene switching is faster than in other scenes. Also, in these particular scenes, subtitles are not directly related to story development compared to scenes with other subtitles. For these reasons, the subtitle display corresponding to the dialogue is not attached.

(Fan 7)
As shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which the character emits lines but does not have subtitles in the fanning part (for example, scenes of r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such a specific scene, the luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is designated so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. By doing so, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. As a result, the effect corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the fanning part can be appropriately shown to the player.

(Fan 8)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in a scene in which a character appears (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), a color other than the color corresponding to the corresponding character in the preceding scene is used. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled to be turned on. Specifically, in front of the scene of (r24), the game effect lamp 9 is lit / blinked in yellow of (r22) or red of (r23), and then the game effect lamp 9 is in orange corresponding to the AD character. It will be a lighting scenario. Further, in front of the scene of (r26), the game effect lamp 9 is lit / blinked in orange of (r25) or white of (r25'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is lit in blue corresponding to the character of maid A. It becomes a scenario to do. Also, in front of the scene of (r28), the game effect lamp 9 is lit / blinked in blue of (r27) or white of (r27'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is in Hawaiian blue color corresponding to the character of Maid B. It will be a lighting scenario. Also, in front of the scene of (r30), the game effect lamp 9 is lit / blinked in Hawaiian blue color of (r29) or white of (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is pink corresponding to Nana's character. Is a scenario that lights up. Also, in front of the scene of (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up / blinks in pink of (r31) or white of (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. It becomes a scenario to do. Also, in front of the scene of (r34), a scenario in which the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character after the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) or white (r33'). It becomes. In this way, after the control is performed to light the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the corresponding character before the character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the color corresponding to the character. Control is done. Therefore, it is possible to express to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the displayed character changes and which character the changed character is, and it can be a suitable fanning part.

[About Starts 1 to 4]
The characteristic portions of FIGS. 171 to 172 will be described by numbering them.

(Detailed explanatory view of the accessory operation in (b18) to (i1))
FIG. 171 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory operation in (b18) to (i1). In the scene before the winning / failing determination shown in (b18), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting mode. After that, when developing into the reach of the latter half of the SP, the movable body 32 as an accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls while tilting diagonally from the upper part of the screen toward the front of the screen. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the start of the fall of the accessory. Due to the effect image, Yumemu-chan's character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern cannot be seen. Further, in the state of (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls.

After that, in the state of (h2), the character is further arranged so that the character "P" among the characters of the character is positioned up to the position where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" is displayed. Fall. In the state of (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Further, as a sound effect, a sound corresponding to the character corresponding to the fall of the character is output. After that, in the state of (h3), the position of the accessory is maintained at the drop position in the state of (h2). In the state of (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, as shown in (h4), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advance position to the evacuation position). In the state of (h4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. When the state (h3) is changed to the state of being evacuated in (h4), the luminance data table output from the luminance data table of the accessory operation part to the luminance data table of the SP second half reach A (fanning part) changes. .. After that, in the state of (h5), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (h5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow.

FIG. 172 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory operation in (b18) to (i1). After (h5), in the state of (h6), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (h6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. After that, as shown in (h7), when the accessory is further raised, the effect image displayed corresponding to the accessory becomes lighter. As the effect image becomes lighter (the transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to the reach A in the latter half of the SP begins to be slightly visible. In the state of (h7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Further, as a sound effect, a sound corresponding to the latter half of SP, which is a BGM corresponding to the reach of the latter half of SP, is output. The sound effect related to the title in the latter half of the SP may be output together with the BGM. After that, in the state of (h8), the accessory is further increased from the state of (h7). In the state of (h8), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h7), so that the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (h8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, in the state of (h9), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (h9), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h8), so that the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (h9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state of (h10), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (h10), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h9), so that the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (h10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state of (i1), the effect image disappears and the title corresponding to the start scene of the SP second half reach A is clearly displayed. In the state of (i1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

(Start 1)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the operation of the accessory switches the effect from the effect of the SP first half reach A to the effect of the SP second half reach A. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed according to the movement of the accessory falling. After that, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the character movement to the screen corresponding to the SP second half reach A while the character is rising. Further, from the luminance data table of the accessory operation part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the luminance data table of the SP latter half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 described later) while the accessory is rising. ) Is switched to the luminance data table. In addition, a sound corresponding to the latter half of the SP (for example, BGM in the latter half of the SP) is output while the accessory is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is at a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. Further, since the sound effect and the luminance data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the accessory is returning to the initial position, the fanning part of the latter half of the SP can be suitably displayed.

(Start 2)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the operation of the accessory switches the effect from the effect of the SP first half reach A to the effect of the SP second half reach A. Further, before the operation of the accessory, the "2" symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the character moves, the character falls so that the character "P" among the characters of the character is positioned to the position where it overlaps with the place where the reduced "2" decorative pattern was displayed. do. Further, the effect image corresponding to the movement of the accessory is displayed in the priority layer in front of the reduced display of the "2" symbol according to the operation of dropping the accessory. Then, after the accessory rises from the drop position and the "2" symbol does not overlap with the accessory, the effect image gradually becomes thinner, and the background and "2" symbol corresponding to the SP second half reach A are displayed. It is displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display from being unattractive by displaying the reduced decorative pattern during the operation of the accessory. Further, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. Further, since the decorative pattern reduced in the middle of the ascending of the accessory is displayed, it is possible to switch the appropriate effect according to the movement of the accessory.

(Start 3)
As shown in FIG. 171, the accessory operates and displays the effect image before reaching the position of the lowermost end of the fall. According to this, the reduced decorative pattern can be hidden at an early stage, and it is possible to switch a suitable effect with a character.

(Start 4)
In addition, when switching from the effect image to the image of the effect when developing in the latter half, the image related to the accessory may be displayed. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIGS. 172 (h7) to (h10), the characters "POWERFULII" and the images of the main characters Yumemu-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan when the character rises, etc. May be displayed. According to this, it is possible to show a suitable switching of the production with the accessory by giving the interlocking when the production is switched.

[About Epilogue 7, 8, 10-14, 20]
In FIGS. 173 to 174, the feature portions in the epilogue part will be described by numbering.

(Detailed explanatory view of the accessory operation in (r54) to (s4))
FIG. 173 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory operation in (r54) to (s4). In the scene before the success / failure decision of (r54), the sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. At this time, the operation image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed together with the character of Baku Chu on the screen. Further, at the lower part of the operation image, a time gauge is displayed as an operation promotion display for promoting the operation. When the player executes the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A within a predetermined period or the predetermined period elapses, the movable body 32 as an accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls while tilting diagonally from the upper part of the screen toward the front of the screen. Here, the time during which the accessory is falling in the success / failure notification scene is longer than the time during which the accessory is falling in the scene that develops in the latter half of the SP.

As shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the start of the fall of the accessory. This effect image has a more flashy production mode than the effect image when developing into the latter half of SP reach. Specifically, the effect image in the scene of the hit / fail notification as in (s1) is a rainbow color. The effect images in the scenes that develop in the latter half of the SP are blue and red. In addition, the effect image makes it impossible to visually recognize the character of Baku Chu and the reduced decorative pattern of "2". Further, in the state of (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a rainbow color in accordance with the fall of the accessory.

After that, in the state of (s2), the character falls so that the character "P" among the characters of the character is positioned to the position where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" is displayed. do. In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a rainbow color. After that, in the state of (s3), the position of the accessory is maintained at the drop position in the state of (s2). In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a rainbow color.

After that, as shown in (s3-2), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advance position to the evacuation position). In the state of (s3-2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Brightness output from the brightness data table for the accessory operation of the hit epilogue part to the brightness data table for the hit epilogue of the hit epilogue part when the state of (s3) is changed to the evacuation state of (s3-2). The data table changes. After that, in the state of (s3-3), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (s3-3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

FIG. 174 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory operation in (r54) to (s4). After (s3-3), in the state of (s3-4), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (s3-4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (s3-5), when the accessory is further raised, the effect image displayed corresponding to the accessory becomes lighter. As the effect image becomes lighter (the transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to the epilogue part at the end of the SP reach begins to be slightly visible. In the state of (s3-5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Further, as a sound effect, a sound corresponding to the hit epilogue part, which is a BGM corresponding to the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, is output. After that, in the state of (s3-6), the accessory is further increased from the state of (s3-5). In the state of (s3-6), the effect image becomes lighter than in the state of (s3-5), so that the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, in the state of (s3-7), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (s3-7), the effect image becomes lighter than in the state of (s3-6), so that the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s3-8), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (s3-8), the effect image becomes lighter than in the state of (s3-7), so that the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s4), the scene where Yumemu-chan caught Baku Chu is displayed. At this time, the sound at the time of successful production is output as a sound effect. In addition, subtitles will be displayed along with the line "Uu, I was caught" from Baku Chu. In the state of (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color.

(Epilogue 7)
As shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, the effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed according to the movement of the accessory falling. After that, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined evacuation pattern. The display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the character movement to the screen corresponding to the SP final reach hit epilogue part while the character is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is at a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the reach of the first half of the SP by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position.

(Epilogue 8)
On the premise that the accessory returns to the initial position, the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue is the rising timing related to the start timing of the return operation. According to this, since the display corresponding to the epilogue is switched at the timing related to the start of the return operation, the display of the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation ends before the accessory returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation where the effect image is displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the production is not spoiled. The timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same as the timing at which the accessory starts to rise. Further, the accessory may perform a rotation operation or a movement operation at the falling position.

(Epilogue 10)
The BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return operation of the accessory to the initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by BGM.

(Epilogue 11)
The sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return operation of the accessory to the initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the sound effect.

(Epilogue 12)
The BGM and sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return operation of the accessory to the initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the BGM and the sound effect.

(Epilogue 13)
In the situation where the character returns to the initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles are output in the epilogue display after the character returns to the initial position. It may be shown. According to this, it is possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a timing when the subtitles are difficult to see, and to preferably execute the epilogue part.

(Epilogue 14)
At the timing when the accessory returns to the initial position, the dialogue sound may be output and the subtitles may be displayed in the epilogue display. According to this, the dialogue can be recognized firmly, and the epilogue part can be preferably executed.

(Epilogue 20)
As shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, the mode of the production is switched to the hit epilogue part by moving the accessory from the scene before the hit / miss decision in the fanning part. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed according to the movement of the accessory falling. After that, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the character movement to the screen corresponding to the SP final reach hit epilogue part while the character is rising. Further, the luminance data table is switched from the luminance data table corresponding to the accessory operation to the luminance data table corresponding to the hit epilogue part while the accessory is rising. In addition, a hit epilogue part-corresponding sound is output while the accessory is rising. In addition, no dialogue sound is output when the background is displayed corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed until the accessory changes to the initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8). .. After that, in the state (s4) in which the movement of the accessory to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is completed, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitle display is displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is at a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. Further, since the brightness data table of the sound effect and the game effect lamp 9 is switched to the one corresponding to the hit epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the hit epilogue part can be suitably displayed. Further, since the subtitle is displayed after the return operation to the initial position is completed, the hit epilogue part can be preferably displayed.

[About Epilogues 2, 3 and 5]
In FIG. 175, the feature portions in the epilogue part will be described by numbering them.

(Relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines)
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 175 shows the number of lines of the character being produced and the number of subtitles corresponding to the lines in each SP reach type and the epilogue type corresponding to each SP reach. For example, in the case of reach A in the first half of SP, the number of lines is 8 and the number of subtitles is 5. Further, in the case of the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the number of subtitles is 1 for the number of lines 1. In the case of the lost epilogue part of reach A in the first half of SP, there are no lines, so there are no subtitles.

Further, in the case of the reach B in the first half of the SP, the number of subtitles is 3 for the number of lines of 5. Further, in the case of the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the number of subtitles is 3 for the number of lines 3. In the case of the lost epilogue part of reach B in the first half of SP, there are no lines, so there are no subtitles. Further, in the case of the SP latter half reach A, the number of subtitles is 14 for the number of lines 16. Further, in the case of the hit epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the number of subtitles is 1 for the number of lines 1. In the case of the lost epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the number of subtitles is 1 for the number of lines 1.

Further, in the case of the reach B in the latter half of the SP, the number of subtitles is 7 for the number of lines 9. Further, in the case of the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the number of subtitles is 3 for the number of lines 3. In the case of the lost epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the number of subtitles is 1 for the number of lines 1. Further, in the case of the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is 19 for the number of lines of 27. Further, in the case of the epilogue part that hits the final reach of the SP, the number of subtitles is 2 for the number of lines 2. In the case of the lost epilogue part of the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is 1 for the number of lines 1.

(Epilogue 2)
As shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character's dialogue in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character in SP reach, which is the fanning part. According to this, by displaying the subtitles firmly in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is speaking. In addition, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to coordinate the feeling of blessing. In addition, since the screen changes more often in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, even if the subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the production will not be disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. , It is possible to give the first priority to convey the effect by switching images. As a result, it is possible to perform a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(Epilog 3)
As shown in FIG. 175, the epilogue part is configured to always display subtitles for dialogue. According to this, the blessing can be emphasized by clearly showing what the character is speaking in the hit epilogue part.

(Epilogue 5)
As shown in FIG. 175, there are a plurality of types of SP reach, which is a fanning part, and the development of each production is different and the number of lines is also different. However, in any SP reach, the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character's dialogue in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character in SP reach. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is speaking by firmly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part regardless of which SP reach is executed. In addition, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to coordinate the feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, it is possible to prevent the production from being disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display, with the first priority being to convey the production by switching images. .. As a result, it is possible to perform a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[About re-lottery production 1, 4, 5, 7-18]
In FIGS. 176 and 177, the characteristic portions in the re-lottery part will be described by numbering.

(Detailed explanation of the re-lottery part)
FIG. 176 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the portions (A1) to (A23) in the re-lottery part. FIG. 177 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the portions (A24) to (A46) in the re-lottery part.

When the jackpot display result is derived, the symbol is enlarged and displayed as shown in (A1) and (A2), and then the symbol is reduced as shown in (A3) and (A4). After that, as shown in (A5), the design becomes a normal size. Then, as shown in (A6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. Here, from the state of (A5) to the state of (A6), the period in which the symbol is shaken is omitted. Specifically, when the design is the normal size, the design is shaking. Then, after reaching the normal size, the pattern shaking of the re-lottery part continues. At this time, at the timing related to the completion of the symbol output (for example, the timing immediately before the normal size, the timing after the normal size, the timing to start the symbol shaking, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 is set. It switches from blinking white to smooth lighting in rainbow color. As a result, it is possible to smoothly print out the symbol from the symbol to the re-lottery effect, shift to a smooth shaking period, and bless the pattern by emitting light from the screen and the lamp.

After that, as shown in (A7) and (A8), there is a shaking period in which the symbol swings up and down. After that, as shown in (A9) and (A10), the "2" symbol located in the center is once reduced. After that, all of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" used as decorative patterns from (A11) to (A23) are displayed. High-speed fluctuation is performed at. After that, all of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" used as decorative patterns are displayed again from (A10') to (A23'). High-speed fluctuations are performed in these embodiments.

Then, as shown in (A24), after all the decorations have been cycled for two cycles, the button image is slightly displayed together with the initially displayed "2" symbol. After that, from (A25) to (A46), the decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and the passage of time. The time gauge displayed below the button image decreases according to. The time gauge is a display showing the validity period of the button operation. If the push button 31B is operated within the operation valid period, or if the push button 31B is not operated within the operation valid period and the effective period of the button operation ends, an odd number is shown as shown in FIGS. 157 to 164. The symbol or even symbol is derived and displayed, and the game shifts to a big hit.

(Re-lottery production 1)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is used as it is for the re-lottery. The production starts. At the start of the re-extraction effect, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the change of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol feed effect is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. By doing so, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was once temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery effect is started, the symbol feed effect is executed using the symbol that was once temporarily stopped. , It is easy for the player to know from which decorative pattern the re-lottery started. As a result, it is possible to show the flow of a series of productions well.

(Re-lottery production 4)
At the start of the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, the fluctuation starts from the reduced state of the decorative symbol that has been displayed from the hit epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to show the flow of a series of effects well without executing the process of changing to a different decorative pattern.

(Re-lottery production 5)
In the symbol feed effect, the variation is started by the reduced symbol, and the size of the variable symbol is a uniform reduced size. According to this, the appearance of the fluctuation at the time of the pattern feed effect can be smoothed, and the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown.

(Re-lottery production 7)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is used as it is for the re-lottery. The production starts. At the start of the re-extraction effect, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the change of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol feed effect is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. Then, during the re-lottery production, all the decorative symbols such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" are sent in order, and then "2" is sent again. The symbol feed effect in which the symbol is displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was once temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after the variation of the plurality of types of decorative symbols. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the symbol feed effect in which the final display result is not displayed immediately and all the decorative patterns are shown.

(Re-lottery production 8)
In the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative symbols such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" are sent in order, and then "2" again. , "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decorative patterns are sent in order. In this way, since the numbers of the decorative patterns are sent in order, it is possible to show the flow of a series of productions well.

(Re-lottery production 9)
In the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the symbols are displayed by the transparency of the symbol when temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the fluctuation. Specifically, a "2" symbol with 0% transmittance, a "2" symbol with 50% transmittance, a "3" symbol with 0% transmittance, a "3" symbol with 50% transmittance, and transparency. The symbols are switched, such as a "4" symbol with a degree of 0% and a "4" symbol with a transmittance of 50%. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed exactly in a mode with low transparency during the symbol feed effect, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of symbol is being sent.

(Re-lottery production 10)
In the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative symbols such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" are sent in order, but each symbol is sent. The displayed times are the same. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of productions can be clearly shown.

(Re-lottery production 11)
During the symbol feed effect, the promotion display formed from the button image and the time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed does not overlap with the position where the variation of the decorative symbol during the symbol feed effect is displayed. By doing so, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol feed effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feed. It should be noted that a part of the promotion display may partially overlap with the decorative pattern during the pattern feed effect.

(Re-lottery production 12)
As shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the promotion display starts to be displayed at (A24) and (A25) after repeating the variation of displaying all the decorative symbols during the symbol feed effect twice. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol feed pattern is repeated twice, the player can be made to firmly recognize the symbol feed effect.

(Re-lottery production 13)
The symbol at the start of the re-lottery effect may be other than the two symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image as the operation promotion display is displayed is constant. For example, in the case of two symbols, the timing at which the operation promotion display is displayed is the timing at which the two symbols are displayed again. Similarly, in the case of the five symbols, the timing at which the operation promotion display is displayed may be the timing at which the five symbols are displayed again. That is, the number of symbols sent is the same regardless of which symbol starts the re-lottery effect. According to this, since the control can be made constant, the processing load can be reduced.

(Re-lottery production 14)
In the lottery effect, a pattern that displays an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols), and a pattern that displays an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) are displayed. It was provided. In addition to this, a pattern for displaying an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) after displaying an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) may be provided. In the effect of sending a symbol from an odd-numbered symbol to an odd-numbered symbol, the same odd-numbered symbol may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the scale of the effect of the symbol feed period in the re-lottery effect may be the same design. According to this, it is possible to obtain a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery production 15)
In the lottery effect, a pattern that displays an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols), a pattern that displays an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols), Common data is used for any of the patterns in which the odd-numbered symbols (for example, 7 symbols) are displayed and then the odd-numbered symbols (for example, 7 symbols) are displayed. In other words, the production data is the same, and the design is such that the data related to the decorative pattern is changed according to the pattern. According to this, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated pattern, the amount of data can be reduced.

[About fanning 21-27]
In FIGS. 178 to 181, the characteristic portions in the fanning part will be described by numbering.

(Fade effect)
FIG. 178 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the portions (b4) to (b6) in the fanning part and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. In the fanning part, a fade effect is added to the subtitles for the dialogue. The fade effect is an effect composed of a fade-in in which the display gradually becomes clear and a fade-out in which the display is gradually erased. In FIG. 178 (A), a part of the effect to which the fade effect is added in the SP first half reach A, which is the fanning part, will be described.

In the state of (b4), the screen where Yumemu-chan and Baku Chu confront each other is displayed. After that, as shown in (b4'), the subtitle of "I found it" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line is displayed with a transmittance of 70%. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle of "I found it" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. In this way, the fade-in effect is added when the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed. In the state of (b4'), the dialogue sound of "I found" is not output, and the dialogue sound is output when the subtitle transmittance is 0% as in the state of (b5). ..

After that, as shown in (b5'), the transparency of "found" corresponding to the line of Baku Chu is in the layer under the subtitle of "found" corresponding to the line of Yumemu-chan with a transmittance of 0%. Subtitles with a rate of 70% are displayed with a fade-in effect. After that, as shown in (b5 ″), the transmittance of the subtitle “found” and the transmittance of the subtitle “found” are both displayed in a state of 40%. After that, as shown in (b6), the subtitle of "found" corresponding to the dialogue of Baku Chu is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. In this way, the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's lines gradually fades out from (b5') to (b6). On the other hand, the subtitles of "found" corresponding to the lines of Baku Chu gradually fade in from (b5') to (b6). In the states of (b5') and (b5''), the serif sound of "found" is not output, and the serif sound is produced when the subtitle transmittance is 0% as in the state of (b6). There is output.

As shown in FIG. 178, during the jackpot round, the effect of the character singing along with the music is executed. For example, in FIG. 178 (B), subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as "I'm sure I'll get it someday" as the song sung by Nana progresses. Immediately after that, the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses, saying "grab with this little hand". If such subtitles (lyrics) during the jackpot round are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not added. This is because when the music is playing, the progress of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the timing of switching is easy to understand.

(Fan 21)
In the fanning part, as shown in FIG. 178 (A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the dialogue of the character. When the subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first and the display period of the second subtitle displayed next overlap each other. A fade effect is added when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. Due to the fade effect, changes occur when the transmittance of the displayed characters is different. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles can be easily understood by the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be easily understood.

(Fan 22)
As shown in FIG. 178 (A), in the scene where the characters face each other, the first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue of one character is displayed, and then the second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue of another character is displayed. There are times. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed overlapping the place where the first subtitle is displayed with a transmittance of 0% and the second subtitle is displayed with a transmittance of 70%. After that, the first subtitle fades out, the second subtitle fades in, and the transmittance is displayed as 0%. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, it is easy to understand the switching of the subtitles due to the fade effect.

(Transformation example of subtitle display)
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed at the overlapping timing, the fade effect may be added to one of the two subtitles instead of the fade effect to both of the two subtitles. .. Specifically, a pattern in which the first subtitle display does not have a fade effect but a second subtitle display has a fade effect, the first subtitle display has a fade effect, and the second subtitle display has a fade effect. A pattern without the subtitles is conceivable. One of the patterns may be applied by substituting the above-mentioned first subtitle display with a fade effect and replacing the second subtitle display with a pattern having a fade effect. Further, when adding a fade effect, the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display, or the second subtitle display may be superimposed under the first subtitle display.

Further, regarding the case where the subtitles are displayed at the same timing, the subtitles for the dialogue between the first character and the second character have been described. However, when the same character continuously emits lines, the subtitle display for the first line may be overlapped with the subtitle display for the second line. In such a case, a fade effect may be added to the subtitle display.

(Fan 24)
As shown in FIG. 178, during the jackpot round, the effect of the character singing along with the music is executed. Then, subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, the fade effect is not added even if the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously. This is because when the music is playing, the progress of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the timing of switching is easy to understand. Further, since the music during the jackpot round is a representative music of the content mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lyrics displayed next are easy for the player to understand even if the fade effect is not added. According to this, the work of adding the fade effect can be omitted during the big hit round, and a series of productions can be shown well.

(Relationship between subtitle transmittance and sound output)
FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transmittance of subtitles for dialogue and the output of sound. FIG. 179 shows the situation when the line "I found" of Yumemu-chan in FIG. 178 (A) and the line "found" of Baku Chu are issued. In FIG. 179, the horizontal axis of the graph indicates the number of frames. The subtitle of "I found it" is displayed with a transmittance of 70% after one frame from the transmittance of 100%. Further, one frame later, the transmittance is displayed at 0%. As a result, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames. During this period, the line sound of "I found it" was not output.

After that, the subtitles of "I found" are displayed with a transmittance of 0% while the dialogue sound of "I found" is output. Then, in the period of T1 which is a silent period of 3 frames after the output of the dialogue sound of "found" is completed, the subtitle of "found" is continuously displayed with a transmittance of 0% for 2 frames. .. After that, the subtitle of "I found it" is displayed with a transmittance of 0% to 100% for the remaining 1 frame of T1. As a result, the subtitle of "I found it" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

Also, during the T1 period, the "found" dialogue sound is not output, but the "found" subtitles have a fade-in effect starting from one frame after the start of the T1 period. Is displayed. Specifically, the "found" subtitle is displayed with a transmittance of 100% to 70% after one frame. Further, one frame later, the transmittance is displayed at 0%. This causes the "found" subtitles to be displayed with a fade-in effect over a two-frame period.

After that, during the period when the "found" dialogue sound is output, the "found" subtitles are displayed with a transmittance of 0%. Then, in the period of T2, which is a silent period of 3 frames after the output of the "found" serif sound is completed, the subtitle of "found" is continuously displayed with a transmittance of 0% for 2 frames. Then, for the remaining 1 frame of T2, the "found" subtitles are displayed with a transmittance of 0% to 100%. As a result, the "found" subtitles are displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

As shown in FIG. 179, the first subtitle of "found" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character and the second subtitle of "found" corresponding to the character of Baku Chu have the same fade-in and fade-out fades. The effect is attached. Further, the fade-in is executed over a period of two frames, while the fade-out is executed over a period of one frame.

(Fan 23)
As shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle of "found" is displayed so that the first subtitle and the second subtitle overlap, and are output during the period when the fade effect is applied. Not done. Then, the serif sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from the time when the second subtitle is displayed with the transmittance of 0%. According to this, it is easy to understand the switching of subtitles due to the fade effect, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily grasp the content of the effect visually and audibly.

(Contrast of subtitles in the fanning part and the epilogue part)
FIG. 180 is a detailed explanatory view of the portions (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory diagram of the portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180 (A) is a detailed explanatory view of the portions (b4) to (b6) in the fanning part. Further, FIG. 180 (B) is a detailed explanatory view of the portions (o3) to (o5). FIGS. 180 (A) and 180 (B) have in common that the subtitles are continuously displayed for the lines emitted by the two characters. However, the period from the display of the first subtitle to the display of the second subtitle is different between FIGS. 180 (A) and 180 (B).

As shown in FIG. 180 (A), in the portions (b4) to (b7), in (b4), Yumemu-chan and Baku Chu are displayed facing each other. After that, in (b5), the first subtitle corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "I found it" is displayed. Then, in (b6), the second subtitle corresponding to the line "found" of Baku Chu is displayed. After that, in (b6'), Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. After that, the subtitles corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "I'll catch you!" Are displayed. The time t1 from the start of (b4) to the end of (b6) is about 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 180 (B), in the parts (o3) to (o5), in (o3), the shop where the crab that was defeated with Jam and Nana became a signboard is displayed, and Jam's line "Good". The first subtitle corresponding to "Signboard" is displayed. After that, from (o3 ′) to (o3 ″), the background of the shop with the crab without subtitles as a signboard is displayed. After that, in (o4), the second subtitle corresponding to Nana-chan's line "Work hard" is displayed. After that, the background of the shop where the crab became a signboard becomes a still image. The time t1 from the start of (o3) to the end of (o5) is about 10 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 180 (A) and 180 (B), the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed a plurality of times in one scene (a period of 0 to t1 or a period of 0 to t2) in the fanning part and the epilogue part. In some cases. When the subtitles are displayed multiple times and there is a margin in the time scale, it is conceivable that the subtitle display once displayed may be erased to make it easier to understand the switching of the subtitle display. However, if there is no time to spare, such as during the period from 0 to t1, it is difficult to take measures to temporarily erase the subtitle display. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, it is possible to make it easy to understand the switching of subtitles by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a video is first created, and then voice such as dialogue is added. After that, the subtitle display corresponding to each line is attached. Assuming that it takes time and effort to recreate a video in which the period for temporarily erasing the subtitle display is lengthened in the period from 0 to t1 where a large amount of time cannot be taken. Therefore, by adding a fade effect, it is possible to make it easier to understand the switching of subtitles without recreating the video. In addition, even if there is a margin in the time scale such as the epilogue part when the shop with the crab signboard is displayed, by adding a uniform fade effect, the overall work load is reduced and when switching subtitles It is possible to prevent the feeling of strangeness from occurring.

(Fan 26)
As shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is added to the subtitle display even in a predetermined scene in the portion (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not cover. As for the fade effect, at least one of the fade-in effect and the fade-out effect may be added. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it takes time and effort to add a fade effect depending on whether or not the subtitle display is covered. Therefore, by uniformly applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the work load from increasing.

(Fan 25)
Here, although not shown, the timing of subtitle display may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from the subtitle display to the subtitle display is longer than that in the fan part. This is because the fanning part progresses quickly, and the epilogue part does not progress as fast as the fanning part. As a result, the ratio of the fanned part to be displayed at the timing when the subtitles are overlapped is higher than that of the epilogue part. In such a case, by effectively adding a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort when switching the subtitles.

[About fanning 27]
In FIG. 181, the characteristic portion in the fanning part will be described by numbering.

(Fan 27)
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181 (A), subtitles for similar lines such as "found" and "found" may be continuously displayed. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. In addition, regarding the display of subtitles for long lines and the display of subtitles for fast-moving lines, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur when the subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the discomfort can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 2 of FIG. 181 (B), it is conceivable to superimpose "found" on the subtitle display of "found" and then display "found". In such a case, the subtitle display becomes difficult to see by not adding the fade effect. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181 (C), it is conceivable to display the subtitle display of "found" and the subtitle display of "found" in two upper and lower rows. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the display area of the effect, which hinders the effect in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display.

[About Epilogue 23]
In FIG. 182, the feature portions in the epilogue part will be described by numbering them.

FIG. 182 is a detailed explanatory view of the portions (B4) to (B11). With reference to FIG. 182, the correspondence between the effect using the decorative pattern or the small pattern on the screen and the effect using the game effect lamp 9 will be described. As shown in (B4), the enlarged "3" symbol is reduced in the effect of displaying the symbol of the re-lottery part. The aspect of the game effect lamp 9 at this time blinks in white. Then, as shown in (B5), the "3" symbol is displayed in normal size. The aspect of the game effect lamp 9 at this time blinks in a rainbow color. Then, as shown in (B6), the "3" symbol is slightly shaken up and down and displayed. The aspect of the game effect lamp 9 at this time blinks in a rainbow color.

Then, as shown in (B7), the screen changes from the background for re-lottery to the normal background, and in this normal background, the "3" symbol is continuously slightly shaken up and down and displayed. The aspect of the game effect lamp 9 at this time blinks in a rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B8), the decorative symbol and the small symbol are fixedly stopped based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command. The aspect of the game effect lamp 9 at this time blinks in a rainbow color. As shown in (B9), the symbol determination period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 s), and the same display as in (B8) is maintained on the screen. As for the mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time, the lighting mode of blinking the rainbow color is maintained.

After that, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched after about 10 msec to support fanfare. Further, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the screen is switched after about 33 msec and the mode changes to display "FEVER". Specifically, as shown in (D1), the screen maintains the state of (B9) during the fanfare period after receiving the fanfare command. On the other hand, the aspect of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to the fanfare correspondence earlier than the aspect of the screen. The aspect of the game effect lamp 9 in (D1) is extinguished. Then, as shown in (D2), the screen is switched to a screen in which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yumemu-chan are displayed behind the mode of the game effect lamp 9. Further, the game effect lamp 9 at this time maintains the lighting mode corresponding to the fanfare.

[About Epilogue 28-31]
In FIG. 183, the feature portions in the epilogue part will be described by numbering them.

FIG. 183 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of patterning. In the modified example, the design may be executed in the order of (Y1) to (Y7). Specifically, as shown in (Y1), the decorative symbols (reduced symbols) reduced in the scene of catching the Baku Chu are aligned in the state of "222" at the upper left of the screen. The aspect of the game effect lamp 9 of the thing is rainbow lighting (smooth). Then, as shown in (Y2), the screen becomes a still image and the reduced symbol sways slightly up and down. The aspect of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth).

Then, as shown in (Y3), the reduced decorative pattern on the upper left of the screen is temporarily erased. The aspect of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y4), the decoration of "222" that has been erased from the center of the screen is enlarged and displayed. The aspect of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is blinking white. Next, as shown in (Y5), the decorative pattern of "222" is enlarged and displayed from the state of (Y4). The aspect of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is blinking white. Next, as shown in (Y6), the decorative pattern of "222" is enlarged and displayed from the state of (Y5). The aspect of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is blinking white. Next, as shown in (Y7), the decorative pattern of "222" is enlarged and displayed from the state of (Y6). The aspect of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is blinking white.

In the design of the modified example, the decorative design moves to the upper left corner of the screen in the reach mode at the start of SP reach, and the symbols are aligned at the hit epilogue part as shown in (Y1). Then, the reduced symbol once deleted after the reduced symbol shaking period as shown in (Y2) is enlarged from the position in the center of the screen, and the first effect of the symbol is executed.

(Epilogue 28)
In the hit epilogue part, when the images constituting the hit epilogue are sequentially displayed (the state in which the image of the hit epilogue is flowing), the decorative pattern is positioned on the edge side in the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). Position). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue image ends, the reduced symbol is erased and the effect of displaying the enlarged symbol is executed using the central area of the screen. Further, the luminance data table switches from the luminance data table corresponding to the hit epilogue part to the luminance data table corresponding to the pattern output in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the hit epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned on the edge side of the screen so that the image of the hit epilogue part is not disturbed, the development of the image of the hit epilogue part is completed, and the pattern is put out. When doing so, the big hit symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging the decorative symbol so as to be continuous using the edge side of the screen and the center of the screen. Furthermore, by switching the luminance data table, it is possible to make the scene change appear suitable. In this way, the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably.

(Epilogue 29)
In the hit epilogue part, when the images constituting the hit epilogue are sequentially displayed (the state in which the image of the hit epilogue is flowing), the decorative pattern is positioned on the edge side in the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). (Position) is displayed in the same state as "222". According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the big hit display result is obtained by the reduced decorative pattern even while the hit epilogue image is being played.

(Epilogue 30)
In the hit epilogue part, when the images constituting the hit epilogue are sequentially displayed (the state in which the image of the hit epilogue is flowing), the decorative pattern is positioned on the edge side in the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). Position) is displayed. In addition, the subtitle display displayed in (Y1) is erased, the reduced symbol at the upper left corner is erased, and the center of the screen is erased in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends. The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern and to be misunderstood that some message is displayed when the pattern is displayed, and the hit epilogue part is preferably used. I can show you.

(Epilogue 31)
In the modified example, the decorative pattern moves to the upper left corner of the screen in the reach mode at the start of SP reach. According to this, by positioning the position from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to prevent the development of the production from being disturbed even during the SP reach, and it is possible to make a series of productions look suitable.

184 to 187 are diagrams for explaining a modified example of the re-lottery. In the modified example, for example, a case where the re-lottery is executed from the symbol drawing in the order of (F1) to (F12) will be described. Specifically, after the symbol is enlarged and displayed as shown in (F1) and (F2), the symbol is reduced as shown in (F3) and (F4). After that, as shown in (F5), the design becomes a normal size. Then, as shown in (F6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. After that, as shown in (F7), there is a shaking period in which the symbol swings up and down. After that, the "3" symbol is reduced and displayed from (F8) to (F9).

After that, as shown in (F10), the button image and the time gauge are slightly displayed under the "3" symbol. After that, as shown in (F11), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed with the "3" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases with the passage of time. The time gauge is a display showing the validity period of the button operation.

FIG. 185 shows a case where the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (F12). FIG. 185 describes the re-lottery effect executed in (G1) to (G27). When the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (F12), "3", "4", "5", "6", which are used as decorative patterns from (G1) to (G13), High-speed fluctuation is performed in such a manner that "7", "1", and "2" are all displayed. After that, as shown in (G14), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

After that, the symbol is enlarged and displayed as shown in (G15) and (G16), and then the symbol is reduced as shown in (G17) and (G18). After that, as shown in (G19), the design becomes a normal size. Then, the background is switched to the background for shaking the pattern. Here, as the symbol shaking, the operation of shaking the symbol is executed by rotating the symbol between the back side and the front side on the screen. Specifically, after the symbol swings to the back side from (G20) to (G21), the symbol swings to the front side from (G22) to (G23) to change to the initial position. After that, the symbol swings toward the front side from (G24) to (G25), and then the symbol swings toward the back side from (G26) to (G27) to change to the initial position.

FIG. 186 shows a case where the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state of (F12). FIG. 186 describes the re-lottery effect executed in (H1) to (H27). If the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state of (F12), the "3" symbol remains displayed from (H1) to (H6), and the time gauge decreases with the passage of time. .. After that, as shown in (H7), the button image is slightly displayed and the button image is erased. After that, all of "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative patterns from (H8) to (H20) are displayed. High-speed fluctuation is performed at. After that, as shown in (H21), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

After that, the symbol is enlarged and displayed as shown in (H22) and (H23), and then the symbol is reduced as shown in (H24) and (H25). After that, as shown in (H26), the design becomes a normal size. Then, as shown in (H27), the background is switched to the background shown in (G20) to (G27). The movement of the symbol out in (H22) to (H26) when the push button 31B is not operated is the same as the movement of the symbol out in (G15) to (G19) when the push button 31B is operated. However, when the push button 31B is operated, the time of the decrease in the time gauge when the push button 31B is not operated is absorbed in the period during which the effect of shaking the three symbols is executed. That is, no matter when the button is operated, the period until the button is operated is absorbed by the scale of the effect that shakes the three symbols.

Then, after (G27) or (H27), the effect as shown in FIG. 187 is executed. FIG. 187 describes the re-lottery effect executed in (J1) to (J18). After (G27) or (H27), the screen temporarily whites out as shown in (J1). After that, the "3" symbol makes one rotation from (J2) to (J9). Specifically, from the state of (J2), counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction of "3 symbols" (J3), (J4), (J5), (J6), (J7), (J8), ( It rotates with J9). Since the movement of rotation is fast, it seems that the design rotates in an instant.

After that, as shown in (J10), after the "3" symbol is reduced and displayed, the symbol sways to the back side from (J11) to (J12), and then the symbol is on the front side from (J13) to (J14). It changes to the initial position by shaking to. After that, the symbol swings toward the front side from (J15) to (J16), and then the symbol swings toward the back side from (J17) to (J18) to change to the initial position. The movement of the symbol shaking from (J11) to (J18) is the same as the movement of the symbol shaking from (G20) to (G27). Then, in (J18), the symbol stops neatly at the normal position.

[About Loss 1-7]
The featured parts of the lost epilogue part will be numbered and explained.

(About the design confirmation period)
FIG. 188 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the symbol determination period. FIG. 188 (X1) is a diagram showing the timing of the winning / failing determination corresponding to (r54) in FIG. 132. The details of the symbol determination period when shifting from this state to the hit epilogue part will be described with reference to (X2) to (X5). Further, the details of the symbol determination period in the case of shifting from the state of (X1) to the lost epilogue part will be described with reference to (X6) to (X9).

When shifting from the state of (X1) to the hit epilogue part, as shown in (X2), the image of the state of (s5) in which the bomb chew is captured is displayed. After that, as shown in (X3), it becomes a symbol confirmation period in which the symbol as in (B8) is fixed and stopped after being controlled by the normal screen. The symbol confirmation period is continued for 0.5 s after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. After that, as shown in (X4), the fanfare period as shown in (B11) is reached. After that, as shown in (X5), the jackpot round period is reached.

When shifting from the state of (X1) to the lost epilogue part, as shown in (X6), an image of the unfortunate state (u2) in which the Baku Chu was not caught is displayed. After that, as shown in (X7), the background is blacked out and the symbol combination showing the loss display result of "232" is displayed. After that, as shown in (X8), an eye-catching image on which a character image having an effect of attracting the player's eyes is drawn is displayed. After that, after being controlled by the normal screen, the symbol confirmation period such as (X9) is set. The symbol confirmation period is continued for 0.5 s after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. If there is a hold memory corresponding to the next variation display after the symbol confirmation period ends, the next variation display is started.

(Detailed explanation of blackout)
FIG. 189 is a detailed explanatory view of the blackout. The details of the blackout will be described in the order of FIGS. 189 (X10) to (X22). As shown in (X10), an image of the unfortunate (u2) state in which the Baku Chu was not caught is displayed. From this state, the background of the blackout is displayed with the transmittance gradually reduced, and the background of the medium symbol showing "3", which is one of the decorative symbols displayed in the center, gradually decreases the transmittance. It will be displayed. By reducing the transmittance, the blackout background gradually becomes darker, and the middle pattern gradually becomes clearer.

After (X10), as shown in (X11), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed at 70%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed at 100%. After that, as shown in (X12), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed at 60%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed at 90%. After that, as shown in (X13), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed at 50%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed at 80%. After that, as shown in (X14), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed at 40%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed at 60%. After that, as shown in (X15), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed at 30%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed at 40%. After that, as shown in (X16), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed at 20%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed at 20%. After that, as shown in (X17), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed at 10%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed at 0%. After that, as shown in (X18), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed at 0%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed at 0%.

After that, the symbol "3" symbol, which is the middle symbol, sways up and down from (X19) to (X20) during the symbol sway period. After the pattern shaking period, an eye-catching image is displayed as shown in (X21). After that, as shown in (X22), the symbol determination period is reached. As shown in FIG. 189, the background blackout starts earlier than the medium symbol fade-in, and the background blackout has more transmittance switching stages than the medium symbol fade-in. ..

(Loss 1)
As shown in FIG. 188, if a loss occurs after the result is determined, the loss symbol is displayed in the loss epilogue part at the blackout background. After that, after the switching image by the eye-catching screen is displayed, the screen is switched to the normal background at the start of reach. According to this, the eye-catching screen makes it possible to preferably show the switching of the screen at the time of loss.

(Loss 2)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the loss epilogue part, the middle symbol gradually fades in while the background at the time of loss gradually blacks out. According to this, since the image at the time of loss and the middle pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, the display at the time of loss can be preferably shown depending on the relationship between the two.

(Loss 3)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the loss epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background at the time of loss from 100% to 0% transmittance fades the medium symbol from 100% to 0%. There are more steps than it takes to get in. Specifically, the background blackout has eight stages from (X11) to (X18), while the fade-in of the medium symbol has six stages from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image at the time of loss and the middle pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, and the number of stages of changing the transmittance is different. Can be shown favorably.

(Loss 4)
As shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background at the time of loss is blacked out starts before the change in which the middle symbol fades in. According to this, the image at the time of loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, and the blackout is faster than the fade-in of the symbol. The time display can be shown favorably.

(Loss 5)
In the image at the time of loss before blackout, the displayed image is switched, whereas in the image at the time of blackout, there is no change in the displayed image. According to this, the blackout can be made to look good by starting the blackout in the state of the image without change. It should be noted that switching the image includes switching the picture on the screen, switching the angle of the image, and switching the displayed scene itself. Further, the fact that there is no change in the image includes the fact that the image is the same still image, the angle of the image does not change even if it is a moving image, and even if it is moving, only a part of the image is moving minutely.

(Loss 6)
As the background at the time of loss is blacked out and the middle symbol fades in, as shown in (X18) to (X20), the medium symbol with a transmittance of 0% and the transmittance are 0%. The blacked out background of is displayed for a predetermined period. This predetermined period includes a symbol shaking period as shown in (X19) to (X20). The symbol shaking period may be set so that the cycle of moving the middle symbol from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position is one cycle, and the symbol shaking is repeated for at least two cycles. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the fade-in is executed from the state where the medium symbol has a transmittance of 100% to the state of the transmittance of 0%. Further, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period in which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in the display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a predetermined period in which the middle symbol is displayed in a clear state, so that it is possible to preferably show that the pattern is lost.

(Loss 7)
As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, on the eye-catching screen, the characters "POWERFULII" in the title and images of the main characters Yumemu-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan are displayed as information about the pachinko gaming machine 1. Will be done. According to this, the information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately transmitted by the eye-catching image.

[About Loss 8, 10-17]
The featured parts of the lost epilogue part will be numbered and explained.

(About the game effect lamp at the time of loss)
FIG. 190 is a detailed explanatory view of the game effect lamp at the time of loss and a diagram for explaining a modified example at the time of loss. FIG. 190 also describes a lighting mode of the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050. FIGS. 190 (X30) to (X36) are detailed explanatory views of the game effect lamps at the time of loss, and FIGS. 190 (X40) to (X46) are diagrams showing deformation examples at the time of loss. The example shown in FIG. 190 shows the effect at the time of loss in the SP final reach, but with respect to the effect at the time of loss in other reach such as SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B. The technique shown in FIG. 190 may be applied.

In the present embodiment, the luminance data table at the time of loss is used from the effect that the six ally characters of (X30) are disappointed to the effect that the background image of (X31) is blacked out. The luminance data table at the time of loss shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table specified by the time tu1 to tu3 of the child table WD17 in the loss epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

After the background image is blacked out, an eye-catching image is displayed. The eye-catching image is an image that attracts the attention of the player, and in the present embodiment, as a result of a series of effects in the SP reach, the eye-catching pattern is derived (temporarily stopped) before returning to the normal screen. The image is displayed.

From the switching period to the eye-catching screen of (X32) to the display of the eye-catching screen of (X33), the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. After that, via the switching period to the normal screen of (X34) and the symbol confirmation period of (X35), the background changes to the next variation of (X36) executed when the variation pattern command with hold is received. Luminance data table for is used. The luminance data table for the background shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table 26 specified by the time tu4 of the child table WD17 in the lost epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

It should be noted that the luminance data table for the background is maintained even when the customer waiting command is received when there is no hold after the symbol determination period of (X35). In response to receiving the customer waiting command, the effect screen may be displayed as a demonstration, and the luminance data table for the demonstration may be used.

In relation to the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is blinking from (X30) to (X34). Then, by receiving the symbol confirmation command, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is turned off in the state of (X35). After that, by receiving the fluctuation pattern command when there is a hold, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 blinks in the state of (X36). When there is no hold after the symbol confirmation period of (X35), the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is kept off even if a customer waiting command is received.

Further, as a modification at the time of loss, the luminance data table in each state may be different from that of the present embodiment. Specifically, from the disappointment of (X40) to the background blackout of (X41), the luminance data table at the time of loss is used. After that, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is displayed over the (X42) eye-catching screen switching period, (X43) eye-catching screen, (X44) normal screen switching period, and (X45) symbol determination period. It may be used. Then, in the next variation of (X36), the luminance data table for the background may be used.

Here, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) has a larger luminance than the final luminance data (turning off) in the luminance data table before the eye catch display (at the time of loss). Further, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) has a larger luminance than the first luminance data in the luminance data table (excluding extinguishing lights) corresponding to the background at the start of fluctuation.

(Loss 8)
The characteristic part of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of loss will be described. The effect screen is switched to the image at the time of loss after the effect of determining whether or not to win. After that, after the blackout display in which the loss display result is displayed, the screen is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, a screen is displayed in which the symbol is fixed and stopped after the screen is switched to the normal screen. Further, the luminance data table is switched from the luminance data table at the time of winning / failing determination to the luminance data table at the time of loss. After that, it is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching). After that, it is switched to the background luminance data table at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Further, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. The variable display of the special symbol of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from blinking to off by receiving the symbol confirmation command, but the luminance data table for the background is not switched by receiving the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from extinguished to blinking by receiving the fluctuation pattern command of the next fluctuation, but the luminance data table for the background is not switched by receiving the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the luminance data table is continued until the next fluctuation. Therefore, the luminance data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command is received. It is not necessary to create a separate image, and it is possible to show the effect by the lamp without any discomfort from the effect at the time of loss to the next change, and it is possible to show a series of effects appropriately.

(Loss 10)
After the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, the luminance data table for the background is continuously used even if there is no hold storage and the customer waiting demo designation command is received. According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be continuously used, so that the effect of the lamp can be shown without discomfort, and a series of effects can be shown favorably. Can be done.

(Loss 11)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from blinking to extinguished by receiving a symbol confirmation command that triggers an effect of stopping the confirmation of the symbol. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow at the time of loss can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Loss 12)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from extinguished to blinking by receiving the fluctuation pattern command of the next fluctuation that triggers the start of the next fluctuation. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow at the time of loss can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Loss 13)
An example of deformation at the time of loss will be described. The luminance data table at the time of loss is used from the effect that the six ally characters of (X40) are disappointed to the effect that the background image of (X41) is blacked out. After the background image is blacked out, an eye-catching image is displayed. From the switching period to the eye-catching screen of (X42) to the symbol determination period of (X45), the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. After that, when the variation pattern command with hold is received, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the background. That is, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) at the timing when the screen is switched to the eye catch screen, the luminance data table is maintained during the symbol confirmation period, and the background is switched to the next fluctuation. You can switch to the brightness data table of. Further, in the symbol determination period, the extinguishing, which is the final luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching), is used. According to this, after switching to the background luminance data table, the final luminance data of the switching (for eye-catching) luminance data table is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received, so that it is a loss. Can be easily recognized, and as a result, the loss can be shown favorably.

(Loss 14)
The final luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) is the data to be turned off and maintained. Further, in the luminance data table for the background, the data for keeping the light off is not used. According to this, since the brightness data for keeping the light off is not used in the brightness data table for the background, it is peculiar to the case where the light is turned off when the background is displayed. It is possible to make it easy to recognize that.

(Loss 15)
If there is no hold storage after the symbol is confirmed, the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) is switched to the luminance data table for the background by receiving the customer waiting designation command. According to this, when the customer waiting designation command is received, the luminance data table for the background is switched to, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the loss has occurred.

(Loss 16)
The first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) has a higher luminance than the final luminance data (turned off) in the luminance data table before the display of the eye-catching image (at the time of loss). According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can emit light with higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, it is easy to recognize the switching by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

(Loss 17)
The first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) has a higher luminance than the first luminance data in the luminance data table (excluding extinguishing lights) corresponding to the background at the start of fluctuation. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light with high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, it is easy to recognize the switching by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[About 8-12]
The characteristic parts in the parts related to the judgment of success or failure will be described by numbering them.

(Detailed explanation of (r48) part)
FIG. 191 is a detailed explanatory view of the (r48) portion. FIG. 191 (r48) is a scene in which the final fanning before the decision of success or failure is executed. FIG. 191 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing screen switching, and FIG. 191 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between screen switching and time. As shown in FIG. 191 (A), in the (r48) portion, after the display of the explosion chew as in (r48-1) is displayed, the display of six allies as in (r48-2) is displayed. After that, after the display of the explosion chew like (r48-1) is displayed again, the display of 6 allies like (r48-2) is displayed. After that, the switching of the still image between (r48-1) and (r48-2) is repeated, and as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the switching speed gradually increases. Then, the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time.

(Win / Fail 8)
The scene before the hit / fail decision of (r48) in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the image is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed in (r48) is the image of Baku Chu and six allies. Performed with images. Then, the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make the character appear to be operating. Here, if an image is created in the slow motion period using the same amount of image data as in the period other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and making the character appear to be operating by switching and enlarging the display. The number of images used in the slow motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than the number other than the slow motion period.

(Win / Fail 9)
As shown in FIG. 191 (B), the switching speed between the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character gradually increases. According to this, after the switching speed of the image becomes the fastest, the promotion display prompting the trigger operation is displayed, so that the scene where the ally character is advantageous is developed or the scene where the enemy character is advantageous is developed. It will be possible to inspire whether or not it will be developed, and the interest will improve. In addition, by switching the images alternately, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the ally character and the enemy character are each executed using one image.

(Win 10)
The production of the slow motion period in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach and the SP final reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably execute the production even at the timing of developing from the reach of the first half of the SP.

(Win / Fail 11)
During the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the ally character and the enemy character may be configured by using two or more images. For example, in the case of an ally character, by repeatedly using four images such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, ..., the character's hair and clothes may appear to move gradually. good. According to this, by changing only a part of the data while diverting the data of the character itself, it is possible to more faithfully express the state of operation while reducing the amount of data change work.

(Win / Fail 12)
In the slow motion period in (r48), when the character's hair and clothes appear to move gradually from multiple images, the movement of the hair and clothes should move at the same speed as the period other than the slow motion period. It may be a visible design. Here, if the number of images is increased according to the movement of slow motion in order to make the movement look smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes large. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, the operation does not become awkward even if the number of images used is reduced, and it is possible to more faithfully express the operation while reducing the data capacity. can.

<Explanation of game effect lamps>
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 260.

[Ramp control of game effect lamp using brightness data table]
The effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122 to turn on / blink / turn off one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 in one frame (33 msec) of the displayed image. The display control unit 124 has a ROM 121 or a RAM 122 when the sub-variable time is time to start a display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (reach display, etc.) in each part such as a start part or a fan part). The display control of the image display device 5 is performed based on the image data (moving image data, animation data) stored in the image display device 5. The display control unit 124 sets an extended command corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extended command to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 124, based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124.

For example, FIG. 272 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 272, when the display control unit 124 performs display control in the hit epilogue of the SP first half reach A, an extended command for designating the hit epilogue of the SP first half reach A is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the hit epilogue of the SP first half reach A based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124.

In the parent table, information that specifies a lamp (lighting location) that is the target of lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and information that specifies the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each lamp. , Information that specifies the child table referred to during lamp control for each lamp (specified address of the child table) is stored. In the parent table, only the lamps that are the target of lamp control are specified, and the lamps that are not the target of lamp control are not specified. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the panel left lamp 9B, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H are targeted for lamp control. It is specified, and 600,000 msec is specified as the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each lamp. Then, in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, the child table WD1 is designated for the frame lamp, the child table YD1 is designated for the accessory lamp 9A, and the child table LD1 is designated for the board left lamp 9B. , The child table AD1 is designated for the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric tutor lamp 9H.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the parent table for epilogue per SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control for the frame lamp is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). The designated CPU 120 for effect control subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 msec in order to measure this 600,000 msec (10 minutes). That is, the effect control CPU 120 clocks 600,000 msec (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The effect control CPU 120 is adapted to perform lamp control using a child table designated by the parent table until it clocks up to 600,000 msec (10 minutes). In the parent table for epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, WD3 is designated as a child table.

In the child table, information for specifying the lamp (lighting location) to be controlled by the lamp among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 and the grandchild table referred to at each time when the lamp control is performed are specified. Information (specified address of grandchild table) is stored. For example, in the child table for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 193, which will be described later, grandchild tables (W4, W11, W12, W21, etc.) referred to for each time such as ta1 to ta19 are designated.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the child table WD3 for epilogue per SP first half reach A, 300 msec is specified as the time for lamp control for the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and performs lamp control using the grandchild table specified by the child table WD3 until the time reaches 3000 msec. ing. In the child table WD3 for epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, W4 is designated as the grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information for designating a lamp (lighting location) to be controlled by the lamps among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and luminance data used at each time when the lamps are controlled. ing. For example, in the grandchild table W4 shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later, luminance data corresponding to RGB used every 30 msec is stored.

The value of the luminance data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp to be controlled by the lamp. For example, a frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements such as "R", "G", and "B", and the luminance data for each element corresponds to the current value output for each element. .. Specifically, the luminance data is divided into 16 stages from 0 to F, and when the luminance data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the luminance data is F, the current value is the lowest value. The current value becomes the maximum value. For example, when the luminance data of "A" is output to the element of "R", the current corresponding to the luminance data of "A" flows to the element of "R", and the element of "G" is "1". When the luminance data is output, the current corresponding to the luminance data of "1" flows to the element of "G", and when the luminance data of "F" is output to the element of "G", the "F" The current corresponding to the luminance data of "G" flows through the element of "G".

The frame lamp can emit light in various colors by passing a current corresponding to the luminance data through each element of RGB. Further, the frame lamp can be turned on in a color corresponding to each character described above by emitting light based on the luminance data. As an example, in a production where Yumemu-chan appears, the data of "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and the LED lights up in red when the current corresponding to the data flows. .. In the production where the maid A appears, the data of "00F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and the current corresponding to the data flows, so that the LED lights up in blue. In the production where the maid B appears, the data of "0AC" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and the current corresponding to the data flows, so that the LED lights up in Hawaiian blue color. In the production where AD appears, the data of "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and the current corresponding to the data flows, so that the LED lights up in yellow. In the production where Jam appears, the data of "A5F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and the current corresponding to the data flows, so that the LED lights up in purple. In a production where Nana appears, the data of "F3F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and the current corresponding to the data flows, so that the LED lights up in pink. In an effect such as the appearance of an explosive chew, the data of "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and the current corresponding to the data flows, so that the LED lights up in red. In a production in which Boingo appears, "FEA" data is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, so that the LED lights up in cream color.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 230, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the grandchild table W4, “000” and “AAA” are alternately used as luminance data (RGB data) at intervals of 30 msec for each lamp. It is specified. The effect control CPU 120 clocks 3000 msec, which is the time specified by the child table, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and performs luminance data at intervals of 30 msec based on the grandchild table W4 until the time reaches 300 msec. Output to the LED driver. Then, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the luminance data to flow to the designated LED based on the received luminance data. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, the child table, and the grandchild table, and while subtracting the timer at a fixed cycle (for example, a 10 msec cycle), the parent table is used. Ramp control is performed based on the table, child table, and grandchild table.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated place of the grandchild table, and when the output of the brightness data is completed up to the last designated place of the grandchild table, the grandchild table is output. If the value of the timer corresponding to the specified child table still remains, the output of the brightness data is started again from the first specified location of the grandchild table. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 outputs the brightness data based on the grandchild table and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table specifying the grandchild table becomes 0, this time, the child table Set the timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table that specifies, and start outputting the brightness data from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified in the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switching.

The timer management of the child table by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 273 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by managing a timer of a child table. As shown in FIG. 273, in the child table for epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, 3000 msec is designated as the time for lamp control to be performed on the frame lamp, and W4 is designated as the grandchild table. In the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately designated as luminance data (RGB data) at intervals of 30 msec for each lamp. For convenience of explanation, the data "000" in the first 30 msec is the data 1, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec is the data 2, the data "000" in the next 30 msec is the data 3, and the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec. Is referred to as data 4, data "000" in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 5, data "AAA" in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 6, and data "000" in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 7.

The effect control CPU 120 clocks 3000 msec specified by the child table WD3 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and data 1 to data 7 at intervals of 30 msec based on the grandchild table W4 until the clock reaches 3000 msec. The brightness data of the above is output to the LED driver, but after the data 1 to the data 7 are output, if the timekeeping has not reached 3000 msec, the brightness data is output to the LED driver again in order from the first data 1. When the timekeeping reaches 3000 msec, the effect control CPU 120 stops outputting the luminance data based on the grandchild table W4 at that time, and starts outputting the luminance data based on the next grandchild table W1 specified by the child table. do. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 loops the output of the luminance data until the time specified by the child table elapses.

As in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, child data is specified over 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and the 10-minute data in such a parent table plays a role of troubleshooting. That is, the effect control CPU 120 switches the parent table based on the effect control command from the CPU 103 to perform lamp control, but some trouble occurs while the lamp control is performed based on a certain parent table, and the effect control is performed. Even if the CPU 120 does not receive the effect control command from the CPU 103, the lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, which prevents the lamp control from being performed one after another from the place where the problem occurs. can do.

Further, as in the child table shown in FIG. 193 described later, grandchild data is specified over 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final designated location, and the 10-minute data in such a child table corresponds to the child table. When the value of the timer to be used becomes 0, the timer of the parent table still remains, so that the lamp control is prevented from being performed again from the first specified location of the child table.

Further, as in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 235 described later, brightness data is specified over 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final designated location, and the 10-minute data in such a grandchild table corresponds to the grandchild table. When the value of the timer to be used becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, so that the lamp control is prevented from being performed again from the first specified location of the grandchild table.

In this way, by setting the luminance data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with a fixed light emission, so that it is possible to prevent a problem in which the lighting of the lamp continues to change. Can be done. Furthermore, if the luminance data for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is specified at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to prevent the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change more effectively. can.

As described above, the luminance data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the luminance data table used in each part described below, a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table are used. Of these, only characteristic tables are shown, and other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the start part]
FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the start part. As shown in FIG. 192, in the parent table in the luminance data table used for the start part, the maximum time for which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and the lamp for each game effect lamp 9. Information that specifies a child table (WD1, YD1, LD1, AD1) referred to at the time of control is stored.

FIG. 193 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the start part. As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the frame lamp, the time of the start part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is specified. In this embodiment, only the grandchild table having a particular feature is described in the child table, and the other grandchild tables are indicated by "omitted" and the description thereof will be omitted.

For example, at time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7, the grandchild table W21 is specified. The grandchild table W21 is included in the normal background luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52, and corresponds to the grandchild table W21 for the frame lamp in the background luminance data table shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21, "550", "770", or "880" is designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W21 to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern) corresponding to the normal background.

At time ta3 and time ta6, the grandchild table W4 is specified. The grandchild table W4 corresponds to the grandchild table W4 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) luminance data table shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp twice in white by performing lamp control over 150 msec (30 msec × 5) based on the grandchild table W4.

At times ta10 to ta12, the grandchild table W11 is designated. The grandchild table W11 corresponds to the grandchild table W11 for the frame lamp in the shutter 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 251 described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W11, the luminance data is gradually lowered from "A00" to "600" at intervals of 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. It is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to gradually reduce the brightness in response to the effect of closing the shutter as shown in FIGS. 58 (a10) to 58 (a12). While turning on the frame lamp in red.

At times ta13 to ta18, the grandchild table W12 is designated. The grandchild table W12 corresponds to the grandchild table W12 for the frame lamp in the shutter 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 251 described later. As shown in FIG. 251 in the grandchild table W12, “600” is specified in 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W12, the effect control CPU 120 is predetermined from the state in which the shutters as shown in FIGS. 59 (a13) to (a15) and 60 (a16) to (a18) are completely closed. The frame lamp is turned on in red while maintaining the brightness in a reduced state in response to the effect of opening in stages after the time is maintained.

In this way, in the child table WD1 of the start part, in the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp has a color or brightness such as background yellow lighting, red blinking, white blinking, and red lighting. While the brightness data is switched so that it lights up / blinks while changing the brightness, during the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining the brightness reduced. Luminance data is maintained. As a result, before the shutter is closed, the effect in the start part is enlivened by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained so that the player can adjust the content of the effect when the shutter is opened. As a result, it is possible to better show the player the production in the subsequent fanning part.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the brightness data is displayed so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining the brightness reduced from the timing when the shutter is completely closed. It was maintained, but not limited to this. For example, even if the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while keeping the brightness reduced after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the shutter is completely closed. good. Alternatively, from the timing related to the shutter closing operation (for example, the timing when the shutter starts closing, the timing just before the shutter starts closing, etc.), the frame lamp is lit in red while maintaining the reduced brightness. The data may be maintained.

At the final time ta19 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off in response to the effect that the shutter is maintained in a completely open state as shown in FIG. 61 (a19). As described with reference to FIG. 53, "off" here means that the luminance data is "0", but at time ta19, the luminance data is "1". You may become. In addition, also in the following description, the part of "turning off" may be "substantially turning off". At time ta19, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and a frame based on the grandchild table is performed for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD1 becomes 0. The lamp stays off.

In this way, since the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully opened, it is possible to inform the player of the timing when the shutter is fully opened in an easy-to-understand manner depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In addition, in the fanning part of SP first half reach A and the fanning part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, the shutter is started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp is off, corresponding to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts to light as the production progresses in the SP first half reach, so that the player knows that the SP first half reach has started. Can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Brightness data table used in the SP first half reach A fanning part]
FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach A. As shown in FIG. 194, in the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game. Information that specifies a child table (WD2, YD2, LD2, AD2) referred to at the time of lamp control for the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 195 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD2 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 195, in the frame lamp child table WD2, the time of the fanning part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is designated.

For example, the grandchild table W3 is specified during the 1560 msec of the time tb10. The grandchild table W3 corresponds to the grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp in the yellow haze brightness data table shown in FIG. 229 described later. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at 180 msec intervals. .. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp is turned on as if it is yellow, which corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

A grandchild table W4 is designated between 150 msec at time tb14 and 210 msec at time tb17, respectively. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4.

Here, as shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec. , The first 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights up in white), the next 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights up in white), next The 30 msec of the above is "000" (lights off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lights up in white), and the last 30 msec is "000" (lights off). That is, the frame lamp blinks in white (white flash) a plurality of times by alternately repeating "off" and "on" for one cycle consisting of 210 msec (30 msec × 7). For example, when the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 for one cycle consisting of 210 msec (30 msec × 7), the frame lamp blinks white three times and the effect control CPU 120 flashes 150 msec. When the lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W4 over (30 msec × 5), the frame lamp blinks white twice.

The grandchild table W4 is specified in both the time tb14 and the time tb17. In the time tb14, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. The frame lamp blinks white twice, and at time tb17, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle time consisting of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp is white three times. Flashes.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of different timings in one child table WD2, so that the frame lamp blinks in white at a plurality of different timings. By differentiating the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between a plurality of different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to 2 or 3 times. As a result, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings. The number of times the white blinks can be made different. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

At the final time tb18 of the fanning part of the SP reach A in the first half of the SP, Yumemu-chan explodes before the hit / fail decision (big hit, loss, development in the second half of the SP reach) as shown in FIG. 67 (b18). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to the production that incites whether or not to catch. At time tb18, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes. For example, the grandchild table W8 corresponds to the grandchild table W8 for the frame lamp in the operation-promoting non-fanning 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, “FDC” is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 is set. The frame lamp keeps lighting white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until it reaches 0.

As a result, in the hit / fail branch in the fanning part of the SP first half reach A, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), the frame lamp is kept lit in white in the mute state, and the player is hit or miss. It is possible to convey the branch (decision timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the child table WD2 of the reach A fanning part in the first half of the SP, when a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. When the character emits a line, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tb4, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect in which Yume-chan located on the left side of the screen and Baku Chu located on the right side of the screen face each other as shown in FIG. 63 (b4). , Turn on the left frame lamp in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan, and turn on the right frame lamp in red corresponding to Baku Chu. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 has a green frame corresponding to Yumemu-chan, corresponding to the effect that Yumemu-chan, located on the left side of the screen, emits a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 has a red frame right lamp corresponding to the explosion chew, corresponding to the effect that the explosion chew located on the right side of the screen emits a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). Flashes.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters emitting lines are displayed, it is possible to appropriately express which character is emitting the lines by lighting / blinking the frame lamp, and the production in the fanning part is suitable for the game. Can be shown to others.

Further, in the child table WD2 of the reach A fanning part in the first half of the SP, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character when the character takes an action. ing.

For example, at time tb11, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to Yumemu-chan by making Yumemu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. 65 (b11), chase after the explosion chew. The left lamp of the frame blinks in green. Further, at the time tb8 and the time tb9, the effect control CPU 120 has a frame with a color corresponding to the character when there is a character line as shown in FIGS. 63 (b8) and 63 (b9) but no subtitle. Make the lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in FIGS. 64 (b8) and 64 (b9), even if there are lines of the character but no subtitles, the frame lamp is lit / blinked in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to appropriately show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the first half of SP]
FIG. 196 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a1), in the parent table for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the maximum time for ramp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). And the information for designating the child tables (WD3, YD3, LD3, AD3) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a2), in the child table WD3 for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the time of the hit epilogue part in the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp. And the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD3 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time ct1, the grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect of catching the explosion chew as shown in FIG. 68 (c1) after the pass / fail branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18). And make the frame lamp blink in white.

As described above, the white lighting in the pass / fail branch (tb18) has RGB data of "FDC", whereas the white blinking in tk1 after the hit is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF". At the time of hitting, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the winning / failing branch and brighter than the winning / failing branch, so that it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hit is achieved depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

In the time ct2 and the time ct3, the grandchild table W1 is specified. The grandchild table W1 corresponds to the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various luminances corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec. ing. By controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W1, the effect control CPU 120 hits and confirms the frame lamp in response to the effect of catching the explosion chew as shown in FIGS. 68 (c2) and 68 (c3). Light up in the rainbow color corresponding to.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b1), in the parent table for displaying the common symbol used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And the information for designating the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbolizing used for the hit epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A, the time of the symbolizing part in the hit epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A is set for the frame lamp. Along with subdividing, the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD0 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Further, the child table WD0 for displaying a common symbol is commonly used in the SP reach first half A and B, the SP reach second half A and B, and the SP final reach.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between the time ct4 and the time ct5 of 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 to display the frame lamp as a pattern in response to the effect of producing a hit pattern as shown in FIGS. 69 (c4) and 69 (c5). Blink in the corresponding bright white.

At the final time ct6 of the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is rainbow-colored and smooth in response to the effect that the hit symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 69 (c6). Light. At time ct6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD3 becomes 0. The frame lamp keeps the rainbow color lit.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for the time ct2 and the time ct3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp corresponds to the effect of catching the explosive chew. Lights up smoothly in rainbow color, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for the time tk6. Based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp corresponds to the effect that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table for the hit epilogue used at the time of hit notification and the grandchild table for the symbol output used at the time of displaying the hit symbol are shared, so that they are different at each of a plurality of different timings. It is possible to liven up each production with a sense of unity while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors without preparing a grandchild table. As a result, while reducing the data capacity, the player can better see the effect in the hit epilogue part by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 197 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the maximum time for ramp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And information for designating a child table (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP reach first half A, the time of the loss epilogue part in the SP reach first half A is subdivided for the frame lamp. , The grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD4 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Further, the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue is commonly used in the SP reach first half A and B, the SP reach second half A and B, and the SP final reach.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time td1. The grandchild table W13 corresponds to the grandchild table W13 for the frame lamp in the loss 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13 to produce an effect that fails to catch the explosion chew as shown in FIG. 70 (d1) after the pass / fail branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18). Correspondingly, the frame lamp is turned on in white.

As described above, in the white lighting in the pass / fail branch (tb18), the RGB data is "FDC", whereas in the white lighting in td1 after the loss notification, the RGB data is "888" or "444". .. As a result, at the time of loss, the frame lamp can be turned on in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the pass / fail branch (tb18). Can be notified to.

The grandchild table W14 is specified during the 5800 msec of the time td2. The grandchild table W14 corresponds to the grandchild table W14 for the frame lamp in the loss 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is designated at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W14, so that the frame lamp can be changed from td1 in response to the effect that Yumemu-chan loses and is disappointed as shown in FIG. 70 (d2). Also lights up in dark white.

As described above, in the rainbow lighting at the time of hit (tc2, ct3), the RGB data is switched at intervals of 30 msec, whereas in the dark white lighting at the time of loss (td2), the RGB data is longer than the hit time at 250 msec. It switches at intervals. As a result, since the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals in the hit time than in the loss time, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hit is achieved depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while emphasizing the lighting by the frame lamp at the time of hitting more than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing than at the time of losing, and as a result, the lamp that contrasts hitting and losing. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time dt3, the grandchild table W15 is specified. The grandchild table W15 corresponds to the grandchild table W15 for the frame lamp in the loss 3 luminance data table shown in FIG. 253, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec and "111" is specified in the next 550 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , "111" is specified in the last 600,000 msec (10 minutes). The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W15, so that the frame lamp is turned off in response to the effect that the screen goes dark due to the notification of the loss as shown in FIG. 70 (d3). ..

At time dt4, the grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W21 to display a normal screen as shown in FIG. 71 (d4), and the frame lamp has a yellow background lighting pattern. Turn on with. That is, the grandchild table W21 used in the state where the normal screen is displayed at the time of loss is a lighting mode corresponding to the normal background, and is the grandchild table W21 designated by the time ta1, the time ta4, and the time ta7 in the start part. Common.

At the time dt4, the lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the grandchild table W21 shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later, until it receives a variation pattern command that specifies the next variation when there is a hold, or when there is no hold. Until the customer waiting command is received in the lapse of time, the lamp control is performed while switching the RGB data, and even if the lamp control is performed based on the final RGB data, if the fluctuation pattern command or the customer waiting command has not been received yet, it is again. Lamp control is performed based on the first RGB data.

As shown in FIG. 190, from the time when the frame lamp is turned off at time dt3 to the time when the frame lamp is turned on in the background yellow lighting pattern in response to the effect that the normal screen is displayed at time dt4. Is displayed, and the frame lamp based on the luminance data table corresponding to the eye-catching screen is turned on. In this way, in the lamp control of the frame lamp at the time of loss, after the brightness data table (grandchild table) corresponding to the eye-catching screen is used, the grandchild used in the start part as the brightness data table corresponding to the normal screen. Table W21 is used. As a result, it is not necessary to separately prepare a luminance data table to be used until the symbol is confirmed even after the eye-catching screen is displayed, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21 also used in the start part. , The effect of the frame lamp can be shown to the player without any discomfort.

[Brightness data table used in the SP first half reach B fanning part]
FIG. 198 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach B. As shown in FIG. 198, in the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game. Information that specifies a child table (WD5, YD5, LD5, AD5) referred to at the time of lamp control for the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 199 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach B. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD5 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 199, in the frame lamp child table WD5, the time of the fanning part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is designated.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between 150 msec of time te8 and 210 msec of time te12, respectively. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. The grandchild table W4 is specified in both the time te8 and the time te12. In the time te8, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. The frame lamp blinks white twice, and at time te12, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle time consisting of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp is white three times. Flashes.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of different timings in one child table WD5, so that the frame lamp blinks in white at a plurality of different timings. By differentiating the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between a plurality of different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to 2 or 3 times. As a result, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings. The number of times the white blinks can be made different. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

At the final time te17 of the fanning part of the SP reach B in the first half of the SP, it is necessary to fuel whether Yumemu-chan loses in the hit / miss branch (big hit, loss, development in the second half of the SP reach) as shown in Fig. 77 (e17). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to the various effects. At time te18, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, in the hit / fail branch in the fanning part of the SP first half reach B, as shown in FIG. 77 (e17), the frame lamp is kept lit in white in the mute state, and the player is hit or miss. It is possible to convey the branch (decision timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the child table WD5 of the reach B fanning part in the first half of the SP, when a character appears, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. When the character emits a line, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time te4, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect in which Yume-chan located on the left side of the screen and Boingo located on the right side of the screen face each other as shown in FIG. 73 (e4). Turn on the left frame lamp in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan, and turn on the right frame lamp in cream color corresponding to Boingo. At time te5, the effect control CPU 120 has a green frame corresponding to Yumemu-chan, corresponding to the effect that Yumemu-chan, located on the left side of the screen, emits a line as shown in FIG. 73 (e5). Blink the left lamp. At the time te6, the effect control CPU 120 sets the frame right lamp in the cream color corresponding to the boingo in response to the effect that the boingo located on the right side of the screen emits a line as shown in FIG. 73 (e6). Make it blink.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters emitting lines are displayed, it is possible to appropriately express which character is emitting the lines by lighting / blinking the frame lamp, and the production in the fanning part is suitable for the game. Can be shown to others.

Further, in the child table WD5 of the reach B fanning part in the first half of the SP, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character when the character takes an action. ing.

For example, at the time te11, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the cream color corresponding to the boingo in correspondence with the effect that the boingo hits the pack as shown in FIG. 75 (e11). Further, at the time te7, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in green corresponding to the dream-chan when there is a line of Yume-chan as shown in FIG. 74 (e7) but there is no subtitle. Let me.

In this way, even if there is a character's dialogue but no subtitles as shown in FIG. 74 (e7), the luminance data (grandchildren) so that the frame lamp lights / blinks in the color corresponding to the character. RGB data in the table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to appropriately show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the first half of SP]
FIG. 200 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a1), in the parent table for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the maximum time for ramp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). And the information for designating the child tables (WD6, YD6, LD6, AD6) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a2), in the child table WD6 for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the time of the hit epilogue part in the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp. And the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD6 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tf1, the grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that Yume-chan as shown in FIG. 78 (f1) hits back the pack after the pass / fail branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17). The frame lamp blinks in white in response to the production.

The white lighting in the pass / fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249 described later, and the RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white blinking in tf1 after the hit is confirmed is RGB. The data is "FFF". As a result, at the time of hitting, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the hit / miss branch and brighter than the hit / miss branch. Can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At times tf2 to tf4, the grandchild table W1 is designated. By controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W1, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the effect that Boingo is attacked and Yumemu-chan wins as shown in FIGS. 78 (f2) to (f4). Then, turn on the frame lamp smoothly with the rainbow color corresponding to the hit confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 200 (b1), in the parent table for common design used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And the information for designating the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 200 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbolizing used for the hit epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B, the time of the symbolizing part in the hit epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B is set for the frame lamp. Along with subdividing, the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between the time tf5 and the time tf6 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 to display the frame lamp as a pattern in response to the effect of producing a hit pattern as shown in FIGS. 79 (f5) and 79 (f6). Blink in the corresponding bright white.

At the final time tf7 of the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is rainbow-colored and smooth in response to the effect that the hit symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 80 (f7). Light. At time tf7, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD6 becomes 0. The frame lamp keeps the rainbow color lit.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for the time tf2 to tf4, and based on the grandchild table W1, Boingo is attacked and Yumemu-chan wins. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for the time tf7, and the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color. As a result, in the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table for the hit epilogue used at the time of hit notification and the grandchild table for the symbol output used at the time of displaying the hit symbol are shared, so that they are different at each of a plurality of different timings. It is possible to liven up each production with a sense of unity while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors without preparing a grandchild table. As a result, while reducing the data capacity, the player can better see the effect in the hit epilogue part by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 201 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 201 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And information for designating a child table (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the first half SP reach B, the time of the loss epilogue part in the first half B of the SP reach is subdivided for the frame lamp. , The grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified between the time tg1 and the time tg2 for 200 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, so that after the pass / fail branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), Yume-chan as shown in FIG. 81 (g1) is skipped. In correspondence with, the frame lamp is turned on in white.

The white lighting in the pass / fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249 described later, and the RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white lighting in tg1 after the loss notification is described later. Based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, the RGB data thereof are “888” and “444”. As a result, at the time of loss, the frame lamp can be turned on in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the pass / fail branch (te17). Can be notified to.

The grandchild table W14 is designated during 5800 msec of time tg3. By controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W14, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the effect that Yumemu-chan is disappointed to lose as shown in FIGS. 70 (g2) and 70 (g3). Turn on the lamp in white, which is darker than tg1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of hit (tf2 to tf4) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225 described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 30 msec, whereas the rainbow lighting at the time of loss (tg3) is dark white. Is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit time. As a result, since the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals in the hit time than in the loss time, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hit is achieved depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while emphasizing the lighting by the frame lamp at the time of hitting more than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing than at the time of losing, and as a result, the lamp that contrasts hitting and losing. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tg4, the grandchild table W15 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to an effect in which a loss as shown in FIG. 82 (g4) is notified and the screen goes dark. ..

At time tg5, the grandchild table W21 is designated. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W21 to display a normal screen as shown in FIG. 81 (g5), and the frame lamp has a yellow background lighting pattern. Turn on with. Further, at the time tg5, the lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the accessory operation part during the development of the latter half of SP]
FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the accessory operation part at the time of the development of the latter half of the SP. The grandchild table included in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 202, in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp, the grandchild table referred to in the accessory operation part is designated for the frame lamp. Further, the child table WD8 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the first half portion (falling portion) of the accessory operation shown in FIGS. 171 (h1) to (h3) (FIGS. 83 (h1) to (h3)). Be done.

For example, the grandchild table W2 is specified between 7000 msec of time th1 to th3. The grandchild table W2 corresponds to the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp in the accessory operation red blinking luminance data table shown in FIG. 228, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W2, so that after the success / failure branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), the accessory as shown in FIGS. 83 (h1) to (h3) falls. The frame lamp blinks in red in response to such an effect.

The lamp control is also performed for the accessory lamp 9A during the time period th1 to th3 of 7,000 msec when the accessory falls. For example, during the time period th1 to th3 of 7000 msec when the accessory falls, the effect control CPU 120 is set to the child table corresponding to the drop operation of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table designated by the child table. Based on this, the accessory lamp 9A is blinked in red.

As a result, the player can be more effectively focused on the effect of dropping the accessory depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp and the accessory lamp 9A.

[Brightness data table used in the SP second half reach A fanning part]
FIG. 203 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach A. As shown in FIG. 203, in the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP second half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game. Information that specifies a child table (WD9, YD9, LD9, AD9) referred to during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIGS. 204 and 205 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD9 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIGS. 204 and 205, in the frame lamp child table WD9, the time of the fanning part of the SP second half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is specified. There is.

The luminance data corresponding to the times th4 to th10 are used for the lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half portion (rising portion) of the accessory operation shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, in the time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect of the accessory rising, and then in the time th7 to th10, the frame lamp reaches SP based on the grandchild table W3. Even the yellow color corresponding to the background of is lit as if it is hazy. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking yellow to a yellowish lighting corresponding to the background of SP second half reach A, making it easier for the player to understand that it has evolved into SP second half reach A. I can tell.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, the lamp control is also performed for the accessory lamp 9A. For example, during the time period th4 to th10 in which the accessory rises, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the child table corresponding to the ascending operation of the bonus in the bonus lamp 9A and the grandchild table designated by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually reduced so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the rising of the accessory, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes the screen showing that the SP second half reach A has been developed. You can draw the attention of the player.

The grandchild table W3 is designated between 1130 msec of time ti1, 1330 msec of time ti20, and 1560 msec of time ti11. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp is turned on as if it is yellow, which corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one cycle consisting of 720 msec (180 msec × 4). At time th7 to th10 and time ti1, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which exceeds one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which exceeds one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights yellow for 1330 msec, and at time ti11, the effect control is performed for 1560 msec, which exceeds two cycles. When the CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps of one child table WD9 based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of different timings, so that the frame lamps are turned on in yellow at a plurality of different timings. By differentiating the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 in the lamp control between a plurality of timings different from each other, the time for turning on the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD9, it is used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing different grandchild tables at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the data capacity, the time to turn on the frame lamp can be different in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

A grandchild table W4 is designated between 150 msec of time ti15 and ti24 and 210 msec of time ti14, ti23, and time ti35, respectively. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. The grandchild table W4 is specified in any of the time ti15, the time ti24, the time ti14, the time ti23, and the time ti35, but in the time ti15 and the time ti24, the effect control CPU 120 takes less than one cycle of 150 msec. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the frame lamp blinks white twice, and at the time ti14, the time ti23, and the time ti35, the effect control CPU 120 is the grandchild in one cycle time consisting of 210 msec. By controlling the lamp based on the table W4, the frame lamp blinks white three times.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of different timings in one child table WD9, so that the frame lamp blinks in white at a plurality of different timings. By differentiating the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between a plurality of different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to 2 or 3 times. As a result, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings. The number of times the white blinks can be made different. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

The grandchild table W7 is designated between 1000 msec of time ti36 to ti38. The grandchild table W7 corresponds to the grandchild table W7 for the frame lamp in the operation-promoting non-fanning 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W7.

At the final time ti39 of the fanning part of the second half of the SP reach A, Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan will fan whether or not to catch the Baku Chu in the hit / miss branch (big hit, loss) as shown in Fig. 95 (i39). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to such an effect. At time ti39, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, “FDC” is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 is set. The frame lamp keeps lighting white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until it reaches 0.

As described above, in the child table WD9 in the SP latter half reach A, the frame lamp blinks in white based on the grandchild table W7, and then the frame lamp lights in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the pass / fail branch in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A where the operation promotion is not performed, "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, is used. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to inform the player of the success / failure branch (decision timing) in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 95 (i39), the frame lamp is kept lit in white in the mute state, and it is possible to inform the player of the success / failure branch (decision timing) in an easy-to-understand manner. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 249, "FDC" is designated as the last RGB data of the grandchild table W7 used between 1000 msec of the time ti36 and ti38, and further, the grandchild table W8 used in the subsequent time ti39. The last RGB data is also designated as "FDC". As a result, the effect control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the luminance data of the "FDC" is output to the LED driver based on the grandchild table W7, and then continuously continues the luminance data of the "FDC" based on the grandchild table W8. Since it is output to the driver, it is possible to preferably produce the timing of determining the success / failure branch by simpler lamp control without increasing the amount of data too much.

Further, in the child table WD9 of the reach A fanning part in the latter half of the SP, when a character appears, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. When the character emits a line, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time ti2, the effect control CPU 120 is used to produce an effect in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan located on the left side of the screen and Baku Chu located on the right side of the screen face each other as shown in FIG. 84 (i2). Correspondingly, the frame left lamp is lit in white corresponding to Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan, and the frame right lamp is lit in red corresponding to Baku Chu. At time ti3, the effect control CPU 120 has a green frame corresponding to Yumemu-chan, corresponding to the effect that Yumemu-chan, located on the left side of the screen, emits a line as shown in FIG. 84 (i3). Blink the left lamp. At the time ti4, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the effect that the jam-chan located on the left side of the screen emits a line as shown in FIG. 85 (i4), and the purple frame left lamp corresponding to the jam-chan. Flashes. At time ti5, the effect control CPU 120 has a red frame right lamp corresponding to the explosion chew, corresponding to the effect that the explosion chew located on the right side of the screen emits a line as shown in FIG. 85 (i5). Flashes.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters emitting lines are displayed, it is possible to appropriately express which character is emitting the lines by lighting / blinking the frame lamp, and the production in the fanning part is suitable for the game. Can be shown to others.

Further, in the child table WD9 of the SP second half reach A fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character when the character takes an action. ing.

For example, at time ti21, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to Yumemu-chan in response to an effect in which Yumemu-chan, located on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. 90 (i21), chases the explosion chew. The left lamp of the frame blinks in green. Further, at the time ti32 and the time ti34, the effect control CPU 120 has a color corresponding to the character when there is a line of the character as shown in FIGS. 94 (i32) and 95 (i34) but no subtitle. Flashes the frame lamp with.

In this way, as shown in FIGS. 94 (i32) and 95 (i34), even if there are lines of the character but no subtitles, the frame lamp lights / blinks in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to appropriately show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the latter half of SP]
FIG. 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a1), in the parent table for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the maximum time for ramp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). And the information for designating the child tables (WD10, YD10, LD10, AD10) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a2), in the child table WD10 for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the time of the hit epilogue part in the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp. And the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD10 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at times tj1 to tj3, the grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect of catching the explosion chew as shown in FIG. 97 (j1) after the pass / fail branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39). And make the frame lamp blink in white.

The white lighting in the pass / fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249 described later, and the RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white blinking in tj1 after the hit is confirmed is RGB. The data is "FFF". As a result, at the time of hitting, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the hit / miss branch and brighter than the hit / miss branch, so that the hit is made depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At times tj2 and tj3, the grandchild table W1 is specified. By controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W1, the effect control CPU 120 hits and confirms the frame lamp in response to the effect of catching the explosion chew as shown in FIGS. 97 (j2) and 97 (j3). Lights up smoothly with the rainbow color corresponding to.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b1), in the parent table for displaying the common symbol used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And the information for designating the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbolizing used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the time of the symbolizing part in the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A is set for the frame lamp. Along with subdividing, the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between the time tj4 and the time tj5 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 to display the frame lamp as a pattern in response to the effect of producing a hit pattern as shown in FIGS. 98 (j4) and (j5). Blink in the corresponding bright white.

At the final time tj6 of the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is rainbow-colored and smooth in response to the effect that the hit symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 98 (j6). Light. At time tj6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD10 becomes 0. The frame lamp keeps the rainbow color lit.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for the time tj2 and tj3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect of catching the explosion chew. The grandchild table W1 is designated for the time tj6, and the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. It lights up smoothly in rainbow color. As a result, in the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table for the hit epilogue used at the time of hit notification and the grandchild table for the symbol output used at the time of displaying the hit symbol are shared, so that they are different at each of a plurality of different timings. It is possible to liven up each production with a sense of unity while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors without preparing a grandchild table. As a result, while reducing the data capacity, the player can better see the effect in the hit epilogue part by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 207 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And information for designating a child table (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the time of the loss epilogue part in the SP reach first half B is subdivided for the frame lamp. , The grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time tk1. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13 to produce an effect that fails to catch the explosion chew as shown in FIG. 99 (k1) after the pass / fail branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39). Correspondingly, the frame lamp is turned on in white.

The white lighting in the pass / fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249 described later, and the RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white lighting in tk1 after the loss notification is described later. Based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, the RGB data thereof are “888” and “444”. As a result, at the time of loss, the frame lamp can be turned on in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the pass / fail branch (ti39). Can be notified to.

A grandchild table W14 is specified between 5800 msec of time tk2 and time tk3. By controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W14, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the effect that Yumemu-chan is disappointed to lose as shown in FIGS. 99 (k2) and 99 (k3). Turn on the lamp in white, which is darker than tk1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of hit (tj2, tj3) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit time. As a result, since the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals in the hit time than in the loss time, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hit is achieved depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while emphasizing the lighting by the frame lamp at the time of hitting more than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing than at the time of losing, and as a result, the lamp that contrasts hitting and losing. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tk4, the grandchild table W15 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to an effect in which a loss as shown in FIG. 100 (k4) is notified and the screen goes dark. ..

At time tk5, the grandchild table W21 is designated. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W21 to display a normal screen as shown in FIG. 100 (k5), and the frame lamp has a yellow background lighting pattern. Turn on with. Further, at the time tk5, the lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the SP second half reach B fanning part]
FIG. 208 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach B. As shown in FIG. 208, in the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP second half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game. Information that specifies a child table (WD12, YD12, LD12, AD12) referred to during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 209 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach B. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD12 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 209, in the frame lamp child table WD12, the time of the fanning part of the SP second half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is designated.

The luminance data corresponding to the times th4 to th10 are used for the lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half portion (rising portion) of the accessory operation shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, in the time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect of the accessory rising, and then in the time th7 to th10, the frame lamp reaches SP based on the grandchild table W3. Even the yellow color corresponding to the background of is lit as if it is hazy. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking yellow to a yellowish lighting corresponding to the background of SP second half reach B, making it easier for the player to understand that it has evolved into SP second half reach B. I can tell.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, the lamp control is also performed for the accessory lamp 9A. For example, during the time period th4 to th10 in which the accessory rises, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the child table corresponding to the ascending operation of the bonus in the bonus lamp 9A and the grandchild table designated by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually reduced so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the rising of the accessory, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes the screen showing that the SP second half reach B has been developed. You can draw the attention of the player.

The grandchild table W3 is designated between 1130 msec of time tun5, 1330 msec of time tun14, and 1560 msec of time tun6. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp is turned on as if it is yellow, which corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one cycle consisting of 720 msec (180 msec × 4). In the time th7 to th10, the time tn1, and the time tn5, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec exceeding one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec and the time. In tun14, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 in 1330 msec, which exceeds one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec, and in time tun6, in 1560 msec, which exceeds two cycles. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps in one child table WD12 based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of different timings, so that the frame lamps are turned on in yellow at a plurality of different timings. By differentiating the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 in the lamp control between a plurality of timings different from each other, the time for turning on the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD12, it is used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing different grandchild tables at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the data capacity, the time to turn on the frame lamp can be different in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

A grandchild table W4 is designated between 150 msec of time tun3, thym12, and thym25 and between 210 msec of thym4, tun13, thyme tn15, thyme tun19, and thyme tun22, respectively. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. The grandchild table W4 is specified for all of time tun3, time tun12, time tun25, time tun4, time tun13, time tun15, time tun19, and time tun22, but at time tun3, time tun12, and time tun25, the grandchild table W4 is specified. When the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, the frame lamp blinks white twice, and the time nt4, the time tun13, the time tun15, and the time nt19, At the time tn22, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle time consisting of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp blinks white three times.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of different timings in one child table WD12, so that the frame lamp blinks in white at a plurality of different timings. By differentiating the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between a plurality of different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to 2 or 3 times. As a result, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings. The number of times the white blinks can be made different. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

At the last time tn27 of the fanning part of the SP second half reach B, the effect of fanning whether or not to catch the crab in the hit / miss branch (big hit, loss) as shown in FIG. 109 (n27) is supported. The frame lamp lights up in white. At the time tun27, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, in the hit / fail branch in the fanning part of the SP second half reach B, as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp is kept lit in white in the mute state, and the player is hit or miss. It is possible to convey the branch (decision timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the child table WD12 of the reach B fanning part in the latter half of the SP, when a character appears, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. When the character emits a line, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tn2, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect in which jam-chan and Nana-chan located on the left side of the screen and a crab located on the right side of the screen face each other as shown in FIG. 101 (n2). Then, the left frame lamp is blinked in white corresponding to Jam and Nana, and the right frame lamp is turned on in red corresponding to the crab. Further, since Jam and Nana located on the left side of the screen emit lines, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in white.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters emitting lines are displayed, it is possible to appropriately express which character is emitting the lines by lighting / blinking the frame lamp, and the production in the fanning part is suitable for the game. Can be shown to others.

Further, in the child table WD12 of the SP second half reach B fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character when the character takes an action. ing.

For example, at the time tn18, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in pink corresponding to Nana-chan in response to the effect that Nana-chan prays as shown in FIG. 106 (n18). Further, at the time tn10, the effect control CPU 120 has a color (red) corresponding to the character (crab) when there is a line of the character (crab) as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) but no subtitle. Flashes the frame lamp with.

In this way, even if there is a character line but no subtitles as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), the luminance data (grandchildren) so that the frame lamp lights / blinks in the color corresponding to the character. RGB data in the table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to appropriately show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per SP second half reach B]
FIG. 210 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a1), in the parent table for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the maximum time for ramp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). And the information for designating the child tables (WD13, YD13, LD13, AD13) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a2), in the child table WD13 for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the time of the hit epilogue part in the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp. And the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD13 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time to1, the grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to correspond to an effect of catching a crab as shown in FIG. 110 (o1) after the success / failure branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27). And blink the frame lamp in white.

The white lighting in the pass / fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249 described later, and the RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white blinking in to1 after the hit is confirmed is RGB. The data is "FFF". As a result, at the time of hitting, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the hit / miss branch and brighter than the hit / miss branch. Can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At times to2 to to5, the grandchild table W1 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W1 so that the caught crabs as shown in FIGS. 110 (o2) to 111 (o5) can be used as the signboard of the shop, and Jam and Nana can use them. In response to the delightful production, the frame lamp is lit smoothly with the rainbow color corresponding to the hit confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b1), in the parent table for displaying the common symbol used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And the information for designating the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbolizing used for the hit epilogue part of the SP reach second half B, the time of the symbolizing part in the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B is set for the frame lamp. Along with subdividing, the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between the time to 6 and the time to 7 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4, so that the frame lamp is designed to correspond to the effect of producing a hit pattern as shown in FIGS. 111 (o6) and 112 (o7). Blink in bright white corresponding to the output.

At the last time to 8 of the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is rainbow-colored and smooth in response to the effect that the hit symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 112 (o8). Light. At time to 8, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD13 becomes 0. The frame lamp keeps the rainbow color lit.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for the time to2 to to5, and based on the grandchild table W1, the caught crab is used as a sign of the shop, and Jam and Nana The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color in response to a pleasing effect, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for time to8, and the winning design is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color in response to such an effect. As a result, in the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table for the hit epilogue used at the time of hit notification and the grandchild table for the symbol output used at the time of displaying the hit symbol are shared, so that they are different at each of a plurality of different timings. It is possible to liven up each production with a sense of unity while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors without preparing a grandchild table. As a result, while reducing the data capacity, the player can better see the effect in the hit epilogue part by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 211 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And information for designating a child table (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP reach second half B, the time of the loss epilogue part in the SP reach second half B is subdivided for the frame lamp. , The grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time tp1. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect of failing to catch the crab as shown in FIG. 113 (p1) after the pass / fail branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27). Then, the frame lamp is turned on in white.

The white lighting in the pass / fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249 described later, and the RGB data is “FDC”, whereas the white lighting in tp1 after the loss notification is described later. Based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, the RGB data thereof are “888” and “444”. As a result, at the time of loss, the frame lamp can be turned on in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the pass / fail branch (tn27). Can be notified to.

A grandchild table W14 is specified between 5800 msec of time tp2 and time tp3. By controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W14, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the effect that Jam and Nana are disappointed to lose as shown in FIGS. 113 (p2) and 113 (p3). The frame lamp is turned on in white, which is darker than tp1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of hit (to2 to to5) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225 described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 30 msec, whereas the rainbow lighting is dark at the time of loss (tp2, tp3). The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit time. As a result, since the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals in the hit time than in the loss time, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hit is achieved depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while emphasizing the lighting by the frame lamp at the time of hitting more than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing than at the time of losing, and as a result, the lamp that contrasts hitting and losing. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tp4, the grandchild table W15 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to an effect in which a loss as shown in FIG. 114 (p4) is notified and the screen goes dark. ..

At time tp5, the grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W21 to display a normal screen as shown in FIG. 114 (p5), and the frame lamp has a yellow background lighting pattern. Turn on with. Further, at the time tp5, the lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach fanning part]
FIG. 212 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP final reach. As shown in FIG. 212, in the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game effect. Information that specifies a child table (WD15, YD15, LD15, AD15) referred to during lamp control for the lamp 9 is stored.

FIGS. 213 and 214 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP final reach. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD15 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, in the frame lamp child table WD15, the time of the fanning part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is specified. ..

The luminance data corresponding to the times th4 to th10 are used for the lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half portion (rising portion) of the accessory operation shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, in the time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect of the accessory rising, and then in the time th7 to th10, the frame lamp reaches SP based on the grandchild table W3. Even the yellow color corresponding to the background of is lit as if it is hazy. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking yellow to a yellowish lighting corresponding to the background of the SP final reach, so that the player can easily understand that the SP final reach has been developed. Can be done.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, the lamp control is also performed for the accessory lamp 9A. For example, during the time period th4 to th10 in which the accessory rises, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the child table corresponding to the ascending operation of the bonus in the bonus lamp 9A and the grandchild table designated by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually reduced so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the player is not aware that the accessory is raised by the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A, while the game is played on the screen showing that the SP final reach is achieved by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Can draw people's attention.

The grandchild table W3 is designated between 1130 msec of time tr1, 1330 msec of time tr19 and tr22, and 1560 msec of time tr15. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp is turned on as if it is yellow, which corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one cycle consisting of 720 msec (180 msec × 4). In the time th7 to th10 and the time tr1, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec exceeding one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec, and the time tr19 and the time In tr22, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 in 1330 msec exceeding one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1330 msec, and in the time tr15, in 1560 msec exceeding two cycles. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps of one child table WD15 based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of different timings, so that the frame lamps are turned on in yellow at a plurality of different timings. Then, by making the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 different in the lamp control between a plurality of timings different from each other, the time for turning on the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD15, it is used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing different grandchild tables at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the data capacity, the time to turn on the frame lamp can be different in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

Further, the child table WD9 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the fanning part of the SP final reach are different from each other. Since the reference time is changed while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the plurality of timings, the data capacity used for lamp control in multiple reach effects is reduced. The time to turn on the frame lamp can be different in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach. Similarly, in the child table WD2 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables should be prepared at each of a plurality of different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the data capacity used for lamp control is reduced, and the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach is different. May be good.

A grandchild table W4 is specified between 150 msec of time tr36 and 210 msec of time tr40 and time tr47, respectively. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. The grandchild table W4 is specified in all of the time tr36, the time tr40, and the time tr47. In the time tr36, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. By doing so, the frame lamp blinks white twice, and at the time tr40 and the time tr47, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle time consisting of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp is used. Flashes white three times.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of different timings in one child table WD15, so that the frame lamp blinks in white at a plurality of different timings. By differentiating the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between a plurality of different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to 2 or 3 times. As a result, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings. The number of times the white blinks can be made different. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

Further, the child table WD2 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD5 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD9 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A, and the child table WD9 used in the SP second half reach B fanning part. In both the child table WD12 used in the part and the child table WD15 used in the fanning part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W4 can be used without preparing a separate grandchild table at each of a plurality of different timings. By changing the reference time while using it, the number of white blinks can be made different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

At time tr41, grandchild table W5 or grandchild table W6 is designated. When the information for executing the red cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, the grandchild table W5 is specified at the time tr41, and when the information for executing the green cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, the grandchild table W5 is specified. The grandchild table W6 is specified at time tr41.

The grandchild table W5 corresponds to the grandchild tables W5a to W5e for the frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild tables W5 (W5a to W5e), the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is initially various for only the R data at intervals of 30 msec. Data showing various brightness is specified, data showing various brightness is specified only for R data at the next 20 msec interval, and finally various brightness is specified only for R data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The data indicating is specified. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red in correspondence with the cut-in effect (red cut-in effect) as shown in FIG. 128 (r41) by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W5.

The grandchild table W6 corresponds to the grandchild tables W6a to W6e for the frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild tables W6 (W6a to W6e), the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is initially various for only the G data at intervals of 30 msec. Data showing various brightness is specified, data showing various brightness is specified only for G data at the next 20 msec interval, and finally various brightness is specified only for G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The data indicating is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W6 to light the frame lamp in green in correspondence with the cut-in effect (green cut-in effect) as shown in FIG. 128 (r41).

As shown in FIGS. 128 (r40) and 128 (r41), when the push button 31B is displayed and the cut-in effect is executed, the character does not emit a line and the subtitles are not displayed. Further, the frame lamp that is the target of the lamp control in the scene other than the cut-in effect in the final reach of the SP is still the target of the lamp control in the cut-in effect.

As a result, the display (button display) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B and the subtitle display do not overlap when executing the cut-in effect, and the overlap makes it difficult to recognize either display. It is possible to prevent the contents of the display from being misunderstood. Further, the luminance data of the lamp control (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect is the frame of the same place as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. By being designed to use a lamp, it is possible to prevent lighting / blinking due to an extra lamp from being mixed and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide an effect in a suitable fanning part.

In the present embodiment, the lamp control target is common in that the frame lamp is used for both the button display and the cut-in effect and the other SP final reach effects. Not exclusively. For example, only one or more game effect lamps 9 such as a frame lamp, a character lamp 9A, and a board left lamp 9B are used for the button display and the cut-in effect and the other SP final reach effects. The target of the lamp control may be common in terms of points, or the target of lamp control may be common in that all the game effect lamps 9 are used.

At 860 msec at time tr49 and time tr50, the grandchild table W9 is specified. The grandchild table W9 corresponds to the grandchild table W9 for the frame lamp in the trigger display luminance data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, “D00” is designated at 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W9, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the effect that the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) and (r50) is displayed in the center. Then, turn on the frame lamp in red.

The grandchild table W10 is designated at the time tr51 to tr54, which is the last time of the fanning part of the SP final reach. The grandchild table W10 corresponds to the grandchild table W10 for the frame lamp in the operation promotion luminance data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 is used. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W10, the player is urged to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. 131 (r51) to 132 (r54). , The frame lamp blinks in red. During the time tr51 to tr54, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10 for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD15 becomes 0. Until then, the frame lamp keeps blinking red based on the grandchild table W10 for 10 minutes.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound corresponding to the reach (BGM) were output in the hit / fail branch in the fanning part of the SP final reach. In the state, the frame lamps are switched one after another, such as blinking white, lighting red, and blinking red, and it is possible to excite the effect of promoting the operation for the player at the hit / miss branch (determined timing).

Here, the child table WD2 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD5 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD9 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A, and the SP second half reach B. When the operation promotion that prompts the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) is not performed like the child table WD12 used in the fanning part, the frame lamp is set at the final hit / fail branch of the fanning part. It keeps lighting in white and then shifts to the hit epilogue part or the lost epilogue part. On the other hand, when the operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) like the child table WD15 used in the fanning part of the SP final reach, it is shown in FIG. 130 (r47). After blinking white in a production that incites whether or not the ally character catches the explosive chew, the explosive chew and the ally character are alternately displayed as shown in FIG. 130 (r48). After the frame lamp lights up in red in response to such an effect, the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) and (r50) is switched to the grandchild table W9 and based on the grandchild table W9. The frame lamp lights up in red in response to the effect displayed in the center.

In this way, in the SP reach production where the operation promotion that encourages the player to operate is not performed in the pass / fail branch, the production is stopped by keeping the mute state and keeping the frame lamp lit in white. Can be shown to the player, and the success / failure branch (decision timing) can be easily communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach effect in which the operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to operate in the pass / fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound corresponding to the reach (BGM) are output, and the operation promotion is further performed. By switching and using the grandchild table a plurality of times in order to control the frame lamp so as to correspond to the mode corresponding to the above, the timing of determining the success / failure branch can be suitably produced by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. As described above, it is possible to preferably produce the timing of determining the success / failure branch by different sound control or lamp control depending on whether the operation promotion is performed in the success / failure branch or the operation promotion is performed. Further, in the SP final reach in which the operation is promoted to encourage the player to operate in the pass / fail branch, the luminance data (RGB data) is set to "500" and "D00" at intervals of 30 msec based on the grandchild table W10. With this, the timing of determining the success / failure branch can be suitably produced depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Further, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach fanning part, when a character appears, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, and the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character when the character emits a line.

For example, at time tr2, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect in which six ally characters located on the left side of the screen and an explosion chew located on the right side of the screen face each other as shown in FIG. 115 (r2). Then, the left frame lamp is blinked in white corresponding to the six ally characters, and the right frame lamp is turned on in red corresponding to the explosion chew. Further, since the six ally characters located on the left side of the screen emit lines, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in white. Further, at the time tr3, the effect control CPU 120 has a red frame corresponding to the explosive chew in response to the effect that the explosive chew located on the right side of the screen emits a line as shown in FIG. 115 (r3). Blink the right lamp.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters emitting lines are displayed, it is possible to appropriately express which character is emitting the lines by lighting / blinking the frame lamp, and the production in the fanning part is suitable for the game. Can be shown to others.

Further, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character when the character takes an action. There is.

For example, at the time tr11, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in blue corresponding to the maid A in response to the effect that the maid A chases the explosive chew as shown in FIG. 118 (r11). Further, in the time tr25, the time tr27, the time tr29, the time tr31, the time tr33, and the time tr35, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), FIG. (R33), and when there is a character line as shown in FIG. 126 (r35) but no subtitle, the frame lamp is blinked in the color corresponding to the character.

Thus, as shown in FIGS. 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), there are character lines while subtitles are present. Even if there is no such data, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights / blinks in the color corresponding to the character. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to appropriately show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

[Brightness data table used in epilogue part per SP final reach]
FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a hit epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a1), in the parent table for the accessory operation used for the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). And the information for designating the child tables (WD16a, YD16a, LD16a, AD16a) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a2), in the child table WD16a for the accessory operation used for the SP final reach hit epilogue part, the time of the accessory operation portion in the SP final reach hit epilogue part is subdivided for the frame lamp. And the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD16a of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, the grandchild table W18 is specified between 10000 msec of time ts1 to ts3. The grandchild table W18 corresponds to the grandchild table W18 for the frame lamp in the hit-determined luminance data table shown in FIG. 256, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightness corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec. Then, "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, so that after the pass / fail branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the accessory as shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to (s3) falls. The frame lamp blinks in seven colors in response to such an effect.

As shown in FIG. 215 (b1), in the parent table for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for ramp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). , Information for designating a child table (WD16b, YD16b, LD16b, AD16b) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 215 (b2), in the child table WD16b for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the hit epilogue portion in the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition, the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD16b of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at times ts3-2 to ts3-8, the grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the effect control CPU 120 seems to have caught the explosion chew while raising the accessory as shown in FIGS. 173 (s3-2) to 174 (s3-8). The frame lamp blinks in white, which corresponds to the rise of the accessory, in response to the effect that the display appears.

At times ts4 to ts7, the grandchild table W1 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W1 to make the frame lamp correspond to the effect of catching the explosion chew as shown in FIGS. 134 (s4) to 135 (s7). Lights up smoothly with the rainbow color corresponding to the hit confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c1), in the parent table for displaying the common symbol used for the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). And the information for designating the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c2), in the child table WD0 for common symbolizing used for the SP final reach hit epilogue part, the time of the symbolizing portion in the SP final reach hit epilogue part is subdivided for the frame lamp. At the same time, the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, a grandchild table W4 is specified between 5000 msec of time ts8 and time ts9. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 to display the frame lamp as a pattern in response to the effect of producing a hit pattern as shown in FIGS. 135 (s8) and 135 (s9). Blink in the corresponding bright white.

At the final time ts10 of the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow color in correspondence with the effect that the hit symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 136 (s10). At time ts10, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD16 becomes 0. The frame lamp keeps the rainbow color lit.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for the time ts4 to ts7, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect of catching the explosive chew. It lights up smoothly in rainbow color, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for the time ts10. Based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect that the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen. It lights up smoothly in rainbow color. As a result, in the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table used at the time of hit notification and the grandchild table used at the time of displaying the hit symbol are shared, so that different grandchild tables are not prepared at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the amount of data used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors, each effect can be enlivened with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the data capacity, the player can better see the effect in the hit epilogue part by using the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD16 of the epilogue part per SP final reach, in the production where the accessory falls, the rainbow color and the achromatic color (RGB data of "333") are switched alternately. The frame lamp is lamp controlled. As a result, by occasionally sandwiching an achromatic color with respect to the rainbow-colored chromatic color, it is possible to perform an effect that emphasizes the big hit and congratulates the player. After that, in the production where the ally character catches the explosion chew, a production that congratulates the player in a calm manner that it became a big hit is executed by lighting a smooth rainbow color without sandwiching the achromatic color. be able to. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be preferably shown to the player.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach loss epilogue part]
FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a1), in the parent table for the loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). , Information for designating a child table (WD17, YD17, LD17, AD17) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a2), in the child table WD17 for the loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the loss epilogue part in the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and each time. The grandchild table referenced by the band is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD17 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time tu1. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect in which the explosion chew escapes as shown in FIG. 137 (u1) after the pass / fail branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54). Then, the frame lamp is turned on in white.

The red blinking in the pass / fail branch (tr54) is based on the grandchild table W10 shown in FIG. 250 described later, and the RGB data includes "D00", whereas the white lighting in tu1 after the loss notification is described later. Based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, the RGB data thereof are “888” and “444”. As a result, at the time of loss, the frame lamp can be turned on in white, which is darker than the red blinking in the pass / fail branch (tr54), so that it is possible to notify the player that the loss has occurred.

The grandchild table W14 is specified during 3900 msec of time tr2. By controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W14, the effect control CPU 120 sets the frame lamp to tu1 in response to the effect that six ally characters lose and are disappointed as shown in FIG. 137 (u2). Lights in a darker white color.

The rainbow lighting at the time of hit (ts4 to ts7) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225 described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 30 msec, whereas the rainbow lighting at the time of loss (tu1) is dark white lighting. Is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit time. As a result, since the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals in the hit time than in the loss time, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hit is achieved depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while emphasizing the lighting by the frame lamp at the time of hitting more than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing than at the time of losing, and as a result, the lamp that contrasts hitting and losing. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the child table WD4 of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of the SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of the SP second half reach B, the same as the child table WD17 of the SP final reach. In addition, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of loss based on the grandchild table W14. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, whereas in the SP final reach, it is 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is controlled by the grandchild table W14. In this way, it is possible to make the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of loss common among a plurality of different reach, but to make the lamp control time different with reference to the grandchild table. As a result, in the child table used in each of the plurality of different reach, the reference time is changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to the time of loss in each of the different plurality of reach. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to make the time for lighting the frame lamp different in the lighting mode corresponding to the loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

At time tu3, the grandchild table W15 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to an effect in which a loss as shown in FIG. 137 (u3) is notified and the screen goes dark. ..

At time tu4, the grandchild table W21 is designated. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W21 to display a normal screen as shown in FIG. 138 (u4). Turn on with. Further, at the time tu4, the lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the relief part]
FIG. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the relief per part. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 217, in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp, the time of the part per relief is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, at 1980 msec at time tv1, the grandchild table W16 is specified. The grandchild table W16 corresponds to the grandchild table W16 for the frame lamp in the one-luminance data table per relief shown in FIG. 254, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and each in the next 30 msec. "B00" is specified for the lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W16, so that the frame lamp is turned on in red in correspondence with the relief effect shown in FIG. 139 (v1).

In this way, from the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W21 last designated in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of loss, the child table WD18 used for relief is first. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the designated grandchild table W16, the frame lamp lights even brighter. As a result, at the time of relief hit, the frame lamp lights up brighter than the state after the loss notification, so that the player can easily understand the loss notification and the subsequent relief hit notification depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. I can show you.

In the present embodiment, the frame lamp is once lit in yellow corresponding to the normal background after the loss notification, and further, at the time of relief hit, the frame lamp is lit brighter in red corresponding to the relief effect. there were. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of loss, the grandchild table W15 is specified at the end, so that "111" is specified as the final luminance data (RGB data). May be done. As a result, at the end of the loss, the frame lamp turns off in white. Further, "AAA" may be designated as the first luminance data (RGB data) in the first designated grandchild table W16 of the child table WD18 used at the time of relief. As a result, at the beginning of the relief hit after the loss notification, the frame lamp lights up brightly with a white system. In this way, at the time of relief hit, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (white) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification, so that the loss depends on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. The notification and the subsequent relief hit notification can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At 700 msec of time tv2, the grandchild table W17 is specified. The grandchild table W17 corresponds to the grandchild table W17 for the frame lamp in the two-luminance data table per relief shown in FIG. 255, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white data such as “AAA” and “DDD” for each lamp at intervals of 30 msec. Is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W17 to light the frame lamp in white in accordance with the whiteout effect shown in FIG. 139 (v2).

The grandchild table W4 is specified between the time tv3 and the time tv4 for 5000 msec. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white in correspondence with the effect of displaying the patterns shown in FIGS. 140 (v3) and 140 (v4).

In the time tv5, which is the last part of the relief, the grandchild table W1 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly turn on the frame lamp in the rainbow color corresponding to the hit confirmation in accordance with the effect of displaying the pattern shown in FIG. 140 (v5). .. At time tv5, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD18 becomes 0. The frame lamp keeps the rainbow color lit.

[Brightness data table used in the re-lottery part]
FIG. 218 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part. As shown in FIG. 218, in the parent table in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and for each game effect lamp 9. Information that specifies a child table (WD19, YD19, LD19, AD19) referred to during lamp control is stored.

(Brightness data table used before promoting operation)
FIG. 219 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part (before promotion of operation). As shown in FIG. 219, as the child table WD19 of the frame lamp, a child table used before the start of movement of the symbol and a child table used after the start of movement of the symbol are prepared. In each child table in these re-lottery parts, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is specified.

FIG. 219 (a) shows a child table used before the symbol starts to move. For example, at times tA6 to tA8, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is designated. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the designated grandchild table, and as shown in FIGS. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8), after the re-lottery effect is started, the design is performed by the re-lottery effect. Turn off the frame lamp once before it starts to move.

In this way, once the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a lighting mode corresponding to the effect that the symbol starts to move by the re-lottery effect. Therefore, the symbol starts to move by the re-lottery effect depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. It is possible to convey this to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 219 (b) shows a child table used after the start of movement of the symbol. At the times tA9 and tA10, the grandchild table W19 is specified. The grandchild table W19 corresponds to the grandchild table W19 for the frame lamp in the re-lottery effect luminance data table shown in FIG. 257, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 60 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to correspond to an effect in which the symbol of "2" as shown in FIGS. 143 (A9) and 144 (A10) is reduced. Flash the frame lamp in red.

At times tA11 to tA46, the grandchild table W20 is designated. The grandchild table W20 corresponds to the grandchild table W20 for the frame lamp in the re-lottery effect luminance data table shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec shorter than that of the grandchild table W20. Has been done. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the effect of changing at high speed while switching the symbols as shown in FIGS. 144 (A11) to 156 (A46). The frame lamp blinks in red at high speed.

(Brightness data table used when the design is promoted after the operation is promoted)
FIG. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a re-lottery part (promotion of a symbol after promotion of operation). The frame lamp child table WD20 shown in FIG. 220 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. 219. As shown in FIG. 220, in the frame lamp child table WD20, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is designated.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between 5000 msec of time tB1 to tB4. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B4), after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, "3". The frame lamp is blinked in white in response to the effect of displaying the design so that the design of is enlarged.

At times tB5 to tB9, the grandchild table W18 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the design of "3" as shown in FIGS. 157 (B5) to (B9) and displays it in a normal size. The frame lamp is blinked in rainbow color in response to the effect of confirming the symbol after the symbol of "3" is shaken and displayed.

It should be noted that the blinking of the rainbow color by the lamp control at the time tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow color lighting by the lamp control based on the grandchild table W1. For example, at times tB5 to tB9, it blinks more violently than the smooth lighting of the rainbow color. In the time tB5 to tB9, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the grandchild table is used for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD20 becomes 0. Based on the frame lamp keeps blinking rainbow color.

In this way, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, as a lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery, the rainbow is the same as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part. The frame lamp lights up in color, but when the symbol is promoted from the symbol "2" and replaced with the symbol "3" by re-lottery, the blinking rainbow color in tB5 to tB9 is once "2" in the hit epilogue part. The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting when the symbol of is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the player that the winning symbol has been promoted by the re-lottery depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the symbol starts to move due to the re-lottery effect with the lights off, and the symbol is swaying and displayed, the color is smooth and rainbow-colored based on the luminance data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W19). Flashes red in a different lighting mode. As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the hit symbol temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part is determined depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, the frame lamp is designed to blink in rainbow color with the start of the effect of confirming the symbol after the symbol of "3" as shown in FIGS. 159 (B7) to (B9) is shaken and displayed. Therefore, it is easy for the designer to decide the start trigger for blinking the frame lamp in rainbow color.

Further, the blinking of the rainbow color when the symbol of "3" is shaken and displayed as shown in FIG. 159 (B7) is subsequently during the period for determining the symbol as shown in FIGS. 159 (B8) and (B9). Will be taken over. In this way, during the symbol determination period that is performed in a short period of time, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare repertoire is performed as it is without preparing a special luminance data table for lamp control. Therefore, the data. No extra capacity is added.

(Brightness data table used when the symbol is not promoted after the operation is promoted)
FIG. 221 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part (after the operation is promoted). The frame lamp child table WD21 shown in FIG. 221 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. 219. As shown in FIG. 221, in the frame lamp child table WD21, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is designated.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between 5000 msec of time tC1 to tC4. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C4), after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, "2". The frame lamp is blinked in white in response to the effect of displaying the design so that the design of is enlarged.

At times tC5 to tC9, the grandchild table W1 is designated. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 so that the design of "2" as shown in FIGS. 162 (C5) to 163 (C9) is shaken and displayed, and then the design is confirmed. The frame lamp is lit smoothly in rainbow color. In the time tC5 to tC9, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the grandchild table W1 is performed for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD21 becomes 0. The frame lamp keeps the rainbow color lit based on.

In this way, in the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, as a lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery, the grandchildren in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part. Table W1 is used. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for rainbow-colored lighting for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control and providing a sense of unity even for different parts (timing). It is possible to show the player a certain production. As a result, it is possible to show the player better the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in the state where the hit symbol is temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the symbol starts to move by the re-lottery effect with the lights off, and the symbol is shaken and displayed. At that time, the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color based on the luminance data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild tables W19 and W20). As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the hit symbol temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part is determined depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, the lighting of the rainbow color at the time tB5 to tB9 when the symbol of "2" is promoted to the symbol of "3" by the re-lottery is "2" without being promoted from the symbol of "2" by the re-lottery. The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth lighting of the rainbow color at the time tC5 to tC9 when the symbol of 1 is maintained. As a result, when the winning symbol is promoted in the re-lottery, the player can effectively congratulate the promotion of the winning symbol in the re-lottery depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and the winning symbol is promoted in the re-lottery. If not, the data capacity can be reduced by using the grandchild table W1 which is used in the hit epilogue part and is common to the grandchild table W1.

In addition, after the symbol of "2" as shown in FIGS. 163 (C7) to (C9) is finished, the symbol of "2" becomes a normal size and the symbol is fixed. Since the frame lamp is designed to light in the rainbow color, it is easy for the designer to decide the start opportunity to light the frame lamp in the rainbow color.

Further, the rainbow-colored lighting when the symbol of "3" as shown in FIG. 163 (C7) is shaken and displayed is subsequently during the period in which the symbol is determined as shown in FIGS. 163 (C8) and (C9). Will be taken over. In this way, during the symbol determination period that is performed in a short period of time, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare repertoire is performed as it is without preparing a special luminance data table for lamp control. Therefore, the data. No extra capacity is added.

[Brightness data table used in fanfare repertoire]
FIG. 222 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare repertoire. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD22 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 222, in the frame lamp child table WD22, the time of the fanfare repertoire is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is designated.

For example, at times tD1 and tE1, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified. By performing lamp control based on the designated grandchild table, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily sets the frame lamp before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1). Turn off the lights.

At times tD2 and tE2, a grandchild table for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare manner is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the designated grandchild table, and as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2), sets the frame lamp in a fanfare mode in accordance with the fanfare effect. It is turned on in the lighting mode. At the time tD2 and tE2, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the grandchild table is used for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD22 becomes 0. Based on the frame lamp keeps the fanfare mode lit.

[Smooth Rainbow Luminance Data Table]
FIG. 223 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 223, in the parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), which is referred to when the lamp is controlled for each game effect lamp 9. Information that specifies the child table (WS1, YS1, LS1, AS1) to be created is stored.

FIG. 224 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 224, in the child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table, a grandchild table (W1, Y1, L1, A1) referred to in a predetermined time zone is designated for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp has various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) at intervals of 30 msec. The data is sparsely specified. The effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the hit determination by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W1.

FIG. 226 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the accessory lamp and the grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 226, in the grandchild table Y1 for the accessory lamp, "FFFF" data is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. There is. The effect control CPU 120 lights the accessory lamp 9A in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table Y1. In the grandchild table L1 for the left panel lamp, the data of "FFFFF" is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the data of "WWWWWW" output to the left panel lamp 9B. The effect control CPU 120 lights the panel left lamp 9B in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table L1.

FIG. 227 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 227, in the grandchild table A1 for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and output to the electric chew lamp 9H. As the "RGB" data to be performed, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec. The effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights each of the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H in a rainbow color corresponding to the hit determination by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table A1.

[Character operation red flashing brightness data table]
FIG. 228 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the accessory operation red blinking luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec. "333" is specified. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W2.

[Yellow haze brightness data table]
FIG. 229 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely designated as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at 180 msec intervals. ing. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp is turned on as if it is yellow.

[Blinking white (white flash) brightness data table]
FIG. 230 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately designated as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec. The first 30 msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lights up in white), the next 30 msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lights up in white), and the next The 30 msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lights up in white), and the last 30 msec is "000" (lights off). That is, the frame lamp blinks in white (white flash) a plurality of times by alternately repeating "off" and "on" for one cycle consisting of 210 msec (30 msec × 7). The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4.

[Common red cut-in brightness data table]
FIG. 231 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 231, in the parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table, the time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 3970 msec, and the child referred to during the lamp control for each game effect lamp 9. Information that specifies a table (WS5, YS5, LS5, AS5) is stored.

FIG. 232 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 232, in the child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table, the grandchild tables (W5 (W5a to W5e), Y5 (Y5a to Y5e)) referred to in a predetermined time zone for each game effect lamp 9. , L5 (L5a to L5e), A5 (A5a to A5e)) are designated.

233 to 235 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild tables W5a, W5b, and W5c, various "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp are used only for the R data at 30 msec intervals. Data indicating the brightness is specified. In the grandchild table W5d, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various luminances are specified only for the R data at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table W5e, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various luminances are specified alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec with respect to only the R data. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables W5 (W5a to W5e).

FIG. 236 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the accessory lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 236, in the grandchild tables Y5a, Y5b, and Y5c for the accessory lamp, data showing various luminances are designated as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 30 msec. There is. In the grandchild table Y5d, as the data of "RRRR" output to the accessory lamp 9A, data showing various luminances are specified at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table Y5e, as the data of "RRRR" output to the accessory lamp 9A, data showing various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are designated. The effect control CPU 120 lights or blinks the accessory lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables Y5 (Y5a to Y5e).

FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 237, in the grandchild tables L5a, L5b, and L5c for the left panel lamp, data indicating various luminances are designated as "WWWWWW" data output to the left panel left lamp 9B at intervals of 30 msec. There is. In the grandchild table L5d, as the "WWWWWW" data output to the left panel lamp 9B, data showing various luminances are specified at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table L5e, as the data of "WWWWWW" output to the left panel lamp 9B, data showing various brightness alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are specified. The effect control CPU 120 lights or blinks the panel left lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables L5 (L5a to L5e).

238 and 239 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 238 and 239, in the grandchild tables A5a, A5b, and A5c for the attacker lamp, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , And as the "RGB" data output to the electric tulamp 9H, data showing various brightness at intervals of 30 msec are specified. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tutor lamp 9H, data showing various luminances are specified only for the R data. In the grandchild table A5d, 20 msec is used as "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H. Data showing various brightness is specified at intervals. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tutor lamp 9H, data showing various luminances are specified only for the R data. In the grandchild table A5e, 30 msec is used as "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H. Data showing various brightnesses are alternately specified at 40 msec and 40 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tutor lamp 9H, data showing various luminances are specified only for the R data. The effect control CPU 120 lights each of the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables A5 (A5a to A5e). Or make it blink.

[Common green cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 240 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 240, in the parent table in the common green cut-in luminance data table, the time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 3970 msec, and the child referred to during the lamp control for each game effect lamp 9. Information that specifies a table (WS6, YS6, LS6, AS6) is stored.

FIG. 241 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 241 in the child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table, the grandchild tables (W6 (W6a to W6e), Y6 (Y6a to Y6e)) referred to in a predetermined time zone for each game effect lamp 9. , L6 (L6a to L6e), A6 (A6a to A6e)) are designated.

242 to 244 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild tables W6a, W6b, W6c, various "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp are used only for G data at 30 msec intervals. Data indicating the brightness is specified. In the grandchild table W6d, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various luminances are specified only for the G data at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table W6e, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various luminances are specified alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec with respect to only the G data. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in green by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables W6 (W6a to W6e).

FIG. 245 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the accessory lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 245, in the grandchild tables Y6a, Y6b, and Y6c for the accessory lamp, data showing various luminances are designated as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 30 msec. There is. In the grandchild table Y6d, as the data of "RRRR" output to the accessory lamp 9A, data showing various luminances are specified at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table Y6e, as the data of "RRRR" output to the accessory lamp 9A, data showing various brightness alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are designated. The effect control CPU 120 lights or blinks the accessory lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables Y6 (Y6a to Y6e).

FIG. 246 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 246, in the grandchild tables L6a, L6b, L6c for the left panel lamp, data showing various luminances are designated as "WWWWWW" data output to the left panel left lamp 9B at intervals of 30 msec. There is. In the grandchild table L6d, as the "WWWWWW" data output to the left panel lamp 9B, data showing various luminances are specified at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table L6e, as the "WWWWWW" data output to the left panel lamp 9B, data showing various brightness alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are specified. The effect control CPU 120 lights or blinks the panel left lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common 6 cut-in by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table L6 (L6a to L6e).

247 and 248 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, in the grandchild tables A6a, A6b, and A6c for the attacker lamp, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , And as the "RGB" data output to the electric tulamp 9H, data showing various brightness at intervals of 30 msec are specified. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tutor lamp 9H, data showing various luminances are specified only for the G data. In the grandchild table A6d, 20 msec is used as "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H. Data showing various brightness is specified at intervals. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tutor lamp 9H, data showing various luminances are specified only for the G data. In the grandchild table A6e, 30 msec is used as "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H. Data showing various brightnesses are alternately specified at 40 msec and 40 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tutor lamp 9H, data showing various luminances are specified only for the G data. The effect control CPU 120 lights each of the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables A6 (A6a to A6e). Or make it blink.

[Furning brightness data table without operation promotion]
FIG. 249 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a fanning luminance data table without operation promotion. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W7.

In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W8.

[Furning brightness data table with operation promotion]
FIG. 250 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the trigger display luminance data table and the operation promotion luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, “D00” is designated at 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W9.

In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec. The effect control CPU 120 is a lamp based on the grandchild table W10. By controlling, the frame lamp blinks in red.

[Shutter brightness data table]
FIG. 251 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the shutter luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W11, the luminance data is gradually lowered from "A00" to "600" at intervals of 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. It is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W11 to light the frame lamp in red while gradually reducing the brightness.

In the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified in 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W12.

[Loss brightness data table]
FIGS. 252 and 253 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the loss luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13.

In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W14 to light the frame lamp in white, which is darker than td1.

As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec and "111" is specified in the next 550 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , "111" is specified in the last 600,000 msec (10 minutes). The effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15.

[Brightness data table per relief]
FIGS. 254 and 255 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table per relief. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and each in the next 30 msec. "B00" is specified for the lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W17.

As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white data such as “AAA” and “DDD” for each lamp at intervals of 30 msec. Is specified. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18.

[Hit confirmed brightness data table]
FIG. 256 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a winning fixed luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightness corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec. Then, "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in seven colors by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18.

[Re-lottery effect brightness data table]
FIGS. 257 and 258 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-lottery effect luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 60 msec. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W19.

As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red. As described above, the grandchild table W20 is designed to blink the frame lamp in red while switching the luminance data faster than the grandchild table W19.

[Background brightness data table]
FIG. 259 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 259, in the child table in the background luminance data table, for each game effect lamp 9, the grandchild tables (W21 (W21a, W21b), Y21 (Y21a, Y21b), L21 (W21 (W21a, Y21b), L21) referred to in a predetermined time zone. L21a, L21b), A21 (A21a, A21b)) are specified.

FIG. 260 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the background luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21a, "550" or "880" is designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern) by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21a.

In the grandchild table W21b, "550", "770", or "880" is designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern) by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21b.

<Reference of brightness data>
The luminance data table has been described as described above, but in the following, the luminance data table used by the lamp control after the hit epilogue part will be described while being organized according to the effect content.

268 to 271 are diagrams for explaining the reference of the luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 268, at the time ts1 to ts3 of the hit epilogue part, the child table for the accessory operation in the hit epilogue part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table 18. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, and after the pass / fail branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the accessory as shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to (s3). The frame lamp blinks in seven colors in response to the effect of falling.

At the time ts3-2 to ts3-8 of the hit epilogue part, the child table for the hit epilogue in the hit epilogue part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table 4. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that the accessory as shown in FIGS. 173 (s3-2) to 174 (s3-8) rises and the explosion chew is performed. The frame lamp blinks in white, which corresponds to the rise of the accessory, in response to the effect that the display appears as if it was caught.

At the time ts4 to ts7 of the hit epilogue part, the child table for the hit epilogue in the hit epilogue part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table 1. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to the effect of catching the explosion chew as shown in FIGS. 134 (s4) to 135 (s7). Light the frame lamp smoothly with the rainbow color corresponding to the hit confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 269, at the time tA1 to tA4 of the hit epilogue part, the child table for patterning in the hit epilogue part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table 4. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, thereby corresponding to an effect of producing a hit pattern as shown in FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A4), and a frame. The lamp blinks in a bright white color corresponding to the pattern.

At the time tA5 of the hit epilogue part, the child table for patterning in the hit epilogue part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 so that the frame lamp corresponds to the effect that the hit pattern as shown in FIG. 141 (A5) is displayed in the center of the screen. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

As shown in FIG. 270, at the time tA6 to tA8 of the re-lottery part, the child table before the symbol starts to move in the re-lottery part is used, and the lamp control based on the grandchild table for turning off the lights is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the designated grandchild table, and as shown in FIGS. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8), after the re-lottery effect is started, the re-lottery effect is started. Before the design starts to move due to the production, turn off the frame lamp once.

At the time tA9 and tA10 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of the symbol in the re-lottery part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 supports an effect in which the design of "2" as shown in FIGS. 143 (A9) and 144 (A10) is reduced by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W19. And make the frame lamp blink in red.

In the time tA11 to tA46 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of the symbol in the re-lottery part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 supports an effect of changing at high speed while switching the symbols as shown in FIGS. 144 (A11) to 156 (A46) by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W20. Then, the frame lamp blinks in red at high speed.

As shown in FIG. 271, at the times tC1 to tC4 of the re-lottery part, the child table for patterning in the re-lottery part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table 4. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C4), after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, the operation is promoted. The frame lamp is blinked in white in response to the effect of displaying the design so that the design of "2" is enlarged and displayed.

In the time tC5 to tC9 of the re-lottery part, the child table for patterning in the re-lottery part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table 1. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to determine the symbol after the symbol of "2" as shown in FIGS. 162 (C5) to 163 (C9) is shaken and displayed. The frame lamp is lit smoothly in rainbow color in response to such an effect.

At the time tE1 of the fanfare repertoire, a child table for the fanfare repertoire is used, and a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is designated. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the designated grandchild table, and as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1), once before the fanfare display is performed. Turn off the frame lamp.

At the time tE2 of the fanfare repertoire, a child table for the fanfare repertoire is used, and a grandchild table for lighting the frame lamp in the fanfare mode is designated. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the designated grandchild table, thereby making the frame lamp correspond to the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2). It is turned on in the lighting mode of the fanfare mode.

In this way, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each effect part, and the effect control CPU 120 refers to the child table set at each timing of each effect part, and the child table is used. Luminance data (for example, RGB data) included in the designated grandchild table (luminance data table) is used to control the lamp corresponding to the effect.

In addition, in FIGS. 268 to 271, the child table from the hit epilogue to the fanfare reperto via the re-lottery part when the symbol is not promoted is illustrated, but other routes, for example, the symbol from the hit epilogue is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 192 to 260, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each production part for the child table from the re-lottery part to the fanfare part in the case of promotion. There is.

<Explanation of characteristic parts in the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, the featured portion and the modified example in the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 9)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully opened, so that the player can easily understand the timing when the shutter is fully opened depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. I can tell. In addition, in the fanning part of SP first half reach A and the fanning part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, the shutter is started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp is off, corresponding to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts to light as the production progresses in the SP first half reach, so that the player knows that the SP first half reach has started. Can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Start 11, Start 14)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, in the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is lit in yellow, red flashes, white flashes, red lights, and the like. While the brightness data is switched so that it lights up / blinks while changing the color and brightness, in the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is red while maintaining the reduced brightness. Luminance data is maintained so that it lights up. As a result, before the shutter is closed, the effect in the start part is enlivened by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained so that the player can adjust the content of the effect when the shutter is opened. As a result, it is possible to better show the player the production in the subsequent fanning part.

(Fan 7, Fan 9)
64 (b8), (b9), 74 (e7), 94 (i32), 95 (i34), 104 (n10), 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), FIG. As shown in FIGS. 125 (r31), (r33), 126 (r35), and the like, even if there is a character's dialogue but no subtitle, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. / Brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified to blink. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to appropriately show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

(Fan 10)
When a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, and when the character emits a line, the color corresponding to the character is used. Brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks. For example, in response to the production in which Yumemu-chan located on the left side of the screen and Baku Chu located on the right side of the screen confront each other as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), a green frame corresponding to Yumemu-chan is used. Turn on the left lamp and turn on the right lamp of the frame in red corresponding to the explosion chew. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 has a green frame corresponding to Yumemu-chan, corresponding to the effect that Yumemu-chan, located on the left side of the screen, emits a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 has a red frame right lamp corresponding to the explosion chew, corresponding to the effect that the explosion chew located on the right side of the screen emits a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). Flashes. As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters emitting lines are displayed, it is possible to appropriately express which character is emitting the lines by lighting / blinking the frame lamp, and the production in the fanning part is suitable for the game. Can be shown to others.

(Fan 17)
The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, so that the frame lamps are turned on in yellow at a plurality of different timings. Then, by making the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 different in the lamp control between a plurality of timings different from each other, the time for turning on the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD9, it is used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing different grandchild tables at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the data capacity, the time to turn on the frame lamp can be different in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Fan 18)
The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white at a plurality of different timings by performing lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of different timings in one child table used in the fanning part. By differentiating the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between a plurality of different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to 2 or 3 times. As a result, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings. The number of times the white blinks can be made different. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Fan 19)
A plurality of different child tables WD9 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the fanning part of the SP final reach. Since the reference time is changed while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each timing, SP reach while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in multiple reach effects. The time to turn on the frame lamp can be different with the yellow color corresponding to the background of. Similarly, in the child table WD2 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables should be prepared at each of a plurality of different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the data capacity used for lamp control is reduced, and the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach is different. May be good.

(Fan 20)
Child table WD2 used in the fanning part of SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the fanning part of SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the fanning part of SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B fanning part In both the child table WD12 used and the child table WD15 used in the fanning part of the SP final reach, the common grandchild table W4 is used without preparing a separate grandchild table at each of a plurality of different timings. By changing the reference time, the number of white blinks can be made different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Fan cut-in 1)
The luminance data of the lamp control (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect is the frame lamp at the same place as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. Designed to be used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting / blinking of the extra lamp from being mixed and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide an effect in a suitable fanning part.

(Win / Fail 13)
In the SP reach effect where the operation promotion that encourages the player to operate is not performed in the pass / fail branch, the player is given an effect that the effect is stopped by keeping the mute state and keeping the frame lamp lit in white. It can be shown, and the success / failure branch (decision timing) can be easily communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach effect in which the operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to operate in the pass / fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound corresponding to the reach (BGM) are output, and the operation promotion is further performed. By switching and using the grandchild table a plurality of times in order to control the frame lamp so as to correspond to the mode corresponding to the above, the timing of determining the success / failure branch can be suitably produced by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. As described above, it is possible to preferably produce the timing of determining the success / failure branch by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation promotion is performed in the success / failure branch or the operation promotion is performed.

(Win / Fail 15)
In the child table WD9 in the SP latter half reach A, the reach is without operation promotion, and the frame lamp blinks in white based on the grandchild table W7, and then the frame lamp lights in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the pass / fail branch in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A where the operation promotion is not performed, "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, is used. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to inform the player of the success / failure branch (decision timing) in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

(Win / Fail 17)
In the child table WD15 in the final reach of the SP, as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), the frame lamp is output with the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound corresponding to the reach (BGM). Will switch one after another, such as blinking white, lighting red, and blinking red, and it is possible to excite the effect of promoting the operation for the player at the hit / miss branch (determined timing).

(Win / Fail 20)
In the child table WD4 of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of the SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of the SP second half reach B, as in the SP final reach child table WD17, Based on the grandchild table W14, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of loss. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, whereas in the SP final reach, it is 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is controlled by the grandchild table W14. In this way, it is possible to make the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of loss common among a plurality of different reach, but to make the lamp control time different with reference to the grandchild table. As a result, in the child table used in each of the plurality of different reach, the reference time is changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to the time of loss in each of the different plurality of reach. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to make the time for lighting the frame lamp different in the lighting mode corresponding to the loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

(Win / Fail 21)
From the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W26 last specified in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of loss, the first designated grandchild of the child table WD18 used for relief. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the table W16, the frame lamp is lit in the same color (yellow) and brighter. As a result, at the time of relief hit, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (yellow) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification. Subsequent relief hit notifications can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Epilogue 9)
When the accessory is raised, the effect control CPU 120 gradually raises the accessory lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the ascending operation of the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table designated by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually reduced so as to turn off the light. As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the rising of the accessory, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes the screen showing that the SP second half reach A has been developed. You can draw the attention of the player.

(Epilogue 26)
In the hit epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table used for hit notification and the grandchild table used for displaying the hit symbol, the rainbow color can be used without preparing a separate grandchild table at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the amount of data used for lamp control to turn on the light, each effect can be enlivened by the effect with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the data capacity, the player can better see the effect in the hit epilogue part by using the frame lamp.

(Epilogue 27)
In the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table W1 is common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery. Is used. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for rainbow-colored lighting for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control and providing a sense of unity even for different parts (timing). It is possible to show the player a certain production. As a result, it is possible to show the player better the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery production 2)
As shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), when the hit symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow color in the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is temporarily turned on before the re-lottery effect is executed. After the lights are turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-lottery effect, so that the player can be easily informed that the re-lottery effect is started depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

(Re-lottery production 7, re-lottery production 14, re-lottery production 16)
In the state where the hit symbol is temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed with the lights off, and when the symbol is shaking and displayed, the re-lottery effect is performed. Based on the luminance data corresponding to (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the hit symbol temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part is determined depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Further, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols of "3" and "2" are shaken and displayed is inherited even during the period when the symbols are fixed. In this way, during the symbol determination period that is performed in a short period of time, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare repertoire is performed as it is without preparing a special luminance data table for lamp control. Therefore, the data. No extra capacity is added.

(Re-lottery production 19)
In the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part as the lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery. Be done. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for rainbow-colored lighting for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control and providing a sense of unity even for different parts (timing). It is possible to show the player a certain production. As a result, it is possible to show the player better the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery production 20)
In the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, the frame lamp lights up in the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery. However, when the symbol of "2" is promoted to the symbol of "3" by the re-lottery, the lighting of the rainbow color in the time tB7 to tB9 is temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part. The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting in the case. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the player that the winning symbol has been promoted by the re-lottery depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

<Detailed explanation of lamp control>
Next, regarding the above-mentioned lamp control, a feature portion to be particularly mentioned will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263.

[Comparison of lamp control between hit and miss]
FIGS. 261 to 263 are diagrams for explaining a comparison of lamps at the time of hit and the time of loss.

First, the lamp control at the time of loss will be described with reference to FIG. 261. As shown in FIG. 261, at the final stage of the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W8 to turn on the frame lamp in white in accordance with the effect of the success / failure branch (determined timing). Further, at the final of the fanning part in the SP final reach, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10. By doing so, the frame lamp blinks in red in response to the effect of the success / failure branch (determined timing).

After that, in the lost epilogue part via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A, B, the SP second half reach A, B, and the SP final reach, the lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W13. .. In the grandchild table W13, "888" is designated in the first 10 msec and "444" is designated in the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W13, so that the frame lamp is turned on in white in response to the effect that the ally character is defeated in the reach effect after the success / failure branch.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W13, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W14 this time. In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W14, so that the frame lamp is lit in darker white than the white lighting based on the grandchild table W13 in response to the effect that the ally character is disappointed with. Let me.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W14, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15. In the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, "111" is specified in the next 550 msec, and the last 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ) Specifies "111". The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W15, so that the frame lamp is turned off in response to the effect that the screen goes dark due to the notification of loss.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15, the lamp control is performed based on the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) as described with reference to FIG. 190, and then the start part before reach is performed. The lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W26 which was also used in the above. In the grandchild table W26, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the data corresponding to the yellow pattern corresponding to the normal background is designated. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W26 to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern) corresponding to the normal background, as in the start part before reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the ramp control at the time of hitting will be described in the case of shifting to the hit epilogue part via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B.

As shown in FIG. 262, at the final stage of the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W8 to turn on the frame lamp in white in accordance with the effect of the success / failure branch (determined timing).

After that, in the hit epilogue part via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W19. In the grandchild table W19, "FFF" is specified in the first 40 msec and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white in response to the effect that the ally character wins by performing the lamp control based on the grandchild table W19.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 this time. In the grandchild table W1, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various luminances corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec. The effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights the frame lamp in the rainbow color corresponding to the hit determination by performing the lamp control based on the grandchild table W1.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21. In the grandchild table W21, "AAA" is sequentially specified for each lamp at intervals of 20 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and finally to each lamp at 600,000 msec (10 minutes). On the other hand, "000" is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W21 to turn on the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the pattern output in response to the effect of producing a hit symbol.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, the lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly turn on the frame lamp in a rainbow color in response to the effect that the winning symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the ramp control at the time of hit will be described in the case of shifting to the hit epilogue part via the fan part in the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 263, at the final stage of the fanning part in the SP final reach, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red in response to the effect of the success / failure branch (determined timing) by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W10.

After that, in the hit epilogue part via the fanning part in the SP final reach, first, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. In the grandchild table W20, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various luminances corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and in the next 30 msec, " 333 ”is specified, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in seven colors in response to the effect of dropping the accessory by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W20.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 this time. The effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights the frame lamp in the rainbow color corresponding to the hit determination by performing the lamp control based on the grandchild table W1.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W21 to turn on the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the pattern output in response to the effect of producing a hit symbol.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, the lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly turn on the frame lamp in a rainbow color in response to the effect that the winning symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

In the examples described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263, characteristic portions will be described below.

(Win / Fail 19)
As shown in FIG. 261, when the transition to the lost epilogue part is performed via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the final luminance data (RGB data) in the fanning part is obtained. Whereas "FDC", the first luminance data (RGB data) in the lost epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, at the time of loss in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, it is possible to light the frame lamp darker in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the pass / fail branch. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the loss has been made. Further, when the transition to the lost epilogue part is performed via the fanned part in the SP final reach, the final luminance data (RGB data) in the fanned part includes "D00", whereas the first luminance in the lost epilogue part is included. The data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". As a result, at the time of loss in the final reach of the SP, the frame lamp can be turned on in white, which is darker than the red blinking in the pass / fail branch, so that it is possible to notify the player that the loss is suitable.

(Characteristic operation 1)
As shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow color based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, at the time of loss, the frame lamp lights up darkly in white based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit time. As a result, since the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals in the hit time than in the loss time, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hit is achieved depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, while emphasizing the lighting by the frame lamp at the time of hitting more than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing than at the time of losing, and as a result, the lamp that contrasts hitting and losing. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Character movement 2)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, in the production where the accessory falls, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the rainbow-colored chromatic color and the achromatic color ("" The frame lamp lights up so that the RGB data of "333") is alternately switched. As a result, by occasionally sandwiching an achromatic color with respect to the rainbow-colored chromatic color, it is possible to perform an effect that emphasizes the big hit and congratulates the player. After that, in the production where the ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled by the lamp based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without sandwiching the achromatic color, so that it became a big hit. It is possible to perform a production that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be preferably shown to the player.

(About the shaking mode of the design)
Here, the shaking mode of the symbol will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a diagram for explaining the shaking mode of the design. During the symbol shaking period in the fanning part and the re-lottery part described above, the decorative symbol moves as in the first to third aspects shown in FIG. 264 (a) and the first to third aspects shown in FIG. 264 (b). It behaves like three modes. Specifically, the first aspect shown in FIG. 264 (a) is an aspect in which the decorative pattern is located at the center position of the screen. The second aspect shown in FIG. 264 (a) is an aspect in which the decorative symbol is located above the first aspect. The third aspect shown in FIG. 264 (a) is an aspect in which the decorative symbol is located below the first aspect.

Further, the first aspect shown in FIG. 264 (b) is an aspect in which the decorative pattern is located at the center position of the screen in front view. The second aspect shown in FIG. 264 (b) is an aspect in which the decorative symbol is oriented to the left more than the first aspect by rotating to the right with the center of the decorative symbol as the vertical axis. The third aspect shown in FIG. 264 (b) is an aspect in which the decorative symbol is oriented to the right rather than the first aspect by rotating counterclockwise with the center of the decorative symbol as the vertical axis.

(Modified example of re-lottery production)
FIG. 265 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-lottery effect. FIG. 265 (A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the re-lottery effect with 7 symbols. Further, FIG. 265 (B) is a timing chart of each re-lottery effect. As shown in FIG. 265 (A), the symbol is enlarged and displayed as shown in (D1) and (D2), and then the symbol is reduced as shown in (D3) and (D4). After that, as shown in (D5), the design becomes a normal size. Then, as shown in (D6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. After that, as shown in (D7), there is a shaking period in which the symbol swings up and down. After that, the "7" symbol is reduced and displayed from (D8) to (D9).

After that, as shown in (D10), the button image and the time gauge are slightly displayed under the "7" symbol. After that, as shown in (D11), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed with the "7" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases with the passage of time. The time gauge is a display showing the validity period of the button operation. When the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (D12), as shown in (D13) to (D20), "7" fluctuates at high speed, and a faint display and a clear display are repeated. The same high-speed fluctuation is repeated after (D20).

As shown in FIG. 265 (B), as shown in the timing chart of each re-lottery effect, the symbol feed period when the re-lottery effect in which the symbol speed fluctuates at high speed is executed by the button operation is the same for any re-lottery effect. be. Here, the re-lottery effect includes a first re-lottery effect in which even-numbered symbols are changed to odd-numbered symbols, a second re-lottery effect in which even-numbered symbols do not change from even-numbered symbols, and a third re-lottery effect in which 7 symbols do not change. There is a production. For example, in the first re-lottery effect, when the symbol feed effect is started by being operated immediately from the timing when the button can be operated, there is a shaking period (t1) of the decorative symbol after the end of the symbol feed period, and then the symbol is confirmed. do.

Further, in the second re-lottery effect, when the button is operated after t2 from the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feed effect is started, there is a shaking period (t1-t2) of the decorative symbol after the end of the symbol feed period. After that, the design is confirmed. Further, in the third re-lottery effect, when the button is operated after t1 from the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feed effect is started, there is no shaking period of the decorative symbol after the end of the symbol feed period, and the symbol is fixed as it is. .. In this way, the symbol feed period is constant regardless of the timing at which the button is operated, and the time from the subsequent symbol shake period to the symbol confirmation is absorbed until the button operation. .. Such a relationship is the same when the button operation is executed in any of the re-lottery effects of the first re-lottery effect to the third re-lottery effect.

[About re-lottery production 26-28]
The featured parts of the re-lottery part will be numbered and explained.

(Modified example of re-lottery production)
FIG. 266 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-lottery effect. As shown in FIGS. 266 (K1) to (K3), the decorative symbol moves in the same manner after the whiteout regardless of when the button is operated at any timing of the winning / failing decision scene. Specifically, when the button is operated immediately after the promotion display is displayed as shown in (K1), the character movable and the hit epilogue part are executed, and the epilogue part as shown in (K4) is executed. The design is put out. After that, after 5 seconds in the symbol shaking period, as shown in (K5), the three symbols are in a state of facing the front.

Further, as shown in (K2), when the button is operated 1 second after the promotion display is displayed in the scene of winning / failing, the character movement and the hit epilogue part are executed, and as shown in (K4). Designs will be displayed in the epilogue part. After that, after 4 seconds in the symbol shaking period, as shown in (K6), the three symbols are in a state of facing the left side from the front. Further, as shown in (K3), when the button is operated 2 seconds after the promotion display is displayed in the scene of winning / failing, the character movement and the hit epilogue part are executed, and as shown in (K4). Designs will be displayed in the epilogue part. After that, after 3 seconds in the symbol shaking period, as shown in (K7), the three symbols are in a state of facing the right side from the front.

As described above, in the first operation timing, the symbol is in the front position after the symbol shaking period, in the second operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing to the left after the symbol shaking period, and in the third operation timing, the symbol is in the front position. After the shaking period of the symbol, the symbol may be in a position facing to the right. However, even if the direction of the symbol is different during the shaking period of the symbol depending on the operation timing, after that, as shown in (K8) to (K17) as a common effect, the symbol is reduced while rotating after whiteout. The lottery effect is executed. Then, after (K17), the symbol feed effect is executed. Although the description has been made using odd-numbered symbols in FIG. 266, the same effect is executed for even-numbered symbols.

(Re-lottery production 26)
As shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the re-lottery effect is subsequently executed regardless of the timing of the operation. A time for shaking the symbol for absorbing the scale may be provided in the time until the predetermined timing to be performed (the period of shaking of the symbol from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, regardless of the timing at which the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbol is once shaken and displayed, and then the common effect accompanied by whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. Therefore, at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent the movement of the pattern from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to make a series of effects more suitable.

(Re-lottery production 27)
From the time when the whiteout screen is displayed until the re-lottery effect is executed, any of the multiple reach may be common. According to this, the data capacity of the production data can be reduced.

(Re-lottery production 28)
The movement of the symbol after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the design in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that sways between the front side and the back side by the axis rotation around the vertical direction of the design, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a movement that makes one full clockwise rotation by rotating the axis around the vertical direction of the symbol while enlarging. According to this, by displaying a whiteout between the movements on the extension of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the pattern from causing a sense of discomfort, and a series of effects can be preferably shown. be able to.

(Re-lottery production 29)
Among the plurality of SP reach, there is one in which the promotion of operation such as a button operation is not notified at the branch at the time of determining whether or not the control is in an advantageous state. In such SP reach, the scale shift due to the operation does not occur. However, even with such an SP reach, the same re-lottery effect as the SP reach in which the scale shift occurs may be executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity even when there is only one re-lottery effect due to the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of the scale deviation. In addition, the data capacity can be reduced by using one re-lottery effect.

(Re-lottery production 30)
As shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the symbol after the whiteout screen is an extension of the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is one of a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) to the left position (K6) via the front position (K5). It is designed to be. That is, when the shaking of the symbol is one of a series of clockwise movements, the whiteout by the re-lottery effect is executed, and then the movement of enlarging the symbol and rotating clockwise continues. According to this, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbol from causing a sense of discomfort due to the series of movements of the clockwise rotating symbol from the period of the symbol shaking to the re-lottery effect.

[About re-lottery production 21-25]
The featured parts of the re-lottery part will be numbered and explained.

(Modified example of re-lottery production)
FIG. 267 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-lottery effect. (L1) is a diagram when the operation is operated at an early timing after the operation promotion display is displayed in the symbol feed period. (L2) is a diagram when the operation is operated at a timing later than (L1) after the operation promotion display is displayed. (L3) is a diagram when the operation is operated at a timing later than (L2) after the operation promotion display is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 267 (L1) to (L3), the symbol output is performed in the same manner regardless of the timing at which the button is operated during the symbol feed period in the re-lottery effect. After that, the whiteout is sandwiched and the decorative pattern makes the same movement and then stops. Specifically, as shown in (L1), when the button is operated immediately after the operation promotion display is displayed, the symbol is output as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the symbol is displayed. Is the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a predetermined period of time, the three symbols as shown in (L7) are in a state of facing to the right from the front.

Further, as shown in (L2), when the button is operated at a timing later than (L1) after the operation promotion display is displayed, the symbols as shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the design becomes the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the shaking of the symbols was started, and after the lapse of the symbol shaking period shorter than that in (L1), the three symbols as shown in (L8) turned to the right from the front. Become. Further, as shown in (L3), when the button is operated at a timing later than (L2) after the operation promotion display is displayed, the symbols as shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the design becomes the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the shaking of the symbols is started, and after the lapse of the symbol shaking period shorter than that in (L2), the three symbols as shown in (L9) are in a state of facing the front.

As described above, in the first operation timing, the symbol is turned to the right side after the symbol shaking period, and in the second operation timing, the symbol is turned to the left side after the symbol shaking period, and the third operation timing is set. Then, after the shaking period of the symbol, the symbol may be in a position facing the front. However, even if the direction of the symbol is different during the shaking period of the symbol depending on the operation timing, after that, as shown in (J1) to (J10) as a common effect, the effect of reducing the design while rotating it after whiteout. Is executed. After that, as shown in (J11) to (J17), the symbol stops after the period of shaking of the symbol. Although the description has been made using odd-numbered symbols in FIG. 267, the same effect is executed for even-numbered symbols.

(Re-lottery production 21)
In the modified example, as shown in FIGS. 267 (L1) to (L3), the operation promotion display by the button image and the time gauge is displayed during the symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. During the period in which the operation promotion display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute the common pattern output effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of which timing the push button 31B is operated, the effect of displaying a common symbol by enlarging and reducing the symbol as shown in (L4) to (L5) is executed. After that, the symbol shake is executed during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing of the button. Therefore, after the shaking period of the symbol, for example, in the first operation timing, the symbol faces the right side, in the second operation timing, the symbol faces the left side, and in the third operation timing, the symbol faces the left side. , The design may be in a position facing the front. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is sandwiched as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and an effect in which the symbol is shaken after the symbol is rotated and the symbol is reduced is executed. According to this, the design can be stopped neatly by performing a common effect regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, and a series of effects can be appropriately shown.

(Re-lottery production 22)
When the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the operation valid period, the decorative symbol is displayed to be shaken after the notification of promotion is executed (example of FIG. 267 (L3) without operation). ). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation valid period, the display that the decorative symbol shook was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether to promote was executed. The display is extended by the minute (the operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the operation valid period, the display that the decorative symbol shook was earlier than the second timing after the notification of whether to promote was executed. The display is extended by the minute (the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is an example of the first timing). In this way, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the scale of the effect can be absorbed by the shaking time of the design. By performing a common effect after that, the design can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be shown favorably.

(Re-lottery production 23)
As shown in FIG. 267, after performing whiteout as a common effect, an effect different from the conventional design mode in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once is executed. According to this, regardless of the position of the symbol in the shaking of the shaku absorption symbol, by executing the effect of a different mode after sandwiching the whiteout, the flow of the effect until the symbol is stopped. It is possible to prevent discomfort.

(Re-lottery production 24)
As shown in FIG. 267, in the shaking period of the symbol, the symbol swings to the back side from (J10) to (J12), and then the symbol swings to the front side from (J13) to (J14) to the initial position. Change. After that, the symbol swings toward the front side from (J15) to (J16), and then the symbol swings toward the back side from (J17) to (J18) to change to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated a plurality of times. However, during the period when the symbol is fixed, it is designed so that the symbol is always located at the initial position facing the front as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbol can be fixedly stopped in a manner that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

(Re-lottery production 25)
The game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in a rainbow color at the timing of the whiteout of FIG. 267 (J1). The timing of (J1) is an effect executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the place where such a common effect is executed as the starting point of changing the game effect lamp 9, it is easy for the designer to decide the start opportunity. It should be noted that the timing of (J2) when the common start display is started may be used as the start trigger instead of the timing of (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed effects.

<Main composition and effects>
The technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are individually listed below.

(F2019-116)
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, accessories, movable bodies 32) and
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) is provided.
It is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that notifies whether or not a big hit is achieved) that notifies whether or not the control is in an advantageous state.
The notification effect includes an introduction part (for example, a fanning part) until the success / failure of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a success / failure notification part (for example, a hit epilogue part) in which the success / failure is notified. A hit / fail notification part that notifies a big hit by moving the accessory, and an epilogue part (for example, a hit epilogue part) that is executed after the hit / fail notification is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state. Consists of, including
In the introductory part, the first character to which the serif sound emitted by the character is output and the serif subtitles are displayed for the serif sound is a friendly character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)).
The display means gives priority to the introduction display of the promotion display that prompts a specific operation with respect to the effect display in the introduction part at the timing of shifting from the introduction part to the pass / fail notification part, so that the effect display is difficult to visually recognize. After that, the promotion display is performed in a state where the effect display can be visually recognized (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54)).
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body is moved from the first position (for example, the retracted position) to the second position on the front side of the display means. Advance to a position (eg, advance position) (eg, example shown in FIG. 133),
The display means is
When the movable body advances to the second position, an effect display for moving the movable body is performed, and the effect display is terminated while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position. Display corresponding to the epilogue part (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 173 and 174).
In the epilogue part, the final dialogue subtitle is displayed for the final dialogue sound emitted by the character, and then the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, and then the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area (for example,). Examples shown in FIGS. 134 to 136),
In the epilogue part, the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part (for example, the example shown in FIG. 175). ..

Specifically, the character that first emits a line in each SP reach as a fanning part is a ally character (for example, FIG. 115 (r2)). According to this, the player can accurately recognize the ally character at the start of SP reach. In addition, at the timing of transition from the fanning part to the pass / fail notification part, the introduction image of the trigger display that prompts the operation of the trigger is displayed with priority over the display of the production in the fanning part, so that the production display of the fanning part disappears, and then The image for operating the trigger button and the effect in the fanning part can be visually recognized (for example, FIGS. 131 (r48) to (r51)). According to this, while giving an impact to the introductory image, the introduction image becomes an image of the trigger button, so that the production of the fanning part can be confirmed, so that the player can be excited. In addition, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled in the flow of the production, which is the background display of the epilogue part by the time the evacuation of the accessory is completed. Further, since the symbol is enlarged and displayed after the display of the final dialogue subtitle is completed in the hit epilogue part, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping with the symbol and misunderstanding that the message is a symbol output message. In addition, the above-mentioned fanning part that fanned the success or failure was updated by the development in which the ally character and the enemy character alternately compete with each other (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B, etc.). There is a scene where a ally character is damaged in the production in such a fanning part. In addition, in the production of such a fanning part, the image display switching interval is earlier than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switchings is also large. According to this, it is possible to make the fanning part look more suitable by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part. In addition, since the subtitles are firmly attached in the slow-developing hit epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is speaking and emphasize the blessing. In addition, in the fast-developing fanning part, firstly, the content is conveyed by switching the video, and the auxiliary subtitle display can be used so as not to interfere with the development of the video. As a result, a series of effects can be appropriately shown.

(F2019-117)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / miss, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are cases where the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character and cases where the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect.
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification effect. high.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character's dialogue in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character in SP reach, which is the fanning part. ing. According to this, by displaying the subtitles firmly in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is speaking. In addition, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to coordinate the feeling of blessing. In addition, since the screen changes more often in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, even if the subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the production will not be disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. , It is possible to give the first priority to convey the effect by switching images. As a result, it is possible to perform a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(F2019-118)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Production execution means and
Light emitting means and
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect to notify whether or not the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / fail, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. It is composed of an epilogue part executed when it is determined to be performed and a re-lottery part executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, the first re-lottery in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects. The production is feasible,
When it is determined that the control is controlled to the first advantageous state, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects. The second re-lottery effect can be executed,
Using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part, the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect is executed.
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode, and the rainbow emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery effect is started using. At the start of the re-extraction effect, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the change of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol feed effect is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. By doing so, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was once temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery effect is started, the symbol feed effect is executed using the symbol that was once temporarily stopped. , It is easy for the player to know from which decorative pattern the re-lottery started. As a result, it is possible to show the flow of a series of productions well.

(F2019-119)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Production execution means and
Light emitting means and
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect to notify whether or not the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / fail, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. It is composed of an epilogue part executed when it is determined to be performed and a re-lottery part executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the control is controlled to the second advantageous state, the replacement display in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects is displayed. It is possible to perform the first re-lottery effect of displaying the second symbol in the latter half part.
When it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode, and the rainbow emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery effect is started using. At the start of the re-extraction effect, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the change of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol feed effect is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. Then, during the re-lottery production, all the decorative symbols such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" are sent in order, and then "2" is sent again. The symbol feed effect in which the symbol is displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was once temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after the variation of the plurality of types of decorative symbols. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the symbol feed effect in which the final display result is not displayed immediately and all the decorative patterns are shown.

(F2019-120)
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) and
Light emitting means (for example, frame lamp, etc.) and
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data (for example, controlling a frame lamp or the like by using the luminance data table).
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that notifies whether or not a big hit is achieved) that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a normal jackpot gaming state without promotion) and a second advantageous state (for example, a probabilistic jackpot gaming state with promotion) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
It is determined that the notification effect is controlled to the advantageous state after the introduction part (for example, the fanning part) is notified of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and after the notification of the result. It is composed of an epilogue part (for example, a winning epilogue part) executed while the epilogue part is being executed, and a re-lottery part (for example, a re-lottery part) executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery parts are the first half part (FIGS. 142 (A6) to 156 (A46)) and the second half part (for example, FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B6) or FIGS. 161 (C1) to 161 (C6)). Including and
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the control is controlled to the second advantageous state, the first symbol (for example, two symbols) is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and then the first symbol is displayed on another. The first re-lottery effect (for example, FIGS. 142 (A6) to 156 (A46), FIG. )-Fig. 158 (B6)) can be executed.
When it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol (for example, two symbols) is displayed in the second half part. The second re-lottery effect (for example, FIGS. 142 (A6) to 156 (A46), FIGS. 161 (C1) to 161 (C6)) for displaying the image again can be executed.
When it is determined that the control is controlled to the second advantageous state, the second symbol (for example, seven symbols) is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and then the second symbol is displayed. Repeated display The third re-lottery effect (for example, FIGS. 142 (A6) to 156 (A46), FIGS. 265 (D6) to (D20)) in which the second symbol is displayed again in the latter half part is performed. Feasible and
The first re-lottery effect, the second re-lottery effect, and the third re-lottery effect have the same effect scale (for example, the effect scale is the same as shown in FIG. 265 (B)).
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode (for example, the frame lamp using the brightness data table corresponding to the smooth rainbow color lighting shown in FIG. 142 (A5)). To control etc.),
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect (for example, the luminance data table corresponding to the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 144 (A6) is switched to and the luminance data table is used. Control the frame lamp, etc. using the brightness data table for lottery production),
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode, and the rainbow emission mode is used. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the purpose (for example, the frame lamp or the like is used by using the luminance data table corresponding to the smooth rainbow color lighting after FIG. 158 (B5) and after FIG. 162 (C5). (Controlled), and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period (for example, FIG. 159 (B8) and later, FIG. 163 (C8) and later). In addition, the frame lamp etc. are controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the smooth rainbow color lighting),
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emission means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. (For example, after FIG. 160 (D1) and after FIG. 164 (E1), the luminance data table corresponding to the smooth rainbow color lighting is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare-compatible lighting, and the fanfare-compatible lighting is switched. Control the frame lamp, etc. using the brightness data table corresponding to).

Specifically, a pattern that displays an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols), and a pattern that displays an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols). Was provided. In addition to this, a pattern for displaying an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) after displaying an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) may be provided. In the effect of sending a symbol from an odd-numbered symbol to an odd-numbered symbol, the same odd-numbered symbol may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the scale of the effect of the symbol feed period in the re-lottery effect may be the same design. According to this, it is possible to obtain a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(F2019-121)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Production execution means and
Light emitting means and
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect to notify whether or not the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / fail, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. It is composed of an epilogue part executed when it is determined to be performed and a re-lottery part executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, the first re-lottery in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects. The production is feasible,
When it is determined that the control is controlled to the first advantageous state, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects. The second re-lottery effect can be executed,
The first symbol is displayed with the same or substantially the same animation when the first symbol is once displayed in the epilogue part and when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half part of the second re-lottery effect.
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode, and the rainbow emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, the above-mentioned symbolizing in FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the symbolizing in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) are executed using substantially the same image. Will be done. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern output by the “2” symbol and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, since the images of the symbols can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the probabilistic symbols. In addition, the image of the pattern appearance portion including the background may be exactly the same.

(F2019-122)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Production execution means and
Light emitting means and
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect to notify whether or not the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / fail, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. It is composed of an epilogue part executed when it is determined to be performed and a re-lottery part executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, the first re-lottery in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects. The production is feasible,
When it is determined that the control is controlled to the first advantageous state, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects. The second re-lottery effect can be executed,
By changing the display mode of the first symbol into the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect from the time when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half part until the symbol determination period is reached, the first symbol is displayed. A shaking display is performed to display the first symbol as if it is shaking.
By changing the display mode of the second symbol into the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect from the display of the second symbol in the latter half part until the symbol determination period is reached, the second symbol is displayed. 2 Perform a shaking display to display the second symbol as if the symbol is shaking.
The first aspect is a mode in which the player can easily see the symbol as compared with any of the second aspect and the third aspect.
The effect executing means is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to execute a movement promotion display that encourages the player to move.
When the operation is performed at the first timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, when the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the first re-lottery effect is executed. The second symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the second aspect.
If the operation is performed at a second timing different from the first timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, after the effect corresponding to the first re-lottery effect is executed. When the predetermined timing is reached, the second symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the third aspect.
When the operation promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, regardless of whether the operation is performed at the first timing or the second timing, the shaking display of the second symbol is displayed from the predetermined timing. The display is made difficult to see, and then the second symbol is displayed again in the shaking display, and then, when the symbol confirmation period is reached, the shaking speed of the second symbol is maintained and the second symbol is displayed. 2 The symbol is stopped and displayed in the first aspect,
If the operation is performed at the first timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery effect, the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is executed. At that time, the first symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes the second aspect.
If the operation is performed at the second timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery effect, the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is executed. At that time, the first symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes the third aspect.
When the operation promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery effect, regardless of whether the operation is performed at the first timing or the second timing, the shaking display of the first symbol is displayed from the predetermined timing. The display is made difficult to see, and then the first symbol is displayed again in the shaking display, and then, when the symbol confirmation period is reached, the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol is maintained and the first symbol is displayed. 1 The symbol is stopped and displayed in the first aspect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode, and the rainbow emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 267 (L1) to (L3), the operation promotion display by the button image and the time gauge is displayed during the symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. During the period in which the operation promotion display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute the common pattern output effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of which timing the push button 31B is operated, the effect of displaying a common symbol by enlarging and reducing the symbol as shown in (L4) to (L5) is executed. After that, the symbol shake is executed during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing of the button. Therefore, after the shaking period of the symbol, for example, in the first operation timing, the symbol faces the right side, in the second operation timing, the symbol faces the left side, and in the third operation timing, the symbol faces the left side. , The design may be in a position facing the front. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is sandwiched as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and an effect in which the symbol is shaken after the symbol is rotated and the symbol is reduced is executed. According to this, the design can be stopped neatly by performing a common effect regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, and a series of effects can be appropriately shown.

(F2019-126)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
There is a notification effect to notify whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / miss, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done,
The introductory part is
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed.
It is composed of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed.
In the luminance data table used in the scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed, the luminance data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. It is composed of.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which the character emits lines but does not have subtitles in the fanning part (for example, scenes of r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35). ). However, even in such a specific scene, the luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is designated so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. By doing so, even in a scene where the subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. As a result, the effect corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the fanning part can be appropriately shown to the player. Further, FIGS. 64 (b8), (b9), 74 (e7), 94 (i32), 95 (i34), 104 (n10), 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29). ), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33), FIG. 126 (r35), etc., even if there is a character's dialogue but no subtitle, the frame lamp is in the color corresponding to the character. Brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that is lit / blinking. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to appropriately show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

(F2019-127)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
There is a notification effect to notify whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / miss, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done,
Up to the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, the change of the scene is notified.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the effect is being retracted from the second position to the first position. Exit the display, display the corresponding scene after switching, and
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the movable body movable luminance data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. In the middle of saving to, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene.

Specifically, the effect may be switched from the effect at the start of the reach to the effect of the reach of the first half of the SP by the operation of the accessory. Further, the effect image corresponding to the accessory movement may be displayed according to the movement of the accessory falling. After that, the display may be gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the character movement to the screen corresponding to the SP first half reach while the character is rising. Further, the luminance data table may be switched from the luminance data table of the accessory operating part to the luminance data table of the reach of the first half of the SP while the accessory is rising. Further, the sound corresponding to the reach of the first half of the SP may be output while the accessory is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is at a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the reach of the first half of the SP by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. Further, since the brightness data table of the sound effect and the game effect lamp 9 is switched to the one corresponding to the first half of the SP during the ascending of the accessory, the fanning part of the first half of the SP can be suitably displayed.

(F2019-128)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / miss, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done,
The display means is
In the introductory part, a promotion display is performed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed.
In the introductory part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and the dialogue subtitles are displayed in the specific area of the display means for the dialogue sound.
At the timing of performing the promotion display in the introduction part, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area, and the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The luminance data table includes a luminance data table for cut-in display corresponding to the cut-in display and a luminance data table for an introduction part corresponding to an introduction part.
The light emitting means in which the luminance data is set in the cut-in display luminance data table includes at least the same portion as the luminous means in which the luminance data is set in the introduction part luminance data table.

Specifically, the luminance data of the lamp control (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect is the same as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. It is designed to use a frame lamp at the location. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting / blinking of the extra lamp from being mixed and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide an effect in a suitable fanning part.

(F2019-129)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / miss, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
In the period before shifting from the introduction part in the first notification effect to the success / failure notification part
The display means performs a promotion display that encourages the player to perform a specific action.
The sound output means continues the sound output and
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for the first notification effect.
In the period before shifting from the introduction part in the second notification effect to the success / failure notification part
The display means does not perform the promotion display that prompts the specific operation, but performs a hit / fail display.
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the luminance data table for the second notification effect.
The luminance data table for the first notification effect is configured so that the luminance data is switched.
The luminance data table for the second notification effect is configured so that the luminance data is not switched.

Specifically, in the SP reach production in which the operation promotion that encourages the player to operate is not performed in the pass / fail branch, the production is stopped by keeping the mute state and keeping the frame lamp lit in white. The production can be shown to the player, and the success / failure branch (decision timing) can be easily communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach effect in which the operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to operate in the pass / fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound corresponding to the reach (BGM) are output, and the operation promotion is further performed. By switching and using the grandchild table a plurality of times in order to control the frame lamp so as to correspond to the mode corresponding to the above, the timing of determining the success / failure branch can be suitably produced by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. As described above, it is possible to preferably produce the timing of determining the success / failure branch by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation promotion is performed in the success / failure branch or the operation promotion is performed.

(F2019-130)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / fail, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done,
The introductory part is composed of a first scene and a second scene after the first scene.
In the first scene, the first moving image data is used,
In the second scene, the second moving image data is used,
The second scene has a slower progress speed than the first scene.
The first moving image data is moving image data in which the movement of a specific character is expressed by a plurality of specific character images.
The second moving image data is moving image data in which the movement of the specific character is expressed by the specific character image and the effect image of 1.

Specifically, the scene before the decision of whether or not (r48) is performed in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the image is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed in (r48) is the image of Baku Chu and six allies. Performed with images. Then, the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make the character appear to be operating. Here, if an image is created in the slow motion period using the same amount of image data as in the period other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and making the character appear to be moving by switching and enlarging the display. The number of images used in the slow motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than the number other than the slow motion period.

(F2019-131)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / fail, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done,
There is a shield display that makes the effect display invisible when it becomes the closed mode after the closing operation, and makes the effect display visible by performing the opening operation after the closing operation.
The obstruction display can be executed at the timing related to the introduction part, and can be executed.
When the shield display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the visible area of the effect display becomes smaller.
When the shield display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area in which the effect display can be visually recognized increases.

Specifically, the shutter described above is an image that makes the image of the effect executed behind by making it invisible by closing it, and makes the image of the effect executed by opening it after closing visible. In addition, the shutter is executed at the timing related to the fanning part, that is, before the start of the fanning part. When the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is lowered as the visible area of the effect is narrowed, and when the shutter is opened, the screen brightness is reduced as the visible area of the effect is widened. Will be higher. According to this, the flow of the production can be shown favorably by giving reality when the shutter is closed and opened. In addition, although the image of the effect executed behind is made invisible or visible using the image of the shutter, the image may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect is executed with the accessory. You may.

(F2019-132)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
There is a notification effect to notify whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / miss, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the operating sound.

Specifically, in the fanning part, there is a scene where the SP reach BGM is output and the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also referred to as the operation sound) are output at the timing of overlapping. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the overlapping timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume when it is output from the speakers 8L and 8R than the physical sound. According to this, while the physical sound is output as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production is given to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to make the production in the fanning part look better.

(F2019-133)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Production execution means and
Light emitting means and
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect to notify whether or not the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / fail, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. It is composed of an epilogue part executed when it is determined to be performed and a re-lottery part executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, the first re-lottery in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects. The production is feasible,
When it is determined that the control is controlled to the first advantageous state, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects. The second re-lottery effect can be executed,
In the epilogue part, when the first symbol is once displayed, the display mode of the first symbol is changed to the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect so that the first symbol is shaken. The first symbol is displayed, and it is displayed.
When the epilogue part is transferred to the re-lottery part, when the first symbol is transferred from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing displayed in the first aspect, and when the first symbol is transferred to the second aspect. There are times when the epilogue part shifts to the re-lottery part at the timing displayed, and there are times when the first symbol shifts from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing displayed in the third aspect.
The effect executing means shifts from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first aspect, and at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second aspect. The first symbol is visually recognized in both the transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part and the transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third aspect. A specific display that is difficult is performed, the first symbol is displayed in a common display mode, and the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect is executed.
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode, and the rainbow emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the timing of the operation, after that, A time for shaking the symbol for absorbing the scale may be provided in the time until the predetermined timing when the re-lottery effect is executed (the period of shaking of the symbol from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, regardless of the timing at which the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbol is once shaken and displayed, and then the common effect accompanied by whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. Therefore, at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent the movement of the pattern from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to make a series of effects more suitable.

(F2020-005)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / miss, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, the display of the second line subtitle is started while the first line subtitle is displayed, then the display of the first line subtitle ends, and the second line subtitle is displayed. In the state of
The fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first serif subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second serif subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the fanning part, as shown in FIG. 178 (A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the dialogue of the character. When the subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first and the display period of the second subtitle displayed next overlap each other. A fade effect is added when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. Due to the fade effect, changes occur when the transmittance of the displayed characters is different. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles can be easily understood by the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be easily understood.

(F2020-006)
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, image display device 5) and
With multiple light emitting means (for example, frame lamps),
A light emitting control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data (for example, controlling a frame lamp or the like by using the luminance data table).
It is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that notifies whether or not a big hit is achieved) that notifies whether or not the control is in an advantageous state.
The notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled is controlled to the introduction part (for example, the fanning part) until the propriety of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state. It is configured to include a first epilogue part (for example, a hit epilogue part) to be notified to that effect.
The notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part (for example, the fanning part) until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. It is composed of a second epilogue part to be notified (for example, a lost epilogue part).
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is performed to notify that the advantageous state is not controlled (for example, a disappointing display in FIG. 190 (X30)).
After that, switching display is performed (for example, display of the eye catch in FIG. 190 (X33)).
After that, the background is displayed (for example, the normal background in FIGS. 190 (X34) (X35) is displayed).
After that, the symbol stop display is performed triggered by the symbol confirmation command (for example, the symbol is confirmed and stopped by receiving the symbol confirmation command as shown in FIG. 190 (X35)).
After that, the variation display of the symbol is started with the variation command as an opportunity (for example, the symbol is confirmed and stopped by receiving the symbol confirmation command as shown in FIG. 190 (X36)).
The plurality of light emitting means include a light emitting means for effect and a light emitting means for the fourth symbol (for example, an LED of the fourth symbol unit such as a frame lamp).
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part, the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means for effect (for example, in the loss epilogue part, the frame lamp or the like is controlled by using the luminance data table at the time of loss. do),
When the switching display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display, and the light emitting means for the effect is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display (for example, the display of the eye catch is displayed). When it is done, the frame lamp etc. is controlled using the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching)),
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the luminous means for effect is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the background display (for example, the normal background display is displayed). When it is done, control the frame lamp etc. using the brightness data table for the background),
When the stop display of the symbol is performed, the luminance data table is switched from the luminance data table for the fourth symbol change to the luminance data table for the fourth symbol stop, and the luminance data table for the fourth symbol stop is used. The fourth symbol light emitting means is controlled (for example, when the symbol stop display is performed, the luminance data table is switched from the luminance data table for the fourth symbol variation to the luminance data table for the fourth symbol stop, and the said third. 4 Control the light emission of the LED of the 4th symbol using the luminance data table for stopping the symbol),
When the stop display of the symbol is performed, the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the effect (for example, the luminance data for the background when the stop display of the symbol is performed). Control the frame lamp etc. by continuously using the table),
When the symbol variation display is started, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the fourth symbol variation, and the luminance data table for the fourth symbol variation is used to control the light emitting means for the fourth symbol. (For example, when the variation display of the symbol is started, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the fourth symbol variation, and the luminance data table for the fourth symbol is used to emit light of the LED of the fourth symbol. Control),
When the variable display of the symbol is started, the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the effect (for example, when the variable display of the symbol is started, the background is used. Control the frame lamp etc. by continuously using the brightness data table).

Specifically, the characteristic portion of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of loss will be described. The effect screen is switched to the image at the time of loss after the effect of determining whether or not to win. After that, after the blackout display in which the loss display result is displayed, the screen is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, a screen is displayed in which the symbol is fixed and stopped after the screen is switched to the normal screen. Further, the luminance data table is switched from the luminance data table at the time of winning / failing determination to the luminance data table at the time of loss. After that, it is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching). After that, it is switched to the background luminance data table at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing when the screen is switched to the eye-catching screen. Further, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. The variable display of the special symbol of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from blinking to off by receiving the symbol confirmation command, but the luminance data table for the background is not switched by receiving the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from extinguished to blinking by receiving the fluctuation pattern command of the next fluctuation, but the luminance data table for the background is not switched by receiving the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the luminance data table is continued until the next fluctuation. Therefore, the luminance data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command is received. It is not necessary to create a separate image, and it is possible to show the effect by the lamp without any discomfort from the effect at the time of loss to the next change, and it is possible to show a series of effects appropriately.

[Start 1]
Up to the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, the change of the scene is notified.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position. , Display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the movable body movable luminance data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body is in the process of retracting from the second position to the first position. , The luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position, the scene after switching is displayed. Output the corresponding sound.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the operation of the accessory switches the effect from the effect of the SP first half reach A to the effect of the SP second half reach A. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed according to the movement of the accessory falling. After that, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the character movement to the screen corresponding to the SP second half reach A while the character is rising. Further, from the luminance data table of the accessory operation part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the luminance data table of the SP latter half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 described later) while the accessory is rising. ) Is switched to the luminance data table. In addition, a sound corresponding to the latter half of the SP (for example, BGM in the latter half of the SP) is output while the accessory is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is at a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. Further, since the sound effect and the luminance data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the accessory is returning to the initial position, the fanning part of the latter half of the SP can be suitably displayed.

[Start 2]
Before the movable body moves, a reduced pattern is displayed at a specific display position,
When the movable body is movable, the movable body covers the specific display position.
Depending on the movement of the movable body, the effect display corresponding to the movement of the movable body is performed in the layer that has priority over the display layer of the reduced pattern.
After the movable body starts retracting and is no longer positioned at the specific display position, the effect display is switched to the display corresponding to the effect after switching the state in which the reduced symbol is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the operation of the accessory switches the effect from the effect of the SP first half reach A to the effect of the SP second half reach A. Further, before the operation of the accessory, the "2" symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the character moves, the character falls so that the character "P" among the characters of the character is positioned to the position where it overlaps with the place where the reduced "2" decorative pattern was displayed. do. Further, the effect image corresponding to the movement of the accessory is displayed in the priority layer in front of the reduced display of the "2" symbol according to the operation of dropping the accessory. Then, after the accessory rises from the drop position and the "2" symbol does not overlap with the accessory, the effect image gradually becomes thinner, and the background and "2" symbol corresponding to the SP second half reach A become. It is displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display from being unattractive by displaying the reduced decorative pattern during the operation of the accessory. Further, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. Further, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed in the middle of the ascending of the accessory, it is possible to switch the appropriate effect according to the movement of the accessory.

[Start 3]
The movable body is movable, and the effect is displayed before reaching the specific display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171, the accessory operates and the effect image is displayed before reaching the position of the lowermost end of the fall. According to this, the reduced decorative pattern can be hidden at an early stage, and it is possible to switch a suitable effect with a character.

[Start 4]
When switching from the effect display to the post-developed production display, the effect display is switched using the image associated with the movable body.

Specifically, when switching from the effect image to the image of the effect when developing in the latter half, the image related to the accessory may be displayed. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIGS. 172 (h7) to (h10), the characters "POWERFULII" and the images of the main characters Yumemu-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan when the character rises, etc. May be displayed. According to this, it is possible to show a suitable switching of the production with the accessory by giving the interlocking when the production is switched.

[Start 5]
There is a shield display that makes the effect display invisible when it becomes the closed mode after the closing operation, and makes the effect display visible by performing the opening operation after the closing operation.
Obstruction display can be executed at the timing related to the introduction part,
When the obstruction display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the visible area of the effect display becomes smaller.
When the shield display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area in which the effect display can be visually recognized increases.

Specifically, the shutter described above is an image that makes the image of the effect executed behind by making it invisible by closing it, and makes the image of the effect executed by opening it after closing visible. In addition, the shutter is executed at the timing related to the fanning part, that is, before the start of the fanning part. When the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is lowered as the visible area of the effect is narrowed, and when the shutter is opened, the screen brightness is reduced as the visible area of the effect is widened. Will be higher. According to this, the flow of the production can be shown favorably by giving reality when the shutter is closed and opened. In addition, although the image of the effect executed behind is made invisible or visible using the image of the shutter, the image may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect is executed with the accessory. You may.

[Start 6]
The image corresponding to the shield display has a shape in which the door closes from both ends of the screen in the center of the screen, or a shape in which the door closes from one end of the screen toward the other end.

Specifically, the shutter described above is a mode in which the shutter closes from the upper and lower edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to preferably show an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Further, the shutter may be closed from both ends of the screen toward the center like a sliding door. Further, the shutter may be closed from the upper end of the screen toward the lower end of the screen.

[Start 7]
In the shield display, the color of the edge between the facing doors that makes the effect display invisible is expressed in black.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is represented in black. According to this, it is possible to blur the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter just before the shutter is completely closed as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), and to eliminate the sense of incongruity. .. Similarly, when the shutter as shown in FIG. 60 (a16) starts to open, the discomfort can be eliminated.

[Start 8]
After the shield display goes through the closing operation and then opens, the display corresponding to the introduction part is performed.
While the obstruction display is in the middle of the opening operation, the display corresponding to the introduction part is performed, and the brightness of the display corresponding to the introduction part is gradually increased, while the obstruction display release operation is completed. , The display corresponding to the introduction part does not proceed, and the display corresponding to the introduction part starts to progress after the release operation of the shield display is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, after the shutter is opened, the reach of the first half of the SP is started. Until the shutter is fully opened, the effect of reaching the first half of the SP is not started and the screen brightness gradually increases, and after the shutter is released, the effect of the first half of the SP progresses. According to this, since the effect of the reach in the first half of the SP is an effect that the player wants to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction caused by the effect being executed before the shutter is opened.

[Start 9]
When the release operation of the shield display is completed, the light emitting means is turned off.
After the release operation of the shield display is completed and the image for one frame is displayed, the display corresponding to the introduction part proceeds and the light emitting means starts to emit light.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully opened. Therefore, the timing at which the shutter is fully opened depends on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. It can be easily understood by the player. In addition, in the fanning part of SP first half reach A and the fanning part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, the shutter is started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp is off, corresponding to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts to light as the production progresses in the SP first half reach, so that the player knows that the SP first half reach has started. Can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Start 10]
The effect display starts to darken before starting the closing operation of the shield display, and ends the closing operation at the timing when the effect display completely darkens.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is lowered first before the shutter closing is started, and the shutter is closed at the timing when the shutter is completely closed. It has become. Here, if the brightness of the screen is lowered at the timing when the shutter is closed, the speed of darkening of the screen may become too fast. Therefore, by starting to reduce the screen brightness in advance, it is possible to appropriately show a series of effects by making the speed of screen darkening appropriate.

[Start 11]
When the effect display becomes invisible due to the shield display
The brightness data has a scenario configuration in which the brightness is switched until the shield display is performed.
A scenario configuration in which the luminance data is maintained until the timing related to the fact that the effect display becomes visible by the shield display being in the open mode while the effect display is invisible due to the closed mode. It has become.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, in the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background is lit in yellow, blinking in red, blinking in white, and lit in red. In addition, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights / blinks while changing the color and brightness, whereas in the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is in a state where the brightness is lowered. The luminance data is maintained so that it lights up in red while maintaining it. As a result, before the shutter is closed, the effect in the start part is enlivened by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained so that the player can adjust the content of the effect when the shutter is opened. As a result, it is possible to better show the player the production in the subsequent fanning part.

[Start 12]
The production display includes the display before the introduction part is started and the display during the introduction part.
In the start part, the shield display closes while the display corresponding to the predetermined effect is performed, and then the shield display performs the release operation, so that the introduction part starts.
There are multiple types of introduction parts, and it is not possible to recognize which introduction part will be executed until the release operation of the shield display is completed.

Specifically, until the shutter is released, the player does not know which SP first half reach will be started. According to this, it is possible to have an expectation as to which effect will be executed.

[Start 13]
The shield display may be performed at a timing other than the timing of shifting to the introduction part.

Specifically, the above-mentioned effect by the shutter may be executed at a timing other than the timing of developing in the first half of the SP. For example, the timing may be from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-ream. In addition, when the shutter is closed and then released, an icon image (for example, a green hold image) suggesting a change in the active hold, which is a hold display of the change, is displayed, and the active hold corresponds to the icon image. It may change (for example, change from blue to green). Further, the effect by the shutter may be executed at the timing of developing from the reach of the first half of the SP to the reach of the second half of the SP. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the production by the shutter.

[Start 14]
The timing at which the luminance data is maintained is the timing at which the closing operation of the shielding display is completed, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed after the closing operation of the shielding display is completed, or the timing related to the closing operation of the shielding display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, in the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background is lit in yellow, blinking in red, blinking in white, and lit in red. In addition, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights / blinks while changing the color and brightness, whereas in the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is in a state where the brightness is lowered. The luminance data is maintained so that it lights up in red while maintaining it. As a result, before the shutter is closed, the effect in the start part is enlivened by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained so that the player can adjust the content of the effect when the shutter is opened. As a result, it is possible to better show the player the production in the subsequent fanning part.

[Start 15]
The period during which the luminance data is maintained is the period from when the shield display is in the closed mode until the release operation is performed as it is, or until the shield display is in the closed mode and the promotion display for encouraging the operation by the player is performed. It is a period of.

Specifically, in addition to the above-mentioned pattern in which the shutter closes and automatically opens, a pattern in which a button image is displayed after the shutter closes and the shutter is released by executing a button operation may be provided. According to this, since a plurality of types of effects by the shutter are provided, the interest of the effects by the shutter is improved.

[Start 16]
At the timing when the obstruction display is closed and the promotion display is performed, the maintenance brightness data is switched to the changing brightness data, and the brightness data is switched to the maintenance brightness data again after the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, in the production using the shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in the closed mode, the player's operation (for example, the operation of pressing a button, the infrared sensor) A promotion display may be performed to encourage (such as an action of holding a hand), and when the movement of the player corresponding to the promotion display is detected, an effect of opening the shutter may be performed. Then, while such a shutter display is in the closed mode, the lamp control is performed based on the luminance data table in which the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the frame lamp) is maintained, while the shutter display is closed. At the timing when the promotion display is performed as a mode, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to the brightness data table in which the lighting mode is changed, the lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table, and then the promotion display is performed ( In the state where the promotion display is continued), the lamp control may be performed again based on the luminance data table in which the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. The luminance data table for maintaining the lighting mode used again after the promotion display is performed may be the same as the luminance data table for maintaining the lighting mode used before the promotion display is performed. However, they may be different. According to this, since the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained while the shutter display is in the closed mode, the player is asked to perform the next effect after the shutter display is in the open mode. Can be easily noticed.

[Start 17]
The promotion display is a display including a button image and a promotion character that encourages the player's action.
When the promotion character is displayed, the sound corresponding to the promotion character is output, and the luminance data whose luminance data changes in association with the sound is incorporated.

Specifically, in the production using the shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in the closed mode, the player's operation (for example, the operation of pressing a button, the infrared sensor) A promotion display may be performed to encourage (such as an action of holding a hand), and when the movement of the player corresponding to the promotion display is detected, an effect of opening the shutter may be performed. Then, in the promotion display, even if a voice prompting the player's action (for example, a voice of "push") is output and a character prompting the player's action (for example, the character of "push") is displayed. good. Further, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed based on the luminance data table that changes the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the frame lamp) in response to the voice prompting the player's operation. In this way, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes in response to the voice prompting the player's movement. Therefore, the player's operation depends on the voice prompting the player's movement and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. It is possible to emphasize the character display that prompts the player, and it is possible to make the player perform an action corresponding to the promotion display more effectively.

[Fan 1]
The introductory part is
It is a part until the right or wrong of whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state is notified.
Includes scenes where the display is updated as the ally character and the enemy character compete, and scenes where the ally character suffers damage.
The display switching interval is faster than the epilogue part,
The number of display switching is larger than that of the epilogue part.

Specifically, the above-mentioned fanning part that fanned the success or failure had a production that was updated by the development in which the ally character and the enemy character alternately competed (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B). .. There is a scene where a ally character is damaged in the production in such a fanning part. In addition, in the production of such a fanning part, the image display switching interval is earlier than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switchings is also large. According to this, it is possible to make the fanning part look more suitable by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part.

[Fan 2]
In the introductory part, first, the dialogue sound of the ally character is output, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (b5) described above, in the fanning part, the dialogue of the ally character was generated at the very beginning, and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in the fanning part.

[Fan 3]
In the introductory part, the display scale of the first dialogue subtitles is set longer.

Specifically, the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in another scene of the fanning part. According to this, the ally character can be firmly recognized.

[Fan 4]
There is a scene where the dialogue sound of the ally character is output, but the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) described above, there is a scene in which the subtitles are not displayed when the ally character emits a line. According to this, it is possible to preferably show the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first, and more preferably show the screen display than adding the subtitle display to all the lines.

[Fan 5]
It may be expanded from the first introduction part to the second introduction part,
Ally characters play an active part in both the 1st introduction part and the 2nd introduction part,
In the first introduction part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is output first, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.
In the second introduction part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned fanning part, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first fanning part executed at the timing of the first half, and SP as the second fanning part executed at the timing of the second half. There were the second half reach A, the second half reach B, and the SP final reach. Then, there are scenes in which the ally character plays an active part in both the first fanning part and the second fanning part. In addition, in any of the fanning parts, the dialogue of the ally character was generated at the very beginning, and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized regardless of the fanning part.

[Fan 6]
In the first introduction part, the first character plays an active part,
In the second introduction part, the second character plays an active part,
In the first introduction part, the dialogue sound of the first character is output first, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.
In the second introduction part, the dialogue sound of the second character is first output, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned fanning part, Yumemu-chan's character plays an active part in the fanning part corresponding to the SP first half reach B, and in the fanning part corresponding to the SP second half reach B, Jam-chan and Nana-chan. There was a scene where the character of was active. Then, in the first half of the SP reach B, a line was generated by Yume-chan, an ally character who was active first, and the subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. Further, in the second half of the SP reach B, a line was generated by the first active ally characters Jam and Nana, and the subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in any of the fanning parts. The number of active characters may be one or two or more. In addition, the characters that are active in the first half of the fanning part and the second half of the fanning part may be the same.

[Fan 7]
The introductory part is
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed.
It is composed of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed.
In the luminance data table used in the scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed, the luminance data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. It is composed of.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which the character emits lines but does not have subtitles in the fanning part (for example, scenes of r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35). ). In such a specific scene, sounds that are difficult to express with subtitles are output as dialogue, so the setting is such that subtitles are not displayed. However, even in such a specific scene, the luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is designated so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. By doing so, even in a scene where the subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. As a result, the effect corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the fanning part can be appropriately shown to the player. Further, FIGS. 64 (b8), (b9), 74 (e7), 94 (i32), 95 (i34), 104 (n10), 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29). ), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33), FIG. 126 (r35), etc., even if there is a character's dialogue but no subtitle, the frame lamp is in the color corresponding to the character. Brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that is lit / blinking. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to appropriately show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

[Fan 8]
In the appearance scene of the character, the light emitting means emits light in a color other than the color corresponding to the character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in a scene in which a character appears (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), the color corresponding to the corresponding character in the previous scene. Control is performed to light the game effect lamp 9 in a color other than the above. Specifically, in front of the scene of (r24), the game effect lamp 9 is lit / blinked in yellow of (r22) or red of (r23), and then the game effect lamp 9 is in orange corresponding to the AD character. It will be a lighting scenario. Further, in front of the scene of (r26), the game effect lamp 9 is lit / blinked in orange of (r25) or white of (r25'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is lit in blue corresponding to the character of maid A. It becomes a scenario to do. Also, in front of the scene of (r28), the game effect lamp 9 is lit / blinked in blue of (r27) or white of (r27'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is in Hawaiian blue color corresponding to the character of Maid B. It will be a lighting scenario. Also, in front of the scene of (r30), the game effect lamp 9 is lit / blinked in Hawaiian blue color of (r29) or white of (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is pink corresponding to Nana's character. Is a scenario that lights up. Also, in front of the scene of (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up / blinks in pink of (r31) or white of (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. It becomes a scenario to do. Also, in front of the scene of (r34), a scenario in which the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character after the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) or white (r33'). It becomes. In this way, after the control is performed to light the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the corresponding character before the character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the color corresponding to the character. Control is done. Therefore, it is possible to express to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the displayed character changes and which character the changed character is, and it can be a suitable fanning part.

[Fan 9]
The light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to the character located on one side of the screen, and the light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to the character located on the other side of the screen.

Specifically, FIGS. 64 (b8), (b9), 74 (e7), 94 (i32), 95 (i34), 104 (n10), 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. As shown in 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), 126 (r35), etc., the color corresponding to the character even if the character has lines but no subtitles. Brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights / blinks with. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to appropriately show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

[Fan 10]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means,
Equipped with a light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and that it is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The introductory part is
The first scene in which the first character and the second character are displayed and the dialogue sound emitted by the first character is output, and
The first character and the second character are displayed, and the second scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the second character is output is included.
The light emission control means is
In the first scene, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the first scene.
In the second scene, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second scene.
In the luminance data table corresponding to the first scene, the light emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of types of light emitting means is set to the light emitting color corresponding to the first character, and the second of the plurality of types of light emitting means is used. When the luminance data in which the light emitting means on the side where the character is displayed is the light emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched corresponding to the dialogue sound emitted by the first character, the first character among the plurality of types of light emitting means is used. The brightness of the light emitting means on the side where is displayed is switched, and the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of types of light emitting means is not switched.
In the luminance data table corresponding to the second scene, the light emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of types of light emitting means is set to the light emitting color corresponding to the first character, and the second of the plurality of types of light emitting means is used. When the luminance data in which the light emitting means on the side where the character is displayed is the light emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched corresponding to the dialogue sound emitted by the second character, the first character among the plurality of types of light emitting means is used. The brightness of the light emitting means on the side where is displayed is not switched, and the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed is switched among the plurality of types of light emitting means.

Specifically, when a character appears, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, and when the character emits a line, the character is specified. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to. For example, in response to the production in which Yumemu-chan located on the left side of the screen and Baku Chu located on the right side of the screen confront each other as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), a green frame corresponding to Yumemu-chan is used. Turn on the left lamp and turn on the right lamp of the frame in red corresponding to the explosion chew. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 has a green frame corresponding to Yumemu-chan, corresponding to the effect that Yumemu-chan, located on the left side of the screen, emits a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 has a red frame right lamp corresponding to the explosion chew, corresponding to the effect that the explosion chew located on the right side of the screen emits a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). Flashes. As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters emitting lines are displayed, it is possible to appropriately express which character is emitting the lines by lighting / blinking the frame lamp, and the production in the fanning part is suitable for the game. Can be shown to others.

[Fan 11]
In the state where the first character and the second character are displayed, the dialogue subtitles are displayed in each of the scene where the dialogue sound of the first character is output and the scene where the dialogue sound of the second character is output. , The serif subtitle is displayed in a certain position with a certain font.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 63 (b5) and 63 (b6) described above, there is a scene in which each character emits a line in a situation where a friendly character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, the subtitle display for the dialogue has a certain size and is displayed at a certain display position. According to this, it is possible to reduce the chance that a bug or the like gets angry by not changing the display mode of the dialogue for each character.

[Fan 12]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the operating sound.

Specifically, in the fanning part, there is a scene where the SP reach BGM is output and the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also referred to as the operation sound) are output at the timing of overlapping. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the overlapping timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume when it is output from the speakers 8L and 8R than the physical sound. According to this, while the physical sound is output as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production is given to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to make the production in the fanning part look better.

[Fan 13]
Various sounds such as BGM, operation sounds, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are output according to the production performed in the introductory part.
At the design stage, the volume of the various sounds is adjusted by outputting various sounds together with the display corresponding to the effect performed in the introduction part.

Specifically, the work process when actually making various effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a video for each production corresponding to a fluctuation time such as SP reach is created. Along with this image, BGM, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, dialogue sounds, and other production sounds are added one by one with dedicated software. The finished image and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is further added. In such a series of work processes, rather than outputting the sound with reality while keeping the actual sense of distance on the image, the sound is output ignoring the actual sense of distance that is easily transmitted to the player by discarding the reality. Sound data is set as follows. Thereby, a series of effects can be preferably shown.

[Fan 14]
When the output of the operation sound corresponding to one character and the output of the dialogue sound overlap, the volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound is louder than the volume of the operation sound.

Specifically, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so as to be heard louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), the SP reach BGM is adjusted to be reduced according to the output period of the dialogue sound. By doing so, it is possible to easily convey the content of the production to the player while giving reality.

[Fan 15]
When the output of the dialogue sound of the first character with a long sense of distance and the output of the operation sound of the second character with a close sense of distance overlap in the front view of the screen, the volume of the dialogue sound is higher than the volume of the operation sound. The volume is adjusted so that is louder.

Specifically, when the dialogue sound of a character whose distance is far from the player and the physical sound whose distance is close to the player overlap, the dialogue sound is heard louder than the physical sound. The data is set. As a result, the sound that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily transmitted to the player by discarding the reality is output, so that the content of the production can be easily transmitted to the player.

[Fan 16]
The volume of the dialogue sound that does not display the subtitles when the output of the operation sound and the dialogue sound overlaps and the subtitles are not displayed, and when the output of the operation sound and the dialogue sound overlaps and the subtitles are displayed. The volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound on which the subtitles are displayed is louder than that.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 166 (B) and 166 (C), the dialogue sound is divided into the case where the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound has subtitles and the case where the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound has no subtitles. If there are subtitles, the volume of the SP reach BGM will be adjusted so that it sounds louder. The dialogue sound with subtitles is more related to the content of SP reach than the dialogue sound without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the production by outputting a large amount of the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

[Fan 17]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table composed of the brightness data according to the time data set in the upper table.
The upper table includes the first upper table and the second upper table.
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table.
There is a notification effect to notify whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and that it is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The light emission control means is
In the first scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table.
In the second scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table.
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are common luminance data tables.
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data is configured to be the specific time.
The first upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and the time data in which the specific luminance data table is used for the first hour longer than the specific time.
The second upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and the time data in which the specific luminance data table is used for the second hour longer than the specific time.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, so that the frame lamps are set at a plurality of different timings. While lighting in yellow, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow can be changed by making the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 different in the lamp control between a plurality of timings different from each other. As a result, in one child table WD9, it is used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing different grandchild tables at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the data capacity, the time to turn on the frame lamp can be different in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Fan 18]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table composed of the brightness data according to the time data set in the upper table.
The upper table includes the first upper table and the second upper table.
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and that it is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The light emission control means is
In the first scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table.
In the second scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table.
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are common luminance data tables.
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data is configured to be the specific time.
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data using the specific luminance data table for a specific time.
The second upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and the time data in which the specific luminance data table is used for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, so that the frame lamps are set at a plurality of different timings. While blinking in white, the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control is different between multiple timings that are different from each other, so that the frame lamp blinks in white twice or three times. Can be done. As a result, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings. The number of times the white blinks can be made different. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Fan 19]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table composed of the brightness data according to the time data set in the upper table.
The upper table includes the first upper table and the second upper table.
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and that it is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
The light emission control means is
In one scene of the introduction part in the first notification effect, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table.
In the scene of the introduction part 1 in the second notification effect, the light emitting means is controlled by using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table.
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification effect and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect are common luminance data tables.
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data is configured to be the specific time.
The first upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and the time data in which the specific luminance data table is used for the first hour longer than the specific time.
The second upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and the time data in which the specific luminance data table is used for the second hour longer than the specific time.

Specifically, in any of the child table WD9 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the fanning part of the SP final reach. Since the reference time is changed while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control is reduced in a plurality of reach effects. However, the time for turning on the frame lamp can be different in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach. Similarly, in the child table WD2 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables should be prepared at each of a plurality of different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the data capacity used for lamp control is reduced, and the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach is different. May be good.

[Fan 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table composed of the brightness data according to the time data set in the upper table.
The upper table includes the first upper table and the second upper table.
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and that it is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
The light emission control means is
In one scene of the introduction part in the first notification effect, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table.
In the scene of the introduction part 1 in the second notification effect, the light emitting means is controlled by using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table.
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification effect and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect are common luminance data tables.
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data is configured to be the specific time.
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data using the specific luminance data table for a specific time.
The second upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and the time data in which the specific luminance data table is used for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

[Fan 21]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In a specific scene, the display of the second line subtitle is started while the first line subtitle is displayed, then the display of the first line subtitle ends, and the second line subtitle is displayed. And
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first serif subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second serif subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the fanning part, as shown in FIG. 178 (A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the dialogue of the character. When the subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first and the display period of the second subtitle displayed next overlap each other. A fade effect is added when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. Due to the fade effect, changes occur when the transmittance of the displayed characters is different. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles can be easily understood by the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be easily understood.

[Fan 22]
In a scene where multiple characters face each other
When the dialogue sound of one character is output, the first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed, and then when the dialogue sound of the other character is output, the second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed. Being done
The second subtitle is displayed with a transmittance of 50% so that the first subtitle overlaps the portion displayed with a transmittance of 0%, and then the first subtitle is displayed when the second subtitle is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. Is finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178 (A), in the scene where the characters face each other, the first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue of one character is displayed, and then the second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue of another character is displayed. Subtitles may be displayed. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed overlapping the place where the first subtitle is displayed with a transmittance of 0% and the second subtitle is displayed with a transmittance of 70%. After that, the first subtitle fades out, the second subtitle fades in, and the transmittance is displayed as 0%. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, it is easy to understand the switching of the subtitles due to the fade effect.

[Fan 23]
The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is
It is not output when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap and at least one of them has a fade effect.
Output when only the second subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle of "found" is displayed so that the first subtitle and the second subtitle overlap, and a fade effect is added. It is not output during the period. Then, the serif sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from the time when the second subtitle is displayed with the transmittance of 0%. According to this, it is easy to understand the switching of subtitles due to the fade effect, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily grasp the content of the effect visually and audibly.

[Fan 24]
In the advantageous state, the music is output and the lyrics are displayed.
When switching from the display of the first subtitle to the display of the second subtitle in the lyrics display, the fade effect is not added to the display of any of the subtitles.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178, during the jackpot round, the effect of the character singing along with the music is executed. Then, subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, the fade effect is not added even if the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously. This is because when the music is playing, the progress of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the timing of switching is easy to understand. Further, since the music during the jackpot round is a typical music of the content mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lyrics displayed next are easy for the player to understand even if the fade effect is not added. According to this, the work of adding the fade effect can be omitted during the big hit round, and a series of productions can be shown well.

[Fan 25]
Character dialogue sounds may overlap in either the introductory part or the epilogue part.
The introductory part has a higher rate of overlapping dialogue sounds than the epilogue part.

Specifically, although not shown, the timing of subtitle display may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from the subtitle display to the subtitle display is longer than that in the fan part. This is because the fanning part progresses quickly, and the epilogue part does not progress as fast as the fanning part. As a result, the ratio of the fanned part to be displayed at the timing when the subtitles are overlapped is higher than that of the epilogue part. In such a case, by effectively adding a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort when switching the subtitles.

[Fan 26]
Even in certain scenes where the subtitles do not overlap
A fade effect is added when the subtitle is displayed or when the subtitle disappears.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is added to the subtitle display even in the predetermined scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not cover. As for the fade effect, at least one of the fade-in effect and the fade-out effect may be added. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it takes time and effort to add a fade effect depending on whether or not the subtitle display is covered. Therefore, by uniformly applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the work load from increasing.

[Fan 27]
The display of the first subtitle without the fade effect and the display of the second subtitle may be interchanged.
It is conceivable to set a blank period between the display of the first subtitle and the display of the second subtitle, but if a long line sound or a fast-paced line sound is output, a feeling of strangeness appears. Therefore, the blank period is not provided.

Specifically, FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181 (A), subtitles for similar lines such as "found" and "found" may be continuously displayed. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. In addition, regarding the display of subtitles for long lines and the display of subtitles for fast-moving lines, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur when the subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the discomfort can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 2 of FIG. 181 (B), it is conceivable to superimpose "found" on the subtitle display of "found" and then display "found". In such a case, the subtitle display becomes difficult to see by not adding the fade effect. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181 (C), it is conceivable to display the subtitle display of "found" and the subtitle display of "found" in two upper and lower rows. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the display area of the effect, which hinders the effect in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display.

[Fan cut-in 1]
The display means is
In the introductory part, a promotion display is performed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed.
In the introductory part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and the dialogue subtitles are displayed in a specific area of the display means for the dialogue sound.
At the timing of performing the promotion display in the introduction part, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
The luminance data table includes a luminance data table for cut-in display corresponding to the cut-in display and a luminance data table for an introduction part corresponding to an introduction part.
The light emitting means in which the luminance data is set in the cut-in display luminance data table includes at least the same portion as the luminous means in which the luminance data is set in the introduction part luminance data table.

Specifically, the luminance data of the lamp control (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect is the same as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. It is designed to use a frame lamp at the location. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting / blinking of the extra lamp from being mixed and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide an effect in a suitable fanning part.

[Fan cut-in 2]
Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the scene before the button where the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 127 (r39) to 128 (r42), the subtitle display is displayed before the promotion display of the button image is displayed at the timing when the cut-in display is executed. .. According to this, since the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen by paying attention to the subtitle display, it is possible not to miss the button image, and the cut-in display can be appropriately executed. Can be done.

[Fan cut-in 3]
At the timing when the cut-in display ends, the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are not displayed, and after a period in which the dialogue sound is not output, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 128 (r41) to 130 (r47) described above, the design is such that there is no dialogue during a predetermined period after the cut-in display is separated. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period without dialogue, a dialogue is issued, and a subtitle is displayed for the dialogue. According to this, the player can concentrate on the production in the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be obtained.

[Win / Fail 1]
In the success / failure notification part,
The player is notified of whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, and the player is notified.
A promotion display is made to encourage the player to perform a specific action.
Performed between the introductory part and the epilogue part,
The movable body moves after the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the scene of the decision of success or failure was between the fanning part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene of winning / failing, the player is notified whether or not it is a big hit after the trigger is operated as an operating means. In addition, in the scene of winning or failing, the accessory was movable after the trigger operation in the case of a big hit. According to this, the interest of the production is improved by setting a suitable scene for determining whether or not the result is made by using the operating means.

[Win / Fail 2]
In the success / failure notification part executed after the introduction part,
By performing the introduction display of the promotion display in the state where the expansion display is performed before the promotion display is performed, the expansion display becomes invisible, and then the promotion display is performed in the state where the expansion display can be visually recognized. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54), the subtitles are displayed by the ally character before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and then the operating means is supported. The screen makes it impossible to see the effect that was being performed. Then, the effect executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, while giving an impact by displaying the introduction of the operating means on the entire screen, it is possible to display the effect that was firmly executed at the timing when the operating means can be operated, and to show the progress of the effect appropriately. ..

[Win / Fail 3]
The expanded display is performed on the back side of the introduction display.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51) described above, introduction images (images of (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation means are displayed. The production is in progress even in the middle. According to this, by advancing the effect behind the scenes, it is possible to pay attention to the image (image of (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to pay attention to the development of the effect.

[Win / Fail 4]
The expanded display is performed while the promotion display is being performed.

Specifically, in FIGS. 132 (r51) to 132 (r54) described above, when the trigger image as the promotion display is displayed, the tail moves slightly at each image change in the image of Baku Chu. Was there. In this way, the effect may be advanced while the promotion display is displayed. Here, as the progress of the production, the scene may be switched or the character may move instead of moving the tail. According to this, it is possible to pay attention to the development of the effect during the promotion display.

[Win / Fail 5]
When the expansion display is performed while the promotion display is being performed, it progresses later than before the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, the effect that progresses during the display of the promotion display is slower than the effect that was executed before the promotion display was displayed. According to this, the player can pay attention to the promotion display for operating the operation means, and the promotion display and the progress of the production can be balanced. It should be noted that the effect progressing during the display of the promotion display may be slower than the effect progressing during the display of the introduced image. According to this, it is possible to make a difference in the progress speed of the effect between the display of the promotion display and the display of the introduced image.

[Win / Fail 6]
Echo is applied to the dialogue sound before the introduction display.

Specifically, it is preferable to apply an echo to the dialogue before the introduction image as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) described above is displayed. According to this, the player can be excited before the introductory image is displayed.

[Win / Fail 7]
The introduction display is performed after the output of the dialogue sound that was displayed while the expansion display before the promotion display is performed is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 131 (r49) described above, the introduced image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introduced image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introduced image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

[Win / Fail 8]
The introductory part consists of a predetermined period and a slow motion period after the predetermined period and before the pass / fail notification.
During a predetermined period, the movement of the character is depicted using multiple image data.
In the slow motion period, the movement of the character is depicted by adding an effect effect to one image data.

Specifically, the scene before the decision of whether or not (r48) is performed in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the image is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed in (r48) is the image of Baku Chu and six allies. Performed with images. Then, the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make the character appear to be operating. Here, if an image is created in the slow motion period using the same amount of image data as in the period other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and making the character appear to be moving by switching and enlarging the display. The number of images used in the slow motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than the number other than the slow motion period.

[Win / Fail 9]
There is a production that includes an introduction part where ally characters and enemy characters appear, and a settlement part after the introduction part.
The introductory part has a predetermined period in which the scene where the ally is displayed and the scene where the enemy is displayed are switched alternately.
It is possible to shift to the final part by performing the action of the player when the promotion display is performed during the predetermined period.
In a predetermined period, the speed at which the scene where the ally is displayed and the scene where the enemy is displayed alternately increases gradually, and the promotion display is performed after the speed becomes the fastest.
As for the depiction in which the scene in which the ally is displayed and the scene in which the enemy is displayed are alternately switched, each of the enemy and the ally is reproduced with one image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the switching speed between the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character gradually increases. According to this, after the switching speed of the image becomes the fastest, the promotion display prompting the trigger operation is displayed, so that the scene where the ally character is advantageous is developed or the scene where the enemy character is advantageous is developed. It will be possible to inspire whether or not it will be developed, and the interest will improve. In addition, by switching the images alternately, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the ally character and the enemy character are each executed using one image.

[Win 10]
The predetermined period in which the scene in which the ally is displayed and the scene in which the enemy is displayed are alternately switched is also applied to the scene in which the reach effect develops from one reach effect to another reach effect.

Specifically, the effect of the slow motion period in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach and the SP final reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably execute the production even at the timing of developing from the reach of the first half of the SP.

[Win / Fail 11]
The enemy character is depicted using a plurality of image data in order to change a part of the enemy character, but the image data of the enemy character itself is diverted and only the part is changed.

Specifically, in the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the ally character and the enemy character may be configured by using two or more images. For example, in the case of a friendly character, by repeatedly using four images such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, ..., the character's hair and clothes may appear to move gradually. good. According to this, by changing only a part of the data while diverting the data of the character itself, it is possible to more faithfully express the state of operation while reducing the amount of data change work.

[Win / Fail 12]
During the slow motion period, a part of the character changes.

Specifically, in the slow motion period in (r48), when the character's hair and clothes appear to move gradually from a plurality of images, the movement of the hair and clothes is about the same as the period other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to appear to move at speed. Here, if the number of images is increased according to the movement of slow motion in order to make the movement look smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes large. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, the operation does not become awkward even if the number of images used is reduced, and it is possible to more faithfully express the operation while reducing the data capacity. can.

[Win / Fail 13]
In the period before shifting from the introduction part in the first notification effect to the success / failure notification part
The display means performs a promotion display that encourages the player to perform a specific action.
The sound output means continues the sound output,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the luminance data table for the first notification effect.
In the period before shifting from the introduction part in the second notification production to the success / failure notification part
The display means does not perform a promotion display that encourages a specific action, but displays a false positive.
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the luminance data table for the second notification effect.
The luminance data table for the first notification effect is configured so that the luminance data is switched.
The luminance data table for the second notification effect is configured so that the luminance data is not switched.

Specifically, in the SP reach production in which the operation promotion that encourages the player to operate is not performed in the pass / fail branch, the production is stopped by keeping the mute state and keeping the frame lamp lit in white. The production can be shown to the player, and the success / failure branch (decision timing) can be easily communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach effect in which the operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to operate in the pass / fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound corresponding to the reach (BGM) are output, and the operation promotion is further performed. By switching and using the grandchild table a plurality of times in order to control the frame lamp so as to correspond to the mode corresponding to the above, the timing of determining the success / failure branch can be suitably produced by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. As described above, it is possible to preferably produce the timing of determining the success / failure branch by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation promotion is performed in the success / failure branch or the operation promotion is performed.

[Win / Fail 14]
When the promotion display is not performed, the display changes in the order of the first display period consisting of the moving image, the second display period consisting of the still image, and the third display period consisting of the moving image branching depending on whether the image is correct or not.

Specifically, from FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39) described above, the image in which the two characters Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed, and the timing of (i39). Then, one image is displayed still for a predetermined period. After that, if it is a big hit, the video of the hit epilogue part will be played, and if it is lost, the video of the lost epilogue part will be played. During the period in which one image is stationary and displayed for a predetermined period, one image can be diverted and used, so that it is possible to preferably incite a scene of winning or failing while reducing the data capacity. In the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 95 (i36) to 96 (i39), many images (for example, 10 images) are displayed. You may use it.

[Win / Fail 15]
The scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when the promotion display is not performed is
The first scenario corresponding to the first display period and
The second scenario corresponding to the second display period and
There is a third scenario corresponding to the third display period,
The first scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.
The second scenario is a scenario in which predetermined luminance data is maintained.
The third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in the child table WD9 in the SP latter half reach A, the frame lamp blinks in white based on the grandchild table W7, and then the frame lamp lights in white based on the grandchild table W8. .. Specifically, in the pass / fail branch in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A where the operation promotion is not performed, "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, is used. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to inform the player of the success / failure branch (decision timing) in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

[Win / Fail 16]
The display when the promotion display is performed changes in the order of the first display period in which the introduction display is performed before the promotion display is performed, the second display period consisting of the moving image, and the third display period consisting of the moving image branching depending on whether or not it is correct. do.

Specifically, from FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the display period of the introduced image in which the image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is gathered in the center of the screen is displayed. be. After that, there is a period in which the promotion display for operating the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the promotion display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make the character appear to be moving. After that, by operating the trigger in the scene of the branch of the hit / fail decision, the video of the hit epilogue part is played if it is a big hit, and the video of the lost epilogue part is played if it is lost. All of these periods are periods in which the image is dynamically displayed as if it were moving. According to this, a series of effects can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of effects can be obtained.

[Win / Fail 17]
The scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when the promotion display is performed is
The first scenario corresponding to the first display period and
The second scenario corresponding to the second display period and
There is a third scenario corresponding to the third display period,
The first scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.
The second scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.
The third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in the child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), a sound corresponding to operation promotion and a sound corresponding to reach (BGM) are output. In this state, the frame lamps are switched one after another, such as blinking white, lighting red, and blinking red, and it is possible to excite the effect of promoting the operation for the player at the hit / miss branch (determined timing).

[Win / Fail 18]
As a flow from the success / failure notification part,
When it is determined that the favorable state is not controlled, the display when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled is performed, and then the display corresponding to the normal background is performed.

Specifically, the hit epilogue part and the lost epilogue part after the scene of the winning / failing determination shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to 136 (s10) and 137 (u1) to 138 (u4) described above will be described. In the hit epilogue part, the video corresponding to the hit epilogue part is played after the production of the character movement. Further, in the lost epilogue part, the screen goes dark after the effect corresponding to the lost epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since it is a flow of switching a plurality of images after the scene of determining whether or not to win, it is possible to make a suitable flow of production.

[Win / Fail 19]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed includes an introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the success or failure. It is configured to include a first epilogue part that is informed that it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled is the introduction part until the notification of whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state, and after the notification of the result. It is configured to include a second epilogue part that is informed that it is not controlled to the advantageous state.
The light emission control means is
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part.
In the second epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set to have a lower luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when the transition to the lost epilogue part is performed via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the final luminance data in the fanning part ( The RGB data) is "FDC", while the first luminance data (RGB data) in the lost epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, at the time of loss in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, it is possible to light the frame lamp darker in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the pass / fail branch. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the loss has been made. Further, when the transition to the lost epilogue part is performed via the fanned part in the SP final reach, the final luminance data (RGB data) in the fanned part includes "D00", whereas the first luminance in the lost epilogue part is included. The data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". As a result, at the time of loss in the final reach of the SP, the frame lamp can be turned on in white, which is darker than the red blinking in the pass / fail branch, so that it is possible to notify the player that the loss is suitable.

[Win / Fail 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
The first notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled is the introduction part until the right or wrong of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state after the right or wrong notification. It is configured to include an epilogue part that is informed that it will be controlled.
The first notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled is the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the control to the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that informs you that it will not be done,
The second notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled is the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. It is configured to include an epilogue part that is informed that it will be controlled.
The second notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled is the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the control to the advantageous state after the propriety notification. Consists of an epilogue part that informs you that it will not be done,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table composed of the brightness data according to the time data set in the upper table.
The upper table includes a first upper table, a second upper table, a third upper table, and a fourth upper table.
The luminance data table includes a first luminance data table for notification effect, a second luminance data table for announcement effect, and a specific luminance data table.
The light emission control means is
In the introduction part in the first notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first upper table and the brightness data table for the first notification effect.
In the introduction part in the second notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled by using the second upper table and the brightness data table for the second notification effect.
In the epilogue part in the first notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled by using the third upper table and the specific luminance data table.
In the epilogue part in the second notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled by using the fourth upper table and the specific luminance data table.
The specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the first notification effect notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled, and the specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the second notification effect notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled. Is a common luminance data table,
The third upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and the time data using the specific luminance data table for the first hour.
The fourth upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data using the specific luminance data table for the second hour different from the first hour.

Specifically, the child table WD4 of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of the SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of the SP second half reach B also have the child table of the SP final reach. Similar to the WD17, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of loss based on the grandchild table W14. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, whereas in the SP final reach, it is 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is controlled by the grandchild table W14. In this way, it is possible to make the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of loss common among a plurality of different reach, but to make the lamp control time different with reference to the grandchild table. As a result, in the child table used in each of the plurality of different reach, the reference time is changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to the time of loss in each of the different plurality of reach. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to make the time for lighting the frame lamp different in the lighting mode corresponding to the loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

[Win / Fail 21]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is
It is configured to include an introduction part until it is notified whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part which is notified after the notification of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. The first pattern to be done and
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed includes an introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the success or failure. A second pattern including a second epilogue part that is notified that the advantageous state is not controlled, and a relief notification part that is executed after the second epilogue part and is notified that the advantageous state is controlled. And there is
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled is the introduction part until the notification of whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state, and after the notification of the result. It is configured to include a second epilogue part that is informed that it is not controlled to the advantageous state.
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect of the second pattern, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
In the relief notification part in the notification effect of the second pattern, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part.
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part is set to have a higher luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

[Loss 1]
As a flow from the success / failure notification part,
When it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled, the image when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled is displayed, and the decorative symbol notifies the decision that the advantageous state is not controlled. When the epilogue part is executed,
After that, the switching display is performed, and the image is switched to the image corresponding to the background at the start of reach.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, when a loss occurs after the result is determined, the loss symbol is displayed in the loss epilogue part in the blackout background. After that, after the switching image by the eye-catching screen is displayed, the screen is switched to the normal background at the start of reach. According to this, the eye-catching screen makes it possible to preferably show the switching of the screen at the time of loss.

[Loss 2]
In the lost epilogue part, the image when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled is displayed in blackout, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed in fade-in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the lost epilogue part, the background at the time of losing is gradually blacked out, and the middle symbol gradually fades in. According to this, since the image at the time of loss and the middle pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, the display at the time of loss can be preferably shown depending on the relationship between the two.

[Loss 3]
When blacking out an image when it is determined that it is not controlled in an advantageous state, the number of steps from 100% to 0% of the transmittance of one image is 100. More than the number of steps from% to 0%.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the loss epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background at the time of loss from 100% to 0% transmittance is 100% for the medium symbol. It is more than the number of steps required to fade in from to 0%. Specifically, the background blackout has eight stages from (X11) to (X18), while the fade-in of the medium symbol has six stages from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image at the time of loss and the middle pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, and the number of stages of changing the transmittance is different. Can be shown favorably.

[Loss 4]
The blackout of the image when it is determined that it is not controlled in an advantageous state is performed before the fade-in of the medium symbol of the decorative symbol.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background at the time of loss is blacked out starts before the change in which the middle symbol fades in. According to this, the image at the time of loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, and the blackout is faster than the fade-in of the symbol. The time display can be shown favorably.

[Loss 5]
When it is determined that the image will not be controlled to the advantageous state before blackout, the cut of the displayed image will change.
The cut of the displayed image does not change in the image when it is determined that it is not controlled by the advantageous state at the time of blackout.

Specifically, in the image at the time of loss before blackout, the displayed image is switched, whereas in the image at the time of blackout, there is no change in the displayed image. According to this, the blackout can be made to look good by starting the blackout in the state of the image without change. It should be noted that switching the image includes switching the picture on the screen, switching the angle of the image, and switching the displayed scene itself. Further, the fact that there is no change in the image includes the fact that the image is the same still image, the angle of the image does not change even if it is a moving image, and even if it is moving, only a part of the image is moving minutely.

[Loss 6]
The image when it is determined that it is not controlled in an advantageous state is blacked out, and as a result of fading in the middle symbol of the decorative symbol, the transmittance of the middle symbol becomes 0%, which is required for blackout 1. The period during which the transmittance of the image is 0% is maintained for a predetermined period, and the transmittance is maintained for a predetermined period.
In a predetermined period, the symbol itself is shaken for at least two cycles.
The predetermined period is longer than the period in which the image of the medium symbol changes from the state of 100% transmittance to the state of 0% transmittance, and is longer than the period in which the switching display is performed.

Specifically, as a result of blacking out the background at the time of loss and fading in the middle symbol, as shown in (X18) to (X20), the medium symbol having a transmittance of 0% and A blacked-out background with a transmittance of 0% is displayed for a predetermined period. This predetermined period includes a symbol shaking period as shown in (X19) to (X20). The symbol shaking period may be set so that the cycle of moving the middle symbol from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position is one cycle, and the symbol shaking is repeated for at least two cycles. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the fade-in is executed from the state where the medium symbol has a transmittance of 100% to the state of the transmittance of 0%. Further, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period in which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in the display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a predetermined period in which the middle symbol is displayed in a clear state, so that it is possible to preferably show that the pattern is lost.

[Loss 7]
The switching display is a display configured to include information about the gaming machine.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, on the eye-catching screen, as information about the pachinko gaming machine 1, the characters "POWERFULII" in the title and the main characters Yumemu-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan Image and is displayed. According to this, the information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately transmitted by the eye-catching image.

[Loss 8]
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is in the advantageous state is advantageous after the introduction part until the notification of whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state and the notification of the success or failure. It is configured to include a first epilogue part that is informed that the state is controlled.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is not controlled in the advantageous state includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the control is controlled in the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state after the notification of the propriety. Consists of a second epilogue part that is informed that it is not controlled by
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is displayed to notify that the control is not controlled in an advantageous state.
After that, switch display is performed.
After that, display the background and
After that, with the symbol confirmation command as an opportunity, the symbol is stopped and displayed.
After that, the fluctuation display of the symbol is started with the fluctuation command as an opportunity.
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part, the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means for directing.
When the switching display is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display to control the light emitting means for the effect.
When the background display is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the background display to control the light emitting means for the effect.
When the stop display of the symbol is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for stopping the symbol, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used. To control the light emitting means for directing,
When the symbol variation display is started, the luminance data table is switched to the fourth symbol variation luminance data table, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continued. It is used to control the light emitting means for directing.

Specifically, the characteristic portion of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of loss will be described. The effect screen is switched to the image at the time of loss after the effect of determining whether or not to win. After that, after the blackout display in which the loss display result is displayed, the screen is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, a screen is displayed in which the symbol is fixed and stopped after the screen is switched to the normal screen. Further, the luminance data table is switched from the luminance data table at the time of winning / failing determination to the luminance data table at the time of loss. After that, it is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching). After that, it is switched to the background luminance data table at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing when the screen is switched to the eye-catching screen. Further, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. The variable display of the special symbol of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from blinking to off by receiving the symbol confirmation command, but the luminance data table for the background is not switched by receiving the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from extinguished to blinking by receiving the fluctuation pattern command of the next fluctuation, but the luminance data table for the background is not switched by receiving the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the luminance data table is continued until the next fluctuation. Therefore, the luminance data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command is received. It is not necessary to create a separate image, and it is possible to show the effect by the lamp without any discomfort from the effect at the time of loss to the next change, and it is possible to show a series of effects appropriately.

[Loss 9]
The luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of reach loops and refers to the luminance data until the change condition is satisfied.
In the introduction part, the luminance data corresponding to the background is not used, but the luminance data corresponding to the background is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the lamp control based on the background luminance data table develops into SP reach, and when a specific change condition is satisfied, it corresponds to the effect of SP reach after the change. It is switched to the SP reach luminance data table, and thereafter, lamp control is performed based on the SP reach luminance data table. In this case, while the SP reach effect is being executed, the switching of the brightness data in the background brightness data table is stopped with the passage of time in the background of the lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table. Continue without. In addition, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the error brightness data table corresponding to the error state when a specific change condition such as an error occurs, and thereafter, the error brightness. Lamp control is performed based on the data table. In this case, in the error state, in the background of the lamp control based on the error luminance data table, the switching of the luminance data in the background luminance data table continues without stopping with the passage of time. This makes it possible to make the series of effects to be performed look more suitable.

[Loss 10]
After switching to the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part, the brightness data table corresponding to the background is used even if the symbol confirmation command is received, and then even if the customer waiting command is received when there is no hold. The luminance data table corresponding to the background is continuously used.

Specifically, after the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, the brightness data table for the background continues even if there is no hold storage and the customer waiting demo designation command is received. Used for. According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be continuously used, so that the effect of the lamp can be shown without discomfort, and a series of effects can be shown favorably. Can be done.

[Loss 11]
When the design is confirmed, the light emitting means of the special figure stops,
Upon receiving the symbol confirmation command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is switched from blinking to extinguished.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from blinking to extinguished by receiving the symbol confirmation command that triggers the effect of stopping the confirmation of the symbol. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow at the time of loss can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Loss 12]
When the next fluctuation starts, the light emitting means of the special figure blinks,
By receiving the next variable command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is switched from extinguished to blinking.

Specifically, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from extinguished to blinking by receiving the fluctuation pattern command of the next fluctuation that triggers the start of the next fluctuation. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow at the time of loss can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Loss 13]
Switching from the luminance data table corresponding to the hit / fail notification part to the luminance data table corresponding to the determination that the advantageous state is not controlled,
When the switching display is performed, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to.
After switching to the background at the start of reach, the final luminance data of the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is used, the luminance data is not switched even if the symbol confirmation command is received, and the luminance data is used during the symbol confirmation period. Then, when the next fluctuation command is received, the luminance data table is switched to the one corresponding to the next fluctuation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, the luminance data table at the time of loss is used from the effect that the six ally characters of (X40) are disappointed to the effect that the background image of (X41) is blacked out. .. After the background image is blacked out, an eye-catching image is displayed. From the switching period to the eye-catching screen of (X42) to the symbol determination period of (X45), the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. After that, when the variation pattern command with hold is received, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the background. That is, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) at the timing when the screen is switched to the eye catch screen, the luminance data table is maintained during the symbol confirmation period, and the background is switched to the next fluctuation. You can switch to the brightness data table of. Further, in the symbol determination period, the extinguishing, which is the final luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching), is used. According to this, after switching to the background luminance data table, the final luminance data of the switching (for eye-catching) luminance data table is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received, so that it is a loss. Can be easily recognized, and as a result, the loss can be shown favorably.

[Loss 14]
The final luminance data is extinguished data, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part does not include the luminance data for maintaining the extinguishing.

Specifically, the final luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is data that is kept off. Further, in the luminance data table for the background, the data for keeping the light off is not used. According to this, since the brightness data for keeping the light off is not used in the brightness data table for the background, it is peculiar to the case where the light is turned off when the background is displayed. It is possible to make it easy to recognize that.

[Loss 15]
By receiving the customer waiting command, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the customer waiting command.

Specifically, if there is no hold storage after the symbol is confirmed, the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) is switched to the luminance data table for the background by receiving the customer waiting designation command. According to this, when the customer waiting designation command is received, the luminance data table for the background is switched to, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the loss has occurred.

[Loss 16]
The first luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is set to be higher in luminance than the last luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the determination that it is not controlled in an advantageous state.

Specifically, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) has a larger luminance than the final luminance data (turning off) in the luminance data table before displaying the eye-catching image (at the time of loss). It has become. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can emit light with higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, it is easy to recognize the switching by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Loss 17]
The first luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is set to be higher in luminance than the first luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part.

Specifically, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) has a higher luminance than the first luminance data in the luminance data table (excluding extinguishing) corresponding to the background at the start of fluctuation. ing. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light with high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, it is easy to recognize the switching by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Character movement 1]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the propriety of notifying the propriety. It is configured to include a notification part and a first epilogue part that is notified that the advantage state is controlled after the notification of the result.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes an introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and a propriety notification for notifying the propriety. It is composed of a part and a second epilogue part that is notified that the advantage state is not controlled even after the notification of the result.
The light emission control means is
In both the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined not to be controlled in the advantageous state. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the common introduction part.
After the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the light emitting means is controlled by using the hit luminance data table.
After the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled by using the loss luminance data table.
The average time for switching to the next luminance data after the one luminance data is used in the hit luminance data table is longer than the average time for switching to the next luminance data after the one luminance data is used in the loss luminance data table. It is set short.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow color based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, at the time of loss, the frame lamp lights up darkly in white based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit time. As a result, since the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals in the hit time than in the loss time, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hit is achieved depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, while emphasizing the lighting by the frame lamp at the time of hitting more than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing than at the time of losing, and as a result, the lamp that contrasts hitting and losing. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Character movement 2]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / fail, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done,
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The light emission control means is
In the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled by using the movable body movable luminance data table.
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the epilogue part.
The luminance data table for moving a movable body is configured so that luminance data representing chromatic colors and luminance data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used.
The luminance data table for the epilogue part is configured such that the luminance data representing the first chromatic color, the luminance data representing the second chromatic color, and the luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors are sequentially used.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263, in the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20 in the production where the accessory falls, and the rainbow color is chromatic. , The frame lamp lights up so that the achromatic color (RGB data of "333") is switched alternately. As a result, by occasionally sandwiching an achromatic color with respect to the rainbow-colored chromatic color, it is possible to perform an effect that emphasizes the big hit and congratulates the player. After that, in the production where the ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled by the lamp based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without sandwiching the achromatic color, so that it became a big hit. It is possible to perform a production that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be preferably shown to the player.

[Epilogue 1]
The epilogue part is a blessing part after the decision to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, there is a scene where the enemy character is killed, there is no scene where the ally character is damaged, and the number of display changes is introduced. Less than a part.

Specifically, the above-mentioned hit epilogue part is a part that does not shift at the time of loss, and there is a scene in which the enemy character is disadvantageous and a scene in which the ally character is advantageous. Further, in the hit epilogue part, the number of switching of the image display in the production is smaller than that in the fanning part. According to this, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect in each part, and it is possible to appropriately show the flow of a series of effects.

[Epilogue 2]
In the epilogue part, the proportion of dialogue subtitles displayed for the character's dialogue is higher than the proportion of dialogue subtitles displayed for the character's dialogue in the introductory part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character's dialogue in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character in SP reach, which is the fanning part. ing. According to this, by displaying the subtitles firmly in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is speaking. In addition, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to coordinate the feeling of blessing. In addition, since the screen changes more often in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, even if the subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the production will not be disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. , It is possible to give the first priority to convey the effect by switching images. As a result, it is possible to perform a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Epilog 3]
In the epilogue part, dialogue subtitles are always displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the epilogue part is configured to always display subtitles for dialogue. According to this, the blessing can be emphasized by clearly showing what the character is speaking in the hit epilogue part.

[Epilog 4]
In the introductory part, if the dialogue sound is output in the scene where the enemy character is damaged, the dialogue subtitles will not be displayed,
In the epilogue part, if the dialogue sound is output in the scene where the enemy character is damaged, the dialogue subtitles are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not added to the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character is damaged in the fanning part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110 (o1), subtitles are added to the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character in the hit epilogue part is damaged (the scene of catching a crab). According to this, the subtitle display that was not displayed in the fanning part is displayed in the hit epilogue part, so that the feeling of blessing can be emphasized.

[Epilog 5]
There are a first introduction part and a second introduction part, each of which has a different development and a different number of lines, but in the epilogue part, the ratio of the line subtitles displayed to the output of the character's line sound is in the introduction part. It is higher than the ratio of the dialogue subtitles to the output of the dialogue sound of the character.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, there are a plurality of types of SP reach, which is a fanning part, and the development of the production is different for each, and the number of lines is also different. However, in any SP reach, the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character's dialogue in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character in SP reach. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is speaking by firmly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part regardless of which SP reach is executed. In addition, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to coordinate the feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, it is possible to prevent the production from being disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display, with the first priority being to convey the production by switching images. .. As a result, it is possible to perform a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Epilog 6]
The final dialogue subtitles displayed in the epilogue part are longer than the dialogue subtitles of the same number of characters displayed in other scenes.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134 (s5) to 134 (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the hit epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the fan part. ing. According to this, by displaying the subtitle display in the final hit epilogue part for a long period of time, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big hit and the blessing can be emphasized. When displaying the subtitle display, the one with a large number of characters may be displayed longer than the case with a small number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) is displayed in the hit epilogue part and the fanning part, the subtitle display period is longer in the hit epilogue part. It should be designed as follows.

[Epilog 7]
When the movable body is in the advanced position, the background display for the movable body is performed, and
The movable body operates according to the evacuation pattern in which the movable body retracts, and the background display for the movable body is switched to the epilogue display by the end of the evacuation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, an effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed according to the movement of the accessory falling. After that, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined evacuation pattern. The display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the character movement to the screen corresponding to the SP final reach hit epilogue part while the character is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is at a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the reach of the first half of the SP by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position.

[Epilog 8]
The deformed member performs a storage operation and a return operation.
The timing of switching to the epilogue display is linked to the start timing of the return operation.

Specifically, on the premise that the accessory returns to the initial position, the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue is the rising timing related to the start timing of the return operation. According to this, since the display corresponding to the epilogue is switched at the timing related to the start of the return operation, the display of the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation ends before the accessory returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation where the effect image is displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the production is not spoiled. The timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same as the timing at which the accessory starts to rise. Further, the accessory may perform a rotation operation or a movement operation at the falling position.

[Epilogue 9]
During the return operation, the light emitting means of the movable body approaches turning off due to fading out.

Specifically, when the accessory is raised, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the child table corresponding to the ascending operation of the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table designated by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually reduced so that the object lamp 9A is gradually turned off. As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the rising of the accessory, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes the screen showing that the SP second half reach A has been developed. You can draw the attention of the player.

[Epilog 10]
BGM linked to the image corresponding to the epilogue suggests switching,
BGM is output in conjunction with the start of epilogue display.

Specifically, the BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return operation of the accessory to the initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by BGM.

[Epilogue 11]
A sound effect suggesting a switch is output in conjunction with the start of the epilogue display.

Specifically, the sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return operation of the accessory to the initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the sound effect.

[Epilogue 12]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, BGM and a sound effect suggesting switching are output.

Specifically, the BGM and the sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return operation of the accessory to the initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the BGM and the sound effect.

[Epilogue 13]
In the epilogue display during the return operation of the movable body, no dialogue sound is output.
In the epilogue display after the movable body is stored, the dialogue sound is output and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, the dialogue sound is not output in the situation where the accessory returns to the initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, and the dialogue sound is output in the epilogue display after the accessory returns to the initial position. All you have to do is output and display the subtitles. According to this, it is possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a timing when the subtitles are difficult to see, and to preferably execute the epilogue part.

[Epilogue 14]
A dialogue sound is output and generated at the timing of evacuation of the movable body.
A dialogue sound is output at the timing when the storage of the movable body is completed, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the accessory returns to the initial position, the dialogue sound may be output and the subtitles may be displayed in the epilogue display. According to this, the dialogue can be recognized firmly, and the epilogue part can be preferably executed.

[Epilogue 15]
The display of the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound output at the end of the epilogue part ends at the start timing of the pattern output.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134 (s6) to 135 (s8) described above, the final subtitle display for the final dialogue in the hit epilogue part is erased before the patterning effect is executed. It is designed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being covered with the decorative pattern and to be misunderstood as a message in the effect of displaying the pattern. Therefore, the production in the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably.

[Epilogue 17]
The moving image that was flowing during the epilogue is a still image at the timing when the symbol drawing is completed and the player finally recognizes the aligned symbols.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, at the timing when the effect of displaying the symbol is completed and the player can recognize the decorative symbol, the image of the decorative symbol and the character displayed as the background is displayed. It is a still image. According to this, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decorative pattern is a moving image.

[Epilogue 18]
The moving image that is playing before the start of patterning is regarded as a still image.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the image flowing in the hit epilogue part becomes a still image at the timing before the effect of displaying the pattern is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the symbol from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of the symbol output.

[Epilogue 19]
Special effects are added at the same time as resting.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the still image displayed in the hit epilogue part has a special aspect of a graphic novel style. According to this, by adding an effect of a special aspect to the still image, it is possible to make a suitable hit epilogue part by emphasizing that the image is still and suggesting that the scene has been switched.

[Epilogue 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the hit / miss notification part to be notified of the hit / fail, and the hit / miss notification part after the hit / miss notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done,
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the effect is being retracted from the second position to the first position. The display is finished, the display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed, and after the movable body is retracted to the first position, the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds emitted by the character are displayed.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the movable body movable luminance data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. In the middle of saving to, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the epilogue is in the process of retracting the movable body from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, the mode of the production is switched to the hit epilogue part by moving the accessory from the scene before the hit / miss decision in the fanning part. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed according to the movement of the accessory falling. After that, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the character movement to the screen corresponding to the SP final reach hit epilogue part while the character is rising. Further, the luminance data table is switched from the luminance data table corresponding to the accessory operation to the luminance data table corresponding to the hit epilogue part while the accessory is rising. In addition, a hit epilogue part-corresponding sound is output while the accessory is rising. In addition, no dialogue sound is output when the background is displayed corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed until the accessory changes to the initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8). .. After that, in the state (s4) in which the movement of the accessory to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is completed, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitle display is displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is at a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. Further, since the brightness data table of the sound effect and the game effect lamp 9 is switched to the one corresponding to the hit epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the hit epilogue part can be suitably displayed. Further, since the subtitle is displayed after the return operation to the initial position is completed, the hit epilogue part can be preferably displayed.

[Epilogue 21]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and that it is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
In the introductory part, the first scene that displays the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In the epilogue part, the final dialogue subtitle is displayed for the final dialogue sound emitted by the character, and then the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, and then the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area. There is
The switching effect is not applied when the display of the final dialogue subtitle is terminated in the second scene, while the switching effect is applied when the display of the dialogue subtitle is terminated in the first scene.

[Epilogue 22]
At the time of designing, both the decorative design and the small design are displayed.
An effect is attached to the decorative symbol, but since the display layer of the small symbol is displayed so as to have priority, the visibility of the small symbol is not hindered by the effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed at the time of producing the pattern. Then, the effect image by the concentrated line is added to the decorative symbol, but the effect image is not added to the small symbol. Further, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the front side. According to this, it is possible to recognize that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by the small symbol while enhancing the effect of the effect image, and it is possible to make it a suitable hit epilogue part.

[Epilogue 23]
At the time of designing, both the decorative design and the small design are displayed.
The movements of the decorative pattern and the small pattern are synchronized at the timing when the decorative pattern is finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative design and the small design are displayed at the time of producing the design. Here, the movements of the decorative symbol and the small symbol may be synchronized at the timing when the decorative symbol is finished. Specifically, during the symbol shaking period in which the decorative symbol has been finished and the symbol is swaying up and down, the small symbol may also be swayed up and down in the same motion as the decorative symbol. According to this, by matching the movements of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to appropriately show the flow of the production in the hit epilogue part.

[Epilogue 24]
At the time of putting out the design in the re-lottery part, both the decorative design and the small design are displayed.
An effect is attached to the decorative symbol, but since the display layer of the small symbol is displayed so as to have priority, the visibility of the small symbol is not hindered by the effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol are displayed at the time of producing the symbol in the re-lottery part. Then, the effect image by the concentrated line is added to the decorative symbol, but the effect image is not added to the small symbol. Further, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the front side. According to this, it is possible to recognize that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by the small symbol while enhancing the effect of the effect image.

[Epilogue 25]
Before the re-lottery part, it is an embodiment showing that it is determined that the small symbol is controlled in an advantageous state, and the small symbol changes again in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, even if both the decorative symbol and the small symbol are once displayed in a state where the symbols are aligned when the design is produced. good. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol may be changed again. According to this, it is possible to synchronize the decorative pattern and the small pattern to obtain a suitable display.

[Epilogue 26]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the upper table composed of the storage destination data indicating the storage destination of the luminance data table and the luminance data table composed of the luminance data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and that it is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The epilogue part is
The first scene where the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed, and
It is composed of a second scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.
The light emission control means is
In the first scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first upper table.
In the second scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the second upper table.
In the first scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and at a specific timing, the rainbow emission mode is obtained from the first luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part. The light emitting means is controlled by switching to the brightness data table and using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode.
In the second scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the enlarged display luminance data table, and the decorative symbol is set to the rainbow emission mode from the enlarged display luminance data table at the timing related to the end of the enlarged display. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table of the above.
The luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode used in the first scene in the epilogue part and the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode used in the second scene in the epilogue part are common luminance data tables. can be,
The first upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part and the storage destination data of the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode.
The second upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the luminance data table for enlarged display and the storage destination data of the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode.

Specifically, in the hit epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table used for the hit notification effect and the grandchild table used for displaying the hit symbol, different grandchild tables are prepared at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the amount of data used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, it is possible to liven up each production with a unified production. As a result, while reducing the data capacity, the player can better see the effect in the hit epilogue part by using the frame lamp.

[Epilogue 27]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the upper table composed of the storage destination data indicating the storage destination of the luminance data table and the luminance data table composed of the luminance data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and that it is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. It is composed of an epilogue part to be performed and a re-lottery part executed after the epilogue part.
The epilogue part is configured to include a result notification scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area and the result of the notification effect is notified.
The re-lottery part is configured to include a re-lottery result notification scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area and the result of the re-lottery is notified.
The light emission control means is
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first upper table.
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the second upper table.
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for the result notification scene enlargement display, and the decorative pattern is displayed from the brightness data table for the result notification scene enlargement display at the timing related to the end of the enlargement display. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the re-lottery result notification scene enlargement display, and the re-lottery result notification scene is performed at the timing related to the end of the enlargement display of the decorative pattern. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode from the brightness data table for enlarged display.
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the result notification scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part have common brightness. It is a data table
The first upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the luminance data table for the result notification scene enlarged display and the storage destination data of the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode.
The second upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the luminance data table for the re-lottery result notification scene enlargement display and the storage destination data of the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode.

Specifically, the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part are common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery. Then, the grandchild table W1 is used. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for rainbow-colored lighting for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control and providing a sense of unity even for different parts (timing). It is possible to show the player a certain production. As a result, it is possible to show the player better the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 28]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means,
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and that it is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The display means is
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decorative pattern on the edge side of the display area, it is displayed in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is finished, and
At the timing related to the end of the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the luminance data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for enlarged display. ..

Specifically, in the hit epilogue part, when the images constituting the hit epilogue are sequentially displayed (the state in which the image of the hit epilogue is flowing), the decorative symbol is the position on the edge side in the display area of the screen. (Position of the upper left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue image ends, the reduced symbol is erased and the effect of displaying the enlarged symbol is executed using the central area of the screen. Further, the luminance data table switches from the luminance data table corresponding to the hit epilogue part to the luminance data table corresponding to the pattern output in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the hit epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned on the edge side of the screen so that the image of the hit epilogue part is not disturbed, the development of the image of the hit epilogue part is completed, and the pattern is put out. When doing so, the jackpot symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging the decorative symbol so as to be continuous using the edge side of the screen and the center of the screen. Furthermore, by switching the luminance data table, it is possible to make the scene change appear suitable. In this way, the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably.

[Epilogue 29]
In the epilogue part
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, it is located on the edge side of the display area with the decorative patterns aligned.

Specifically, in the hit epilogue part, when the images constituting the hit epilogue are sequentially displayed (the state in which the image of the hit epilogue is flowing), the decorative symbol is the position on the edge side in the display area of the screen. It is displayed in the same state as "222" at (the position of the upper left corner of the screen). According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the big hit display result is obtained by the reduced decorative pattern even while the hit epilogue image is being played.

[Epilogue 30]
In the epilogue part
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the decorative pattern is located on the edge side of the display area.
In relation to the timing when the display of the image corresponding to the epilogue ends, the output of the displayed dialogue sound ends, the state where the decorative symbol is displayed on the edge side of the display area ends, and the decorative symbol is displayed. Enlarge using the center of the area.

Specifically, in the hit epilogue part, when the images constituting the hit epilogue are sequentially displayed (the state in which the image of the hit epilogue is flowing), the decorative symbol is the position on the edge side in the display area of the screen. It is displayed at (the position of the upper left corner of the screen). In addition, the subtitle display displayed in (Y1) is erased, the reduced symbol at the upper left corner is erased, and the center of the screen is erased in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends. The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern and being misunderstood that some message is displayed when the pattern is displayed, and the hit epilogue part is preferably used. I can show you.

[Epilogue 31]
At the beginning of the introductory part, the decorative design is located on the edge side of the display area.

Specifically, the decorative symbol may be moved to the upper left corner of the screen in the reach mode at the start of SP reach. According to this, by positioning the position from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to prevent the development of the production from being disturbed even during the SP reach, and it is possible to make a series of productions look suitable.

[Re-lottery production 1]
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect to notify whether or not the effect is controlled in an advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect includes an introduction part until the right / wrong is notified whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state, a right / wrong notification part in which the right / wrong is notified, and the fact that the notification effect is controlled to the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of executing the production is
Of the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part when it is determined that the control is controlled to the second advantageous state. Is feasible and
When it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
Using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part, the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect is executed.
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode, and the rainbow emission mode is used. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for the purpose, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery effect is started using. At the start of the re-extraction effect, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the change of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol feed effect is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. By doing so, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was once temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery effect is started, the symbol feed effect is executed using the symbol that was once temporarily stopped. , It is easy for the player to know from which decorative pattern the re-lottery started. As a result, it is possible to show the flow of a series of productions well.

[Re-lottery production 2]
When the image corresponding to the background in which the decorative pattern alignment is temporarily stopped is displayed, the light emitting means is turned off, and when the screen shifts to the re-lottery screen, the light emitting means emits light in the light emitting mode corresponding to the re-lottery. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), when the hit symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow color in the hit epilogue part, before the re-lottery effect is executed, After the frame lamp is turned off once, the frame lamp is turned on in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-lottery effect, so that the player can be easily informed that the re-lottery effect is started depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery production 3]
When shifting to the re-lottery screen, temporarily stop the decorative pattern alignment and then temporarily stop.
When temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern alignment is accompanied by an effect, and the shaking display is performed. However, while the shaking display accompanied by the effect is maintained, the light emitting mode of the image corresponding to the background and the light emitting means is renewed. Switch to the one for lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the effect of displaying the symbol in the hit epilogue part, the decorative symbol is shaken and displayed, and the effect image by the concentrated line is added. Even when switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image by the concentrated line is still added. Further, the game effect lamp 9 switches from the smooth rainbow lighting to the extinguishing. In other words, from the design to the re-lottery effect, the design is such that the pattern shaking and the mode of the effect continue, and the background and the lamp are switched. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery effect started.

[Re-lottery production 4]
At the start of symbol feed, the decorative symbol whose display has been maintained from the epilogue is reduced, and the symbol feed is started after the reduction is made.

Specifically, at the start of the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, the fluctuation starts from the reduced state of the decorative symbol that has been displayed from the hit epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to show the flow of a series of effects well without executing the process of changing to a different decorative pattern.

[Re-lottery production 5]
The symbol feed starts with the reduced size, and the reduced size of all other symbols is also uniform.

Specifically, in the symbol feed effect, the variation is started by the reduced symbol, and the size of the variable symbol is a uniform reduced size. According to this, the appearance of the fluctuation at the time of the pattern feed effect can be smoothed, and the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown.

[Re-lottery production 6]
While a plurality of types of decorative symbols are being fed in a reduced size, the transition is made in the order of operation promotion display, operation acceptance, display of a decorative symbol slightly larger than the reduced size, and display of an enlarged decorative symbol.

Specifically, as shown in the flow shown in FIGS. 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery effect, the symbol is fed by a reduced size decorative symbol. Is executed, and the operation promotion display of the button is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, the effect of displaying the symbol in an enlarged manner is executed. That is, the decorative symbol that is finally notified from the moment when the symbol is put out is enlarged and displayed. According to this, since it is a symbol that is finally notified from the beginning of expansion, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final notification symbol is.

[Re-lottery production 7]
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect to notify whether or not the effect is controlled in an advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect includes an introduction part until the right / wrong is notified whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state, a right / wrong notification part in which the right / wrong is notified, and the fact that the notification effect is controlled to the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of executing the production is
When it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, the first symbol is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. , It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect that displays the second symbol in the second half part.
When it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the second re-lottery effect in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Is feasible and
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part.
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part.
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode, and the rainbow emission mode is used. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for the purpose, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery effect is started using. At the start of the re-extraction effect, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the change of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol feed effect is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. Then, during the re-lottery production, all the decorative symbols such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" are sent in order, and then "2" is sent again. The symbol feed effect in which the symbol is displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was once temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after the variation of the plurality of types of decorative symbols. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the symbol feed effect in which the final display result is not displayed immediately and all the decorative patterns are shown. Also, in the state where the hit symbol is temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed with the lights off, and when the symbol is shaking and displayed, it is re-displayed. Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the hit symbol temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part is determined depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Further, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols of "3" and "2" are shaken and displayed is inherited even during the period when the symbols are fixed. In this way, during the symbol determination period that is performed in a short period of time, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare repertoire is performed as it is without preparing a special luminance data table for lamp control. Therefore, the data. No extra capacity is added.

[Re-lottery production 8]
The symbol feed according to the predetermined pattern is sent in order from the symbol that was temporarily stopped to the next symbol, and after the last symbol is sent, it returns to the symbol that was temporarily stopped again, and then in order to the next symbol. It is a production that is sent to
The predetermined pattern is a pattern that loops in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.

Specifically, in the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all decorative symbols such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" are sent in order. , Again, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decorative symbols are sent in order. In this way, since the numbers of the decorative patterns are sent in order, it is possible to show the flow of a series of productions well.

[Re-lottery production 9]
While the symbol is being fed in a predetermined pattern, all of the decorative symbols to be sent are displayed at the same resolution as when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

Specifically, in the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the symbols are displayed by the transparency of the symbol when temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the fluctuation. Specifically, a "2" symbol with 0% transmittance, a "2" symbol with 50% transmittance, a "3" symbol with 0% transmittance, a "3" symbol with 50% transmittance, and transparency. The symbols are switched, such as a "4" symbol with a degree of 0% and a "4" symbol with a transmittance of 50%. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed exactly in a mode with low transparency during the symbol feed effect, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of symbol is being sent.

[Re-lottery production 10]
After the symbol feed is started, each of the display times of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is the same until the notification of promotion is performed.

Specifically, in the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all decorative symbols such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" are sent in order. However, the time when each symbol is displayed is the same. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of productions can be clearly shown.

[Re-lottery production 11]
The operation promotion display is performed during the symbol feed,
The position where the operation promotion display is performed is a position that does not overlap with the symbol being fed.

Specifically, the promotion display formed from the button image and the time gauge is displayed during the symbol feed effect. The position where the promotion display is displayed does not overlap with the position where the variation of the decorative symbol during the symbol feed effect is displayed. By doing so, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol feed effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feed. It should be noted that a part of the promotion display may partially overlap with the decorative pattern during the pattern feed effect.

[Re-lottery production 12]
The operation promotion display is started during the symbol feed, and is started during the second loop of the predetermined pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the promotion display is displayed in (A24) and (A25) after repeating the fluctuation of displaying all the decorative symbols during the symbol feed effect twice. It will be started. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol feed pattern is repeated twice, the player can be made to firmly recognize the symbol feed effect.

[Re-lottery production 13]
When the symbol feed is started from the symbol of "1", the timing at which the operation promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol of "5".
When the symbol feed is started from the symbol of "4", the timing at which the operation promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol of "8".

Specifically, the symbol at the start of the re-lottery effect may be other than the two symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image as the operation promotion display is displayed is constant. For example, in the case of two symbols, the timing at which the operation promotion display is displayed is the timing at which the two symbols are displayed again. Similarly, in the case of the five symbols, the timing at which the operation promotion display is displayed may be the timing at which the five symbols are displayed again. That is, the number of symbols sent is the same regardless of which symbol starts the re-lottery effect. According to this, since the control can be made constant, the processing load can be reduced.

[Re-lottery production 14]
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect to notify whether or not the effect is controlled in an advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect includes an introduction part until the right / wrong is notified whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state, a right / wrong notification part in which the right / wrong is notified, and the fact that the notification effect is controlled to the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of executing the production is
When it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, the first symbol is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. , It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect that displays the second symbol in the second half part.
When it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Is feasible and
When it is determined that the control is controlled to the second advantageous state, the second symbol is displayed repeatedly in the first half part, then the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and the second symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to execute the third re-lottery production
The first re-lottery effect, the second re-lottery effect, and the third re-lottery effect have the same production scale.
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode, and the rainbow emission mode is used. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for the purpose, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..

Specifically, a pattern that displays an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols), and a pattern that displays an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols). Was provided. In addition to this, a pattern for displaying an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) after displaying an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) may be provided. In the effect of sending a symbol from an odd symbol to an odd symbol, the same odd symbol may be sent at the time of symbol feed. However, regardless of the pattern, the scale of the effect of the symbol feed period in the re-lottery effect may be the same design. According to this, it is possible to obtain a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity. Also, in the state where the hit symbol is temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed with the lights off, and when the symbol is shaking and displayed, it is re-displayed. Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the hit symbol temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part is determined depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Further, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols of "3" and "2" are shaken and displayed is inherited even during the period when the symbols are fixed. In this way, during the symbol determination period that is performed in a short period of time, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare repertoire is performed as it is without preparing a special luminance data table for lamp control. Therefore, the data. No extra capacity is added.

[Re-lottery production 15]
The re-lottery effect is displayed by combining display data other than the decorative pattern and display data of various decorative patterns, and each pattern of multiple types of re-lottery effect is reproduced.
By using common display data in each re-lottery effect, the effect scale is common between each re-lottery effect, and only the type of symbol being sent and the symbol displayed in the symbol output are each re-lottery effect. It is different in the lottery production.

Specifically, in the lottery effect, a pattern that displays an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols), and an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) after displaying an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols). Common data is used regardless of whether the pattern displays an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbols) and then displays an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbols). In other words, the production data is the same, and the design is such that the data related to the decorative pattern is changed according to the pattern. According to this, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated pattern, the amount of data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery production 16]
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect to notify whether or not the effect is controlled in an advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect includes an introduction part until the right / wrong is notified whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state, a right / wrong notification part in which the right / wrong is notified, and the fact that the notification effect is controlled to the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of executing the production is
Of the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part when it is determined that the control is controlled to the second advantageous state. Is feasible and
When it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production is possible,
The first symbol is displayed with the same or substantially the same animation when the first symbol is once displayed in the epilogue part and when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half part of the second re-lottery effect.
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode, and the rainbow emission mode is used. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for the purpose, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..

Specifically, the above-mentioned symbolizing in FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the symbolizing in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) are executed using substantially the same image. Will be done. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern output by the “2” symbol and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, since the images of the symbols can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the probabilistic symbols. In addition, the image of the pattern appearance portion including the background may be exactly the same. Also, in the state where the hit symbol is temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed with the lights off, and when the symbol is shaking and displayed, it is re-displayed. Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the hit symbol temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part is determined depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Further, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols of "3" and "2" are shaken and displayed is inherited even during the period when the symbols are fixed. In this way, during the symbol determination period that is performed in a short period of time, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare repertoire is performed as it is without preparing a special luminance data table for lamp control. Therefore, the data. No extra capacity is added.

[Re-lottery production 17]
The animation for displaying the first identification information includes an animation from the display of the symbol to the first position while enlarging.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned effect of displaying the symbol, a series of effects of enlarging the symbol once and then setting the normal size at the center of the screen are executed. According to this, it is possible to suitably show a series of patterning effects by enlarging and reducing the pattern.

[Re-lottery production 18]
The display means refers to common display data when temporarily stopping the decorative symbol alignment before the re-lottery is executed and when notifying whether or not the decorative symbol alignment is promoted in the notification part.
By combining the common display data and the display data of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, a plurality of types of patterns are displayed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned patterning effect, common symbolizing data may be used for the patterning effect data in the hit epilogue part and the patterning effect data in the re-lottery effect. Then, a series of patterning effects may be executed by using the common patterning data and the combination of the plurality of decorative patterns. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data capacity while making the effect of patterning appear suitable. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used for the data of the designing effect in the hit epilogue part and the data of the designing effect in the re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery production 19]
If you are not promoted in the re-lottery production
The light emitting mode in the symbol output is the same when the decorative symbol alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed and when the notification that the decorative symbol alignment is not promoted is performed by the re-lottery.

Specifically, in the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, as a lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery, it is common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part. The grandchild table W1 is used. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for rainbow-colored lighting for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control and providing a sense of unity even for different parts (timing). It is possible to show the player a certain production. As a result, it is possible to show the player better the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part while reducing the data capacity.

[Re-lottery production 20]
In the case of promotion in the re-lottery production
When the decorative symbol alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed, and when the notification that the decorative symbol alignment is promoted is performed by the re-lottery, the light emission mode in the symbol output is different.
When the notification that the decorative symbol alignment is promoted is performed by the re-lottery, the light emission mode in the symbol output is more intense than when the decorative symbol alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed.

Specifically, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part is used as a lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery. The frame lamp lights up at, but when the symbol is promoted from the symbol of "2" and replaced with the symbol of "3" by the re-lottery, the rainbow color lighting at tB5 to tB9 is once "2" in the hit epilogue part. The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting when the symbol is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the player that the winning symbol has been promoted by the re-lottery depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery production 21]
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect to notify whether or not the effect is controlled in an advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect includes an introduction part until the right / wrong is notified whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state, a right / wrong notification part in which the right / wrong is notified, and the fact that the notification effect is controlled to the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of executing the production is
Of the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part when it is determined that the control is controlled to the second advantageous state. Is feasible and
When it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production is possible,
By changing the display mode of the first symbol to the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect from the display of the first symbol again in the latter half part to the symbol confirmation period, the first symbol shakes. A shaking display is performed to display the first symbol as shown in the above.
By changing the display mode of the second symbol to the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect from the display of the second symbol in the latter half part to the symbol confirmation period, the second symbol is shaken. A shaking display is performed to display the second symbol as if it were.
The first aspect is a mode in which the player can easily see the symbol as compared with any of the second aspect and the third aspect.
The means of executing the production is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to execute a movement promotion display that encourages the player to move.
If the operation is performed at the first timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, the second is when the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the first re-lottery effect is executed. The second symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the symbol becomes the second aspect.
If the operation is performed at the second timing different from the first timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the first re-lottery effect is executed. At that time, the second symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the third aspect.
When the operation promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, a display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the shaking display of the second symbol from a predetermined timing regardless of whether the operation is performed at the first timing or the second timing. After that, the second symbol is displayed again in the shaking display, and then, when the symbol confirmation period is reached, the second symbol is displayed in the first aspect while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol. Stop display and
If the operation is performed at the first timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery effect, the first is when the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is executed. The first symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the symbol becomes the second aspect.
If the operation is performed at the second timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery effect, the first is when the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is executed. The first symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the symbol becomes the third aspect.
When the operation promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery effect, a display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the shaking display of the first symbol from a predetermined timing regardless of whether the operation is performed at the first timing or the second timing. After that, the first symbol is displayed again in the shaking display, and then, when the symbol confirmation period is reached, the first symbol is displayed in the first aspect while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol. Stop display and
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode, and the rainbow emission mode is used. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for the purpose, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 267 (L1) to (L3), an operation promotion display by a button image and a time gauge is displayed during the symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. During the period in which the operation promotion display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute the common pattern output effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of which timing the push button 31B is operated, the effect of displaying a common symbol by enlarging and reducing the symbol as shown in (L4) to (L5) is executed. After that, the symbol shake is executed during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing of the button. Therefore, after the shaking period of the symbol, for example, in the first operation timing, the symbol faces the right side, in the second operation timing, the symbol faces the left side, and in the third operation timing, the symbol faces the left side. , The design may be in a position facing the front. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is sandwiched as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and an effect in which the symbol is shaken after the symbol is rotated and the symbol is reduced is executed. According to this, the design can be stopped neatly by performing a common effect regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, and a series of effects can be appropriately shown.

[Re-lottery production 22]
When the operation is performed at the first timing of the valid period of the operation, after the notification of promotion or not is performed, the decorative pattern is displayed swayingly until the predetermined timing of the fluctuation arrives.
When the operation is performed at the second timing earlier than the first timing of the valid period of the operation, the operation is performed at the second timing earlier than the first timing until the predetermined timing of the fluctuation is reached after the notification of promotion or not is performed. The decorative pattern is displayed swaying as soon as it is, and the scale is absorbed.

Specifically, when the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the operation valid period, the decorative symbol is displayed to be shaken after the notification of whether or not to promote is executed (FIG. 267 (L3)). Example without operation). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation valid period, the display that the decorative symbol shook was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether to promote was executed. The display is extended by the minute (the operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the operation valid period, the display that the decorative symbol shook was earlier than the second timing after the notification of whether to promote was executed. The display is extended by the minute (the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is an example of the first timing). In this way, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the scale of the effect can be absorbed by the shaking time of the design. By performing a common effect after that, the design can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be shown favorably.

[Re-lottery production 23]
The predetermined effect starts after the swaying decorative pattern is rotated while being magnified while blinking white.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, after performing whiteout as a common effect, an effect different from the conventional pattern mode in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once is executed. According to this, regardless of the position of the symbol in the shaking of the shaku absorption symbol, by executing the effect of a different mode after sandwiching the whiteout, the flow of the effect until the symbol is stopped. It is possible to prevent discomfort.

[Re-lottery production 24]
The swaying display of the decorative pattern is displayed with the decorative pattern swaying around the first position.
The shaking display has decorative patterns in the order of 1st position, 2nd position, 3rd position, 2nd position, 1st position, 4th position, 5th position, 4th position, 1st position, and 2nd position. It is positioned, and when the fixed period is reached, the predetermined effect is designed so that the decorative pattern is always displayed in the order of the second position, the first position, and so on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, during the shaking period of the symbol, the symbol swings to the back side from (J10) to (J12), and then the symbol swings to the front side from (J13) to (J14). Changes to the initial position. After that, the symbol swings toward the front side from (J15) to (J16), and then the symbol swings toward the back side from (J17) to (J18) to change to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated a plurality of times. However, during the period when the symbol is fixed, it is designed so that the symbol is always located at the initial position facing the front as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbol can be fixedly stopped in a manner that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

[Re-lottery production 25]
The starting point when the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is made to emit light by the rainbow in the second part is to make the light emitted by the rainbow at the start of the predetermined effect.

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in a rainbow color at the timing of the whiteout shown in FIG. 267 (J1). The timing of (J1) is an effect executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the place where such a common effect is executed as the starting point of changing the game effect lamp 9, it is easy for the designer to decide the start opportunity. It should be noted that the timing of (J2) when the common start display is started may be used as the start trigger instead of the timing of (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed effects.

[Re-lottery production 26]
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect to notify whether or not the effect is controlled in an advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect includes an introduction part until the right / wrong is notified whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state, a right / wrong notification part in which the right / wrong is notified, and the fact that the notification effect is controlled to the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of executing the production is
Of the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part when it is determined that the control is controlled to the second advantageous state. Is feasible and
When it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production is possible,
In the epilogue part, when the first symbol is once displayed, the display mode of the first symbol is changed to the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect, so that the first symbol is shaken. It displays the first design,
In the case of transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, when the first symbol is transitioned from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first aspect, and when the first symbol is displayed in the second aspect. There is a time when the epilogue part shifts to the re-lottery part at the timing, and a time when the first symbol shifts from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing displayed in the third aspect.
The effect executing means is a re-lottery from the epilogue part when the first symbol is displayed in the first aspect and when the epilogue part is changed to the re-lottery part and when the first symbol is displayed in the second aspect. In both the transition to the part and the transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third aspect, a specific display is performed to make the first symbol difficult to see. The first symbol is displayed in a common display mode, and the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect is executed.
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode, and the rainbow emission mode is used. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for the purpose, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the timing of the operation, after that, A time for shaking the symbol for absorbing the scale may be provided in the time until the predetermined timing when the re-lottery effect is executed (the period of shaking of the symbol from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, regardless of the timing at which the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbol is once shaken and displayed, and then the common effect accompanied by whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. Therefore, at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent the movement of the pattern from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to make a series of effects more suitable.

[Re-lottery production 27]
The re-lottery effect is the same regardless of which of the multiple types of introduction parts is hit.

Specifically, from the time when the whiteout screen is displayed until the re-lottery effect is executed, any of a plurality of reach may be common. According to this, the data capacity of the production data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery production 28]
The movement of the decorative design after the specific display is an extension of the movement in which the decorative design was once swayed and displayed before the specific display.

Specifically, the movement of the symbol after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the design in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that sways between the front side and the back side by the axis rotation around the vertical direction of the design, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a movement that makes one full clockwise rotation by rotating the axis around the vertical direction of the symbol while enlarging. According to this, by displaying a whiteout between the movements on the extension of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the pattern from causing a sense of discomfort, and a series of effects can be preferably shown. be able to.

[Re-lottery production 29]
Multiple types of introduction parts are branches of notification of whether or not they are controlled in an advantageous state, and include predetermined introduction parts that are not notified triggered by the operation of the operating means.
In the predetermined introduction part, there is no point where the scale shifts, so if it is decided that the predetermined introduction part will be controlled in an advantageous state, the decorative pattern will be temporarily stopped until the re-lottery effect is executed. There is no blurring in the shaking display, but the same re-lottery effect as the reach where the scale shift occurs is executed.

Specifically, among the plurality of SP reach, there is one in which the promotion of operation such as a button operation is not notified at the branch at the time of determining whether or not the control is in an advantageous state. In such SP reach, the scale shift due to the operation does not occur. However, even with such an SP reach, the same re-lottery effect as the SP reach in which the scale shift occurs may be executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity even when there is only one re-lottery effect due to the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of the scale deviation. In addition, the data capacity can be reduced by using one re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery production 30]
In the flow of going to the re-lottery production after the shaking display of the decorative pattern at the big hit in the predetermined introduction part
The timing for shifting to the re-lottery effect is designed so that the movement is an extension of the decorative pattern after the specific display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the symbol after the whiteout screen is an extension of the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is one of a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) to the left position (K6) via the front position (K5). It is designed to be. That is, when the shaking of the symbol is one of a series of clockwise movements, the whiteout by the re-lottery effect is executed, and then the movement of enlarging the symbol and rotating clockwise continues. According to this, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbol from causing a sense of discomfort due to the series of movements of the clockwise rotating symbol from the period of the symbol shaking to the re-lottery effect.

<Explanation of terms>
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above. In the following, some terms used in the present specification will be described.

"Variable display" (variable display) includes displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), a plurality of types of ordinary symbols, and a plurality of types of decorative symbols in a variable manner.

"Variation" of a symbol is an updated display of multiple types of symbols such as multiple types of special symbols (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol), multiple types of ordinary symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols, and multiple types of symbols. Scroll display, deformation of 1 or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of 1 or more symbols, lighting / blinking / extinguishing of lamps (4th symbol unit 9050, special figure 1 variable display unit 9053, special figure 2 variable display unit 9054, etc.) And so on.

The "decorative symbol" includes a symbol that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

The "reduced symbol" is a symbol in a state in which the decorative symbol is reduced, and includes a symbol smaller than the decorative symbol. When the reduced symbol is stopped and displayed, the same number symbol as the decorative symbol is displayed at the edge of the screen smaller than the decorative symbol.

The "small symbol" includes a symbol corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a size smaller than the decorative symbol. The small symbols are displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction.

In the "design confirmation", the fluctuations of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the special figure 1 variable display unit 9053, the special figure 2 variable display unit 9054, the decorative symbol, etc. are stopped, and finally the special symbol game. Includes the determination of the design in. For example, the state in which the fluctuation of the decorative symbol that fluctuates in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol that fluctuates in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol that fluctuates in the right decorative symbol display area 5R has stopped. include.

In the "design confirmation period", the display result is determined by stopping the fluctuation of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the special figure 1 variable display unit 9053, the special figure 2 variable display unit 9054, the decorative symbol, and the like. Includes period. For example, the variation of the decorative symbol that fluctuates in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol that fluctuates in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol that fluctuates in the right decorative symbol display area 5R stops and is displayed. Includes a deterministic display of the results.

"Reach" continues to be variablely displayed for decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of the jackpot combination. For example, the decorative symbol of "2" stops in the decorative symbol display area 5L on the left, and the decorative symbol of "2" stops in the decorative symbol display area 5R on the right, but the decorative symbol of "2" stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C inside. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is still continued.

The “turning off” of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes a state in which the value of the luminance data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) becomes “0” (value indicating the lowest brightness). In addition, "turning off" of the lighting means (light emitting means) means brightness data corresponding to turning off such that the value of the brightness data for turning on (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is "1" or "2". It may include a state in which the value is close to "0". The state in which the value of the luminance data for turning on (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is close to the luminance data "0" corresponding to extinguishing, such as "1" or "2", is ". It may be included in "lighting" or "substantially extinguished".

The "lighting" or "light emission" of the lighting means (light emitting means) is a state in which the value of the luminance data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is higher than that when the lamp is turned off, and the luminance data It includes a state in which the value is equal to or higher than the value of the luminance data (“0”) corresponding to the above-mentioned “off”. "Lighting" includes constant lighting in which the lamps are always lit, wave lighting in which a plurality of lamps are sequentially switched from off to on, and moya lighting in which the lamps are dimly lit while changing the brightness.

"Blinking" of the lighting means (light emitting means) means that the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is in a state other than "turning off", "substantially turning off", or "lighting", and the lamp is "turning on" or "turning off". Includes repeating over time. Further, "blinking" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes repeating "lighting" and "substantially extinguishing" of the lamp with the passage of time.

The "luminance" is a value indicating the brightness of the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), and in the present embodiment, the brightness data is represented by a hexadecimal number as the data corresponding to the brightness. For example, when the luminance data used to control a predetermined lamp is "0", the lamp control is performed so that the predetermined lamp has the lowest brightness (the lamp is dark), and the predetermined lamp is controlled. When the luminance data used for this purpose is "F", the lamp control is performed so that the predetermined lamp has the highest luminance (the lamp is bright). As described above, the luminance data corresponds to the value of the current flowing through the lamp, and when the luminance data used to control the predetermined lamp is "0", the current flowing through the predetermined lamp is the smallest. When the luminance data used to control the predetermined lamp is "F", the current flowing through the predetermined lamp is the largest. The "lamp" is not limited to an LED (light emitting diode) lamp, but includes any kind of lamp such as an EL (electroluminescence) lamp and an incandescent lamp.

The "lighting color" or "emission color" of a lamp includes a color represented by the emission of one or more light emitting elements contained in the lamp. For example, if the lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three light emitting elements such as "R" (red), "G" (green), and "B" (blue), the 3 is adjusted by the LED driver based on the luminance data. The three light emitting elements emit light by the current applied to the three light emitting elements, so that the LEDs are lit in various colors. The "lighting color" of the lamp differs depending on the color of the light emitting element. For example, in the case of an LED consisting of only "W" (white) as a light emitting element, the brightness differs depending on the flowing current, but the lamp lights in white, and " In the case of an LED consisting of a light emitting element only for "R" (red), the lamp lights in red although the brightness varies depending on the flowing current.

The "rainbow color" (seven colors) among the lighting colors of the lamp includes a color composed of seven kinds of colors. For example, "rainbow color" includes red, orange (orange), yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. The "rainbow color" is not limited to the colors described above, and may be composed of seven other colors. Even if the same "rainbow color" is used, the lighting mode may differ between the smooth lighting based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. 225 and the blinking based on the brightness data table (grandchildren table) shown in FIG. 256. In addition, the lighting mode depending on the rainbow color may differ depending on the set luminance data.

The "color corresponding to the character" includes a color predetermined for each character appearing in the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the color corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character is green, the color corresponding to Jam-chan is purple, and the color corresponding to Bakuchu is red.

The “emission color corresponding to the character” is a lighting color (emission color) of the game effect lamp 9, and includes a color predetermined for each character appearing in the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the "emission color corresponding to the character" is the lighting color (emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character, and the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 in purple corresponding to Jam-chan. (Emission color), lighting color (emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in red corresponding to the explosion chew, and the like are included.

The “serif sound” includes a sound corresponding to the word output at the timing when the character appearing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 utters the word. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a sound (sound) corresponding to a word uttered by the character is output according to the image of the character appearing by the production.

The "serif subtitle" includes characters corresponding to the serif sound displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the serif sound is output. Dialogue subtitles are also called subtitle display.

The "physical sound" includes a physical sound generated by the movement of an object such as a character or an object appearing in the production. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a physical sound (physical sound) that will be generated by the movement of the object is output according to the image of an object such as a character or an object that appears by the production.

The "onomatopoeia" includes a pseudo sound that expresses the movement of an object such as a character or an object that appears in the production. In the pachinko game machine 1, a pseudo sound (onomatopoeia) expressing the movement of the object is output according to the image of the object such as a character or an object appearing by the production.

The "character action" includes an effect in which the character appearing in the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs some action. For example, it includes the action of Yumemu-chan's character chasing the character of Baku Chu.

In the "re-lottery effect", the normal jackpot symbol that does not become a probabilistic jackpot in the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, an even numbered symbol such as the symbol "2") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the normal jackpot symbol is a probabilistic jackpot. Includes an effect that is performed before the symbol is finalized to encourage whether or not it is promoted to a symbol (for example, an odd symbol such as the symbol of "3").

The "replacement display" is an effect included in the "re-lottery effect", and includes an image display in which the decorative symbols that have been temporarily stopped are sequentially replaced with other symbols, so that the decorative symbols are switched one after another. In the present embodiment, the "replacement display" displays a display in which the symbol "2" or "3" is finally stopped while the symbol "2" fluctuates at high speed and is sequentially replaced with another symbol. include.

"Repeat display" means repeating the same display, and refers to repeating the display using the same animation. It is an effect included in the "re-lottery effect", and includes a display in which a temporarily stopped decorative pattern is displayed many times with the same animation. As an example, the "repeated display" includes a display in which the symbol "7" is sequentially replaced with another symbol while fluctuating at high speed, and finally the symbol "7" is stopped.

"Shaking display" is to display the decorative pattern while shaking it, and indicates that the fluctuation has not been completed and is being changed.

The "stop display" is to display the decorative symbol stationary without moving it, and indicates that the fluctuation has ended.

The "swaying speed" is the speed at which the decorative symbol operates from the first position to the second position when the decorative symbol is displaying shaking.

The "first aspect of the symbol", the "second aspect of the symbol", and the "third aspect of the symbol" are aspects indicating the position of the decorative symbol. For example, in the case where the decorative pattern is swayed up and down, when the first aspect is the central position, the second aspect is the upper position and the third aspect is the lower position. Further, in the case where the decorative pattern is swayed and displayed in the front-back direction, when the first aspect is the front position, the second aspect is the position facing left and the third aspect is the position facing right.

The "fanfare effect" is an effect executed at the start of the big hit game state to notify that the big hit game state has been reached.

The "advancement" of a movable body (feature) is an action in which the movable body (feature) moves from the initial position. The position at the end of the movable area where the accessory moves is the advance position.

"" Evacuation "of a movable body (role)" is an operation in which a movable body (role) moves from an advance position to an initial position. The initial position in the movable area where the accessory moves is the evacuation position.

The "effect display for moving the movable body" is a display for enhancing the visual effect around the accessory on the screen as the accessory moves to the advanced position as the movable body. For example, an effect image is displayed to make the character movement stand out according to the character movement when the reach develops in the latter half or when the big hit is notified.

"Story development" refers to the progress of a story or a series of productions. That is, the story of a series of flows is not interrupted due to a change of scenes, and the story is continuously displayed to the player.

"Part, scene" refers to the group that constitutes the production, and the part is a larger group than the scene. The parts are divided by role.

"Scene switching" mainly means that the display is switched, and in particular, it means that the displayed background, characters, etc. are switched.

"Cut-in display" is an effect in which another image is interrupted and displayed in the displayed image. In addition, the cut-in display can indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit with the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is green.

"Switching display (eye catch display)" is an effect displayed when changing scenes. In the present embodiment, the eye-catching display is used when the scene is changed from the state showing the loss to the state of the normal game. The eye-catching display has the role of making it easy to understand that the super reach has ended.

In the "shield display (shutter display)", the image display device 5 displays an image such as a shutter so as to cover the entire area displayed by the image display device 5, and the image displayed before the shield display is displayed. Is a display that shields. The obstruction display may obscure the image by displaying something other than the shutter.

"Switching the luminance data" means that the timer of the luminance data defined in the grandchild table becomes 0 and the next luminance data is used. By switching the luminance data, the light emitting mode of the lamp is switched. By switching the light emission mode of the lamp, the player is given the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene is updated.

"The luminance data does not switch" means that the timer of the luminance data defined in the grandchild table does not become 0, and the luminance data continues to be used. Since the luminance data is not switched, the light emission mode of the lamp becomes constant. By making the light emitting mode of the lamp constant, the player is given the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene is not updated and is stopped.

"Video data" is data for displaying a video including animation. The images displayed on the image display device 5 are switched at high speed for several tens of images per second to make them appear to be moving. The moving image data may be compressed and retained.

The "first moving image data" is moving image data created by using many images in order to operate a character among the moving image data.

The "second moving image data" is moving image data created by using a small number of images in order to operate the character among the moving image data.

The "movement of a specific character" is a movement corresponding to a specific character among a plurality of characters appearing in the production.

The "blackout" is an effect of displaying a black image in the display area to darken (blackout) the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The blackout may be in a mode in which the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot differs depending on the duration of the darkened state.

The “whiteout” is an effect of displaying (whitening out) a white image in the display area in order to make the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible. The whiteout may be in such a manner that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot differs depending on the duration of the state in which the white image is displayed.

The "specific display that makes it difficult to see" means that an image for making the displayed decorative pattern invisible to the player is displayed on the screen. For example, by displaying a white image on the entire surface (whitening out), the decorative pattern becomes invisible to the player.

"Fade effect" refers to fade-in and fade-out used in video technology. Fade-in means that the state in which the background image or the like is displayed gradually changes to the state in which a predetermined image is visible. In the present embodiment, for example, an image showing dialogue is gradually displayed from the state where the room background is displayed. Gradually displaying means gradually reducing the transparency of the image showing the dialogue. For example, after displaying the dialogue image with 100% transmittance, the transparency is reduced by 10% every 0.1 seconds to display the dialogue image after 1 second. Further, the fade-out means that, contrary to the fade-in, the state in which the predetermined image is visible overlapping the background image gradually shifts to only the background image. In the present embodiment, for example, the image showing the dialogue is gradually hidden from the state where the image showing the dialogue is displayed on the background of the room. Gradually hiding means gradually increasing the transparency of the image showing the dialogue. For example, after displaying the dialogue image with a transmittance of 0%, the transparency is increased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, so that the dialogue image is hidden after 1 second. Further, the fade effect includes a crossfade in which the fade-in and the fade-out are performed at the same time and the images are exchanged.

<Example of time saving control without hitting>
Next, an example of executing a time saving control that does not go through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) as a time saving state will be described.
(Example of time saving control using time saving symbol)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned feature portions and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) always shifts via the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base) without operating the special variable winning ball device 7A. It may be made to shift to the state). That is, as the time saving state, the time saving control may be executed without going through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.).

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of a lost symbol or a part of a small hit symbol.

(A3) Further, when the lottery process relating to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol is performed, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or the lottery random number of the lost symbol. Or a random number for performing other lottery such as a lottery random number of a big hit symbol, a lottery random number of a small hit symbol, a random number for determining a big hit lottery, and a lottery random number of a fall lottery, the lottery may be performed.

(A4) Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a combination of symbols displayed as a lost symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of the transition to the time saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time saving will not be drawn.

(A5) Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the time-saving symbol is used for all the set values. Although the lottery probabilities are the same, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

(A6) Regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start port (first start). It may be at the time of winning a prize at the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) Regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the time-saving symbol is drawn. When a small hit symbol random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a fall lottery judgment value random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, the fall lottery judgment value random number can be used as the winning value. , A lottery using a structure, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

(A8) In the case where the lottery of the time-saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display number (time-saving number) of the time-saving state is determined by the presence or absence of passing through the time-saving region. Make sure it doesn't change.

(A9) Regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the lost symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, the specific lost symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and the big hit symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. In that case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the set value cannot be changed.

(A10) Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the big hit determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time-saving is already in the state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

(A13) Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings given may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required to be predetermined for the gaming state.

(A14) Further, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

(A15) Further, the number of times the time reduction end symbol is derived and displayed (time reduction end lottery) is executed, and the number of time reductions is set to the number of times until the time reduction end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction start, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. That is, in principle, the number of working hours may not be set and may be unlimited.

(A16) Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

(A17) Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

(A18) Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

(A19) Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, a high probability at the time of opening the game hall. It is a low-base state, and the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

(A20) Further, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving limiters is updated.

(A21) Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other time saving control examples using time saving symbols)
As another time saving control using the time saving symbol, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game control for shifting from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) is performed, and the special symbol is performed in the time-saving state. Based on the fact that the variable display result of the time saving symbol is displayed, the game control for further shifting from the time saving state to the same time saving state is not performed (even if the time saving symbol is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (time saving state). May not be controlled to switch the game state). Then, different effects may be produced when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the time-saving state (decorative symbol). In the normal state, a special symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol, and in the time-saving state, a general lost symbol is displayed.) This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B2) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of the special symbol is the time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays the common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. A different symbol may be displayed as a display result in the reduced working hours state (for example, the decorative symbol displays a special symbol corresponding to the reduced working hours symbol in the normal state, but simply displays a lost symbol in the reduced working hours state, etc.). Do not display the symbol corresponding to the symbol). As a result, the display result of the decorative pattern in the time-saving state does not give the player a feeling of loss, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect suggesting whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol is a special symbol (time saving symbol) is executed, but in the time saving state, the decorative symbol is executed. It is also possible not to execute the effect suggesting whether or not the display result of is a special symbol (time saving symbol). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the player has lost the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect in the time-saving state, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative symbol (the time for displaying the fixed surface result and then maintaining the display state) differs between the normal state and the time saving state. You may control it. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game without causing the player to feel that the decorative pattern is produced in a time-saving state.

(B5) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and it is a normal state. In, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol, and the time-saving symbol is variable in the special symbol in the time-saving state. Do not perform game control to shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state based on the display result (the time saving state is overwritten even if the time saving symbol is displayed (so that the time saving state occurs again). N) The switching control of the gaming state may not be performed). The second variable display has a higher ratio of displaying the variable display result of the time saving symbol than the first variable display, and the information related to the variable display is stored as the hold storage information, and the hold storage is completed when the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (when shifting to time saving control, it is possible to specify that the time saving continuous display is performed, and when shifting to time saving control, the time saving control is not executed. (Display effect, etc.), right-handed game is played in response to right-handed notification (notification to instruct right-handed) during the time-saving state, and variable display based on the hold storage information stored when the time-saving state ends. Until all is done. Left-handed notification (notification instructing left-handed) may not be performed. This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B6) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and it is a normal state. In, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol, and the time-saving symbol is variable in the special symbol in the time-saving state. Do not perform game control to shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state based on the display result (the time saving state is overwritten even if the time saving symbol is displayed (so that the time saving state occurs again). N) The switching control of the gaming state may not be performed). The second variable display has a higher ratio of displaying the variable display result of the time saving symbol than the first variable display, and the information related to the variable display is stored as the hold storage information, and the hold storage is completed when the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (when shifting to time saving control, it is possible to specify that the time saving continuous display is performed, and when shifting to time saving control, the time saving control is not executed. During the time saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, and until all the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time-saving state ends is completed. Left-handed notification (notification instructing left-handed) may not be performed. This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B7) Left-handed notification is executed in the variable display (first variable display) executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is completed. You may. As a result, since the instruction of how to hit is given appropriately, the game can be smoothly advanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B8) When the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining holding storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining holding storage information. The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed according to the hit (small hit, big hit) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed is It may be different. As a result, the effect of the notification mode of the right-handed notification does not give the player a feeling of loss due to the display result of the decorative pattern, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(B9) In the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends, a common effect is obtained when there is holding storage information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no holding storage information. It is possible to execute different effects after executing (For example, when there is hold storage information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the fourth hold storage information out of the four remaining hold storage, the third hold memory A common effect that suggests whether or not to return to the time saving state is executed until the variable display based on the information, and a time saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed in the variable display based on the fourth reserved storage information. It may be possible). As a result, the effect of the notification mode of the right-handed notification does not give the player a feeling of loss due to the display result of the decorative pattern, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(B10) The effect at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) stored based on the remaining holding storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining holding storage information. The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed differs depending on the effect at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You may do so. As a result, the production changes according to the game state, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(B11) Confirmation display time of display result in variable display (second variable display) based on remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after the confirmed surface result is displayed. The fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information is executed may be common. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period when the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is executed, the right-handed notification is not executed and the variable display is based on the remaining hold storage information. When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the display, the right-handed notification may be executed during the initial period when the next variable display is started. As a result, since the instruction of how to hit is given appropriately, the game can be smoothly advanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B13) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game control for shifting from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) is performed, and the variable display result is small. It is possible to execute a common specific effect (reach effect, notice effect) depending on whether it is a hit symbol (specific display result) such as a hit symbol or a big hit symbol or a time-saving symbol (special display result). The ratio of the time-saving symbols (special display result) may be different depending on which of the common specific effects provided is executed. Then, when the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right-handed notification may be executed during the initial period at which the next variable display is started. As a result, it is possible to suitably control the effect according to the game state when the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific effect, the display result may be a hit symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). As a result, the variation of the effect result of the variable display is abundant, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control has a common variation pattern depending on whether it is a hit symbol (specific display result), a time-saving symbol (special display result), or a lost symbol (predetermined display result). Is selectable, and even when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command for specifying the same fluctuation pattern from the game control CPU 103, different effects are displayed in the variable display according to the type of the symbol specification command that specifies the display result. May be made feasible. As a result, the variation of the variable display effect is enriched, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the special effect after the execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained may or may not be executed (for example, a plurality of types). Of the super reach productions in the above, when performing the production with the highest expectation, the special production is not executed, etc.). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (ratio) of a time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special effect is executed may be different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (ratio) of a time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special effect is executed may be different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B19) A predetermined effect different from the common specific effect (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a hit (a display moved from the display position of the hold display to another display position, and is currently being executed). The degree of expectation (ratio) that becomes the time saving symbol (special display result) is made different according to the effect mode of the effect) that displays the effect that can suggest the expectation of the hit corresponding to the variable display of. May be good. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B20) In the special effect that can be executed when the time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, after performing the effect (such as the time-saving suggestion effect) that suggests that the time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, the winning symbol (specification) is executed. It may be possible to execute an effect (such as a special jackpot whose game value is higher than that of a time-saving state) to notify the display result). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can be controlled to a time reduction state (special state) in which the number of time reductions (time reduction continuation period) differs according to the types of time reduction symbols (special display results) provided in a plurality of types (for example, the first). The 1st time reduction symbol: 50 times of time reduction, the 2nd time reduction symbol: 100 times of time reduction, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 is given when the time reduction symbol is stopped depending on the type of effect executed (for example, the type of reach effect, etc.). You may execute effects with different number of time reductions (duration). As a result, depending on the type of production, the player's attention can be focused on the subsequent time reduction, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(B22) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game is controlled to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the progress of the game is controlled. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute the effect based on the command. The transmitted command includes a special command that can specify the transition (control) from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the effect control CPU 120 executes a plurality of types of commands including the special command. A look-ahead notice effect for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information that is specified to execute the variable display that can shift to the time saving state (special state) based on the look-ahead of the hold storage information when received. You may want to limit the execution (do not execute at all, make it executable in rare cases, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the effect control according to the game state when the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) Based on the look-ahead of the hold storage information, the look-ahead for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information specified to execute the variable display capable of shifting (controlling) to the jackpot gaming state (specific game state) is executed. The execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. Then, as the look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of such a look-ahead notice effect, it may be possible to execute the effect of a common mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B24) The variable display based on the hold storage information for the look-ahead target is a variable display in which the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed, and a variable display in which the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed. In both the display and the case, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information may be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B25) The look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of the look-ahead notice effect does not execute an effect having a higher expectation than a specific expectation (for example, hold when the expectation of the color of the hold display is blue <green <red). Do not change the display color to red, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B26) The look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of the look-ahead notice effect does not execute a specific type of effect (for example, when the expectation of the color of the hold display is blue <green <red, the color of the hold display is changed to red. Do not change, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(Example of time reduction control using the variable display count that resulted in a predetermined display result such as the loss variable display count)
Next, an example of time saving control using a variable display count (number of continuations of variable display that has been lost) that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in a normal state will be described. As shown below, in the time saving state (special state), the number of continuations of the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) has reached the special number (for example, 1000 times). May be feasible on condition of. As the predetermined result, the time saving state (special state) may be executed on condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in the loss display result reaches the special number of times.

(C1) A game based on the fact that the variable display result becomes a specific display result after the first variable display by the first special symbol and the second variable display by the second special symbol are performed. It is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the person, and the numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and the numerical information is concerned. Based on the above, when the special condition that the number of executions (continuation) of the variable display resulting in the predetermined display result reaches the special number (for example, 1000 times) is satisfied, the normal state is changed to the time saving state (special state). You may control the game to be transferred. Then, the numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is obtained in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is obtained in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times that the predetermined display result is obtained is continuously updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display can be executed, so that the player can be easily rescued due to the time saving state. , It is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player due to the time saving state.

(C2) The special condition is satisfied when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result is continuously displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times). You may do it. As a result, when the display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuous, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (probability change state, time saving state). As a result, the player can be suitably relieved when the display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuous.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be satisfied by being controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to suppress relief when it is no longer necessary to rescue the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the gambling from being increased more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition May be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress relief when the player no longer needs to be rescued, such as when the player is in a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the gambling from being increased more than necessary. Can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is executed a special number of times. As a result, it becomes possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs substantially, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(C7) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the backup is stored when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The data can be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power failure is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, so that it is suppressed from being disadvantageous to the amusement park side.

(C8) Based on the fact that the numerical information has reached the special number of times (for example, 1000 times or more), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) for a period of the special number of times or more (for example, 1000 times or more). In the time saving state (special state), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time saving state (special state) and A different effect may be executed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game that is in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), the variable display time of the second time saving state is shorter than that of the first time saving state. It is possible to change the appearance of the production, such as, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game. It should be noted that the same effect may be executed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state) without executing such an effect. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being aware that the player is in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), and suppresses a decline in the interest in the game. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to the variable display is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is different from the first numerical value (4 or later). ), The second process relating to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is executed, and the special condition is satisfied when the value of the special figure process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. The third process for controlling the time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. Also. It is possible to hit the game ball into the first path (left side game area) and the second path (right side game area). In the normal state, the game ball is hit into the first path, and in the time saving state (special state), the second path. A game is played by hitting a game ball into the path. Then, during the execution of the third process, although it is not controlled to the time saving state (special state), it is notified that the second path should be fired (for example, right-handed notification by a right-handed lamp or the like). You may do it. Further, during the execution of the third process, a notification effect of shifting to a time saving state (special state) may be performed. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. For example, by turning on the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the firing direction early (before the actual start of the time saving fluctuation) when actually shifting to the time saving state (special state). Will be.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. .. As a result, since the control to the advantageous state is prioritized over the control to the time saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition, the result is not more advantageous for the player, and the player's hobby of the game is enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display is started, and the numerical information becomes a specific value based on the fact that the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. After the variable display ends (start of next fluctuation, waiting for customers), it is controlled to a time saving state (special state), and when the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, special information (special number of times reached). When changing the flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set) and controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). You may. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the control of shifting to the time saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The CPU 103 for game control selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and determines a variation pattern of a symbol determination time that differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information. You may do so. As a result, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to the variable display is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is different from the first numerical value (4 or later). ), The second process related to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is satisfied. The third process for controlling to the original time saving state (special state) is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute the effect based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, fluctuation pattern) according to the case where the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value and the third numerical value in the special state. .. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. For example, different gaming states can be suitably identified, which facilitates gaming control. Then, if the command is different according to the game state identified at that time, the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) can execute suitable effect control according to the game state.

(C14) In the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is satisfied, the value of the special figure process flag is set to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value. By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control.

(C15) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the specific display result (hit symbol) and the special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to execute different effects depending on whether the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In some cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the end of the big hit game state (for example, the time is shortened). As a result, it is possible to perform the production of a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(C16) In the time saving state (special state), there are cases where the specific display result (hit symbol) is displayed and the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and the special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). The fluctuation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, since no new production data is required, the development cost is not increased, and the game entertainment can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the special display result (time saving symbol) is displayed is controlled to the time saving state (special state), and the special condition (variable display number of times) It may be possible to execute different effects depending on whether the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In some cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time was shortened after the big hit was completed). As a result, it is possible to perform the production of a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(C18) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the special display result (time saving symbol) is displayed is controlled to the time saving state (special state), and the special condition (variable display number of times) It may be possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In such a case, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, since no new production data is required, the development cost is not increased, and the game entertainment can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 has predetermined information (predetermined information) based on the backed up and stored data when the power is turned on. It is possible to transmit a ram clear command at the time of cold start and a command for notifying the number of fluctuations displayed until the end of the time saving state at the time of hot start) to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the predetermined information. A suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display was executed in a predetermined period after the power was turned on (so-called morning appearance is different, the background image is different, and an effect that suggests whether it is far or near within 100 rotation fluctuation is executed. (Easy, etc.) may be made feasible. It is possible to give the player a motivation to play the game in the morning, so that the operating rate of the game machine increases and the processing load does not increase.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command capable of specifying information related to the time saving state) to the effect control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the effect control CPU 120 is capable of transmitting the effect control CPU 120. It may be possible to execute a special effect (such as an effect of suggesting the end of the number of time-saving states) related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. Then, as the specific information, the first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is a predetermined value (for example, 127) or less is specified. Information) and second specific information (such as a command that counts down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 127). May be good. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting the function to the player, and it is possible to suitably realize the command processing.

(C21) The effect control CPU 120 is put into a time saving state (special state) when the special condition is satisfied, based on the execution of the variable display of the first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times) less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for time-saving state suggestion effect control) suggesting that it is controlled, and a second predetermined number of times (for example, a second predetermined number of times) less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the variable display of the special number of times is executed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect every time the variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly losing the player by suggesting the function to the player on a regular basis.

(C22) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 is used when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 has the special condition (variable) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. The special display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the display count condition) and after the backup-stored data is initialized. A different effect (such as a different effect when shifting to the time-saving state) is executed when the state is controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the condition and when the time-saving state (special state) is controlled. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. In addition, the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized depending on the difference in the production. Therefore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability setting can be changed, the setting is changed. Since it is possible to grasp the possibility that the setting has been made, the elements for guessing the setting are increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(C23) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 is used when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 has the special condition (variable) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. The special display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the display count condition) and after the backup-stored data is initialized. When the condition is controlled based on the condition, different effects are executed after being controlled to the time saving state (special state) (the effect after shifting to the time saving state is different, etc.). As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. In addition, the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized depending on the difference in the production. Therefore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability setting can be changed, the setting is changed. Since it is possible to grasp the possibility that the setting has been made, the elements for guessing the setting are increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(D1) The execution ratio of the group notice effect may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display is the result of deriving the reduced working hours symbol, the case where the big hit occurs, or the case where the loss occurs.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Each configuration relating to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but is an enclosed type that encloses the gaming media and gives points based on the occurrence of winning. It may be a gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, depending on the player. If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus, The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is controlled to the advantageous state. It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is a big hit (for example, a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is a big hit), and the notification effect is notified whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. Including the introduction part (for example, the fanning part) up to, and the epilogue part (for example, the hit epilogue part) executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled after the notification of the result. The notification effect is configured to include a first notification effect (for example, a notification effect of the SP second half reach A) and a second notification effect (for example, a notification effect of the SP final reach), and the first notification effect and the first notification effect. In both of the two notification effects, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and in both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, when the dialogue subtitle is displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the dialogue subtitle is displayed. There are times when it is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 175, there are times when subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound), and there are cases where the first notification effect and the second notification effect are displayed. The number of lines emitted by the character is different (for example, the number of lines shown in FIG. 175), and the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is the introduction of the first notification effect. The ratio of displaying subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles in the epilogue part of the SP second half reach A in FIG. 175. The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification effect. It is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles (for example, the ratio of adding subtitles in the epilogue part of the SP final reach in FIG. 175 is higher than the ratio of adding subtitles in the fanning part of the SP final reach), and the character in the introductory part The first character to which the emitted dialogue sound is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound is an ally character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)), and further, an operation that can be operated by the player. Means (eg stay) As the vibration effect that the operation means vibrates, the lock controller 31A, the push button 31B, etc., a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example). Vibration of the operation unit effect control pattern or variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, which can execute the vibration effect execution means (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern). The effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect process in step S172 using the control data, and the light emission effect that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (for example, depending on the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern). The variable display effect processing in step S172 is executed using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, for example, the light emission effect execution means capable of executing the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Specific effect execution means (for example, determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, SP reach A reach effect, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. It is provided with an effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the variable display effect process in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern), and the predetermined vibration effect is executed more than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed. The rate of control to the advantageous state is higher (for example, jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern, etc.), and the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the predetermined vibration effect. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the timing at which is executed (for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the use of the operation unit effect pattern), and the vibration effect. The executing means can execute the special vibration effect along with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect in the period AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. (For example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the series of effects to be performed look more suitable. In addition, the player can accurately recognize the ally character in the introduction part (at the start of SP reach). In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

In other words, in both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, in the epilogue part, the dialogue subtitles are firmly attached to make it easier to understand what the character is speaking, thereby emphasizing the sense of blessing and introducing it. In the part, there are many changes in the picture, so the first thing to convey in the picture is to use the auxiliary subtitle display so that it does not get in the way, so that it can be a suitable production and the specified vibration. Since it is possible to pay attention to the light emission mode in which the effect is controlled in an advantageous state, whether or not the vibration effect is executed at the execution timing, and whether or not the special vibration effect is executed in association with the execution of the specific effect. , It is possible to improve the game entertainment. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can more preferably show a series of effects in the notification effect when installed in the game hall and that easily attracts the interest of the player.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can make a series of effects to be executed more suitable and improve the entertainment of a game, it is in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. A controllable gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), and an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) and a predetermined vibration as a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates. It is possible to execute effects (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and special vibration effects (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern). Vibration effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect process during variable display in step S172 using vibration control data of an operation unit effect control pattern or a variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203). In the light emitting effect executing means (for example, step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. The effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in the above step, and the specific effect (for example, reach of SP reach A) according to the progress of the game. For effect control that executes the variable display effect process of step S172 based on the specific effect execution means (for example, the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute the effect, the jackpot confirmation notification, the jackpot type lottery, etc. CPU 120, etc.), and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, in an operation unit effect pattern or the like). The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the operation unit). The emission color included in the effect pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the use of the operation unit effect pattern), and the vibration effect execution means can execute the special vibration effect along with the execution of the specific effect (for example, period AKZ01). -Execution of vibration effect in AKZ05, etc.), the predetermined vibration effect, and the special Examples thereof include gaming machines having different vibration modes (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44) depending on the vibration effect. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 274 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold display 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 276). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 276), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 274), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 276).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 276).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 275 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls by winning the 2nd starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the 1st big winning opening and the 2nd big winning opening (attacker) occupy the role ratio. It is a ratio. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which there are few prize balls, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. 276. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electric components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 277, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 278. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 278 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 278 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 278 being executed after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this big hit end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing to make various settings for starting control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 280 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 280 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 280 (B) shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as the "big hit" than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled in the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special map, the probability determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special map display result as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 are set. In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is a probable change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value is set. In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is a game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game performance (so-called V) in which the ratio of the gaming ball passing through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). If the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 281. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 281 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 281 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 282, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part related to the setting suggestion effect)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In this feature unit, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined ratio while the variable display is being executed.

FIG. 283-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination process makes it possible to determine the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggestion effect.

After the advance notice effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S203). The effect control pattern may include an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice effect control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various effect executions. For example, in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns is selected and set as a usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared advance notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in response to the determination result by the advance notice effect determination process in step S202. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and the advance notice effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is set. There may be.

When the effect control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Set the value (step S204). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbol may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the hold display update setting at the start of variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and the other hold numbers "2" to "2" are deleted. The hold display in the display area corresponding to "4" or the like is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. In the active display unit provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display corresponding to the erased (digested) hold display may be performed in the hold display area. If the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the number of hold storages is "0", the hold display is not updated and the active display area is displayed. Settings may be made to update the active display in. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 283-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221). Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed can be determined based on, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

If the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is terminated. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "missing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "missing", the fixed decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so as to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right". At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of big hit. The final stop symbol at the time of a big hit is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". At the time of super reach where the variable display result becomes "missing", the fixed decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. When the variable display result is a "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the big hit.

At the time of super reach, the same (matching) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are displayed regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "missing". It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decoration pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that make up such a reach loss combination and a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbol that can be determined as the reach symbol may include a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative pattern corresponding to the numbers may be only an effect image showing the numbers, or may be an effect image showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to the reach symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the reach symbol. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "missing" or "big hit". For example, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 are the highest. As the result becomes lower, the determination ratio of the decorative design becomes lower, and the determination ratio of the decorative design corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2 number, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 As the number becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative design becomes higher, and the determination ratio of the decorative design corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state is the highest, 6 As the number of, 5 number, 4 number, 3 number, and 2 number, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a reach symbol becomes "big hit", and the rate of being controlled to the big hit game state is low. Therefore, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is the lowest. In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". The number of determination values assigned to each decorative symbol to be a reach symbol may be different, or the number of assigned determination values may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol to be a reach symbol. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed (step S225). Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed or "with effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is executed.

Based on the determination result of step S225, it is determined whether or not it is determined to "have an effect" to execute the setting suggestion effect (step S226). When it is determined that "no effect" is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 may receive a set value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified set value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern can be selected from a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. It should be decided. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 283-3 shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 283-3 as the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01 or the like. In the determination table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination rate of "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit”. ..

FIG. 283-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion content of these setting suggestion patterns differs depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed and the display color when the symbol display color is changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is a normal display color. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, and suggests that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. The pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to suggest the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 283-4 (B) shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 283-4 (B) as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11 or the like. In the determination table TA11, there is a portion where the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-0, the expectation level which is an advantageous setting value for the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. It is confirmed that there is. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed by the pattern RE-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed by the pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the reach symbol includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of the jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode of 7. It includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of a jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number and suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed. The suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state will be continued, and the suggestions regarding the set values will be made.

The setting suggestion effect can be executed so that the effect mode differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-1, so that the symbol display color is not changed to the copper color. In this way, as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color. Is different whether or not is changed to copper color. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-3, so that the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, the symbol display color is gold as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6. Whether or not it is changed to is different.

The setting suggestion effect was stopped and displayed as a reach symbol in place of the one that changes the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, or in addition to the one that changes the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image or any other effect image, output of sound by speakers 8L, 8R, lighting of decorative light emitters such as game effect lamp 9 and decorative LED, operation of movable members for effect, these. It may change the production mode by any production device such as a combination of a part or all. For the setting suggestion effect and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data obtained by combining these are predetermined for performing the effect. It may be feasible if it satisfies one or more conditional expressions. The effect of changing the pattern display color is also called the change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display. It may be possible to determine at a predetermined ratio only when the result is "big hit", and it may not be possible to determine when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value.

FIG. 283-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the effect processing during variable display, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S241). When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control for executing various effects is performed as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, and blinking. It suffices that various effects can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as a movable body 32, or by combining a part or all of them.

In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect period is in effect (step S242). In the case of the advance notice effect period (step S242; Yes), the control for executing the advance notice effect is performed (step S243). When it is not the advance notice effect period (step S242; No), or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step S244). In the case of the reach effect period (step S244; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step S245). When the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is stopped and displayed by the control of step S245 and then the reach effect is executed after the symbol display color is changed, the control of the jackpot gaming state is suggested and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. It is possible to make suggestions regarding the set value.

When it is not the reach effect period (step S244; No), or after the control of step S245 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be predetermined as the execution period of the effect of changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. In the case of the change effect period (step S246; Yes), the control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). When it is not the change effect period (step S246; No), after the control of step S247 is performed, for example, the decorative pattern is variable based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern. After performing control for executing the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to a different time length depending on the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of 2, the change effect period may be set to a third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. Generally, when a player notifies an advantageous effect (advantageous effect), the player takes an image or a video of the effect on a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on websites that require membership registration such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for productions that are often performed even in disadvantageous cases (disadvantageous productions), since the motivation for shooting is not aroused, if the execution period of the disadvantageous productions is long, the player will be rather uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of the unfavorable effect is shorter than that of the advantageous effect to reduce the discomfort. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the effect when the effect advantageous to the player is executed, and it is possible to secure the shooting time. Further, by securing the shooting time, the shot images and moving images can be published by the player on the Internet, and the public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, by disclosing the images taken by which pachinko machine 1 in which game field, the game field was advertised by the players from the game field side. become. As described above, by securing the shooting time when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game hall side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and the process waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When a symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S252), the variable display effect process is terminated.

FIG. 283-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 283-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the reach is established. When the decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 7 are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right", the reach is established and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. FIG. 283-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102, which is a reach development in which the reach effect of normal reach shifts to the reach effect of super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed, and the effect image in the reach effect of the super reach is displayed. FIG. 283-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed. The effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed by superimposing it on the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed. In addition, by displaying an effect image for notifying a message such as "change the symbol display color !!", it is suggested to change the symbol display color.

FIG. 283-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0. FIG. 283-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color is changed to copper color by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 283-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD 113 in which the symbol display color is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2. FIG. 283-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD 113 in which the pattern display color is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the reach pattern does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and the display color remains red, which is the normal display color. In this way, the failure effect (gase effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to copper color by the pattern RE-1, which suggests that the set value is 2 or more. In the effect execution example HD113, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2, which suggests that the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3, which suggests the determination of 6 which is the highest set value.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect suggests the jackpot expectation by any effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead notice effect, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be able to make suggestions about. During the execution of the variable display, it may be possible to make a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. In the case of executing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed and pachinko. It may include the case of making a suggestion regarding the set value of the gaming machine 1. When performing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion ends, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related. It may include the case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. .. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the suggestion is made by the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. Can be diversified to improve the interest in pachinko.

While the variable display is being executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be given, but the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be given. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine is accompanied by the execution of the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and the big hit medium effect (effect corresponding to the first round and the second round). You may make a suggestion about the setting value of 1. In some cases, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, or with some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, make suggestions for controlling a state that is different from the jackpot gaming state and is advantageous to the player. It may be a thing. For example, it may make a suggestion regarding a probabilistic state controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is given may be suggested according to whether or not it is controlled.

(Explanation of feature 10SH)
Next, the feature portion 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes an operating means that can be operated by the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has a timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, a timing T2 at which the reach is established, and a normal reach after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timing T3 during which the reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has the push button 31B regardless of whether the timing is one of the timing T1 and the timing T2 or the timing of the timing T3 and the timing T4. It is possible to execute the vibration effect in a manner in which the vibration time and the emission color are common.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the timing T1 and the timing T2.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of the super reach.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect while the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5 that displays various effects images.

The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect related to the feature unit 10SH has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the effect image of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the always small symbol, the hold number display, and various error notifications, and has a higher priority than the hold display, the active display, the background image, and the decorative symbol.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 284-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 10SH, and shows the layout of the main members.

The push button 31B is formed of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for a game effect is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be made to emit light by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to be vibrable by driving the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is composed of, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight having a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or at a position close to the push button 31B. In addition, in order to make the vibration mode of the push button 31B various, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the outside. The game effect lamps 9L and 9R have a plurality of LEDs built in along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 284-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on / off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, 9R, drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, 9R based on the lamp signal, and has a game effect in a mode specified by the lamp signal. Turn on / off the lamps 9B, 9L, 9R. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp. The lighting / extinguishing of the lamp may be controlled by the effect control CPU 120.

For example, a motor control board 130 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display control unit 123 supplies the motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be controlled by the effect control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 284-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process related to the feature unit 10SH. The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 284-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG. 282.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display variation pattern to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). The variation pattern and the display result are transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display, and are specified by the effect control command analyzed by the command analysis process. The final stop symbol is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the variation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, the lottery refers to a determination method using a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. As the random number value, one of the effect random numbers updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random number update process is used.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration effect is executed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect that is not linked to the advance notice effect. In the process of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration effect is executed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed, by the random value and the lottery by the table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the vibration effect is not executed, and when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect. It suffices that the determination value to be compared with the random value is assigned to the determination result of the presence / absence of the vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain effect A is, for example, (probability that effect A is executed when the display result is "big hit") x (probability that the display result is "big hit") / {(display result). Probability that production A is executed when is a "big hit") x (probability that the display result is "big hit") + (probability that production A is executed when the display result is not "big hit") x ( Probability that the display result will not be a "big hit")}.

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is performed when the display result is "big hit" so that the jackpot reliability corresponding to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value. It suffices to specify the probability of execution and the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern is executed when the display result does not become a "big hit".

(Contents of vibration production and jackpot reliability)
FIG. 284-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of the jackpot. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment has execution patterns SE1 to SE1 according to a combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of vibration effects of SE10.

The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T2 where the reach is established. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at the timing T2 where the reach is established.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment has a timing T3 in which a normal reach reach effect is being executed and a timing T4 in which a super reach reach effect is being executed after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timings. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as the vibration effect at the timing T3 during the execution of the reach effect of the normal reach. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration effect at the timing T4 during the execution of the reach effect of the super reach.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect may be executed when the reach effect of the super reach is executed, so that the interest can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, or the super reach reach effect. Regardless of the timing T4, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted. It is possible to carry out a vibration effect in which the light is emitted in red. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1, SE5, SE8 as the vibration effect of the mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light. Is. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit red light. Is.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. Vibration effect can be executed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in rainbow colors. It is possible.

Then, in this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds as compared with the case where the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed. The jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in red is executed. Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in the embodiment of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is "big hit". Is definitely notified.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, it is possible to pay attention to what color the push button 31B emits light and how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed, and when the push button 31B is vibrated and pushed for 3 seconds. When the vibration effect in which the button 31B emits light in red is executed, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even in the case of the vibration effect of the same aspect, when the normal reach effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, it is executed more than when it is executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach effect is being executed. The jackpot reliability is high. Further, even in the case of the vibration effect of the same aspect, it is more when the super reach reach effect is executed at the timing T4 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started than when it is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. , The jackpot reliability is high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode when the vibration effect is not executed at the timing T1, the reach effect of the super reach is performed instead of the timing T3 during which the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed. It is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T4 during execution. Then, when the vibration effect is not actually executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed, the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed is further increased. be able to.

It should be noted that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during the execution of the reach effect of the normal reach may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. Further, when it is possible to execute a plurality of types of normal reach reach effects and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach effects, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects that can be executed at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effects is , It suffices if it is higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of the normal reach being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of any kind of normal reach.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the super reach. Further, when it is possible to execute a plurality of types of super reach reach effects and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of super reach reach effect, the jackpot of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. The reliability may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of the super reach being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of any kind of super reach.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during the super reach reach effect can be regarded as a chance-up effect. can do.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is always vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored vibration effect. And it is definitely notified that the display result will be a "big hit".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 where the reach is established, instead of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, when the vibration effect is not actually executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 where the reach is established can be further increased.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to change the expectation that the vibration effect is executed in a complicated manner as the variable display of the decorative pattern progresses.

Further, the probability that the vibration effect of the mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit light in rainbow colors is sufficiently low as compared with the probability that the vibration effect of the other mode is executed. By prescribing it, it is possible to enhance the interest when it is definitely notified that the display result will be a "big hit".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always made to emit light.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and it is possible to increase the chance of recognizing that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the description of FIG. 284-3, after that, according to the determination result of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 performs the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the super reach reach effect in this variable display. It is determined whether or not to execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T4 during execution (step 10SHS3).

Then, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guidance effect is an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect by a random number value and a lottery using a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. In the table referred to in the process of step 10 SHS4, the determination ratio of the presence / absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of the vibration effect is executed. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect at the same ratio regardless of which mode the vibration effect is.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. In addition, it is possible to perform a line-of-sight guidance effect.

According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be focused on before the vibration effect is executed, so that the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

On the other hand, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established, the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, the relief effect may be executed after the display result of "off" is displayed, and the true display result may be derived and displayed. Therefore, when the display result of the previous variable display is derived and displayed and the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started even though the variable display of this time is started. There is a possibility of giving a misunderstanding as if the relief effect was executed in the previous variable display. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, it is possible to prevent such a misunderstanding.

Further, if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it may not be possible to properly recognize that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol has become the predetermined reach mode. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern has become the predetermined reach mode. ..

Returning to the description of FIG. 284-3, when the vibration effect is not executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed ( After executing the process of step 10SHS3; No) or step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute other effects such as reach effects, the mode of the effects to be executed, and the like (step 10SHS5). Specifically, the presence or absence of execution of various effects such as advance notice effects and the mode thereof are determined by lottery. At this time, by making the decision ratio in the lottery different according to the display result of this time, the fluctuation pattern of this time, etc., the jackpot reliability is made different depending on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and its mode. Further, when the current pattern specifies the reach, it is determined that the reach effect specified by the fluctuation pattern is executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the effect determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer value corresponding to the special figure variation time corresponding to the current variation pattern as an initial value in the effect control process timer, and the type and mode of the effect determined to be executed. The effect specific data for specifying the effect and the execution timing specific timer value indicating the effect execution timing by comparison with the timer value of the effect control process timer are stored in the timer value storage area of the RAM 122 in association with each other. When there are a plurality of effects determined to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect specific data and the execution timing specific timer value in the timer value storage area for each effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol that derives the determined final stop symbol and the mode specified by the current variation pattern (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives an instruction and starts variable display of the decorative pattern. At this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" (step 10SHS8), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Execution timing and production period of vibration effect and line-of-sight guidance effect)
FIG. 284-5 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing and the effect period of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at any of the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the timing T4 during the super reach reach effect. It is possible.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at any of the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the timing T4 during the super reach reach effect. In that case, it is possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before that.

When the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guidance effect before executing the vibration effect at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 starts the line-of-sight guidance effect 4 seconds before the timing T3. , The vibration effect is started when the timing T3 is reached. Similarly, when the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guidance effect before executing the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance is performed 4 seconds before the timing T4. The production is started, and the vibration production is started when the timing T4 is reached. The effect period of the line-of-sight guidance effect of this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed for the first second.

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
FIGS. 284-6 and 284-7 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. In this effect operation example, an example of executing the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of types of super reach reach effects. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 284-6 (A), the background image 10SHY of the "mountain landscape" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed when the reach is established is reduced and displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 284-6 (A), the “left” reach decorative symbol 10SH5L is a reduced version of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L when the reach is established. And, when the reach is established, the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R, which is a reduced version of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, is displayed.

Further, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 10SHK smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" is provided. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, the variable display of the small symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The effect image showing a small pattern is also referred to as a broadcast information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect image showing the small symbol to be the broadcast information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol as the display result is displayed. Derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small symbol different from the decorative symbol is performed. During the period from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation of the final decorative symbol that is the display result, the variable display of the small symbol is continuously performed in a certain display mode, and disappears from the screen or is a shield. It is not shielded by. Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small symbol that is variably displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK is also referred to as a constant small symbol or a small symbol for directing. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, a plurality of decorative symbols that can be identified by a display mode in which a part or all of them are common to each of a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, a symbol that indicates a number as well as a part that indicates a number in the decorative symbol. An effect image showing a type of small symbol may be variably displayed as a broadcast information image. The small symbol may be displayed only when the decorative symbol is hidden. For example, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach mode, the variable display of the small symbol is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 284-6 (A) instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It may be displayed in the lower left corner of.

In addition, a special symbol, a decorative symbol, and a fourth symbol following the normal symbol are provided, and the variable display of the fourth symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol repeats display and non-display with a specific display color at regular time intervals, for example, in the fourth symbol display area provided on or outside the screen of the image display device 5. It is realized by continuing the display control. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a mode that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B have a display screen of the image display device 5, such as the right side of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 284-1. Is provided at a remote location. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player paying attention to the effect of the display on the image display device 5 to confirm the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbol progresses. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not the display result is inside and whether or not the display result is derived. On the other hand, by performing variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, whether or not the variable display is in progress is determined. Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, in this example, the hold display area 10SHH for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held, and the active display area 10SH for displaying the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. , Is displayed. When the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, the hold display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SH may not be displayed.

Further, a hold number display area 10SHHS is provided in the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the hold number display area 10SHHS, as in the hold display area 10SHH, the hold number of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game is identifiablely displayed. The display mode is a mode in which arithmetic numbers are displayed.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guidance effect 4 seconds before the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using a visual effect as a line-of-sight guidance effect.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 284-6 (B). do.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 284-6 (B) to (D), the effect control CPU 120 changes the aspect of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings up the hammer. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 uses the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. 284-6 (B) to (D) in accordance with the action of the character swinging up the hammer. Lights so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 284-7 (E) and 284-7 (F), the effect control CPU 120 changes the aspect of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 uses the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. 284-7 (E) and (F) in accordance with the action of the character swinging down the hammer. Lights the light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

After that, as shown in FIG. 284-7 (G), the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of hammers that the character swings down to hit the button image 10SHB and imitates a star from the button image 10SHB at the timing T4. The mode of various images is changed so that the effect image 10SHS of the "star" of the above is scattered. Further, as shown in FIG. 284-7 (G), the effect control CPU 120 starts the vibration effect when the timing T4 is reached, vibrates the push button 31B, and is built in the push button 31B. The game effect lamps 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after the timing T4, the effect control CPU 120 ends the line-of-sight guidance effect as shown in FIG. 284-7 (H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect elapses, the effect control CPU 120 ends the vibration effect, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and has a game effect lamp built in the push button 31B. 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as below the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 284-1. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player who is paying attention to the effect of the display on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B, and whether the push button 31B is vibrating or whether the push button 31B is lit. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not. On the other hand, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, the push button 31B can be focused on before the push button 31B vibrates, and the push button 31B can be pushed. It is possible to appropriately recognize the vibration of the button 31B and sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

It should be noted that the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is always set lower than that of the small symbol or the holding number display. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guidance effect on the layer on the back side of the layer that constantly displays the small symbol or the number of pending numbers among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 284-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed on the back side of the constant small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, always has a lower priority than the small symbol.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 284-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed on the back side of the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the guidance effect, has a lower priority than the hold number display.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set higher than that of the hold display, the active display, the background image, and the decorative pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guidance effect on the layer on the front side of the layer for displaying the background image or the decorative pattern among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 284-6 (B) to 284-7 (G), the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB are displayed on the front side of the background image 10SHY of the "mountain landscape". It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are the displays of the line-of-sight guidance effect, have higher priority than the background image 10SHY of the "mountain scenery".

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 284-6 (D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed on the front side of the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is a display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 284-6 (D), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the front side of the "left" reach decoration symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration symbol 10SH5R. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the reach decoration symbol 10SH5L of the "left" and the reach decoration symbol 10SH5R of the "right".

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 284-6 (G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed on the front side of the hold display displayed in the hold display area 10SH, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, has a higher priority than the hold display.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 284-6 (G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed on the front side of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be conspicuous while the visibility of the small symbol and the holding number display is suitably ensured at all times.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 284-6 (B) to 284-7 (G), when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is displayed and the line-of-sight guidance effect is displayed. The high-priority constant small symbols and the number of holdings are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made more conspicuous while ensuring the visibility of the small symbol and the holding number display at all times. ..

(Modification example of feature part 10SH)
The invention according to the feature portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4 of FIG. 284-3, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect may be set according to which mode of the vibration effect is executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the vibration effect this time is a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light, or the push button 31B is pressed for 3 seconds. Depending on whether the vibration effect is such that the push button 31B is vibrated over a period of 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in red, or the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow color. The presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect may be determined at different ratios. Here, when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit red light is executed, it is easy to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect. Further, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors is executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is always executed. That is, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the execution rate of the vibration effect having higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve the expectation that the vibration effect with higher jackpot reliability is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked to the advance notice effect. In this case, as the vibration effect linked with the notice effect, there are a plurality of types depending on the combination of the interlocking notice effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. It may be possible to carry out the vibration effect of. Depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a bonus advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect linked with a highly reliable character advance notice effect. This vibration effect is an effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32 and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the interlocking accessory notice effect. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be used as a chance-up effect in the character advance notice effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked with other highly reliable advance notice effects. This vibration effect is an effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronization with the image displayed in the notice effect and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the interlocking notice effect. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be used as an effect of increasing the chance in the advance notice effect.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived, the gaming ball passes through a specific area provided in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or a winning opening. By doing so, the jackpot gaming state may be started. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery effect that notifies the upper limit of the number of rounds executed in the big hit game state when a game ball that has passed through a specific area is detected. Then, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked to the round lottery effect. This vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery effect, and is executed in the big hit game state. Notify that the maximum number of rounds to be played is not the minimum number of rounds among multiple options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored effect. It may be deterministically notified that the maximum number of rounds executed in the gaming state is the maximum number of rounds among the plurality of options. With such a configuration, it is possible to raise attention to the vibration effect linked with the round lottery effect.

The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11 or when an error is detected in the effect control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 and a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The effect control CPU 120 can display an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance effect. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect may have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error notification image can be suitably ensured even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed when the error notification image is displayed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. For example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the time. Further, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. , It is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between the timing before the reference timing and the timing after the reference timing with reference to a certain timing. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol, which is the timing before the timing T2, is started with the timing T2 at which the reach is established as a reference. , Timing T3 during normal reach reach production, which is the timing after timing T2, and timing T4, which is executing super reach reach production, are set to 3 seconds. The vibration time at the timing after the reference timing may be longer than the vibration time at the timing before the timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed after the reference timing.

Depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be different. For example, there are a case where the push button 31B is vibrated with a first strength and a case where the push button 31B is vibrated with a second strength larger than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength. When making the push button 31B vibrate with the first strength, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than when the push button 31B is vibrated. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the strength of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration effect and the reliability of the jackpot may be common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model. According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the variation in the execution pattern and the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed in each of the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1. , It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A vibration effect may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the vibration effect.

In addition to this, when the vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is the first mode and the second mode. , The jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, may be different. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is a mode in which the push button 31B vibrates continuously for a predetermined time, and a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. Make the jackpot reliability different in the variable display before execution, which is the target of the look-ahead notice. With such a configuration, it is possible to raise attention to the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect.

Alternatively, when the vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is a plurality of capable of executing the vibration effect as the notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. It may be possible to execute only at any one of the timings of. For example, the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect can be executed only at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration effect as a look-ahead notice can be executed, the vibration effect is announced as a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. Can be suitably recognized as having been executed.

When the vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead advance notice effect at the timing when the vibration effect as the advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution is executed, the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed is announced. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the advance notice effect may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect. For example, when the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect can be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. The vibration time of the push button 31B is set to 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a warning effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution is set to a mode in which the push button 31B continuously vibrates for a predetermined time, and the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a look-ahead notice effect. The vibration mode of the above is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. According to such a configuration, any of the cases where the vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed at the timing when the vibration effect as the advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution can be executed. It is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect has been executed.

When the execution pattern of the vibration effect and the jackpot reliability are common between the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model, it is executed at a specific timing. Even if the mode of the vibration effect executed by the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the aspect of the vibration effect executed by the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 are different, a big hit. The reliability may be common. For example, regarding the vibration effect executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model. Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the executed vibration effect is different, the jackpot reliability is 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the models of the pachinko gaming machines 1 are different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be adjusted to match the image of the effect executed at that time, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. For example, at the timing T2 when the reach is established, when the notification effect for notifying that the reach is established is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated while the video of the notification effect is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, a sense of unity is generated between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the same execution pattern of vibration effect and jackpot reliability, vibration of the same execution pattern Regarding the production, only the lower limit of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when the vibration effect is executed as an effect of increasing the chance of another effect, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect can be flexibly adjusted in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other effect. While making adjustments, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at a timing different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has higher jackpot reliability than the reach mode after the decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination, which is not a jackpot combination, is temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode. It is possible to carry out a fanning effect that encourages the development of a reach mode. There are cases where the reach mode with high jackpot reliability develops after the fanning effect is executed, and there are cases where the display result becomes "missing" without developing into the reach mode with high jackpot reliability. When developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanning success effect that notifies that the effect of the fanning effect is developed into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability. On the other hand, when the display result is "off" without developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the effect of the fanning effect does not develop into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability. Perform a fanning failure production. In executing such a fanning effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing of executing the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the successful fanning effect is executed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the fanning success effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the successful fanning effect is executed.

The emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the successful fanning effect is the vibration of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration effects of multiple types of execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. The push button 31B in the effect may be the same emission color as the emission color. According to such a configuration, when the fanning success effect is executed, the display result may be "missing" even if it develops into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, but the jackpot reliability is excessively increased. It is possible to suppress the increase.

Further, when the display result is "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing immediately before the definite decorative symbol, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, not only can the interest be improved at the timing immediately before the final decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, but also the expectation for the vibration effect itself is increased, and the vibration effect is executed at other timings as well. It is possible to improve the interest of the time.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, it is advantageous to the player. The emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect can be "rainbow color" even when the jackpot type is different from the jackpot type with the highest advantage among the multiple types of jackpots with different characteristics. do. According to such a configuration, when the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is not misunderstood as if it is the "big hit" of the big hit type having the highest advantage. Can be.

When there are only two types of advantages for the player depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible not to provide an execution pattern in which the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is "rainbow color". According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the push button 31B from becoming a "big hit" of a big hit type, which has a low advantage for the player, even though the push button 31B emits light in a "rainbow color" in the vibration effect. It is possible to prevent the expectation for the vibration effect from being impaired.

The effect control CPU 120 may guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by utilizing an auditory effect as a line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when the vibration effect is being executed, and then gradually changes the specific sound effect from a low volume to a loud volume as a line-of-sight guidance effect. Output to change. According to such a configuration, a player who has difficulty in recognizing a line-of-sight guidance effect using a visual effect can be focused on the operation means before the operation means vibrates.

In the case where the winning probability of the jackpot changes according to the set value, even if the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is used, the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value are used. The jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the execution pattern may differ from one time to another. For example, even if the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is set, when the set value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the execution pattern may be higher than when the set value is "1". .. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result becomes a "big hit", it is possible to raise the expectation that the set value has a high degree of advantage.

In the case where the winning probability of the jackpot changes according to the set value, the push button 31B in the vibration effect depends on the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value. The vibration time and emission color may be different. According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, when the set value is any of "1" to "3" and when the set value is any one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect It suffices if the vibration time and emission color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the vibration effect is a high setting that may be the setting value “6” that is most advantageous to the player. Further, for example, the vibration time and the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may differ depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the set value is an even number that may be the set value “6” that is most advantageous to the player by the vibration effect.

Even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is red. It may be possible to carry out a vibration effect in a mode of emitting light. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 in which the reach is established, it is possible to pay attention not only to the execution of the vibration effect but also to the mode when the vibration effect is executed.

Even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is red. When the vibration effect of the mode of emitting light is enabled, the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. It may happen. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors at any timing of the timing T1 and the timing T2 is not executed, the vibration at the timing T1 is performed. When the combination of the effect execution pattern and the vibration effect execution pattern at the timing T2 is a specific combination, it may be deterministically notified that the display result is a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored light. Even if the vibration effect is not executed, not only can the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 where the reach is established can be increased, but also the attention to the mode of the vibration effect at the timing T2 can be further increased. ..

The vibration effect may be executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors at any timing of the timing T3 and the timing T4 is not executed, the vibration at the timing T3 is performed. When the combination of the effect execution pattern and the vibration effect execution pattern at the timing T4 is a specific combination, it may be deterministically notified that the display result is a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored vibration. Even if the effect is not executed, it is possible not only to raise the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, but also to pay more attention to the mode of the vibration effect at the timing T4. Can be enhanced.

The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of deterministically notifying that the display result is "big hit" is the vibration effect of not deterministically notifying that the display result is "big hit". It may be different from the vibration time and the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the above. For example, in a vibration effect in which the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of deterministically notifying that the display result is "big hit" is not deterministically notified that the display result is "big hit". The vibration time is longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of the mode in which the display result is not deterministically notified that the display result is the "big hit" is monotonous, whereas the display result is deterministically notified that the display result is the "big hit". In the vibration effect of the above mode, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined time signature. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the vibration effect in the mode of deterministically notifying that the display result is a "big hit" is a special vibration effect.

When the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed or at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed without fail. According to such a configuration, the expectation that the display result becomes a "big hit" due to the execution of the reach effect is suitably increased by appropriately recognizing the vibration of the operating means. be able to.

When the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established, the timing T3 during which the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed, and the timing T3. The vibration effect may be executed at any of the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. In that case, the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at timing T3 and timing T4 are lower than the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at timing T1 and timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4 does not fall below the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 and the timing T2. Or, the execution pattern of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 may be limited. For example, when the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE2 is executed at the timing T1, the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE5 is executed at the timing T3, and the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE8 is executed at the timing T4. To limit. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible to prevent the credibility of the jackpot reliability from being lowered.

When the vibration effect linked to the notice effect can be executed, the mode of the vibration effect linked to the notice effect and the mode of the vibration effect not linked to the notice effect may be different. For example, in the vibration effect linked to the advance notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated according to the beat of the music played in the interlocking advance notice effect. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the character advance notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated according to the sound effect when the character is operating. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the notice effect, the push button 31B is made to emit light in a color different from the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect not linked to the notice effect. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect is linked to the notice effect or not linked to the notice effect. ..

The present box effect may be made feasible. In that case, when the present box is opened, a character having a hammer as shown in FIG. 284-6 (B) may pop out from the opened present box, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to raise the expectation that the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed due to the execution of the present box effect.

When the operation effect for operating the push button 31B can be executed, in this operation effect, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is effective during the operation valid period in which the operation of the push button 31B is effective, The push button 31B may be turned on. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is turned on in a manner different from the lighting mode. For example, when the push button 31B is turned on in the vibration effect, the lighting mode may be controlled so that the push button 31B is continuously emitted in red for 3 seconds to vibrate the push button 31B. .. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is turned on in the operation effect, the push button 31B is switched between red light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation valid period. It may be controlled so that the lighting mode is for suggestion. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is effective. In addition, in order to notify that the operation of the operation lever is effective during the lever operation effective period in which the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is effective, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A may be turned on. In this case, the lighting mode may be controlled so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A emits light during the lever operation valid period to suggest a lever operation. The lighting mode for suggesting lever operation may be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode for suggesting button operation, or may be a lighting mode different from the lighting mode for suggesting button operation.

For example, when the special figure game or the like is not executed, the push button 31B or the like is operated by the player, for example, the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the setting of the type of the output music or background, and the image display. It may be possible to change the settings related to the effect, such as the brightness setting of the device 5, the brightness setting of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9. For example, it may be possible to select which effect setting to change from the menu screen, or the player may perform a different operation corresponding to the desired change item, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do so. Further, the push button 31B may be turned on in order to notify that the setting related to the effect can be changed when the special figure game or the like is not executed. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is turned on, and the push button 31B in the operation effect is turned on in a mode different from the lighting mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the setting related to the effect can be changed.

(Explanation of means related to feature unit 10SH)
In relation to the feature unit 10SH, there has been proposed a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and that can perform a vibration effect in which an operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-05107 5).

Generally, a player plays a game while looking at a display means on which a variable display or various effects are displayed. Therefore, when the operating means is not in the player's field of view, it may not be possible to recognize that the operating means is vibrating even if the vibration effect is executed. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

Therefore, in order to draw attention to the gaming means before the vibration effect is executed and sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature unit 10SH can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. It is a machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, etc.), and an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a player. Is provided with a push button 31B capable of performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like), a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a push button 31B). A line-of-sight guidance effect executing means that can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a player's It is possible to execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B, etc.), and the vibration effect is controlled to the advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. The expectation is high (for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed), and the vibration effect executing means is , The vibration effect can be executed at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. , Timing T2 where reach is established, timing T3 during execution of normal reach reach effect after timing T1 and timing T2, and timing during execution of super reach reach effect. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timings of T4 and the like), and the vibration effect is performed in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 is at any timing of timing T1 and timing T2, or at any timing of timing T3 and timing T4. However, the vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time of the push button 31B and the emission color are common), and the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing ( For example, production control The CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing (for example, do not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the timing T1 and the timing T2) (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 is characterized in that the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the operation means before the vibration effect is executed, and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

The gaming machine of the means 2 according to the feature unit 10SH is the gaming machine of the means 1, and the vibration effect executing means can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed (for example, effect control). The CPU 120 may perform the vibration effect while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed).

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means 3 according to the feature unit 10SH is a specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect in the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2. , The ability to execute the reach effect of the super reach, etc.), and the vibration effect executing means can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120). May be able to execute the vibration effect while the reach effect of the super reach is being executed).

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect may be executed when the specific effect is executed, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 according to the feature unit 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 3 (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an image display device 5 for displaying various effect images. The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, an effect image of the line-of-sight guidance effect). Is always lower in priority than small symbols, hold number display, various error notifications, hold display, active display, background image, higher priority than decorative symbols, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be conspicuous while suitably ensuring the visibility of predetermined information.

The gaming machine of the means 5 according to the feature unit 10SH is any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 4, and the vibration effect executing means has the vibration effect of the first aspect and the advantageous state over the first aspect. It is possible to execute the vibration effect of the second aspect, which suggests that the degree of expectation to be controlled is high (for example, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and push button 31B. It is possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in white and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in red, and the push button 31B is caused to emit light for 1.5 seconds. When the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit red light is executed, rather than when the vibration effect of vibrating and causing the push button 31B to emit light in white is executed. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second aspect is easier to execute than the vibration effect of the first aspect (for example, pachinko game). In the machine 1, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light. At the same time, it may be easier to perform a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in red).

According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve the expectation that the vibration effect of the second aspect is executed.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration related to the feature unit 10SH may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature unit. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

(Explanation of featured parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 285-1 shows a configuration example of the effect device related to the feature portions 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for effect, which is a movable effect device, is provided in front of the lower end, which is a lower edge portion on the front side overlapping with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to the operating motor via, for example, a link mechanism. The movable body 32 can be changed to an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting the power from the operation motor. The movable body 32 may be capable of changing its position by power from, for example, a solenoid for operation or another general actuator.

The movable body 32 includes a frame portion and a window portion. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is configured by using a decorative member, and has a configuration capable of covering the display screen of the image display device 5 so that the player cannot see the display screen. The window portion of the movable body 32 is formed by using transparent glass or synthetic resin or as a simple opening, and has a structure capable of being seen through so that the player can visually recognize the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs constituting the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs constituting the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs constituting the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs constituting the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs built in the operation rod (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be partially or wholly formed of a translucent member. As a result, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A can be made to emit light by turning on the lever lamp 9B1. Further, by turning on the button lamp 9B2, the push button 31B can be made to emit light.

For example, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are integrally formed, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside the push button 31B or at a position close to the push button 31, may be built in the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, or may be provided at the root position of the operation lever. In order to diversify the vibration modes of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute an operation unit effect including a light emission effect accompanying a vibration effect as a suggestion effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined ratio and is controlled to the big hit game state. In the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration mode according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect, one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 is turned on, and one of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is made to emit light according to the vibration effect. May be good. For example, by lighting only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may be made to emit light with the vibration effect.

FIG. 285-2 (A) shows a setting example of the operation unit effect pattern used for executing the operation unit effect. In this setting example, as a plurality of operation unit effect patterns, operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance. The emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and usage are set according to each operation unit effect pattern. The emission color corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates a light emission mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates a vibration mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates the rate at which the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state when the operation unit effect corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern is executed. The usage corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates the timing at which the operation unit effect is executed for each operation unit effect pattern.

The operation unit effect can be executed at a plurality of timings accompanying the progress of the variable display, for example, at the start of the pre-variation, at the start of the target variation, at the time of establishing the reach, at the time of developing the reach, and at the time of inciting the hit / fail notification. The start of the pre-variation is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit effect. The target fluctuation start time is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit effect. When the reach is established, it is the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display becomes the reach mode. The reach development is the timing corresponding to the case where the development production is executed along with the reach production of the super reach. The development effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect of the super reach is executed (development of the reach) after the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. The hit / fail notification fanning is the timing corresponding to the fanning effect prior to the hit / miss notification effect that notifies whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" while the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 285-2 (A), a plurality of operation unit effect patterns that can be used to execute the operation unit effect according to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. Further, it is set so that different operation unit effect patterns can be used according to a plurality of timings at which the operation unit effect can be executed.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when only the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and the reach effect of the super reach is not executed. Depending on whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed and the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived, it is possible to notify whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled. As the reach effect of the super reach, for example, a plurality of reach effects including the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach effect may include an effect having different production modes from each other. Each reach effect may include an effect having a common effect mode to each other. The decision rate when the variable display result is "big hit" and the decision rate when the variable display result is not "big hit" are set so that the jackpot reliability according to each reach effect is obtained. Just do it. Depending on the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table using the random value for determining the variation pattern, the presence / absence of reach effect, the presence / absence of reach effect of super reach, the effect mode in reach effect, etc. It should be configurable.

The operation unit effect is executed at a predetermined ratio depending on whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", regardless of the specific effect that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as the reach effect. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of. An operation unit effect that can be executed regardless of such a specific effect is also referred to as a single operation unit effect. On the other hand, there is a case where the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light or vibrate in accordance with the specific effect. The effect of light emission or vibration associated with such a specific effect is also referred to as a specific interlocking effect.

FIG. 285-2 (B) shows a setting example when the specific interlocking effect is executed. In this setting example, when a specific interlocking effect is executed along with a plurality of specific effects such as movable body movement, image display, music reproduction, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the reach effect of SP reach A. The emission color and vibration pattern are set. The emission color in the specific effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can emit light as a part of the specific effect. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as a part of the specific effect. As described above, since the specific interlocking effect can be executed as a part of the specific effect, the jackpot reliability is the same as that of the specific effect, and the unique jackpot reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the special vibration effect that can be executed with the execution of the specific effect. The light emission of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the specific light emission effect that can be executed with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach effect of SP reach A may be, for example, a jackpot reliability of about 40%. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be a lottery effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the minimum (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be a lottery effect that can be executed when the number of rounds is the maximum (for example, 16 rounds) of the second jackpot type. It should be noted that the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery effect related to the jackpot type according to the presence / absence of time saving control and probability variation control after the end of the jackpot game state and the end condition, and the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are notified first in the jackpot game state. It may be a lottery effect regarding the presence or absence of rank up and the amount of increase, which is the number of rounds increased from the number of rounds. As the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2, when it becomes possible to control the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state based on the game ball that has won the V winning opening in the V winning attacker, the opening presence / absence and opening time of the V winning attacker Depending on the number of times of opening, the end condition of the probability change control, and the like, it may be possible to execute a lottery effect regarding a jackpot game state having different advantages. When it becomes possible to control from the small hit game state to the big hit game state based on the occurrence of the V prize due to the entry of the game ball into the V prize attacker, the opening presence / absence, opening time, opening number of times, or opening number of the V winning attacker, or It may be possible to execute a lottery effect regarding a small hit game state or a big hit game state having different advantages depending on the number of rounds of the big hit game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning.

Until the game state in which the V prize attacker can be released is started, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled, and then the game ball enters the V prize attacker from the start of the game state in which the V prize attacker can be released. In the period until the winning is generated, the vibration strong monitoring state may be controlled, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled so as not to vibrate. Then, when the V prize is generated, the vibration weak monitoring state may be controlled, and the effect including the vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be executed. The vibration strong monitoring state is a state in which vibration errors are easily detected, and the vibration weak monitoring state is a state in which vibration errors are more difficult to detect than the vibration strong monitoring state. During the period when there is a high risk of fraud due to the player generating vibration, the vibration strength monitoring state is controlled. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of fraud due to the player generating vibration, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled. When a vibration error is detected, the alarm image is displayed, the alarm sound is output, the alarm lamp is lit, the alarm signal is output, or a part or all of them are combined under the control of the effect control CPU 120. It suffices if the control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality can be executed. When a vibration error is detected, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be stopped by controlling the CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor the vibration and suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the notification of the vibration error or the stop state of the game due to the inappropriate abnormality determination.

FIG. 285-3 shows the setting contents of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. FIG. 285-3 (A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect. FIG. 285-3 (B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used for executing the special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect.

The vibration pattern AKV01 has a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the start of the pre-variation. In the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

The vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. Further, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by AKC02, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by AKC03, the emission color in the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes rainbow color. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC11, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

The vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation unit effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the target fluctuation. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC12, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC13, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes rainbow color.

In the vibration pattern AKV11, the vibration mode is set to the on-period vibration according to the effect AKR1 when the reach is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time when the reach is established. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC21, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In the vibration pattern AKV12, the vibration mode is set to the on-period vibration according to the effect AKR2 when the reach is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time when the reach is established. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC22, the emission color in the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes orange.

As the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach is established, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that when the reach is established and the effect using a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be able to be executed. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. .. As described above, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be common, so that the control load of the effect and the increase of the control data may be prevented.

In the vibration pattern AKV21, the vibration mode is set to the on-period vibration according to the effect AKS1 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC31, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light with the vibration effect becomes white.

In the vibration pattern AKV22, the vibration mode is set to the on-period vibration according to the effect AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC32, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

As the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect at the time of reach development, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development and the effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be able to be executed. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be able to be executed. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed at the time of reach development and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. .. As described above, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be common, so that the control load of the effect and the increase of the control data may be prevented.

The vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the vibration mode in which the on period continues until the movement of the player who operates the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected in the effective detection period. It should be. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed at the time of the hit / miss notification. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of the hit / miss notification. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC41, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes gold.

It should be noted that whether or not the effective detection period is provided when the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed may be different depending on the type of effect executed with the variable display, for example, the type of reach effect. good. When an effective detection period is provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between golden light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. You may control it. If the effective detection period is not provided, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B may be controlled so as to emit light continuously in gold for a period of vibration. On the other hand, when an effective detection period is provided, it is suggested that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B be switched between light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) of red, which is different from gold, every 150 milliseconds. It may be controlled so as to have a light emitting mode for the purpose. By executing the light emission effect of the light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it is effective to operate the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A while executing the vibration effect. , Can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp layers in which lamp control data can be set may be used, and the priority of light emission control may be different. For example, in the first lamp layer, as a light emitting mode for suggesting normal operation, a light emitting mode in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is switched between red light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. Set the lamp control data. Lamp control data is set in the second lamp layer as a light emitting mode for suggesting a special operation so that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B continuously emit gold light over an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds. do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is more than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Priority is given to execution. As a result, the light emitting mode for special operation suggestion may be controlled to be preferentially the light emitting mode for the light emitting effect rather than the light emitting mode for normal operation suggestion.

The plurality of reach effects that are super reach may include a strong SP reach having a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach having a relatively low jackpot reliability. In the reach effect of the strong SP reach, the success / failure notification effect is executed after the motion detection effect is executed by detecting the movement of the player who is the operation for the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When the vibration effect corresponding to the reach effect of such a strong SP reach is executed, it is turned on until the movement of the player who operates the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be such that the period is continuous. In the reach effect of the weak SP reach, the hit / miss notification effect is executed without executing the motion detection effect. When the vibration effect corresponding to the reach effect of such a weak SP reach is executed, the vibration mode may be set to the vibration pattern AKV31 before 1500 milliseconds or more before the pass / fail notification effect. It should be noted that there may be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 5000 milliseconds, which is the effective detection period. It may be controlled to the vibration mode which becomes the period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled by switching between a period and an off period during which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the on period is such that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. It may be controlled according to the vibration mode. There may be cases where the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit gold light every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. It may be controlled so that the light emitting mode is switched between (lighting) and non-light emitting (off). On the other hand, as a light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the stick controller 31A continuously vibrates the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A for 2000 milliseconds. The operation lever and the push button 31B may be controlled so as to emit light in gold.

The vibration pattern AKV41 is an on-period vibration mode linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV42 is an on-period vibration mode linked to the screen display in the reach effect of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV43 is an on-period vibration mode linked to music reproduction in the reach production of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV44 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emission effect becomes blue due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emission effect becomes gold due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific emission effect changes from blue to gold with the vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV44 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the big hit confirmation notification, and a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the big hit type lottery CH1 and CH2. There are cases where it becomes. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot confirmation notification, the emission color in the specific emission effect becomes rainbow color due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the emission color in the specific emission effect becomes white due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the emission color in the specific emission effect becomes rainbow color due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

FIG. 285-4 shows an execution example of an effect by vibrating and emitting light of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Here, a plurality of production execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. The lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B have normal emission luminance set to be low in the normal emission state, and the emission color is changed. It suffices to emit light so that it becomes white. Alternatively, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-light emission in the normal light emitting state.

The effect execution example AKA01 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit white light is executed. When the operation unit effect is executed by any one of the operation unit effect pattern AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the emission color becomes white. The operation unit effect pattern AKC01 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC11 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Both the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 has a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22. Even when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes white.

The effect execution example AKA02 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in red is executed. When the operation unit effect is executed by any of the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 and AKC12, the emission color becomes red. The operation unit effect pattern AKC02 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC12 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC02 and AKC12 has a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes red is included.

The effect execution example AKA03 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in rainbow colors is executed. When the operation unit effect is executed by any of the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 and AKC13, the emission color becomes rainbow color. The operation unit effect pattern AKC03 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC13 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC03 and AKC13 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when the big hit confirmation notification or the big hit type lottery CH2 is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes rainbow color.

The effect execution example AKA04 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in pink is executed. Operation unit effect pattern When the operation unit effect by the AKC21 is executed, the emission color becomes pink. The operation unit effect pattern AKC21 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11.

The effect execution example AKA05 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in orange is executed. When the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 is executed, the emission color becomes orange. The operation unit effect pattern AKC22 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12.

The effect execution example AKV06 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in blue is executed. The emission color does not turn blue when the operation unit effect is executed. When the movable body operation of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes blue. Further, even when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes blue is included.

The effect execution example AKV07 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in gold is executed. When the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41, the emission color becomes gold. The operation unit effect pattern AKC41 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of the hit / miss notification. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31. When the image display of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes gold. Further, even when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes gold is included.

As described above, the emission colors of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or common depending on the execution timing of the operation unit effect, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode in the vibration effect. In addition to the emission color, any emission mode such as emission time, number of emission times (number of blinks), emission cycle (blinking cycle), and emission brightness can be determined by the execution timing of the operation unit effect, jackpot reliability, and vibration in the vibration effect. Depending on the embodiment, they may be different or common.

The operation unit effect can be executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect or a continuous advance notice effect when it is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The pre-reading notice effect suggests whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit" before the variable display to be suggested. The continuous notice effect continuously suggests whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display to be suggested. The continuous advance notice effect can be executed by using the continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number here may be any special figure reserved memory number at the time of starting winning. As the continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories, a plurality of continuous effect patterns are prepared in advance according to the effect mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of special figure hold storage at the time of starting winning, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 285-5 shows a setting example of a continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect. For the continuous effect pattern, for example, using a random value for determining the continuous effect pattern, the continuous effect pattern determination table according to the number of reserved storages is referred to, and a decision value matching the random value is assigned according to the winning determination result. The decision may be made by determining the decision result.

FIGS. 285-5 (A) show continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of reserved storages is “2”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD01, the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD02, the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD03, the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD04, the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD05, the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD06, the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed.

FIGS. 285-5 (B) show continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of reserved storages is “3”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation unit effect by any of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is "0". At this time, the operation unit effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIGS. 285-5 (C) show continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of reserved storages is “4”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any of "1" to "3", the operation unit effect by any of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is When it is "0", the operation unit effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 285-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 282 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIGS. 285-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition for executing the pre-reading notice effect, which is a continuous notice effect. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the effect control command (start opening winning designation command, hold storage number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of winning the start is received. If no command is received, it is determined that the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied. When there is a command reception, the notification content by the received command is specified, and for example, the winning determination result is specified as the notification content by the winning determination result command.

The winning judgment result is whether or not the variable display result is determined as a "big hit" and whether or not the variation pattern is determined as a specific variation pattern by using the game random numbers extracted at the start winning. , The result may be the result determined by the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. As the winning determination result, for example, one of big hit, super reach confirmation at the time of loss, reach confirmation at the time of loss, and general at the time of loss may be shown. The jackpot winning determination result is a determination result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The winning judgment result of the super reach confirmation at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and corresponds to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss. This is the judgment result. The winning judgment result of the reach confirmation at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and the judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range at the time of loss. Is. When the general winning judgment result at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss nor within the reach confirmation range. It is a judgment result corresponding to.

It suffices if the pre-reading notice condition can be satisfied when the judgment result at the time of winning is either a big hit or the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss. In addition, if the winning judgment result this time is either a big hit or the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss, and if the judgment results at the time of winning up to the previous time corresponding to the hold memory are all general at the time of losing, the pre-reading notice condition. May be possible. If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, which is the continuous advance notice effect, is already set to start, the pre-reading notice condition may be restricted so as not to be satisfied.

If the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. When the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for pre-reading advance notice execution determination and referring to a pre-reading advance notice execution decision table stored in advance in ROM 121 according to a winning determination result, etc. Whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect may be determined as whether or not the reading notice is executed. In step AKS102, it is determined to be either "no execution" when the pre-reading notice effect is not executed or "execution" when the pre-reading notice effect is executed. It is determined whether or not the determination result at this time is determined to be "executed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. When it is determined to "execute" to execute the pre-reading notice effect (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of reserved storages may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, a continuous effect pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining a continuous effect pattern and referring to a continuous effect pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 according to a winning determination result, the continuous effect pattern can be determined. Should be determined to be one of a plurality of patterns.

After the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105, the pre-reading notice setting process is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. In step AKS106, for example, the pre-reading advance notice flag provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as an effect control flag setting unit) may be set to the ON state.

In such a look-ahead notice setting process, when the winning judgment result is a big hit or the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss, the look-ahead notice condition in step AKS 101 can be satisfied, and the look-ahead notice is executed by step AKS 102. It becomes possible to determine the presence / absence and the continuous effect pattern by the step AKS105. Then, when the winning judgment result is a big hit, even if the winning judgment result is determined to be "executed" to execute the pre-reading notice effect by step AKS 102 at a higher rate than the case where the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss. good. Further, in step AKS 105, when the winning determination result is a big hit, the continuous effect pattern may be determined at a rate different from the case where the winning determination result is the case where the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss. In this way, it suffices if it is possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect which is the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the winning determination result which is the pre-reading determination result.

FIG. 285-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 282 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 285-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (step AKS201). The effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. You just have to decide. The variation pattern specification command and the display result notification command are mainly used because the command transmission setting at the start of variation of the special symbol is set when the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern determined as a usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result determined by using a random value for determining a special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". All you need is.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is displayed. It becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the confirmed decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "miss". It becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes the reduced working hours state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols aligned with the same even-numbered symbols is determined as the final stop symbol. Further, when the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", it suffices if it is possible to determine the combination of the definite decorative symbols aligned with the same odd-numbered symbols as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the combination of the definite decorative symbols to be the reach-off combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the combination of the definite decorative symbols to be the non-reach out-of-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When deciding the combination of the fixed decorative symbols, for example, by extracting numerical data which is a random value for determining the symbol and referring to the symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the variable display content, the combination is determined. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined.

After the final stop symbol and the like are determined, the operation unit effect is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. For example, when the pre-reading notice flag is on, it may be determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. When the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, the remaining number of times may be subtracted by 1, and the operation unit effect pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous effect pattern. As the continuous effect pattern, the one determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. When the remaining number of times after subtraction is "0", the pre-reading advance notice flag may be cleared to turn it off.

In step AKS202, when it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect is not being executed, the presence / absence of the operation unit effect corresponding to the current variable display and the operation unit effect pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the effect of the operation unit is extracted, and the operation unit effect determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 is referred to depending on whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the operation unit effect and the operation unit effect pattern used when executing the operation unit effect. The operation unit effect corresponding to this variable display can be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed, and cannot be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. .. Therefore, the operation unit effect corresponding to the variable display this time is limited so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operation unit effect included in the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed. Is set.

In step AKS202, when the specific interlocking effect including the special vibration effect is executed along with the specific effect based on the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted. For example, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit effect at any timing. In this case, in the range of the variable display in which the reach effect of the SP reach A is executed, a limit is provided so that all the operation unit effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation unit effect at a predetermined ratio at the timing corresponding to the start of the target fluctuation or the establishment of the reach, while at the time of reach development or Execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit effect at the timing corresponding to the hit / fail notification. In this case, in the range of the variable display in which the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, a limit limit is provided so that some operation unit effects cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display. .. In addition, in the range of the variable display in which the specific effect is executed, a limit may be provided so that a part or all of the operation unit effect is difficult to be executed during the execution of the variable display. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 that determines the operation unit effect by the step AKS 202 can limit the execution of the operation unit effect including the vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed.

In the case where the operation unit effect is determined by step AKS202, when a special effect different from the specific effect is executed based on a fluctuation pattern or a winning determination result, the special effect is different from the case where the special effect is not executed. The determination ratio of the operation unit effect may be set so that a part or all of the operation unit effect can be easily executed during the execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation unit effect, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step AKS203). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (variable display effect control patterns) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets the pattern to be used. .. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of effect control patterns (operation unit effect control patterns) prepared in response to the operation unit effect determined by step AKS202 and set them as the usage pattern. good. Further, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit or the like) is set (step AKS204). Then, the variation of the decorative pattern or the like is started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (variable display effect control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image is displayed. The variation of the decorative symbol may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the variable start, the setting for updating the hold display and the like is made in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the hold display or the like, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 285-8 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern includes a variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 285-8 (A) and an operation unit effect control pattern shown in FIG. 285-8 (B). The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 285-8 (A) corresponds to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and various effects are executed from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Contains control data used to control. The operation unit effect control pattern shown in FIG. 285-8 (B) includes control data used for controlling the execution of the operation unit effect.

The variable display effect control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, and the like. .. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (judgment value) to be compared with the effect control process timer value, which is a stored value of the effect control process timer, and is a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation. Is preset. In addition, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command was received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process was executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control and the like may be set corresponding to the predetermined control content and processing content.

The display control data includes data showing a display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data showing a variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data showing a voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data showing an output mode such as a sound effect linked to a variable display of a decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes data indicating a light emission driving mode during variable display of the decorative pattern for a light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that specifies the light emitting mode of the light emitting body during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes an effective detection period for effectively detecting the player's operation, such as a tilting operation for the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation for the trigger button, or a pressing operation for the push button 31B, and each operation. Includes data that indicates the mode of the effect operation according to the motion detection of the player, such as data that specifies the control content of the effect operation when the player effectively detects. The vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the on period and the driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and the effect control pattern is configured to include a part of the control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plurality of types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different depending on the content of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, some process data includes all of display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, and some process data includes some of these. It's okay. Further, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the variable display during effect processing in step S172 of the effect control process process, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values is matched, and if they match, it is determined. Controls the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 has the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to the process data # n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 9. Control of a light emitting body such as a decorative LED, a vibration motor 131, a movable body 32, etc.) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data # n, display control data # 1 to display control data # n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to # n. The data # n, the lamp control data # 1 to the lamp control data # n, the operation detection control data # 1 to the operation detection control data # n, and the vibration control data # 1 to the vibration control data # n are the control of the effect operation in the effect device. The effect control execution data # 1 to the effect control execution data # n, which indicate the contents and specify the execution of the effect control, are configured.

The operation unit effect control pattern is composed of, for example, process data including an effect control process timer determination value, lamp control data, vibration control data, and the like. The lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern includes data indicating a lighting operation mode of the light emitting body in the operation unit effect, such as a lever lamp 9B1 and a button lamp 9B2. That is, the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern is data that specifies a light emission mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are made to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect. The vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern includes data indicating the on period and the drive mode of the vibration generator in the operation unit effect, such as driving the vibration motor 131. That is, the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are vibrated in the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect.

FIG. 285-9 shows an example of setting the timing at which the operation unit effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE01. The timings AKT01 to AKT03 are timings at which the operation unit effect at the start of the pre-variation can be executed corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol that becomes the pre-variation is started. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process, the operation unit effect is executed at a part or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation according to the number of remaining times. be able to. For example, when the number of remaining times is "3", the operation unit effect can be executed in the timing AKT01, and when the number of remaining times is "2", the operation unit effect can be executed in the timing AKT02, and the remaining number of times. When is "1", the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT03.

The timing AKT11 shown in FIGS. 285-9 is a timing at which the operation unit effect at the start of the target variation can be executed corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol that is the target variation is started. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process, the operation unit based on the operation unit effect pattern according to the remaining number of times in a part or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. At the timing AKT 11 at the start of the target change after the effect is executed, the operation unit effect according to the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times of "0" can be executed. Further, at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation, the operation unit effect may be able to be executed. Specifically, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 to AKC13 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern is executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target change. be able to.

As in the case of Timing AKT01 to AKT03 or Timing AKT11, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is started may be such that the operation unit effect can be executed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. , It may be possible to execute the operation unit effect when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. As described above, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is started may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in FIGS. 285-9, as the operation unit effect corresponding to the variable display this time, the operation unit effect when the reach is established, the operation unit effect when the reach is developed, and the operation unit effect when the hit / fail notification is agitated. Each is a feasible timing. For example, depending on the operation unit effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and the operation unit effect at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed. There are cases where it becomes possible to execute the operation unit effect at the timing AKT14 when the hit / miss notification is triggered. Specifically, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 or AKC22 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern is executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established. Can be done. Further, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 or AKC32 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development. Alternatively, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 is determined by step ASK202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / miss notification.

FIG. 285-10 shows a control example of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 285-10 (A) becomes white and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. 285-10 (B). It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. As shown in FIG. 285-10 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 285-10 (A), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. The emission effect that the emission color becomes white according to the on period of the vibration effect is the first brightness in which the white emission brightness is high and the second brightness in which the emission brightness is low, for example, every 30 milliseconds in the on period of 300 milliseconds. By alternately repeating the above steps, the emission brightness of white may change periodically.

FIGS. 285-11 show an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color is red as shown in FIG. 285-11 (A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 285-11 (B). It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 285-11 (A) becomes iridescent, and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 285-11 (B). , It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. As shown in FIG. 285-11 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 1500 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 285-11 (A), in the light emitting effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are continuous in red if the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 is used in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, a plurality of LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light by shifting the emission colors of red, magenta, blue-purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange according to the elapsed time and the emission position. , The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow colors. The light emitting positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can be specified as a plurality of sections such as the upper and lower parts of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2, and the light emitting time, the light emitting color, and the light emitting light can be specified according to each section. It suffices if part or all of the brightness can be set.

FIGS. 285-12 show an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 285-12 (A) becomes white and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 285-12 (B). It can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 285-12 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 1500 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 285-12 (A), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. The emission effect that the emission color becomes white according to the on period of the vibration effect is the first brightness in which the white emission brightness is high and the second brightness in which the emission brightness is low, for example, every 30 milliseconds in the on period of 1500 milliseconds. By alternately repeating the above steps, the emission brightness of white may change periodically.

FIGS. 285-13 show an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color is red as shown in FIG. 285-13 (A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 285-13 (B). It can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 285-13 (A) becomes iridescent, and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 285-13 (B). , It can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 285-13 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 3000 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 285-13 (A), in the light emitting effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are intermittently red in the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 according to the on period of the vibration effect. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit red light by alternately repeating the first brightness with high emission brightness and the second brightness with low emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the vibration effect. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission mode included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 changes the emission brightness in a shorter cycle than the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. Will be. As described above, as an effect mode of the light emission effect, not only the light emission color but also the light emission cycle may be different to suggest the jackpot reliability. In the on period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission, for example, every 20 milliseconds. As an effect mode of the light emission effect, while the light emission cycle is common, it may be possible to suggest the jackpot reliability by making the light emission colors different. In this way, for example, when the emission colors in the emission effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the emission effect by sharing the emission cycle.

FIG. 285-14 shows a control example of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, corresponding to the effect AKR1 which is the effect when the reach is established as shown in FIG. 285-14 (A). Includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in (B) becomes pink, and a vibration effect in which the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIG. 285-14 (C) is used. The effect AKR1 which is an effect when the reach is established may be an effect of displaying an effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect of displaying a background image according to the establishment of the reach. It may be any other effect as long as it is an arbitrary production accompanying the establishment of reach. As shown in FIG. 285-14, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated a plurality of times every predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 285-14 (B), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in pink in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light.

FIG. 285-15 shows a control example of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, in accordance with the effect AKR2 which is the effect when the reach is established as shown in FIG. 285-15 (A). It includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in (B) turns orange and a vibration effect in which the vibration pattern AKV12 shown in FIG. 285-15 (C) is used. The effect AKR2, which is an effect when the reach is established, may be an effect of displaying an effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect of displaying a background image according to the establishment of the reach. It may be any other effect as long as it is an arbitrary production accompanying the establishment of reach. It suffices if the effect mode is different between the effect AKR1 and the effect AKR2, which are the effects when the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 285-15 (C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 has an on period of the first vibration on time (for example, 100 ms) and an off period of the first vibration off time (for example, 100 ms). After repeating twice alternately, the vibration mode includes an on period of the second vibration on time (for example, 250 ms) and an on period of the third vibration on time (for example, 500 ms). As shown in FIG. 285-15 (B), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. Further, when the on periods of the vibration effects are different vibration on times, the light emission patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit orange light. On the other hand, during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit orange light. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently by alternately repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time. do it.

Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed corresponding to the effects AKS1 and AKS2 that are the effect at the time of reach development at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, and the emission color becomes white. , The vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, and the like. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKS1 in the case of the operation unit effect pattern AKC31. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKS2 in the case of the operation unit effect pattern AKC32. In any of the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect.

The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 can be executed in response to the hit / fail effect at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / miss notification, and the light emission effect that the emission color becomes gold and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31. ,including. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the on period is 1500 milliseconds or more. In the light emitting effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in gold according to the on period of the vibration effect.

As shown in FIGS. 285-12 and 285-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target change, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In this case, a vibration effect is executed by a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emission color is white or the emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that an operation member such as a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B is used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the vibration effect by the common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both the case where the emission color becomes red and the case where the emission color becomes rainbow color. That is, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common depending on whether the emission color is red or the emission color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is common, there may be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation includes the operation unit effect that the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. I'm out. As for the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 and AKC32, is executed. Includes things. In this way, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development become white with a common emission color, and the vibration effect is produced. There are cases where the vibration modes of the above are different. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, whereas the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that an operation member such as a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B is used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target change includes the operation unit effect that the emission color becomes red or rainbow color, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. There is. As in this case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 11 at the start of the target fluctuation and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 13 at the time of reach development, and the vibration effect is produced. The vibration mode of the above may be different. As in the case where the emission color becomes white, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation includes the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development and the light emission mode of the light emission effect. Includes what is common. Further, as in the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation is the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, and the light emission. It may include those having different light emitting modes of the effect. The operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development does not have to include the operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation and the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. All of these operation unit effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification includes an operation unit effect such as an operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes gold due to the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31. I'm out. This operation unit effect has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the jackpot reliability is 100% common between the operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT14 when the hit / miss notification is triggered, and the vibration effect is produced. There are cases where the vibration modes of the above are different. Further, the emission color is different and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different between the operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT14 when the hit / miss notification is triggered. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is different, the jackpot reliability is common, but the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, or the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, so that the stick controller 31A It is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using the operation members such as the push button 31B and the push button 31B to improve the game entertainment.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at which the target fluctuation starts is that the emission color becomes white, red, or rainbow color due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13. Includes those that perform light emission effects. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 11 at the start of the target fluctuation and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 12 at the time when the reach is established, and the vibration of the vibration effect is performed. There are cases where the embodiments are different. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development is such that the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 and AKC32 is executed. Includes things. As described above, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT 12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT 13 when the reach is developed, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. Is different. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. It can be appropriately diversified to improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include one that executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white. Further, the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development may include one that executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is different, even if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be performed. It can be appropriately diversified to improve the entertainment of the game.

The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is 100% regardless of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development is 50% or more regardless of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability is 100% when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. The vibration modes of the vibration effect are the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity driven by the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of the strong vibration and the weak vibration in the vibration intensity, and others. , Arbitrary vibration patterns that vibrate the operating members such as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be different.

The plurality of specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include the movable body movement, the image display, the music reproduction, the big hit confirmation notification, and the big hit type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the reach effect of SP reach A. In the reach effect of SP reach A, for example, the jackpot reliability is about 40%. Therefore, when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, and when it is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. Become. Since the movable body movement, the image display, and the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A are all executed as a part of the reach effect, they do not have the jackpot reliability individually. Further, the jackpot confirmation notification is an effect of deterministically notifying that the variable display result is a "big hit". The jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are lottery effects of the jackpot type according to the number of rounds and the like, corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is controlled. The jackpot confirmation notification and the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are similar to the reach production of SP reach A in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result is "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot game state. It is different from the production with a big hit reliability. In this way, among a plurality of specific effects, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed for the specific effect having the jackpot reliability. It suffices if it is set as. Further, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed than when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is not executed.

FIGS. 285-16 show an execution example of an effect by causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light. The game effect lamp 9 includes an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of production execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the execution mode of the effect by light emission.

In the effect execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit white light according to the background display. , The operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red due to the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light according to the background display. , The operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit rainbow colors by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes rainbow color due to the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white from the left side to the right side, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed in the background. While the light is emitted so as to change from black to white according to the above, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF04, when the character display of the image display device 5 is a blue display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit blue light according to the character display. , The operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect.

For example, the background display, the character display, and other predetermined effects by displaying an arbitrary effect image of the image display device 5 can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, variable display and the like are performed using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5 and lamp control data for controlling light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. There is. When the operation unit effect is executed while such a predetermined effect is being executed, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 cause the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light due to the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. It is possible to emit light in the light emitting mode of. In the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, the operation unit effect is performed using the control data read from the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control to execute is performed. The control data includes lamp control data that controls the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data that controls the vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In contrast to the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect in the operation unit effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect of the operation unit effect due to the predetermined effect. Is. In this way, the light emitting mode is different between the operating member such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. It is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by appropriately diversifying the production by.

The predetermined effect may be executed by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the screen display of the image display device 5 or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit light in a emission color corresponding to the audio output of, for example, BGM, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. The light emission color of the light emission effect in the club effect may be emitted. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output a voice message that gives the player the impression of red, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light in accordance with the voice output. On the other hand, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. Even in this way, by making the light emitting mode different between the operating members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. , It is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by appropriately diversifying the production by light emission. In the predetermined effect, the screen display of the image display device 5 is dimmed, and in addition to stopping the audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. are not emitted (turned off). May be. When this predetermined effect is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. By executing the operation unit effect during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention to the vibration effect that vibrates the operation member such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is further increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

FIG. 285-17 shows an example of setting an effect period in which a specific interlocking effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed along with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emission effect in which the emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B becomes blue due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed along with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light emission effect in which the emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B becomes gold due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed along with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ03 includes a specific light emission effect in which the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A changes from blue to gold due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43. ..

The period AKZ04 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed with the big hit confirmation notification. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ04 includes a specific light emission effect in which the emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B becomes rainbow color due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification is to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol, to display the production image of the scene where the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character in the reach production, the speaker 8L, The jackpot confirmation sound is output by 8R, the jackpot confirmation notification lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on, or a part or all of these can be combined to allow the player to recognize the jackpot. It suffices if the notification of is executed.

In addition, following the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / miss notification, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ04 accompanying the big hit confirmation notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to enhance the impression of the effect and improve the interest of the game by executing the specific interlocking effect accompanying the big hit confirmation notification while increasing the expectation of the player by the effect of the operation unit. When executing a specific interlocking effect following such an operation unit effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or the special vibration effect may be different between the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emission effect or the specific light emission effect may be produced. The light emission mode may be different. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The emission brightness may be different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. By making the vibration mode and the light emission mode different to give the effect a sharpness, it is possible to easily recognize the distinction between the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, appropriately diversify the effect, and improve the game entertainment. Can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in accordance with the big hit type lottery CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed, the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes white due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes directing. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed, the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow color due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes light emission effect.

285-18 to 285-20 show the case where the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIGS. 285-18 show the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when the movable body movement in the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIGS. 285-19 show the effect execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIGS. 285-20 show production execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the reach production of SP reach A.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be a position in front of the lower end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Subsequently, when the reach effect of the SP reach A is started due to the reach development, the movable body operation is performed by changing the position of the movable body 32 from the initial position as in the effect execution example AKG01. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by linearly or parallelly moving upward from the initial position, and the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window provided inside the movable body 32 is "SP. An effect image showing a message such as "reach A" is displayed. After that, by continuing to change the position of the movable body 32, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the effect execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window portion of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This fluctuation is ..." is displayed.

Production execution example Along with the change in the position of the movable body 32 that operates as a movable body such as AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking effect is executed, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light with vibration. The specific interlocking effect performed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP reach A is a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes blue in the period AKZ01 shown in FIGS. 285-17. , Includes. Further, when the position of the movable body 32 is continuously changed and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the upper end front on the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the effect execution example AKG03, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ01 ends. do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time from the lower end front to the upper end front of the display screen where the position of the movable body 32 is the initial position is 2500 milliseconds, and the stick controller 31A is continuously operated over this period AKZ01. A special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode during which the lever or the push button 31B is vibrated. Alternatively, when the period is AKZ01, a special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode in which the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between an on period in which the operation lever and the push button 31B are vibrated every 250 milliseconds and an off period in which the stick controller 31B is not vibrated. Further, the specific light emitting effect may be executed in a light emitting mode in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B continuously emits light in blue over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is switched between light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) in blue every 250 milliseconds. May be good.

Production execution example When the movable body operation in the reach production of SP reach A such as AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the position of the movable body 32 of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N is changed, for example. As a result, the light may be emitted in a light emission pattern in which the light emission color and the light emission brightness gradually change from the lower side to the upper side. For example, when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, the emission color of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N becomes blue, and the emission brightness changes in a wavy shape according to the height and time. It suffices to emit light as if it were.

After the movement of the movable body is completed as in the effect execution example AKG03, the effect image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as the effect execution example AKG11 as the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. At this time, for example, the character display indicating the message "super hot" is performed in the gold display color. Further, as in the effect execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added and displayed around the character display.

Production Execution Example Along with the display of an effect image that is an image display such as AKG11 and AKG12, a specific interlocking effect is executed, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light together with vibration. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A includes a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42 and a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes gold in the period AKZ02 shown in FIGS. 285-17. Includes. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of the effect image in the reach effect different from the character display is started as in the effect execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "super hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the vibration that is the on period for continuously vibrating the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A over this period AKZ02. A special vibration effect may be performed depending on the embodiment. Further, during the period AKZ02, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are alternately repeated with the first brightness having a high golden emission brightness and the second brightness having a low emission brightness every 10 milliseconds. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

Example of effect execution When the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A such as AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are, for example, on the display screen of the image display device 5. The emission color may be gold according to the image display and the emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. For example, with the display of the effect image such as the effect execution example AKG11 and AKG12, the emission color of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N becomes gold, as in the effect execution example AKG13. When the display of the effect image is started, the light may be emitted in a light emitting color different from the gold color.

After the display of the production image such as the production execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R as the production execution example AKG21 as the music reproduction in the reach production of the SP reach A. Subsequently, as in the production execution example AKG22, the sound of the music phrase PH02 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R. After that, the sound of the music phrase PH03 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R as in the production execution example AKG23. In this way, by sequentially outputting the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 according to the progress of the production, it is sufficient that the entire music reproduction in the reach production of the SP reach A can be executed.

Production Execution Example A specific interlocking effect is executed along with the output of the sound for playing music such as AKG21 to AKG23, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light with vibration. In the specific interlocking effect performed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A, the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43 and the emission color change from blue to red in the period AKZ03 shown in FIGS. 285-17, and further. It includes a specific light emission effect that changes from red to gold. Production execution example In the AKG21, a specific light emission effect in which the emission color is blue is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH01. In the production execution example AKG22, a specific light emission effect in which the emission color is red is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH02. Production execution example In the AKG23, a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes gold is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH03. As described above, it is sufficient to be able to execute a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color changes to a plurality of colors as the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 are sequentially output according to the progress of the effect.

FIG. 285-21 shows a case where the musical scale changes in order as the production progresses as the music reproduction execution example AKH01. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 285-21 (A), in the period AKZ03 in which the specific interlocking effect can be executed along with the music reproduction, each of do, re, mi, fa, so, la, shi, and do The sound corresponding to the scale is output by the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of the last output do may be one octave higher than the scale of the first output do.

The specific interlocking effect associated with such music reproduction is a light emission effect that is a specific light emission effect in which the emission color changes as shown in FIG. 285-21 (B), and a special emission effect based on the vibration pattern shown in FIG. 285-21 (C). It can be executed in AKZ03 for a period corresponding to music reproduction, including a vibration effect which is a vibration effect. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 285-21 (C) is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated a plurality of times according to the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 285-21 (B), the specific light emission effect associated with this special vibration effect is the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the audio output period corresponding to each scale and the on period of the special vibration effect. The emission color of is changed in order between blue, red, and gold. During the period when the audio output is stopped and the period when the special vibration effect is off, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. In the sound output period corresponding to each scale, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect may be different for each scale. For example, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously emitted in blue for a period of time which is the scale of the first output. Next, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the first brightness having a high light emission brightness and the second brightness having a low light emission brightness are alternately repeated during the period of the scale. After that, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) in gold during the period of the scale of Mi. In this way, by having a light emitting mode in which the amount of light emitted differs for each light emitting color according to each scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game.

The reach effect of the SP reach A is executably controlled by using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 285-8 (A) is based on the lamp control data and the vibration control data, and is associated with the specific effect such as the movement of the movable body, the image display, and the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect is set to be executable. In the specific interlocking effect, a special vibration effect using any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 can be executed. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration effect by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern in the operation unit effect. In this way, the stick controller 31A and the stick controller 31A have different vibration modes between the vibration effect in the operation unit effect that can be executed regardless of the specific effect and the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect that can be executed along with the execution of the specific effect. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production using the operation member such as the push button 31B and improve the game entertainment.

When executing the operation unit effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are used to emit light of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in accordance with the vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emitting effect is executed. When executing the specific interlocking effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are moved by using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the special vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A specific light emission effect for emitting light is executed. A player who has been paying attention to an image display on a display screen of an image display device 5, for example, by performing an effect including vibration and light emission of an operation member such as an operation lever of the stick controller 31A and a push button 31B, can see the image display. By recognizing the vibration and light emission of different operating members, the unexpectedness of the production is enhanced.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIGS. 285-17, a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed along with the operation of the movable body 32 which is the movable object operation in the reach effect of the SP reach A. As described above, since the special vibration effect can be executed during the operation period of the movable body 32, the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the period AKZ04 shown in FIGS. 285-17, a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed along with the big hit confirmation notification. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to the notification that the jackpot game state is controlled, the effect using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the game entertainment. be able to.

The specific interlocking effect includes a specific light emitting effect due to the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light in association with the special vibration effect by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The light emission mode such as the emission color is different between the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect in the operation unit effect and the specific light emission effect associated with the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect. In this way, by making the light emitting mode different according to the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the game entertainment. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 285-10 and 285-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed in the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. When the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in FIGS. 285-12 and 285-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target change, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the timing to be executed is the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. The vibration mode is different as well as different. Further, the emission colors are white and red in the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT01 at the start of the pre-variation and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. By becoming one of the rainbow colors, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, while the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, so that the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be operated. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production using the members and improve the entertainment of the game.

The vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is executed by the operation unit effect at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target change based on the winning determination result that is the pre-reading determination result. It is executed in the variable display before the variable display to be performed. In this way, by making the timing at which the operation unit effect is executed different, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and improve the game entertainment.

As shown in FIGS. 285-10 and 285-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed in the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. When the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emission color is white or the emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that an operation member such as a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B is used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the vibration effect by the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed in both the case where the emission color becomes red and the case where the emission color becomes rainbow color. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common depending on whether the emission color is red or the emission color is rainbow. As described above, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is common, the case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common may be provided regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect is an operation unit effect pattern in which the emission color in the light emission effect is different depending on the case where the remaining number of times is other than "0" and the case where the remaining number of times is "0". Some include. For example, the continuous effect pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 285-5 (A) includes an operation unit effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1" and an operation unit effect pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , Includes. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation and the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target change. The light emission mode is different between the two. In this way, by providing a case where the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the effect using the operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the jackpot reliability of the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is higher than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. Is set to prevent it from becoming degraded. For example, in the continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 285-5 (A), in the case of the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". As a result, it is set to prevent the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 is used when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 or the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is used as the operation unit effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". It is set to prevent. This prevents the operation unit effect with low jackpot reliability from being executed later, even though the operation unit effect with high jackpot reliability is executed first at the start of the pre-variation. , It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game without lowering the expectation of the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 285-10 and 285-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed in the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is the emission color. Including the case where the emission color becomes white and the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, it emits light according to the on period and the off period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. And non-light emission are repeated, and when the emission color turns red, light is continuously emitted according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIGS. 285-12 and 285-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target change, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, it emits light according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02, and the emission color becomes red. In that case, light is emitted intermittently according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. In the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, the setting of the on period is different from each other, so that the light emission mode such as the light emission period in the light emission effect is different. Even in this way, it suffices if it is possible to provide a case where the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different.

(Modification example of characteristic part 48AK-50AK)
Regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the setting of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be different. It may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value of. In addition, regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on any advantage regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different rates depending on such advantages. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different according to any advantage regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different rates depending on such advantages.

When the timing for executing the operation unit effect is different and common, when the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different and common, and when the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different and common, the jackpot reliability is The combination of each case, such as a different case and a common case, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the timing to be executed is different and common between the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, and when the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the special vibration effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. The combination of each case can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. In addition, when the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, it is sufficient that the control burden of the light emission effect can be reduced by sharing the light emission mode of the light emission effect. When the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration effect by sharing the vibration mode of the vibration effect. When some vibration modes in the vibration effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration effect by sharing the other vibration modes in the vibration effect. For example, when the vibration intensities in the vibration effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control load of the vibration effect by sharing the vibration cycle in the vibration effect. When some of the light emitting modes in the light emitting effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emitting effect by sharing the other light emitting modes in the light emitting effect. For example, when the emission colors in the light emission effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emission effect by sharing the light emission cycle in the light emission effect. It suffices if the control burden can be reduced by the same common use of the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect.

In addition to or instead of executing the variable display, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect is executed when the game state is controlled to an arbitrary game state such as a small hit game state or a big hit game state. It may be possible. For example, in the case of being controlled to a small hit game state, a predetermined ratio is determined according to whether or not the V winning attacker is open, the opening time, the number of times of opening, or the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. It may be possible to execute the operation unit effect with. When controlled to the jackpot game state, the number of rounds will be increased from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state, such as the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control after the end of the jackpot game state, the end condition, and the rank up. It may be possible to execute the operation unit effect at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence / absence, the amount of increase, and the like. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking effect along with a specific effect such as a movable object motion, an image display, and a music reproduction in a small hit game state or a big hit game state.

The specific effect capable of executing the specific interlocking effect may be an arbitrary effect that can be executed according to the execution of the variable display, or may be an arbitrary effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike the reach effect, when a suggestion effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined ratio and is controlled to the big hit gaming state is executed, it is specified in a part or all of the effect period. It may be possible to execute the interlocking effect.

When controlled to an arbitrary effect state, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect may be executed. For example, when the effect is controlled to be the special effect mode, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect is executed at a higher rate than when the effect state is controlled to be different from the special effect mode. It may be possible.

The operation member capable of performing the effect by vibration or light emission may be any motion detection member configured to be able to detect the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects a touch operation or a pressing operation on a touch panel. Further, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation by a player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. The result of shooting the player's hand or the like using a predetermined camera may be analyzed (video type motion capture) so that the movement by the player can be detected. In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined operation by the player may be used. A contact member that allows the player to come into contact with a hand or the like may be provided together with such a motion detection member, and the contact member may be vibrated or emitted light together with the motion detection member or separately from the motion detection member. ..

The vibration effect included in the operation unit effect can correspond to the vibration effect in the feature unit 48AK, the predetermined vibration effect in the feature unit 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effect, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation can correspond to the first vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effect, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation can correspond to the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. The light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect is associated with the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect in the feature unit 48AK, the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect in the feature unit 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. It can correspond to the light emission effect. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation unit effect, the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is the light emission associated with the first vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. It can correspond to the production. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effect, the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation is the light-emitting effect associated with the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Can be accommodated. The special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect can correspond to the special vibration effect in the feature unit 49AK.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned feature portions and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always made to shift via the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 operates. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base state) without operating the special variable winning ball device 7 is performed. ) May be migrated.

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be used as a part of the out-of-time symbol or as a part of the small hit symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, a lottery may be executed using a dedicated random number for time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or a lottery random number of a missed symbol or a big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed by using other random numbers such as a lottery random number, a small hit symbol lottery random number, a big hit lottery determination random number, and a fall lottery lottery random number.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a combination of symbols displayed as a missed symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of the transition to the time saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time saving will not be drawn.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Is the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

Regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start opening (first start winning opening, It may be at the time of winning the second start winning opening).

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the small hit symbol is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. When a random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time-saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A lottery using the above, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time saving area may be the winning of the time saving symbol.

In addition, when the lottery of the time-saving symbol is performed using the structure and the small hit symbol is used together with the time-saving symbol, the variable display number (time-saving number) of the time-saving state does not change depending on the presence or absence of passing through the time-saving region. To.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, the winning value is the specific missing symbol random number when the missing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, and the jackpot symbol random number is specified when the big hit symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. The big hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the set value cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the big hit determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time-saving is already in the state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Further, even when the same time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time reductions given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is required to be predetermined for the gaming state.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the derivation lottery for the time-reduced end symbol (time-reduced end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-reduced times may be set to the number of times until the time-reduced end symbol is derived and displayed after the time-reduced start, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of working hours may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called a specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high probability low base state is reached when the game hall is opened. Therefore, the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving limiters is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 48AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is an operating means that can be operated by the player, a vibration effect executing means that can execute a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, and an operating means that accompanies the vibration effect. It is equipped with a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect, and the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, and the vibration of the vibration effect is performed according to the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect. The mode is different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS 203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed may be higher, for example, as long as the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The fact that the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed is, for example, a big hit according to the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the application of the operation unit effect pattern. It may be reliability. The vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, the emission color and the vibration pattern AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, and the like.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not the vibration effect is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different depending on whether the mode is executed or the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The second light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is red or iridescent. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The ratio of the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed has a common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed, and vibration. The embodiments may be different. Here, the common ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the difference in the emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the emission color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing to improve the game entertainment.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode associated with the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode in accordance with the predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting mode by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The vibration effect can be executed, and the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect execution means is the line-of-sight at the first timing. It may be possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing without executing the guidance effect. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3, T4, or the like. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 may be used in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately recognize the vibration of the operating means and sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature section 49AK)
A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is a vibration effect that can execute a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as an operation means that the player can operate and a vibration effect that the operation means vibrates. A predetermined vibration effect is provided with an execution means, a light emission effect execution means capable of executing a light emission effect that causes an operation means to emit light in accordance with a predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect according to the progress of a game. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different depending on the above, and the vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect according to the execution of the specific effect, and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. .. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. Just do it. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission state color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific effect may be, for example, a reach effect of SP reach A, a big hit confirmation notification, a big hit type lottery, or the like. The specific effect execution means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS 203. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the predetermined vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The ratio of controlling to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, for example, depending on the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the use of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability may be sufficient. The ability to execute the special vibration effect may be, for example, the execution of the vibration effect during the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The difference in vibration mode between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, and the like.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not the vibration effect is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission mode is executed or the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The second light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is red or iridescent. The different vibration modes may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Yes, the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The ratio of the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed is controlled to an advantageous state when it is executed is the same. , The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the difference in the emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the emission color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing to improve the game entertainment.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. .. Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11, AKV12, etc., which are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When a predetermined vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode associated with the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting mode by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The predetermined vibration effect can be executed, and the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect execution means is the first timing. In, the line-of-sight guidance effect may not be executed, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3, T4, or the like. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 may be used in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately recognize the vibration of the operating means and sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the rate of being controlled in an advantageous state may be higher than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation of 50% or more, which is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the game interest.

The specific effect executing means can execute an effect of operating the movable member as a specific effect, and the vibration effect executing means may be able to execute a special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effect of operating the movable member may be, for example, the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effect and improve the entertainment of the game.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect with the notification that the vibration effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the control is performed in an advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit confirmation notification. The special vibration effect associated with this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44.
In such a configuration, the vibration effect can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting effect executing means can execute a specific light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the special vibration effect, and the light emitting mode differs between the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect associated with the special vibration effect. May be good. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The difference in the emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the emission color changes from blue, gold, or blue to gold via red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

When the special vibration effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined vibration effect may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when the operation unit effect is determined by step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature section 50AK)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can execute the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect as the operation means that the player can operate and the vibration effect that the operation means vibrates. It is equipped with a vibration effect executing means and a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the vibration effect, and the vibration effect is executed when the vibration effect is executed rather than when the vibration effect is not executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is high, and the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the timing to be executed in the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. However, the vibration mode is different, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration effect may be, for example, driving the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS 203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed may be higher, for example, as long as the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect, for example, it may be the jackpot reliability according to the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The timing of execution differs between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, the timings of the start of the pre-variation, AKT01 to AKT03, which are different from the timing of the start of the target variation, AKT11. The difference in vibration mode between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV01 different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect, for example, when the emission colors included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 are white, red, or rainbow color. And so on.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the timing AKT11 at which the target variation starts.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not the vibration effect is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode associated with the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode or the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The second light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is red or iridescent. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. It is common and may have different vibration modes. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have a common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

Even if the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, the vibration mode is different. good. Here, the difference in the emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the emission color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing to improve the game entertainment.

The vibration mode is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. May be good. Here, the difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means is different from the light emitting mode in accordance with the predetermined effect. It may be possible to emit light with. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting mode by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The second vibration effect can be executed, the second vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect execution means is the first. The line-of-sight guidance effect may not be executed at the first timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed before the second vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3, T4, or the like. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 may be used in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately recognize the vibration of the operating means and sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the first vibration effect in the variable display prior to the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the pre-reading determination result. Here, the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the hold storage may be, for example, a variable display that is a prior variation.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the first vibration effect includes a first vibration light emitting mode and a second vibration light emitting mode different from the first vibration light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first vibration light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the light emitting mode at the time of the first vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The light emitting mode at the time of the second vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is red or rainbow color. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV01 different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode may be different between the light emitting effect associated with the first vibration effect and the light emitting effect associated with the second vibration effect. Here, the difference in the light emission mode is, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous effect pattern and the emission color of the operation unit effect pattern is different from the case where the remaining number of times is "0". All you need is.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation relating to the association of the feature portions 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration of the feature portions 48AK to 50AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration of the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame,
5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative pattern display area 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker,
9 Game effect lamp 9B1 Lever lamp 9B2 Button lamp 9C Upper frame lamp 9M Left frame lamp 9N Right frame lamp 10 General winning opening 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 15 Relay board 9020 Special figure LED board 21 Gate switch 22A No. 1 Start port switch 22B 2nd start port switch 23 Count switch 24 V Winning switch 30 Hitting ball operation handle,
31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 35A Controller sensor unit 35B Push sensor 41 Passing gate 9050 Fourth symbol unit 81, 82, 83 Solenoid,
100 Game control microcomputer 101,121 ROM
102,122 RAM
104, 124 Random number circuit 106 RTC
110 Switch circuit 111 Output circuit 120 Production control CPU
123 Display control unit 131 Vibration motor

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and that it is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are cases where the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character and cases where the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect.
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification effect. high,
In the introduction part, the first character in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound is a ally character.
Moreover,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
As the vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect, and a vibration effect executing means.
A light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect, and a light emitting effect executing means.
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect according to the progress of the game.
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed.
The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect.
The vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images